Home

A USER GUIDE FOR DRAGON VERSION4 G. Marleau, A. Hébert

1. where EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of the module The amount of output produced by this tracking module will vary substantially depending on the print level specified SAVE keyword to specify that the current isotopic concentration and the microscopic reaction rates resulting from the last transport calculation will be normalized and stored on BRNNAM in a sub directory corresponding to a specific time By default this data is stored at a time corresponding to xti NOSA keyword to specify that the current isotopic concentration and the results of the last transport calculation will not be stored on BRNNAM By default this data is stored at a time corresponding to xti SET keyword used to recover the isotopic concentration already stored on BRNNAM from a sub directory corresponding to a specific time By default this data is recovered from a time corresponding to xtf DEPL keyword to specify that a burnup calculation between an initial and a final time must be performed In the case where the SAVE keyword is absent the initial isotopic concentra tion will be stored on BRNNAM on a sub directory corresponding to the initial time If the SET keyword is absent the isotopic concentration corresponding to the final burnup time will be used to update MICNAM xti initial time associated with the burnup calculation The name of the sub directory where this information is stored w
2. Description of the various rotation allowed for hexagonal geometries Typical cluster geometry 4 ks k ee a we a ee ee ee E Organization of amulticompo object k roo a baa trd daa Parameter tree in a MULTICOMPO object ks Global parameter tree in a SAPHYB object lt 000 Slab geometry with mesh splitting Ps Two dimensional Cartesian assembly containing micro structures Cylindrical cluster geometry a a k K ee Two dimensional hexagonal geometry L Three dimensional Cartesian super cell 2 2 as Hexagonal multicell lattice geometry o o o ee ee Geometry for test case TCMO1 for an annular cell with macroscopic cross sections Geometry for test case TCMO2 000 Geometry for test case TCMO3 LL Geometry of the CANDU 6 supercell with stainless steel rods is Geometry of a 2 D hexagonal assembly filled with triangular hexagonal cells Geometry for the Mosteller benchmark problem o Geometry for test case TCWUO2 LL Geometry for test case TCWUO3 L LL Depletion chain of heavy isotopes as Geometry of the CANDU 6 cell L Geometry of 2 D CANDU 6 supercell with control rods 2 4 An example of depletion chain e Distribution contente ss occ ie Sue ob Sh bee ke De se ee ba ee es An example of an ass ciative table k ee ee a Re a i vili IGE 294 ix ANawokwnr List of Tables Structure
3. cross sections are modified accordingly SIGSOO SIGSO1 etc Scattering cross section The total NTOTO cross section is modified accordingly SCATOO SCATO1 etc Differential scattering cross section The total NTOTO cross section is modified accordingly NUSIGF v times the fission cross section The fission NFTOT and total NTOTO cross sections are modified accordingly NFTOT Fission cross section The v times fission NUSIGF and total NTOTO cross sections are modified accordingly NU Number of neutrons emitted per fission The v times fission NUSIGF cross section is modified accordingly CHI Fission spectrum The resulting spectrum is normalized lower energy group index of the energy domain where the modification is taking place upper energy group index of the energy domain where the modification is taking place keyword indicating a replacement of all values in the above energy domain by different values group dependent real variable used as replacement value We expect igp igm 1 components keyword indicating a replacement of all values in the above energy domain by value keyword indicating that value is added to all values in the above energy domain keyword indicating a multiplication of all values in the above energy domain by value real variable used to modify the nuclear reaction character 8 or character 12 name of the isotope to modify If HISOT is a character 8
4. END QUIT LIST 6 4 10 TCM10 Solution of a 2 D fixed source problem using MCCGT This test case is for a 2 D Cartesian assembly that contains a fixed source It is solved using the method of cyclic characteristics Input data for test case TCM10 x2m TEST CASE TCM10 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM CARTESIAN 2 X 2 ASSEMBLY TSAI LOYALKA SEMI INFINITE PROBLEM REF R Roy The Cyclic Characteristics Method Int Conf Physics of Nuclear Science and Technology Long Island NY October 1998 pp 407 414 XK XA XA XX A XA A XX X X LINKED_LIST LOYA LOY25 TRACK FLUX EDITION MACRO SYS MACRO100 MACROO50 MACROO10 MACROOO5 MACROOOO SEQ_BINARY LOYATRK STRING PolarAng CACB MODULE GEO EXCELT MCCGT MAC ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE assertV INTEGER in 5 11 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS MACRO100 MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 2 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 1 0 SCAT 1 1 1 00 FIXE 1 0 MIX 2 TOTAL 1 0 SCAT 1 1 1 00 MACRO050 MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 2 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 1 0 SCAT 1 1 0 50 FIXE 1 0 MIX 2 TOTAL 1 0 SCAT 1 1 0 50 MACROO10 MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 2 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 1 0 SCAT 1 1 0 10 FIXE 1 0 MIX 2 TOTAL 1 0 SCAT 1 1 0 10 MACRO005 MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 2 READ INPUT o o IGE 294 214 MIX 1 TOTAL 1 0 SCAT 1 1 0 05 FIXE 1 0 MIX 2 TOTAL 1 0 SCAT 1 1 0 05 MACROOOO MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 2 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 1 0 SCAT 1 1 0 00 FIXE 1 0 MIX 2
5. Geometry BC 3D Cartesian Tracking 1 EXCELT ALLG 2 EXCELT XCLL k BC GEO CAR3D 3 2 2 assembly with annular regions X REFL X SYME Y REFL Y SYME Z REFL Z SYME CELL M MX MX MX FXY MXY TURN A A A F A A M MX BX MX FXV BXY A A AF A A M GEO CAR3D 1 1 1 MESHX 0 0 7 14375 MESHY 0 0 7 14375 MESHZ 8 25500 8 25500 SPLITZ 2 MIX 3 MX GEO M MESHX 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITX 2 1 MXY GEO MX MESHY 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITY BX GEO CARCELY 2 1 MESHX 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITX MESHY 0 0 7 14375 MESHZ 8 25500 8 25500 SPLITZ RADIUS 0 0 3 5100 3 8100 MIX 3 4 3 BXY GEO BX MESHY 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITY FXY GEO CARCELZ 2 1 MESHX 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITX MESHY 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITY MESHZ 8 25500 8 25500 SPLITZ RADIUS 0 0 5 16890 6 58750 MIX 1 2 3 y TRACK BCTRK EXCELT BC TITLE N TCMO4 TWO GROUPS CANDU 3 D ADJUSTER ROD ASSEMBLY MAXR 40 ALLG TRAK TISO 4 2 5 SYS ASM MACRO TRACK BCTRK TRACK2 EXCELT BC TITLE TCMO4 TWO GROUPS CANDU 3 D ADJUSTER ROD ASSEMBLY MAXR 40 XCLL TRAK TISO 4 2 5 SYS2 ASM MACRO TRACK2 IGE 294 201 Solution K EFFECTIVE Editing Compute reference reaction rates k FLUX FLU SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 103927 EDITION EDI MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 UPS MERG COMP SAVE ON NOROD FL
6. energy i ii 1 ngcond ALLX ISOTXS ASCII ALL RES nis HISO i i 1 nis REAC nreac HREAC i i 1 nreac ISOTXS ASCII NONE imixa ii ii 1 nbmix ON DIRN idirn y STAT ALL RATE FLUX DELS REFE DIRO idiro ADF TYPE REGI ireg ii ii 1 iimax ENDR MIX imix ii ii 1 iimax ENDM where EDIT iprint UPS NONE MERG REGI keyword used to modify the print level iprint index used to control the printing of this module The iprint parameter is important for adjusting the amount of data that is printed by this calculation step e iprint 0 results in no output e iprint 1 results in the average and integrated fluxes being printed floating de fault e iprint 2 results in the reaction rates being printed e iprint 3 is identical to the previous option but the condensed and or homoge nized vectorial cross sections are also printed e iprint 4 is identical to the previous option but the condensed and or homoge nized transfer cross sections are also printed keyword to specify that the reaction rates and the condensed and or homogenized cross sections are corrected so as to eliminate up scattering This option is useful for reactor analysis codes which cannot take into account such cross sections keyword to deactivate the homogeneization or the condensation keyword to specify that the neutron flux is to be homogenized over specified
7. o c es seie hua REY Reh eee a EE eee 155 Structure DUO lt e e 44 448 0806 ee eee ee Gabbe Onde eth bea we ee 157 Structure DUOdata ke o Eee RE EEL L bib ii 157 Structure PSPi o sse ea eaae a eee b ee eS a 160 Structure desepsp as oa a radari Cee ea elem ak ee ae kw a 160 structure equality b rea 0 ee GSES Eda e mad ab ee ee 162 Strict WT oan od hee RRM ESRD SE ee RE De BERS 163 Structure DELETE la ss bake ak Qe eee oe ee B ee Re 165 Structure BACKUPS casco a ee we k toe Bae RS 166 Structure RECOVER cocidos ehh Adee eed be Pe a eb ood 167 Structure ADD 4 4 04 4484 e a wb ene A 168 Structure MPI i sibi o Re ad ni Lineni 169 Structure STATS I in e e OE a i ee ee ee ee D 170 struttura GREP cser he a EY OR EGS b b oe RHE Ee oe 171 Structure MSTR oec c e 24400 88 a e a ae 173 Structure PIN DO Land az cmb AAA EA Eee S E E 175 Structure ABORT gt se ca Pee eh Bee IA AJ A be eel AY ee 176 Sittiehure ENDE Liss 4 3 oe ee k Ree eg ee a a Bee Bi ana 177 structure DRVMPTE ead basaga BRA PNA Lee eed Be eee A eb es 178 Structure SNDMPI espa sda ken daa ha ee ooh eee Rag hed eae sie 179 DEFUCHUTS AA56E65 45 ii OR ee eee kb hae ao 281 SOUNE ASS se date tal ek da a ate ar Ga ye hee or gr OE 281 Structure descmodilej 420564 64 teeren rk REA da Gee eee es 287 Structure descobject lt o 200 cc eee ee ee eee Eee 288 IGE 294 1 1 INTRODUCTION The computer code DRAGON is a lattice code designed around
8. 039 039 039 039 039 039 039 039 039 039 039 039 039 039 039 039 02 02 221 IGE 294 Geometry xX GlobalGeo GEO HEX 7 HBC COMPLETE REFL CELL Ci C2 Ci C2 C1 C2 C1 C1 GEO HEXT 4 SIDE 4 0 MIX 123456789 10 11 123456789 10 11 123456789 10 11 123456789 10 11 123456789 10 11 123456789 10 11 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2 RODI GEO TUBE 2 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 ROD2 GEO ROD1 C2 GEO HEXT 4 SIDE 4 0 MIX RhRRR GRE NNNNNN ww www w Sop BR BOAR aonana k Tracking Solution k Lines Tracki EDIT 2 LONG NORE TISO 3 10 0 Fig ps PSP Tracking 1 1 o Oo o Oo 0 0 NNNNWNN NXT PIJ 00 00 00 00 0 0 WO O O O O o 10 10 10 10 10 10 14 11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 MIX 17 18 NPIN 0 6540 MIX 17 18 NPIN 12 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 14 U 14 14 14 14 14 14 ng NXT GlobalGeo Pij ASM MacLib Tracking Lines Flux FLU Pij MacLib Tracking assertS Flux DELETE Flux Pij GlobalGeo Tracking Lines ECHO test TCM13 completed END QUIT LIST K EFFECTIVE Flux Pij 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 TYPE K 3 1 0 9896834 Hexagonal assembly containing hex
9. G Marleau Fine Mesh 3 D Collision Probability Calculations Using the Lattice Code DRAGON Int Conf on the Physics of Nuclear Science and Technology Long Island New York October 5 8 1998 G Marleau New Geometric Capabilities of DRAGON Nineteenth Annual Conf of the Canadian Nuclear Society Toronto Ontario October 18 21 1998 IGE 294 295 75 K E Kohler PostScript for Technical Drawings PSPLOT A FORTRAN Callable PostScript Plot 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 ting Library User s Manual Technical Report Nova Southeastern University Oceanographic Cen ter 8000 North Ocean Drive Dania Florida One can get a feel for the flavor of PSPLOT at http www nova edu ocean while access to the full psplot library is via anonymous ftp whitetip ocean nova edu in the directory psplot T O Theisen Ghostview An X11 user interface for Ghostscript This program is free software under the term of the GNU general public licence as published by the Free Software Fundation MATLAB The Language of Technical Computing www mathworks com 2006 C Plamondon V rification des lignes d int gration et illustration des g om tries DRAGON Tech nical Report IGE 290 Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al 2006 A H bert Revisiting the Ceschino Interpolation Method in MATLAB A Ubiquitous Tool for the Practical Engineer Clara M Ionescu Ed
10. QUIT LIST 6 5 12 TCWU12 Mixture composition This case illustrates the use of the INFO module of DRAGON see Section 3 13 as well as the new COMB option in the module LIB see Section 3 2 IGE 294 255 Input data for test case TCWU12 x2m ik x TEST CASE TCWU12 iaea WLUP Library GENERATE A LIBRARY USING INFO AND OTHER OPTIONS REF None ees Define variables and initialize Coolant properties a Input TempCool Coolant temperature K Purity D2 D2 H1 Weight ratio in Coolant b Output DensCool Coolant Density g cm 3 WH1C Hi Weight in Coolant WD2C D2 Weight in Coolant WO16C 016 Weight in Coolant Fuel properties a Input TempFuel Fuel temperature K Enrichment U235 U235 U238 Weight ratio in Fuel DensFuel Fuel Density g cm 3 b Output WU235F U235 Weight in Fuel WU238F U238 Weight in Fuel WO16F 016 Weight in Fuel eo REAL TempCool Purity TempFuel Enrichment DensFuel 560 66 99 95 941 29 0 72 10 437501 REAL WH1C WD2C WO16C DensCool WU235F WU238F WO16F far Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used Pu LINKED_LIST LIBRARY ISOT MODULE LIB INFO END PROCEDURE asserts fon Get Coolant properties pare ee ECHO Input Coolant temperature K TempCool ECHO Input D2 D2 H1 Weight ratio in Coolant Purity INFO TMP lt lt TempCool gt gt K PUR
11. Table 58 Structure compo datal EDIT iprint ILL STEP UP NAMDIR MAXCAL maxcal COMM HCOM ENDC PARA PARKEY TEMP HMIC imix CONC HISO1 HMIC imix IRRA FLUB POWR MASL FLUX TIME VALU REAL CHAR INTE LOCA PARKEY TEMP CONC HISO2 IRRA FLUB FLUG POWR MASL FLUX ISOT nisp HISOP i i 1 nisp GFF INIT where EDIT keyword used to set iprint iprint index used to control the printing in module COMPO 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value STEP keyword used to create the database from a sub directory named NAMDIR This capability make possible the creation of a single object with many independent MUL TICOMPO structures in it By default the database is created on directory default IGE 294 UP NAMDIR MAXCAL maxcal COMM HCOM ENDC PARA LOCA PARKEY HMIC imix HISO1 HISO2 TEMP CONC IRRA FLUB FLUG POWR MASL FLUX TIME VALU REAL CHAR 127 keyword used to move up towards a sub directory of CPONAM create the MULTICOMPO structure in the sub directory named NAMDIR keyword used to set maxcal maximum number of elementary calculations to be stored in the MULTICOMPO max cal 10 by default This maximum size is automatically increased when the number of elementary calculations exceeds the current value of maxcal keyword used to input a general comment for the MULTICOMPO character 80 u
12. bt Li Ar Pi do bi SL 22 Po M Pi bp 0 3 41 because i Li MP 0 3 42 in term of Eq 3 36 Using the relation Ag Pa A1 Pi 6X P2 A1 6P Eq 3 41 can be rewritten as Pi 6 L 6A Pa 41 dP 6 0 3 43 so that Pi 5 L A1 0P 6 TD A 3 44 ST Po by 3 44 Equation 3 44 is not a first order perturbation approximation of A it is an exact expression of it Its numerator is used to obtain every component of A in term of energy group isotope mixture and or nuclear reaction IGE 294 160 3 26 The PSP module The PSP module is used to generate a graphical file in a PostScript ASCII format for a DRAGON 2 D geometry which can be analyzed using the EXCELT or NXT tracking module see Sections 3 4 2 and 3 4 3 The module PSP is based on the PSPLOT Fortran library from Nova Southeastern Universitv 1 7l Since only a few PSPLOT routines were required and because additional PostScript routine not present in the original package were needed the routines have been completely readapted to DRAGON These routines are no longer machine dependent The PostScript files generated by DRAGON can be viewed by any PostScript viewer such as Ghostview or sent to a printer compatible with this language In DRAGON the PSP module is activated using the following list of commands Table 84 Structure PSP PSGEO PSP PSGEO GEONAM TRKNAM FLUNAM descpsp where PSGEO charac
13. is the averaged surfacic flux of the reference calculation Using this defini tion the averaged SPH factor is equal to Pref H gap ref keyword to specify the use of Selengut macro calculation water gap normalization for the SPH factors It is necessary to know the averaged surfacic flux of the reference and that of the macro calculations This reference value can be obtained by defining a small region near boundary in the reference geometry and by using the ADF FD_B data structure in Section 3 9 1 In each macro group the macro fluxes in macro regions are normalized using 2 E db L Qi Qi surf mc where EP is the averaged surfacic flux of the reference calculation and 8 is the averaged surfacic flux of the macro calculation Using this definition the averaged SPH factor is equal to IGE 294 SELE EDF ASYM mixs ARM ITER maxout epsout MAXNB maxnb EQUI TEX T80 LEAK b2 117 keyword to specify the use of generalized Selengut normalization for the SPH factors It is necessary to know the averaged surfacic flux and the averaged volumic flux in a row of cells of the reference calculation The surfacic flux is obtained as with the SELE option The value of the volumic flux in a row of cells is computed using index information from the ADF FD_H data structure in Section 3 9 1 In each macro group the macro fluxes in macro regions i are normalized using 7 g Prot Prof Qi Qi 6 row
14. keyword for input of the Z directed diffusion coefficient array representing the multigroup Z directed diffusion coefficient DY in cm for the mixture matnum IGE 294 NUSIGD xssigd CHDL xschid OVERV overv NFTOT nftot FLUX INTG xsint FLUX INTG P1 xsintl H FACTOR hfact SCAT nbscat ilastg xsscat 14 keyword to specify that the delayed macroscopic fission cross section multiplied by the average number of neutrons per fission for this mixture follows array representing the delayed multigroup macroscopic fission cross section multiplied by the average number of neutrons per fission E in cm for all the fissile isotopes associated with this mixture keyword to specify that the delayed fission spectrum for this mixture follows array representing the delayed multigroup fission spectrum x9 del for all the fissile isotopes associated with this mixture keyword for input of the multigroup average of the inverse neutron velocity array representing the multigroup average of the inverse neutron velocity lt 1 v 94 for the mixture matnum keyword for input of the multigroup macroscopic fission cross sections array representing the multigroup macroscopic fission cross section for the mix ture matnum keyword for input of the multigroup Py volume integrated fluxes array representing the multigroup Po volume integrated fluxes Vog for the mixture matnum keyword f
15. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 I R Suslov Solution of Transport Equation in 2 and 3 Dimensional Irregular Geometry by the Method of Characteristics Joint Int Conf on Mathematical Methods and Supercomputing in Nuclear Applications Karlsruhe Germany April 19 23 1993 I R Suslov An Algebraic Collapsing Acceleration Method for Acceleration of the Inner Scattering Iterations in Long Characteristics Transport Theory Int Conf on Supercomputing in Nuclear Applications Paris France September 22 24 2003 R Le Tellier and A H bert Application of the DSA Preconditioned GMRES Formalism to the Method of Characteristics First Results Int Mtg on the Physics of Fuel Cycles and Advanced Nuclear Systems Global Developments PHYSOR 2004 Chicago Illinois April 25 29 2004 R Roy Anisotropic Scattering for Integral Transport Codes Part 1 Slab Assemblies Ann nucl Energy 17 379 1990 R Roy Anisotropic Scattering for Integral Transport Codes Part 2 Cyclic Tracking and its Ap plication to XY Lattices Ann nucl Energy 18 511 1991 R Roy G Marleau A H bert and D Rozon A Cyclic Tracking Procedure for Collision Probability Calculations in 2 D Lattices Int Topical Meeting on Advances in Mathematica Computation and Reactor Physics Pittsburgh PA April 28 May 2 1991 G Marleau a
16. 3 15 1 Data input for module TLM Table 63 Structure desctlm EDIT iprint NTPO nplots POINTS NoPause DIRECTIONS NoPause DIR idir PLAN iplan U iuv V iuv PLANP NoPause DIR idir DIST dist PLAN iplan PLANA NoPause AaBb Cc Dd V iplot 1 nplots where EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing in this module It must be set to 0 if no printing on the output file is required NTPO keyword to specify the number of figures to draw nplots integer value for the number of figures to draw IGE 294 POINTS DIRECTIONS PLANP PLANA NoPause DIR idir PLAN iplan iuv DIST dist 133 keyword to specify that the figure will illustrate the intersection points between the lines and the external faces of the geometry keyword to specify that the figure will illustrate the lines crossing each region as well as the intersection points between the lines and the external faces of the geometry keyword to specify that the figure will illustrate the points crossing a plane normal to the line direction keyword to specify that the figure will illustrate the points crossing an arbitrary surface in 3 D or line in 2 D The equation for the surface in 3 D is aX bY cZ d while the equation for the line in 2 D is aX bY d keyword to specify that all the lines the lines must be drawn without Matlab pause
17. FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B B1 PNL KEFF 1 199538 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 199508 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B B1 PNL assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 195775 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L B1 PNL assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 195778 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX DELETE FLUX FLUX FLU SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE K B1 HETE BUCK 1 50298E 03 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 195597 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B B1 HETE KEFF 1 199538 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 199507 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B Bi HETE R BUCK Z 5 00993E 04 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 195596 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B Bi HETE Z BUCK R 1 001986E 03 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 195598 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B B1 HETE assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 195598 203 IGE 294 204 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L B1
18. FLUXF FLU SVSF MACRO TRACF TYPE K assertS FLUXF K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8165358 EDITF EDI MACRO TRACF FLUXF EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 1 1 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 67 8 7 8 910 910 9 10 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 15 16 15 16 15 16 17 18 17 18 17 18 17 18 19 20 19 20 19 20 EDITF DELETE EDITF ees SINCE KEFF lt 1 DO FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM FIXED AND FISSION SOURCES TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT Hita FLUXF FLU FLUXF SYSF MACRO TRACF TYPE S EDITF EDI MACRO TRACF FLUXF EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 1 1 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 65 6 7 8 7 8 910 910 9 10 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 15 16 15 16 15 16 17 18 17 18 17 18 17 18 19 20 19 20 19 20 222 Solution TYPE S only since no fission k k IF KEFF lt 1 DO FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM PROBLEM FIXED AND FISSION SOURCES TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT FLUXS FLU SYSS MACRO TRACS TYPE 8 assertV FLUXS FLUX GROUP 1 REGION 10 6 728200E 03 EDITS EDI MACRO TRACS FLUXS EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 1 1 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 65 6 7 8 7 8 910 910 9 10 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 15 16 15 16 15 16 17 18 17 18 17 18 17 18 19 20 19 20 19 20 PWRTRKS PWRTRKF DELETE PWRTRKS PWRTRKF ECHO test TCMO8 completed END QUIT LIST 6 4 9 TCM09 Solution of a 2 D fission source problem using MCCGT This test case is for a 3 x 3 Cartesian assembly in 2 D similar to TCM03 It is solved using t
19. InTech Open Access Publisher ISBN 978 953 307 907 3 Croatia 2011 R Chambon Optimisation de la gestion du combustible dans les r acteurs CANDU refroidis leau l g re Ph D Thesis Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al 2006 R D Mosteller L D Eisenhart R C Little W J Eich and J Chao Benchmark Calculations for the Doppler Coefficient of Reactivity Nucl Sci Eng 107 265 1991 Stankovski Refinement of the Substructure Method for Integral Transport Calculations Nucl Sci Eng 92 255 1986 R T Akroyd and N S Riyait Iteration and Extrapolation Methods for the Approximate Solution of the Even Parity Transport Equation for systems with voids Ann nucl Energy 16 1 1989 C Laville tude de diff rentes m thodes de calculs de coefficients de sensibilit s du keff aux donn es nucl aires Master Thesis Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al 2011 SCALE A Modular Code System for Performing Standardized Computer Analyses for Licensing Evaluation Oak Ridge National Laboratory ORNL TM 2005 39 Version 6 1 2011 M T Sissaoui G Marleau and D Rozon CANDU Reactor Simulations Using the Feedback Model with Actinide Burnup History Nucl Technology 125 197 1999 G Marleau DRAGON Theory Manual Part 1 Collision Probability Calculations Technical Re port IGE 236 Rev 1 Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al 2001 P Gu rin T Courau D Couyras and E Girardi
20. TITLE TCWUO7 CANDU 6 CARTESIAN FUEL TEMP 941 29 EDIT O MAXR 14 TRAK TISO 7 20 0 SYMM 4 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY TRACK INTLIN EDIT O NOLJ TRACK INTLIN DELETE TRACK INTLIN TRACK INTLIN EXCELT CANDU6T TITLE TCWUO7 CANDU 6 CARTESIAN FUEL TEMP 941 29 EDIT O MAXR 32 ANIS 2 TRAK TISO 7 20 0 SYMM 4 SYS ASM LIBRARY TRACK INTLIN IGE 294 245 EDIT O PIJK FLUX FLU SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 120623 EDITION EDI LIBRARY TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE COND 4 0 TAKE REGI 1 4 7 10 16 24 FLUX FLU FLUX SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE B Bi PNL assertS FLUX K INFINITV 1 1 112290 EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE COND 4 0 TAKE REGI 1 4 7 10 16 24 FLUX FLU FLUX SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE B Bi HETE assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 112264 EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE COND 4 0 TAKE REGI 1 4 7 10 16 24 FLUX SYS DELETE FLUX SYS SYS ASM LIBRARY TRACK INTLIN EDIT 0 PIJ ECCO FLUX FLU SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE B Bi ECCO assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 112270 EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE COND 4 0 TAKE REGI 1 4 7 10 16 24 FLUX SYS TRACK INTLIN DELETE FLUX SYS TRACK INTLIN m CASE WITH COOLANT VOIDED Self Shielding calculation EXCEL Transport calculation EXCEL Flux TYPE K AND B WITH VARIOUS LEAKAGE OPTIONS His T
21. gt gt iedit lt lt ik iedit containing the result of LIB for for LIB module LINKED LIST LIBRARY option IGE 294 Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 k LIBRARV LIB EDIT lt lt iedit gt gt NMIX 17 CTRA WIMS DEPL LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIX 1 560 66 0 81212 D2D20 73002 1 99768E 1 MIX 2 560 66 6 57 BNat 71011 2 10000E 4 Zr91 91 9 75000E 1 MIX 3 345 66 0 0014 MIX 4 345 66 6 44 Ni58 758 6 00000E 2 BNat 71011 3 10000E 4 Zr91 791 9 97100E 1 MIX 5 345 66 1 082885 D2D20 73002 2 01016E 1 MIX 6 941 29 10 4375010 Xe135 74135 0 0 U235 2235 6 27118E 1 1 U238 78238 8 75256E 1 1 U236 7236 0 0 1 Pu239 76239 0 0 al MIX 7 COMB 6 1 0 MIX 8 COMB 6 1 0 MIX 9 COMB 6 1 0 MIX 10 560 66 6 44 Ni58 587 BNat 71011 Zr91 2917 MIX 11 COMB 10 1 0 MIX 12 COMB 10 1 0 MIX 13 COMB 10 1 0 MIX 14 COMB 1 1 0 MIX 15 COMB 11 0 MIX 16 COMB 11 0 MIX 17 COMB 11 0 END QUIT LIST 6 00000E 2 3 10000E 4 9 97100E 1 016 H1H20 Nb93 He4 Fe56 Cr52 016 H1H20 016 Fe56 Cr52 7 6016 7 3001 293 34 2056 252 6016 30017 6016 22056 752 7 99449E 1 83774E 4 2 50000 N 1 00000E 2 1 60000E 1 1 10000E 1 7 98895E 1 8 96000E 5 1 18473E 1 1 60000E 1 1 10000E 1 277 IGE 294
22. keyword to ask the module to compute some parametric values It returns one value in the output parameter dens set of keywords to recover the water density as a function of its temperature and purity This option requires the setting of temperature and purity and it does not affect any given list of isotope names keywords to recover 3 number densities for a compound mixture of heavy and light water The isotope list is assumed to contain H D and 20 Temperature and purity are supposed to be available It returns concentration of these isotopes in the output parameters nhl nd2 and nol6 IGE 294 123 WGT U02 keywords to recover 3 number densities for a compound mixture of Uranium oxide The isotope list is assumed to contain 7 U 238U and 190 The 2 U enrichment is supposed to be available Note that the number densities will sum to 100 It returns concentration of these isotopes in the output parameters nu5 nu8 and nol6 WGT THO2 keywords to recover 3 number densities for a compound mixture of Thorium Uranium oxide The isotope list is assumed to contain 3 Th 233U and 190 The 233U enrichment is supposed to be available Note that the number densities will sum to 100 It returns concentration of these isotopes in the output parameters nth2 nu3 and nol6 The INFO module works the following way For a given isotope list the mass is extracted from the library or a calculation process is expected Once this calculation is has b
23. number of basis points for the spatial integration of the blocks in a two dimensional geometry appearing during assembly calculations The values of nsegment allowed are 1 to 10 The default value is nsegment 3 keyword to specify the use of equal weight quadrature keyword to specify the use of the Gauss Legendre or the Gauss Jacobi quadrature This is the default option keyword to specify that the isotropic DP components of the inter cell current is used with the incoming current being averaged over all the faces surrounding a cell The global collision matrix is calculated in a annular model Only used when 2 d assembly of cells are considered keyword to specify that the isotropic D Po components of the inter cell current is used The global collision matrix is calculated in a annular model Only used when 2 d as sembly of cells are considered keyword to specify that the isotropic D Po components of the inter cell current is used The global collision matrix are computed explicitly Only used when 2 d assembly of cells are considered keyword to specify that the linearly anisotropic DP components of the inter cell cur rent are used This hypothesis implies 12 currents per cell in a cartesian geometry and 18 currents per cell for an hexagonal geometry Linearly anisotropic reflection is used Only used when 2 d assembly of cells are considered keyword to specify the use of a Wigner cylinderization which preserves the vol
24. quivalence et correction de transport dans COCAGNE Compte Rendu CR 123 2010 042 SINETICS Electricit de France January 2011 A H bert A Reformulation of the Transport Transport SPH Equivalence Technique paper pre sented at the 7th International Conference on Modelling and Simulation in Nuclear Science and Engineering 7ICMSNSE Ottawa Canada October 18 21 2015 S Perruchot Triboulet and R Sanchez D composition par m thodes perturbatives de r activit de deux syst mes Note CEA N 2817 Commissariat l Energie Atomique France F vrier 1997 G Todorova H Nishi and J Ishibashi Method for Condensation of the Macroscopic Transport Cross Sections for Criticality Analyses of FBR MONJU by the Code NSHEX J of Nucl Sci and Tech 41 No 12 1237 2004 IGE 294 Index 186 190 192 194 198 202 205 207 208 210 213 215 219 220 223 225 226 229 230 232 236 240 243 246 248 250 251 254 257 259 261 264 271 273 276 129 163 171 172 22 9 16 29 60 63 67 71 74 76 79 82 84 88 91 97 107 113 118 121 125 132 135 137 139 142 148 151 153 155 157 160 162 163 166 167 169 171 173 175 178 179 281 288 59 00 9 16 29 30 60 63 67 71 74 76 79 82 84 88 91 97 107 113 118 125 132 135 137 139 142 148 150 151 153 155 160 162 163 165 169 173 175 178 179 35 0 4 9 10 15 30 150 155 162 1
25. xssigd jf idel jg jg 1 ngroup idel 1 ndel jf 1 nifiss CHDL xschid jf idel jg jg 1 ngroup idel 1 ndel jf 1 nifiss OVERV overv jg jg 1 ngroup NFTOT nftot jg jg 1 ngroup FLUX INTG xsint0 jg jg 1 ngroup FLUX INTG P1 xsint1 jg jg 1 ngroup H FACTOR hfact jg jg 1 ngroup SCAT nbscat jLjg ilastg jl jg xsscat jl jg ig ig 1 nbscat jl jg jg 1 ngroup jl 1 naniso IGE 294 MIX matnum NTOTO TOTAL xssigt NTOT1 xssigl TRANC xsstra NUSIGF xssigf CHI xschi FIXE xsfixe DIFF diff DIFFX xdiffx DIFFY xdiffy DIFFZ xdiffz 13 keyword to specify that the macroscopic cross sections associated with a new mixture are to be read identifier for the next mixture to be read The maximum value permitted for this identifier is nmixt When matnum is absent the mixtures are numbered consecutively starting with 1 or with the last mixture number read either on the GOXS or the input stream keyword to specify that the total macroscopic cross sections for this mixture follows alias keyword for NTOTO array representing the multigroup total macroscopic cross section 29 in cm l asso ciated with this mixture keyword to specify that the P weighted total macroscopic cross sections for this mix ture follows array representing the multigroup P weighted total macroscopic cross section S in cm associated with this mixtur
26. 73001 4 76690E 2 BNat 71011 2 38103E 5 MIX 2 579 9 Cr52 752 7 54987E 5 Zr91 4917 4 18621E 2 MIX 3 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 65292E 2 Fe56 2056 4 45845E 5 Mn55 755 4 15901E 7 BNat 71011 2 32761E 5 Zr91 791 8 92427E 4 MIX 4 579 9 Cr52 527 7 07291E 5 Zr91 791 3 92175E 2 MIX 5 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 71346E 2 Fe56 2056 2 09013E 5 Mn55 55 1 94976E 7 BNat 10117 2 35598E 5 Zr91 91 4 18372E 4 MIX 6 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 71676E 2 Fe56 2056 1 96130E 5 Mn55 5b 1 82957E 7 BNat 10117 2 35753E 5 Zr91 791 3 92583E 4 MIX 7 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 72020E 2 Fe56 72056 1 82630E 5 Mn55 755 1 70365E 7 BNat 71011 2 35914E 5 Zr91 91 3 65562E 4 MIX 8 933 6 U235 2235 7 39237E 4 1 U238 78238 2 17285E 2 1 x Geometry ASSMB contains C1 C2 C3 cell without fuel normal fuel cell peripheral cell 016H20 016 Fe56 016H20 Cr52 Ni58 MoNat A127 016 Fe56 016H20 Cr52 Ni58 MoNat A127 016H20 Cr52 Ni58 MoNat A127 016H20 Cr52 Ni58 MoNat A127 016 76016 6016 22056 6016 252 258 296 227 6016 2056 6016 252 258 296 227 6016 252 258 296 227 6016 252 258 296 227 6016 a 17 X 17 normal PWR assembly BE OPP BD 38345E 2 06711E 4 47624E 4 32646E 2 79927E 5 13521E 4 03755E 6 35231E 6 2
27. CALC FLU CALC CP LIBRARY DISCR TYPE K assertS CALC K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8238403 OUT EDI OUT LIBRARY DISCR CALC EDIT 1 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 27 69 STAT ALL REFE 1 DISCR TRKSPC CP DELETE DISCR TRKSPC CP ECHO test TCXAO1 completed END The input deck begins with declarations for the linked lists and the interface files and the various modules used for this DRAGON execution Any word not declared is considered as a keyword The LIB module is used to interpolate the microscopic cross sections in absolute temperature and dilution and to produce group ordered macroscopic cross sections We use the MATXS format 69 groups microscopic cross section library named MATXS7A 0 1 Each mixture at a given absolute temperature in Kelvin is defined in terms of MATXS isotope names U235 U238 016 etc In this case the number density in 10 particules per cubic centimeter for each isotope is provided Resonant region indices and the type of thermal scattering approximation used with the 42 thermal groups free gas or H20 molecular model is also specified Only MATXS type libraries require the thermalization model to be set The GEO module is used to define the geometry Here two types of geometry are considered MOSTELA a 1 D annular geometry and MOSTELC a 2 D Cartesian geometry These geometries are defined before knowing the type of discretization or numerical treatment that will follow For MOSTELA the first line indi c
28. Case 2 Cartesian Self Shielding calcul Transport calculation Flux calculation for haria DISCR TITLE TCWUO1 MOSTELL R CP ation SYBIL SYBIL K no leakage SYBILT MOSTELC ER BENCHMARK SYBIL SYBIL MAXR 4 QUA1 5 QUA2 6 5 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY DISCR CP ASM LIBRARY DISCR CALC FLU CALC CP LIBRARY DISCR TYPE K assertS CALC EDIT O NOLJ gt K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8277465 IGE 294 225 OUT EDI OUT LIBRARY DISCR CALC EDIT 1 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 4 0 STAT ALL REFE 1 DISCR CP DELETE DISCR CP k Case 3 annular Self Shielding calculation EXCEL ISO Transport calculation EXCEL ISO Flux calculation for K no leakage DISCR TRKSPC EXCELT MOSTELC TITLE TCWUO1 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK EXCELL MAXR 4 TRAK TISO 12 20 0 LIBRARV SHI LIBRARV DISCR TRKSPC EDIT O NOLJ CP ASM LIBRARV DISCR TRKSPC CALC FLU CALC CP LIBRARY DISCR TYPE K assertS CALC K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8287268 OUT EDI OUT LIBRARY DISCR CALC EDIT 1 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 4 0 STAT ALL REFE 1 DISCR TRKSPC CP DELETE DISCR TRKSPC CP Case 4 Cartesian Self Shielding calculation EXCEL SPC Transport calculation EXCEL SPC Flux calculation for K no leakage m DISCR TRKSPC EXCELT MOSTELC TITLE TCWUO1 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK EXCELL MAXR 4 TRAK TSPC 12 20 0 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY DISCR
29. DAY YEAR IGE 294 146 where EDIT key word used to set iprint iprint index used to control the printing in module SAP 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value CRON key word used to force the kinetics data to be placed into the divers directory By default the kinetics data is placed in the cinetique directory of each mixture subdi rectory The CRON option can only be used if the Saphyb contains a unique mixture This option is mandatory if the Saphyb is to be read by the Lisaph module of Cronos parkey character 4 keyword associated to a user defined global parameter value floating point integer or character 12 value of a user defined global parameter ORIG key word used to define the father node in the global parameter tree By default the index of the previous elementary calculation is used orig index of the elementary calculation associated to the father node in the global param eter tree SET keyword used to recover the flux normalization factor already stored on BRNNAM from a sub directory corresponding to a specific time xtr time associated with the current flux calculation The name of the sub directory where this information is stored will be given by DEPL DAT CNN where CNN is a character 4 variable defined by WRITE CNN 14 INN where INN is an index associated with the time xtr S keyword to specify that the time is given in seconds DAY keyword to specify that the time is given in da
30. FOrROROROROR OR OR OR OF 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 217 IGE 294 218 ii F16 GEO F2 MIX 16 17 H ii F18 GEO F2 MIX 18 19 TRACK PWRTRK EXCELT PWR MAXR 300 TRAK TSPC lt lt Nazimuth gt gt lt lt DenTrak gt gt TRACK MCCGT TRACK PWRTRK EDIT 1 lt lt Polar_Ang gt gt 4 AAC 80 TMT EPSI 1E 5 MAXI 1 KRYL O SCR O HDD 0 0 SYS ASM MACRO TRACK PWRTRK EDIT 2 ARM FLUX FLU MACRO TRACK SYS PWRTRK TYPE S THER lt lt Tolerance gt gt 100 EXTE lt lt Tolerance gt gt 100 EDITION EDI FLUX MACRO TRACK EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE MIX 1230000456789 10110000 GREP EDITION STEP UP REF CASEOOO1 STEP UP MACROLIB GETVAL VOLUME 1 11 gt gt y1 lt lt gt gt y2 lt lt gt gt y3 lt lt gt gt y8 lt lt gt gt y9 lt lt gt gt v10 lt lt gt gt v11 lt lt gt gt v12 lt lt gt gt v13 lt lt gt gt v14 lt lt gt gt v15 lt lt STEP UP GROUP STEP AT 1 GETVAL FLUX INTG 1 11 gt gt 1 lt lt gt gt f2 lt lt gt gt 3 lt lt gt gt f8 lt lt gt gt f9 lt lt gt gt f10 lt lt gt gt f11 lt lt gt gt f12 lt lt gt gt 13 lt lt gt gt f14 lt lt gt gt f15 lt lt EVALUATE fi 2 f3 8 9 10 fil 12 13 14 15 ti vl z1 yl f2 v2 r2 r2 13 v3 r3 r3 18 v8 r8 r8 f9 v9 r9 r9 ou f10 v10 rio r10 f11 vii TiL zii f12 v12 ri2 r12
31. MACREF EDIT iprint RMS gt gt RMS_VAL lt lt where SOURCE character 12 name of a FIXED SOURCES type L_GPT object open in creation mode This object contains the adjoint fixed source corresponding to the RMS error on power distribution FLUX character 12 name of the actual FLUX type L_FLUX object open in read only mode TRACK character 12 name of the actual TRACKING type L_TRACK object open in read only mode MICRO character 12 name of the actual MICROLIB type L LIBRARV object open in read only mode The information on the embedded macrolib is used MACRO character 12 name of the actual MACROLIB type L MACROLIB object open in read only mode IGE 294 MICREF MACREF EDIT iprint RMS RMS_VAL 154 character 12 name of reference or target MICROLIB type L LIBRARV object open in read only mode The information contained in the embedded macrolib is used to compute P values character 12 name of reference or target MACROLIB type L_MACROLIB object open in read only mode This information is used to compute P values a keyword used to set iprint index used to control the printing in module DREF 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value keyword used to recover the RMS error on power distribution in a CLE 2000 variable characterx12 CLE 2000 variable name in which the extracted RMS value will be placed IGE 294 155 3 24 The SENS module This module
32. MODULE GEO EXCELT LIB SHI ASM FLU EVO EDI COMPO SPH DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 ja PROCEDURE TCWUO5Lib INTEGER iedit 1 LIBRARY TCWUOSLib lt lt iedit gt gt a Geometry CANDU6S 13 regions annular cluster for self shielding CANDU6F 31 regions annular cluster for transport HET CANDU6S GEO TUBE 5 R REFL RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 16 12171 MIX 12345 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 ROD1 GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2 GEO ROD1 MIX 7 10 NPIN 6 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 0 0000 ROD3 GEO ROD1 MIX 8 10 NPIN 12 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 0 261799 ROD4 GEO ROD1 MIX 9 10 NPIN 18 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 0 0 CANDU6F GEO CANDU6S SPLITR 6111 10 ROD1 GEO ROD1 SPLITR 21 ROD2 GEO ROD2 SPLITR 2 1 ROD3 GEO ROD3 SPLITR 2 1 ROD4 GEO ROD4 SPLITR 2 1 te Self Shielding calculation EXCEL Transport calculation EXCEL Flux calculation for keff VOLMATS INTLINS EXCELT CANDU6S TITLE TCWU31 FEW GROUP BURNUP SELF SHIELDING TRACKING EDIT O MAXR 13 TRAK TISO 5 10 0 SYMM 12 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY VOLMATS INTLINS EDIT O NOLJ IGE 294 275 VOLMATF INTLINF EXCELT CANDU6F TITLE TCWU31 FEW GROUP BURNUP TRANSPORT TRACKING EDIT O MAXR 31 TRAK TISO
33. NDIR 139 140 NDSA 74 75 nedit 16 19 NELAS 19 neval 171 172 NEWL 16 17 19 NEWNAME 139 140 NF 19 NFSLO 19 NFTOT 12 14 19 23 nftot 12 14 NG 19 22 ngcond 114 115 NGRO 10 16 ngroup 10 12 16 93 100 149 152 180 ngroup 1 100 nhi 121 122 NHEAT 19 nhr 30 31 42 NIFI 10 nifiss 10 12 NINEL 19 nir 24 26 nis 98 100 nisp 126 128 nl 135 nlibre 92 93 NLIVO 74 75 nmaxi 71 72 nmerge 114 115 nmilg 56 nmisot 16 17 nmistr 56 NMIX 10 16 17 nmix 85 86 101 nmixt 10 12 13 16 17 24 nmu 63 65 67 69 71 72 303 NNF 19 no16 121 123 NOCO 85 NOCONTOUR 160 161 NODI 108 110 NOEV 24 26 28 NOEX 108 110 NOGC 82 83 NOGL 108 110 NOHF 98 102 NOLJ 82 83 NOMA 135 NOMALT 163 164 NOMDIR 114 115 139 140 162 163 166 167 171 NOML 143 nomlib 143 NOMREF 163 164 non regression testcases 180 281 NONE 10 11 16 18 24 26 71 72 88 89 98 101 148 149 151 152 160 NONL 88 89 NoPause 132 133 NORE 59 NORM 10 12 64 68 88 89 92 93 NOSA 108 NOSP 85 86 NOSY 63 66 67 69 NOTR 67 70 82 83 85 86 139 NP 19 22 145 NPIN 41 43 npins 41 43 46 nplots 132 nrads 33 35 nreac 98 101 ns 56 NSAT 108 110 NSDSA 74 75 nsdsa 74 75 nsegment 60 61 nsrck 148 149 nstart 74 75 NT 145 ntfg 24 25 nth2 121 123 NTOTO 12 13
34. POWER KW 615 00000 BURN POWER KW KG 31 97130 URANIUM MASS 19 23600 U02 REAL DENSITY 10 59300 U02 EFF DENSITY 10 43750 U02 TEMPERATURE 941 28998 ENRICHMENT 0 71140 COOLANT D2 AT 99 222 MODERATOR D2 AT 99 911 NUMBER OF DAYS 50 ie x Define variables and initialize Burnup paremeters a Power 31 9713 kw kg for 0 0 to 300 0 days b Burnup time interval Delt 1 day for 0 to 1 day 4 days for 1 to 5 days S 5 days for 5 to 10 days 10 days for 10 to 50 days 20 days for 50 to 150 days 50 days for 150 to 300 days c Days with burnup interval changes 1 0 5 0 10 0 50 0 150 0 and 300 0 days d Burnup control time variables Timei Timef Timei initial time Timef final time Ike REAL Power Delt Timec Timei Timef 31 9713 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 goose Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used gloss LINKED_LIST LIBRARY CANDU6S CANDU6F VOLMATS VOLMATF PIJ FLUX BURNUP EDITION COMPO1 COMPO2 SEQ BINARV INTLINS INTLINF SEQ ASCII fuel mode MODULE GEO NXT SHI ASM FLU EVO EDI CPO DELETE END aa Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 a PROCEDURE TCWUO5Lib PROCEDURE asserts INTEGER iedit 1 LIBRARY TCWUO5Lib lt lt iedit gt gt HB Geometry CANDU6S 13 regions annular cluster for self shielding IGE 294 CANDUGF CANDU6S GEO CARCEL 5 X REFL X
35. XIR purityref puritydown keyword used to modify the print level iprint index used to control the printing of the module keyword which allows to set the title character 72 title associated to the reactor database generated keyword to set a specific database name in the data structure character 12 name of the feedback database keyword to specify power used for evolution for power history power value for regular power history CPONAM default power value for high power history CPONAM 21 power value for intermediate power history CPONAM 20 power value for low power history CPONAM 19 keyword to specify coolant temperature used for regular evolution and perturbed cases normal coolant temperature CPONAM default high coolant temperature CPONAM 4 low coolant temperature CPONAM 5 keyword to specify moderator temperature used for regular evolution and perturbed cases IGE 294 tmoderef tmodeup tmodedown TFUEL tfuelref tfuelup tfueldown RHOC denscool RHOM densmode XIR purityref puritydown 120 normal moderator temperature CPONAM default high moderator temperature CPONAM 6 and 23 low moderator temperature CPONAM 7 and 24 keyword to specify fuel temperature used for regular evolution and perturbed cases normal fuel temperature CPONAM default high fuel temperature CPONAM 2 low fuel temperature CPONAM 3 keyword to specify coolant density used for regular evolution no
36. lt lt Purity gt gt WGT CALC DENS WATER gt gt DensCool lt lt LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea IGE 294 ISO 3 73001 23002 6016 CALC WGT D20 gt gt WH1C lt lt gt gt WD2C lt lt gt ECHO Output Coolant Density g cm ECHO Output H1 Weight in Coolant ECHO Output D2 Weight in Coolant ECHO Output 016 Weight in Coolant po Get Fuel properties pus ECHO Input Fuel temperature K ECHO Input U235 U235 U238 Weight ECHO Input Fuel Density g cm 3 INFO ENR lt lt Enrichment gt gt WGT LIB WIMSD4 FIL ISO 3 72235 iaea 28238 76016 256 gt W016C lt lt 3 DensCool WHiC U WD2C 3 WO16C TempFuel 4 ratio in Fuel Enrichment DensFuel CALC WGT U02 gt gt WU235F lt lt gt gt WU238F lt lt gt gt W016F lt lt ECHO Output U235 Weight in Fuel ECHO Output U238 Weight in Fuel ECHO Output 016 Weight in Fuel esas Microscopic cross sections from poa WU235F WU238F WO16F file iaea format WIMSD4 LIBRARY LIB NMIX 8 CTRA WIMS MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIX 1 lt lt TempCool gt gt lt lt DensCool gt gt 016 760167 lt lt W016C gt gt D2D20 73002 lt lt WD2C gt gt H1H20 730017 lt lt WH1C gt gt MIX 2 lt lt TempFuel gt gt lt lt DensFuel gt gt 016 760167 lt lt WO16F gt gt U235 72235 lt lt WU235F gt gt 1 U23
37. xti gt valexp will be treated by a saturation approxi mation Here A is the sum of the radioactive decay constant and microscopic neutron absorption rate The default value is valexp 80 0 In order to remove the saturation approximation for all isotopes set valexp to a very large number such as 1 0 x 10 On the other way the saturation approximation can be set for a specific isotope by using the keyword SAT in Sect 3 2 3 module LIB keyword to remove the saturation approximation for all isotopes even if SAT keyword was set in Sect 3 2 3 module LIB keyword to specify an estimate of the relative width of the time step used in the solution of burnup equations relative width of the time step used in the solution of burnup equations An initial time step of A valh1 x xtf xti is used This value is optimized dynamically by the program The default value is valh1 1 0 x 1074 keyword to specify that the solution will be obtained using the 5 order Cash Karp algorithm keyword to specify that the solution will be obtained using the 4t order Kaps Rentrop algorithm This is the default value IGE 294 TIXS TDXS NOEX EXTR NOGL GLOB NSAT SAT NODI DIRA FLUX_FLUX FLUX_MAC FLUX_POW CHAIN PIFI MIXB mixbrn MIXP mixpwr 110 keyword that specified that time independent cross sections will be used This is the default option when no time dependent cross sections are provided keyw
38. 109 129 145 146 S30 33 34 S90 33 34 SA180 33 34 SA60 33 34 SAME 47 53 SANC 60 62 SAP 162 SAP 142 SAP 5 7 111 141 143 SAPHYB 5 7 113 114 saphvb datal 142 143 saphvb datal 142 saphvb data2 142 145 saphyb_data2 142 saphvb data3 142 146 saphyb_data3 142 SAPNAM 113 115 117 142 147 SAPNEW 113 117 SAPO 60 62 64 67 68 74 75 SAPRHS 142 147 SAT 24 26 105 108 110 SATOFF 108 109 SAVE 98 100 101 108 111 140 SB180 33 34 SB60 33 34 SCAT 12 14 74 76 77 79 80 150 SCR 71 73 SECT 41 42 SEED 148 149 SELE 115 117 SELE ALB 114 116 SELE_EDF 114 117 SELE FD 114 116 SELE_MWG 114 116 SELF 145 sens save 155 SENS sdf 155 sens x2m 155 SENS 155 SENS 5 155 SENS data 155 SENS data 155 SEQ ASCII 3 288 SEQ_BINARY 3 288 SET 108 111 129 145 146 SETLOOP 178 SHI 82 SHI 5 6 24 82 SHIB 24 25 SIDE 41 42 IGE 294 sideh 41 42 SIGS 93 95 SKIP 16 18 19 88 89 MS 67 69 70 N 74 114 116 SNDMPI 179 NDMPI 179 NNN 145 SNT 74 NT 4 8 58 59 74 SOURCE 151 153 SPH 102 259 sph 114 115 SPH 113 SPH 113 SPHE 56 SPHERE 29 30 42 44 48 60 74 SPLITH 41 42 SPLITR 41 42 182 SPLITX 41 SPLITY 41 SPLITZ 41 42 SPN 76 77 79 80 SPRD 114 115 SSYM 32 33 64 68 STABLE 22 23 STAT 98 101 163 164 STAT 170
39. 122 enrichment 121 122 ENTI 143 144 EPS 82 83 EPS1 108 109 EPS2 108 109 EPSI 71 72 74 75 epsi 74 75 epsout 92 93 114 117 epsthr 92 93 epsunk 92 93 equality 162 E E E E E E E E IGE 294 EQUI 114 117 143 144 EQW 60 61 67 69 70 EVO 107 EVO 5 8 105 107 109 111 125 142 223 EXCELL 98 99 EXCELL 8 42 EXCELT 63 EXCELT 1 4 6 8 31 42 43 58 59 63 64 66 68 71 83 86 89 160 182 183 219 223 EXPM 108 109 EXTE 92 93 EXTR 108 110 EXTRACT 139 140 EXTSTR 173 false 175 FBMXSDB 7 118 FD_B 102 FD_C 102 FD_H 102 PIL 16 20 121 122 FILE 288 FILL 160 FINDO 175 FINDO 175 FINDO 6 175 FISS 143 145 FIXE 12 13 FLOT 143 144 flott 163 164 FLU 91 FLU 5 7 91 105 FLUB 126 127 142 144 FLUG 126 127 143 144 FLUNAM 91 92 94 97 102 107 110 113 114 142 155 160 FLUX 151 153 FLUX 98 101 108 109 111 126 127 143 144 160 161 FLUX 142 flux 108 109 FLUX INTG 12 14 FLUX INTG P1 12 14 FLUX_FLUX 108 110 FLUX_MAC 108 110 FLUX_POW 108 110 FLUXUNK 7 91 97 107 190 fpower 108 110 fract 56 FREE 25 FROM 22 23 135 136 179 from 179 FUIT 145 FULL 71 72 299 G 94 96 GAUS 60 61 63 65 67 69 71 72 GC 82 83 GELB 88 89 GEO 98 99 GEO 29 GEO 2 4 6 11 29 30 58 59 99 GEOMETRY
40. 13 v13 r13 ri3 14 v14 rid rid f15 vid 115 r15 ou ou ou ou k o o x XA XX XX X SS Xxx XX XX X SOLUTION FOR KAVENORY BENCHMARK FLUX VALUES COMPARED TO MONTE CARLO RESULTS SEE TABLE 3 ref p 412 ECHO DF 1 3 f1 f2 f3 ECHO DF 8 9 18 f9 ECHO DF 10 12 10 fii 12 ECHO DF 13 15 13 14 15 ECHO ACCEPT fi ABS el lt 2 ABS e2 lt f3 ABS e3 lt ECHO ACCEPT 8 ABS e8 lt f9 ABS e9 lt ECHO ACCEPT 10 ABS e10 lt f11 ABS e11 lt 12 ABS e12 lt ECHO ACCEPT 13 ABS e13 lt 14 ABS e14 lt 15 ABS e15 lt PWRTRK DELETE PWRTRK assertV FLUX FLUX GROUP 1 REGION 30 3 84262705 IGE 294 219 ECHO test TCM11 completed END QUIT 6 4 12 TCM12 Solution of a 3 D problem using the MCU module This test case is for a simplified 3 D Cartesian assembly analyzed using the EXCELT A collisions probability solution is generated as well as two solutions using the method of characteristics Input data for test case TCM12 x2m TEST CASE TCM12 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS FISSION SOURCE PROBLEM 3D HEXAGONAL 830 ASSEMBLY WITH FUEL RODS Xxx XA XX X LINKED_LIST GEOMETRY TRACKING ASSEMBLY MACLIB FLUX MODULE MAC GEO EXCELT ASM FLU TRIVAT END SEQ_BINARY TRKSPC PROCEDURE asserts MACLIB MAC EDIT 2 NGRO 1 NMIX 4 NIFI 1 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 0 41 SCAT 1 1 0 3 NUSIGF 0 1 CHI
41. 179 igm 137 138 igp 137 138 ihmix 47 48 ii 99 149 152 ikryl 71 73 ikz 148 149 ilastg 12 14 ilem 173 ilem1 173 ilem2 173 ilenc1 163 ilenc2 163 ileni 163 ilev 82 83 ILUO 71 72 imat 10 12 imax 85 86 imcu 71 73 imerge 47 54 imil 143 144 imix 47 51 53 85 86 98 102 103 126 127 143 imixa 98 101 imixm 98 99 148 149 152 300 imixm ii 99 149 152 imixm2 98 99 imixold 135 136 imixt 98 100 IMPR 163 impv 79 81 imxit 82 83 increment 173 174 index 114 115 162 163 166 167 171 index1 171 172 index2 171 172 index3 171 172 indexfirst 173 INDMAX 171 INDMIN 171 172 INF 24 info 121 INFO 121 INFO 5 121 123 254 INFOR 119 INIT 92 126 128 INPUT 10 12 inrs 24 25 82 84 INTE 126 128 INTR 16 19 ipass 85 iplan 47 53 132 133 iplani 47 53 iplot 132 ipos 281 ipreci 16 17 iprint 3 10 15 17 20 30 31 59 71 82 83 85 88 92 97 98 107 108 111 114 115 119 121 126 129 132 135 137 139 143 145 146 148 151 155 157 160 162 166 167 171 173 178 179 iqual 60 61 iqua2 60 61 iquab 60 62 64 67 68 74 75 iquad 74 75 ireg 98 102 103 iregm 98 99 148 149 152 iregt 98 99 IRRA 126 127 142 144 IRSET 24 25 83 iscat 74 76 77 79 80 iscr 71 73 isect 41 42 iseed 148 149 iseg 79 80 iset 281 I
42. 19 NTOT1 12 13 19 NTPO 132 nu3 121 123 nud 121 123 nus 123 NUDEL 19 NUFI 145 numnew 15 numold 15 IGE 294 NUSIGD 12 14 NUSIGF 12 13 150 NVAL 171 172 nvd 76 77 79 80 NWTO 19 NWT1 19 NXT 98 99 NXT 67 NXT 148 99 132 160 220 261 OFF 15 92 93 114 115 OFFCENTER 41 43 OGAU 63 65 67 69 71 72 OLD 162 OLDGEO 29 30 32 OLDL 15 OLDLIB 9 10 14 17 20 28 82 OLDMIC 107 110 OLDNAME 139 140 OLDW 16 18 ON 92 98 101 ONEG 63 64 67 68 operand 178 179 OPP1 63 65 67 69 71 72 OPTIM 9 ORIG 129 130 145 147 orig 129 130 145 147 OUTMC 148 OVERV 12 14 overv 12 14 P 92 PO 94 POW 98 100 P1 94 P1W_L 98 100 P1W_T 98 100 PARA 126 127 143 param 123 PARKEY 126 127 129 130 parkey 143 145 146 parnam 143 PASS 85 path 173 288 path1 173 path2 173 pcinl 57 pcorn 63 66 67 70 pcut 63 64 67 68 PERT 98 101 PF 143 144 PI 32 34 PI 2 32 34 PICK 157 158 NXT 1 4 5 31 42 58 59 64 67 68 70 71 304 PIFI 108 110 PIJ 82 83 85 86 88 89 pijcel 57 PIJK 88 89 95 PIJNAM 88 91 PISO 63 64 67 68 PLAN 132 133 PLANA 132 133 PLANE 47 53 PLANP 132 133 PLUS 137 138 PN 76 77 114 115 135 PNL 93 95 PNLR 93 95 PNOR 88 89 PNTN 67 69 70 POINT 175 POINTS 132 133 POURCE 57 POWER 107 110 powerdown 119 powerint 119
43. 2 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly with diagonal symmetry X and Y lx x la 1 2 The mixtures or cells are then given in the following order Ni 1 from surface X to surface X i 1 j for each j 2 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly e CARCEL geometries Ni Ir 1 x lz x ly The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 radially outward 1 1 lr and such that imix is arbitrary not used if radial region does not intersect Cartesian region i 7 2 Ir 1 for the mixture outside the annular regions but inside Cartesian region i j 3 from surface X to surface X 1 lz for each j IGE 294 50 4 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly e CAR3D geometry without diagonal symmetry N lr x ly x lz The mixtures or cells are then given in the following order 1 from surface X to surface X i 1 lx for each j and k 2 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly for k 3 from surface Z to surface Z k 1 Iz with diagonal symmetry X and Y N lx x i 1 The mixtures or cells are then given in the following order x lz 1 from surface X to surface X i j lx for each j and k 2 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly for each k 3 from surface Z to surface Z k 1 lz with diagonal symmetry X and Y l l 1 y EX The mixtures or cells are then given in the following order x lz 1 from surf
44. 6 29 60 63 67 71 74 76 79 97 GEONAM 29 60 63 67 71 74 76 79 160 GET 121 173 GET MASS 122 GETVAL 171 GFF 126 128 gir 24 25 GLOB 108 111 139 140 GMRES 74 75 GOXSRN 10 12 GOXSWN 10 11 GPT 91 GRAY 160 161 GREP 171 GREP 6 171 GRMAX 82 83 85 GRMIN 82 83 85 GROUP 30 31 H FACTOR 12 14 H1 108 109 HALT 60 61 63 66 HBC 33 HCELL 47 54 HCOH 24 25 HCOM 126 127 hd2 121 HDD 71 73 HEBE 60 62 64 67 68 74 75 HEDIT 16 19 HELI 88 89 HETE 89 94 95 HEX 30 31 45 51 60 76 HEXCEL 30 31 42 44 45 51 60 HEXCELZ 66 HEXCELZ 30 31 42 45 52 hexmsh 41 42 51 HEXT 30 31 42 45 51 HEXTZ 30 31 42 45 51 HEXZ 66 HEXZ 30 31 45 51 hfact 12 14 HINC 24 25 HISO 98 100 HISO1 126 127 HISO2 126 127 HISOP 126 128 HISOT 137 138 HMIC 126 127 142 144 IGE 294 HMIC1 125 126 142 HMIC2 125 126 142 HMIX 47 48 54 98 99 264 hmix 135 136 HNAISO 143 144 HNAMAC 143 144 HNAMIX 143 145 HNAREA 143 145 HOMO 114 115 HOMOGE 29 30 60 HREAC 98 101 HSB 160 161 HTURN 47 54 hu8 121 hvalc 163 164 i 54 jaca 71 73 iburn 17 20 ic 47 54 icll TA 75 icl2 74 75 icode 32 34 icol 76 77 79 80 icond 98 100 148 149 152 IDEM 94 96 114 115 idir 132 133 idirn 98 101 102 idirn 101 102 idiro 98 102 ielem 76 77 79 81 iFrom
45. 7 14375 0 0 7 14375 SPLITY 3 3 0 0 7 14375 SPLITX 3 268 IGE 294 269 HMIX 0 0 MIX 5 53 BXY GEO CARCEL 2 MESHX 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITX 6 MESHY 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITY 6 RADIUS 0 0 6 380 6 530 SPLITR 2 2 HMIX 1 1 1 MIX 15 15 15 CLUSTER ROD ROD GEO TUBE 4 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0 APIN 0 0 RADIUS 0 0 5 4115 5 4877 5 5791 5 6553 SPLITR 1 1 1 1 HMIX 1 1 1 1 MIX 15 14 21 14 FXYL GEO CARCEL 5 2 1 MESHX 7 14375 0 0 7 14375 SPLITX 3 3 MESHY 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITV 6 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 7 00 HMIX 0 0 0 0 0 0 i i i i i i MIX 1 2 3 4 5 5 11 12 13 14 15 15 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2L ROD2R ROD3L ROD3R ROD4L ROD4R RODI GEO TUBE 2 1 2 MIX 6 10 16 20 HMIX 0011 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 MESHX 0 6540 0 6540 MESHY 0 6540 0 0 0 6540 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2L GEO TUBE 2 MIX 7 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 3 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 2 09439510 3 14159265 4 18879020 ROD2R GEO TUBE 2 MIX 17 20 HMIX 1 1 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 3 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 1 04719755 0 0000 1 04719755 ROD3L GEO TUBE 2 MIX 8 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 6 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 2 87979327 2 35619449 1 83259571 1 83259571 2 35619449 2 87979327 ROD3R GEO TUBE 2 MIX 18 20 HMIX 1 1 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 6 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 1 30899694 0 78539816 0 26179939 0 26179939 0 78539816 1 30899694 RODAL GEO TUBE 2 MIX 9
46. By default there is a pause after all the points associated with an external surface and all the lines associated with a region are drawn keyword to specify line direction to draw integer value to identify the track direction to draw In the case where idir 0 all the directions will be drawn A value of idir 0 for 2 D geometry is generally accept able However for 3 D geometry the number of lines generated is such that the figure becomes a mess and it is generally more convenient to draw the lines direction per direction keyword to specify which of the three planes normal to the specified direction in 3 D will be considered for drawing This plane is defined by the axes U V Used only for 3 D geometries integer value to identify which of the three planes normal to the specified direction in 3 D will be considered for drawing the only values permitted are 0 1 2 or 3 When a value of 0 is specified default all three planes will be drawn Used only for 3 D geometries keyword to specify that the all the lines in the V axis associated with a position on the U axis will be drawn Used only for 3 D geometries keyword to specify that the all the lines in the U axis associated with a position on the V axis will be drawn Used only for 3 D geometries integer value to identify the position on the U or V axis to be drawn Used only for 3 D geometries keyword to specify the distance between the plane normal to the line direction
47. Create Library for test CASE TCWU17 x2m Calling LIBRARY TCWU17Lib x2m iedit with LIBRARY Linked list containing the result of LIB for TCWU17 x2m print level for LIB module iprint Hoi Define PARAMETERS STRUCTURES and MODULES used Husos PARAMETER LIBRARY LINKED_LIST LIBRARY MODULE LIB DELETE END Hamas Define and read LIB EDIT option INTEGER iedit H gt gt iedit lt lt ee Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 IGE 294 272 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 All materials are duplicated for left and right cell identification during homogenization LIBRARY LIB EDIT lt lt iedit gt gt NMIX 21 CTRA WIMS DEPL LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIX 1 560 66 0 81212 016 7 6016 7 99449E 1 D2D20 73002 1 99768E 1 H1H20 73001 7 83774E 4 MIX 2 560 66 6 57 Nb93 293 2 50000 BNat 1011 2 10000E 4 Zr91 791 9 75000E 1 MIX 3 345 66 0 0014 He4 24 1 00000E 2 MIX 4 345 66 6 44 Fe56 7 2056 1 60000E 1 Ni58 758 6 00000E 2 Cr52 527 1 10000E 1 BNat 71011 3 10000E 4 Zr91 791 9 97100E 1 MIX 5 345 66 1 082885 016 6016 7 98895E 1 D2D20 73002 2 01016E 1 H1H20 73001 8 96000E 5 MIX 6 941 29 10 4375010 016 6016 1 18473E 1 Xe135 74135 0 0 U235 72235 6 27118E 1 1 U238 78238 8 75256E 1 1 U236 7236 0 0 1 Pu239 6239 0 0 Al MIX 7 COMB 6 1 0 MIX 8 COMB 6 1 0 MIX 9
48. DRAGON io kb kak RELL k REA e 3 Structure MAG cow kai AY ER Get ee BEY as ee OY 9 Structure descmacinp samer er ke crne ti abisa rta dudi 10 structure desevs oo caro RDA dude doaa a a k we 12 Structure descmacupd k A ee ee 15 Structure GIB cc a Pe wh Boe A he eee i ee we 16 Structure deselib s ea a 4480 EGR eee SEN We Bae eo ee 16 Bieuctare deselib oa csr tr se eae eM REY wh ee eb ee ee Pee 17 Structure deselib 4 5 4 84800 82 a ott bea a eo 17 Structure desclib Lk o ee eee EEE EELS SARS 17 Structure desedepl gt e o casas 050 6 8 Bee eee ee ee ee ee 22 Structure desedeplA2 Lk 55 k Red A o 23 Structure desemix 6 4 ele b b b eh eed ee k ee ee gla 24 Structure desemix pk S As BEE SS 27 Structwme GEOG v o ee ka Pee a Bee ae e ee A eS 29 Structure desegtyp ee esaa 4050 53 ae De ee A ALE ks a a 29 Structure desegcnt lt s 1 3000 eee e FB kk kw b ee bee 30 Structure deseBC ob oka we sg ke l A S oe Re Rah AA we Se 32 Structure deseSP fc ch sta EGG EEE EN ew i es 41 Situchite esePP ooo 4ae ob ta OER REDRESS ES Wara ee ee hh od w ads 47 Structure deseDE s sn mk eG EL hae eR he bb EEE Se ee 56 Structure deseSIJ co c 24460 Be EES pe EEN EH RR Ee eee daa we 57 Structure d setrack k a ed eh eee RR ee eee S 59 Structure SYBILT 2244544 85 08 E Se ee Se WEEE ED e ee eRe 60 structure desesybil 2 4 sea eka De A 60 Structure EXCELTE k 4 eR hh a Pee ee ered bb ele 63 Structure
49. Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used go PARAMETER res SEQ_ASCII res LINKED_LIST LIBRARY MOSTELAS MOSTELA TRACKS TRACK SYS FLUX BURNUP EDITION DATABASE ISOT MODULE GEO SYBILT LIB SHI ASM FLU EVO EDI COMPO DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts goss Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 ae LIBRARY LIB NMIX 3 CTRA WIMS DEPL LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIX 1 600 0 016 760167 4 61309E 2 U235 2235 1 66078E 4 1 U238 78238 2 28994E 2 1 U236 7236 0 0 1 Pu239 76239 0 0 1 MIX 2 600 0 Zr91 91 3 83243E 2 MIX 3 600 0 H1H20 73001 4 42326E 2 016H20 6016 2 21163E 2 BNat 71011 1 02133E 5 Geometry MOSTELAS 3 regions annular cell for self shielding MOSTELA 4 regions annular cell for transport MOSTELAS GEO TUBE 3 R REFL RADIUS 0 0 0 39306 0 45802 0 71206 MIX 1 2 3 MOSTELA GEO MOSTELAS SPLITR 2 i 4 3 joo Create the reactor database eee DATABASE COMPO EDIT 5 COMM Multi parameter reactor database ENDC PARA BURN IRRA PARA FLUB FLUB IGE 294 235 INIT Pee Self Shielding calculation SYBIL Transport calculation SYBIL Flux calculation for keff with imposed buckling using B1 homogeneous leakage model a TRACKS SYBILT MOSTELAS TITLE TCWU04 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK WITH BURNUP EDIT 1 MAXR 3 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY TRACK
50. GEONAM desctrack descbivac where TRKNAM character 12 name of the TRACKING data structure that will contain region volume and surface area vectors in addition to region identification pointers and other tracking information If TRKNAM also appears on the RHS the previous tracking parameters will be applied by default on the current geometry GEONAM character 12 name of the GEOMETRY data structure desctrack structure describing the general tracking data see Section 3 4 descbivac structure describing the transport tracking data specific to BIVACT The BIVACT specific tracking data in descbivac is defined as Table 35 Structure descbivac IX PRIM ielem icol isplh DUAL ielem icol isplh MCFD isplh PN SPN n SCAT DIFF iscat L VOID nvd where desctrack structure describing the general tracking data see Section 3 4 PRIM keyword to set a primal finite element classical discretization DUAL keyword to set a mixed dual finite element discretization If the geometry is hexagonal a Thomas Raviart Schneider method is used MCFD keyword to set a mesh centered finite difference discretization in hexagonal geometry ielem order of the finite element representation The values permitted are 1 linear polyno mials 2 parabolic polynomials 3 cubic polynomials or 4 quartic polynomials By default ielem 1 icol type of quadrature used to integrate the mass ma
51. IGE 294 141 3 19 The SAP module This component of the lattice code is dedicated to the constitution of the reactor database intended to store all the nuclear data produced in the lattice code that is useful in reactor calculations including fuel management and space time kinetics Multigroup lattice calculations are too expensive to be executed dynamically from the driver of the global reactor calculation A more feasible approach is to create a reactor database where a finite number of lattice calculation results are tabulated against selected global parameters chosen so as to represent expected operating conditions of the reactor The SAP operator is used to create and construct a SAPHYB object This object is generally persistent and used to collect information gathered from many DRAGON elementary calculations performed under various conditions The SAPHYB object is based on a specification of the Saphyr code system l Each elementary calculation is characterized by a tuple of global parameters These global parameters are of different types depending on the nature of the study under consideration type of assembly power temperature in a mixture concentration of an isotope time burnup or exposure rate in a depletion calculation etc Each step of a depletion calculation represents an elementary calculation The SAPHYB object is often presented as a multi parameter reactor database For each elementary calculation the results are reco
52. INFO coo koi sa a heb bade eed be oe a Be eee 121 Struci t MO cie pns paa cta Ke eA ws oa wee eg AR wed 121 Structure COMPO Jo lt b bb b as eee a E GS we eee 125 Structure compo_datal 126 Structure compo data2 ssa 2 566404 S Rhee ee rures 129 Structure compo datad 2 2 6 0 ii 130 Structure cotipo datad k k k eR Re ee ee eee 130 Structure TIME 2 3 6 i ERE eA Me SE ae wR ES 132 Structure desetim o ra See A A RAE ee mew eh A 132 Structure MIT contr reas REEMA Ge ee be ee be e aa 135 Structure M21 date 224 B gur bb s Sa 0 hee bes oe wee eg BRA oe dee 135 Structure CHAB e oia as ee EO a oe eee GS eee wee 137 Structure CHAB data 4 5 66 EE ea eee ee ee 137 Structure OPOEJ k hee ee Eb dde Pad a g 139 Structure descepo 4 0 44 2244 k ER HERE Ree 139 Structure SAAB 0 i ke See ORE K Wee e Lies 142 Structure saphyb datal 60 0260 8 e455 FUR der eae ee eR ee 143 Structure saphvb data da a secesi LL wh ankua ee ee 145 Structure saphyb data3 20200 0 k k k beep eee Ee EH ER ee ESHER es 146 Structure MGi lt ziuna ee ae ew at eee Bee eee dba et L 148 truchas IMC data bbe ERG et Ge Ge ERE a eae ee 148 ta LA or heed ae ee EME REDNESS A ea hee ee he BR 150 structure DMACs ocio ee REE SR we ee ae ee os 151 Structure DMAC data ccs cee k SR ee B ES 151 structure DREPE gt a ce as Fee eek eee ba a k al we 153 Structure SHINS ee e ss EUS ee ENO Bae eo ee ee 155 Structure SPINS data
53. TUBE SPHERE CAR2D TUBEZ and CAR3D The calling specification for this module is Table 32 Structure SNT TRKNAM SNT TRKNAM GEONAM desctrack descsn where TRKNAM character 12 name of the TRACKING data structure that will contain region volume and surface area vectors in addition to region identification pointers and other tracking information If TRKNAM also appears on the RHS the previous tracking parameters will be applied by default on the current geometry GEONAM character 12 name of the GEOMETRY data structure desctrack structure describing the general tracking data see Section 3 4 descsn structure describing the transport tracking data specific to SNT The SNT specific tracking data in descsn is defined as Table 33 Structure descsn DIAM m SN n SCAT iscat DSA NDSA LIVO icl1 icl2 NLIVO GMRES nstart NSDSA nsdsa MAXI maxi EPSI epsi QUAD iquad QUAB iquab SAPO HEBE where desctrack structure describing the general tracking data see Section 3 4 DIAM keyword to fix the spatial approximation order m spatial order m 1 is used for the classical diamond scheme default value m 2 or 3 is currently available in 1D slab 2D Cartesian and 3D Cartesian geometries SN keyword to fix the angular approximation order of the flux n order of the Sy approximation even number SCAT keyword to limit the anisotropy of
54. Xxx XA XX X xXx uo Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used Faros LINKED_LIST MOSTELA VOLMAT LIBRARY PIJ FLUX OUT MODULE LIB MAC GEO SYBILT SHI ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE assertS assertV goss Microscopic cross section from file iaea format WIMSD4 Fixed source of 1 0E5 in group 6 EEE LIBRARY LIB EDIT O NMIX 3 CTRA WIMS MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIX 1 600 0 016 760167 4 61309E 2 U235 72235 1 66078E 4 1 U238 78238 2 28994E 2 1 MIX 2 600 0 Zr91 91 3 83243E 2 MIX 3 600 0 H1H20 73001 4 42326E 2 016H20 6016 2 21163E 2 BNat 71011 1 02133E 5 LIBRARY MAC LIBRARY EDIT 0 READ INPUT MIX 3 FIXE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0E 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IGE 294 251 k Geometry MOSTELA Annular cell with reflective BC MOSTELA GEO TUBE 3 RADIUS 0 0 0 39306 0 45802 0 71206 SPLITR 2 1 1 MIX 1 2 3 R REFL hores Self Shielding calculation SYBIL Transport calculation SYBIL Flux calculation for keff jim VOLMAT SYBILT MOSTELA TITLE TCWU10 SYBIL TRACK MOSTELLER BENCHMARK MAXR 4 QUAI 5 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY VOLMAT EDIT O NOLJ PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMAT FLUX FLU PIJ LIBRARY VOLM
55. and NOMALT are two sub directories only the floating point information contained in them is added The result is written into NOMALT keyword used to compare the contents of two records the relative differences are printed the absolute differences are printed name of the reference block name of the block which may possibly be modified during the ADD and COPY operations Dump the active directory of and its sub directories to the printer IGE 294 165 4 3 The DELETE module This module is used to delete one or many LCM objects The calling specifications are Table 88 Structure DELETE NAMEI DELETE NAME1 NAME1 character 12 name of a LCM object The names of the LCM object should be present on both the LHS and the RHS A LCM object named PARENT can be deleted using the following command PARENT DELETE PARENT IGE 294 166 4 4 The BACKUP module This module is used to copy one or many LCM objects memory resident or XSM based along with all of its parent to a backup LCM object The backup data structure can be stored on a single LCM object either memory resident or XSM based a sequential binary file or a sequential ASCII file The calling specifications are Table 89 Structure BACKUP NAMEI BACKUP NAME NAME2 EDIT iprint STEP UP NOMDIR AT index NAME1 character 12 name of LCM object used as a backup media NAME2 character 12 name of LC
56. ee LATGEOR GEO CAR2D 2 2 X REFL X REFL MESHX 0 00 Y REFL Y REFL MESHY 0 00 MIX 122 2 LATGEOV GEO LATGEOR X VOID X VOID Y VOID Y VOID LATREGR TRKR EXCELT LATGEOR TITLE LATHROP xxx P1 ANISOTROPE MAXR 64 TRAK TISO 49 20 0 LATREGV TRKV EXCELT LATGEOV 00 SPLITX 4 4 1 0 2 1 0 2 00 SPLITY 4 4 IGE 294 TITLE LATHROP xxx P1 ANISOTROPE MAXR 64 TRAK TISO 49 20 0 km Solution TYPE K E SYSR ASM MACRO LATREGR TRKR FLUXR FLU SYSR MACRO LATREGR TYPE K ACCE 3 0 assertS FLUXR K EFFECTIVE 1 1 687038 EDITR EDI MACRO LATREGR FLUXR EDIT 1 SYSV ASM MACRO LATREGV TRKV FLUXV FLU SYSV MACRO LATREGV TYPE K ACCE 3 0 assertS FLUXV K EFFECTIVE 1 0 6779595 EDITV EDI MACRO LATREGV FLUXV EDIT 1 LATGEOR LATREGR SYSR FLUXR EDITR TRKR LATGEOV LATREGV SYSV FLUXV EDITV TRKV DELETE LATGEOR LATREGR SYSR FLUXR EDITR TRKR LATGEOV LATREGV SYSV FLUXV EDITV TRKV MACRO DELETE MACRO ECHO test TCMO7 completed END QUIT LIST 6 4 8 TCMO8 Fixed source problem with fission This test is for a 2 D Cartesian cell which contains both a fission and a fixed source Input data for test case TCMO8 x2m des TEST CASE TCMO8 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM WITH FISSILE MATERIAL FOR 1 8 7X7 PWR ASSEMBLY x XA XA XX 3 X xXx REF TCMO2 k Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used LINKE
57. gt FLUX MERGE REGION 00000 00 0 ooo Ooooo O O OOGO Ooo0oooo0o eee eee mom OO OOO OOO Go OOO COCOCOOC Oo Go OOO COCOO0O oO LOO 0 LOO Oo0O0O0O0O0oO0oOooOoOo o0o0DOO0O0O0OoOoOoOoO O 2 Oo O 9OOCOCOCCCOOCO fo oo Oo 0 Oo Oo o oO Oo 0000 EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX OO OO OM OM OO Ome O O OO S O O O Oro 9 OOOO o E e E a E e fo O 0 O O O Oo O o o O O O O OO O o 6 O GROUP 1 REGION 10 3 947211 EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX O0OCOoCCVCVVoo O oOo 2 0 Oo 0 0 6 197 198 IGE 294 00 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 000 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 002 00 3 0 0 4 0 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000 0000 0 0 5 0 060070 000 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 8 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDITION EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 100 000 0 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 00000000000 02 0000 0 0 0 0 0 O 0000000000 03 0000 0 0 0 0 0 O 000000000 04 0 0000 0 0 0 0 O 00000000 05 00 O 0 0 O O 0 0 O 0000000 0600000 O 0 0 0 O 000000 0 70 O O O O O 0 0 0 O 00000 080000 0 0 0 0 0 O 0000 09 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 010 00000 0 0 0 0 O 0000 0 00 0 0 0 00 011 o 012 00000 0 0 0 0 0 013 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 o 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ooo oo DELETE WATATRK WATATRK ECHO test T
58. j 1 nmistr i 1 nmilg where BIHET keyword to specify that the current macro geometry is containing composite mixtures TUBE keyword to specify that the micro structures are of a cylindrical geometry SPHE keyword to specify that the micro structures are of a spherical geometry nmistr maximum number of micro structure types in the composite mixtures Each type of micro structure is characterized by its dimension and may have distinct volumetric con centrations in each of the macro geometry volumes All the micro structures of a given type have the same nuclear properties in a given macro volume The micro structures of a given type may have different nuclear properties within different macro volumes nmilg number of composite mixtures This is the number of material mixture indices of the macro geometry with a value gt maxmix ns array giving the number of sub regions tubes or spherical shells in the micro structures Each type of micro structures may contain a different number of micro volumes rs array giving the radius of the tubes or spherical shells making up the micro structures For each type of micro structure i we will have an initial radius of rs 1 0 0 milie array giving the indices used to defined composite mixtures in the macro geometry These composite mixture indices must be gt maxmix mixdil array giving the mixture indices associated with the diluent in each composite mixtures of the macro geom
59. module The CFC module is used to generate a Feedback Model database required for a full core calculation in DONJON The general specifications of this module are Table 53 Structure CFC CFCNAM CFC CFCNAM CPONAM i i 1 28 desccfc where CFCNAM character 12 name of the FBMXSDB data structure containing the Feedback Model reactor database The reactor database can be updated if CFCNAM appears on the RHS CPONAM character 12 name of read only CPO data structures There are 28 different CPO data structures required here each containing respectively the reactor reference cross section cell cross section for the first fuel temperature cell cross section for the second fuel temperature cell cross section for the first coolant temperature cell cross section for the second coolant temperature cell cross section for the first moderator temperature cell cross section for the second moderator temperature cell cross section for the first coolant density pe ANA PF WN H cell cross section for the second coolant density e cell cross section for the first moderator density 14 14 cell cross section for the second moderator densitv 14 N cell cross section for a different concentration of boron 14 w cell cross section for a different moderator purity j cell cross section for a different concentration of xenon m on cell cross section for a different concen
60. value of the triangular mesh splitting Its use is similar to nhr except that each sector of the hexagonal cell will be filled by a unique mixture IGE 294 NPIN npins DPIN dpins RPIN rpins APIN apins CPINX xpins CPINY ypins CPINZ zpins 43 keyword to specify the number of pins located in a cluster geometry It can only be used for SPHERE TUBE TUBEX TUBEY and TUBEZ sub geometry the number of pins associated with this sub geometry in the primary geometry keyword to specify the pin density in a geometry that contains clusters A number Np r of pins that will be placed randomly in the geometry with de Np NINT 22 2 a 4 where dp is the pin density V the volume of the cell containing these pins andV the volume of this pin type The function NINT provides the nearest integer associated with its real argument It can only be used for SPHERE TUBE TUBEX TUBEY and TUBEZ sub geometry the pin density dp r keyword to specify the radius of an imaginary cylinder where the centers of the pins are to be placed in a cluster geometry the radius cm of an imaginary cylinder where the centers of the pins are to be placed In the case where a single value is provided for rpins all the pins are located at the same distance from the center of the cell taking account the offset provided by the keyword OFFCENTER keyword to specify the angle of the first pin or each pin centered on an imag
61. 115 118 120 125 127 129 131 139 140 CPONEW 113 CPORHS 125 126 130 CRE 7 CREA 163 CRON 145 146 CROWN 47 54 CTRA 10 11 15 18 83 86 140 CUT 63 64 67 68 CYLI 32 31 D 132 134 d 132 134 D20 121 122 DAY 108 109 129 130 145 146 DB STRUC 130 131 DBYE 24 25 dcr 22 DEBUG 175 DECAY 22 23 DEFAULT 98 99 DEL 163 DELE 10 12 DELETE 165 DELETE 6 165 DELP 10 11 DELS 98 101 deltaRho 157 158 denmix 24 DENS 121 123 dens 24 27 28 63 66 67 70 121 122 dens_z 63 66 denscool 119 120 densmode 119 120 denspr 63 65 67 70 DEPL 16 19 102 108 110 111 descasm 88 descBC 30 33 92 descbivac 76 desccfc 118 119 desccpo 139 descdepl 16 17 20 22 descdeplA2 16 17 20 23 descDH 30 32 56 descedi 97 98 descevo 107 108 descexcel 63 descflu 91 92 descgent 29 30 descgtyp 29 30 descinfo 121 123 descleak 92 94 desclib 16 17 23 descmac 10 IGE 294 descmacinp 9 10 descmacupd 9 10 14 15 descmccg 71 descmix1 16 21 24 26 descmix2 17 20 21 27 descmodule 287 descnxt 67 descobject 288 descPP 30 32 46 48 descpsp 160 descshi 82 descSIJ 30 32 57 descsn 74 descSP 30 31 41 descsph 113 114 descsybil 60 desctlm 132 desctrack 59 60 63 67 74 76 79 descTRIVAC 79 descuss 84 85 descxs 10 12 DIA
62. 146 BUCK 94 96 bup 135 136 BURN 17 20 111 135 136 BURNUP 139 140 BURNUP 7 16 17 105 107 139 121 122 132 133 c 132 134 CACA 63 65 67 69 71 72 CACB 63 65 67 69 71 72 CALC 85 86 121 123 IGE 294 CALENDF 16 17 CAR1D 29 30 44 49 60 61 74 76 CAR2D 29 30 34 35 44 49 60 74 76 CAR3D 29 30 34 35 45 50 74 CARCEL 30 31 42 44 45 49 60 65 70 CARCELX 30 31 42 45 50 53 58 CARCELY 30 31 42 45 50 53 58 CARCELZ 30 31 42 45 51 58 CD 173 CDIRN 101 102 CELL 47 54 57 98 99 CFC 118 CFC 7 118 119 CFCNAM 118 CHAB 137 CHAB 5 137 CHAB data 137 CHAB data 137 CHAT 143 144 CHAIN 22 23 108 110 CHAR 126 127 CHDL 12 14 CHI 12 13 145 150 CHID 19 CHIS 19 CLUSTER 48 54 58 CMYK 160 161 COMB 24 26 254 COMM 126 127 143 comment 143 COMP 98 99 102 115 148 149 151 152 COMPLETE 33 34 54 COMPO 125 COMPO 5 7 8 102 111 125 127 compo datal 125 126 compo datal 126 compo_data2 125 129 compo data2 126 compo data3 125 130 compo data3 126 compo data4 125 130 compo data4 126 CONC 126 127 143 144 COND 98 100 148 149 152 CONS 137 138 COOL 108 109 COPY 163 164 CORN 63 66 67 70 CORR 24 25 145 cP 173 CPINX 41 43 CPINY 41 43 CPINZ 41 43 CPO 7 118 139 CPO 139 297 CPO 5 7 139 CPONAM 113
63. 1713 Ev as li Por 1 9 1 17413 ma 2 il 2e 1 n 7 3 31 where f gt 1 In conclusion All P cross sections including the total cross section NTOTO in the even paritv equations must be multiplied by uy The total cross section NTOT1 in the odd parity equations must be divided by pg Scattering matrix terms Useg n r with l even must be multiplied by pun Scattering matrix terms Use g n r with odd must be divided by py Even parity fluxes such as NWTO and FLUX INTG must be divided by pug Odd parity fluxes such as NWT1 and FLUX INTG P1 are not modified IGE 294 113 e In the case where the macro calculation is done in transport theory but not with a P type method the macroscopic total cross section is not modified and the even odd corrections consistent with the simplified P method are reported to the macroscopic within group scattering cross sections They are now corrected as Esze geg r Hg Us20 ge 9 7 1 Hg Lo g r 3 32 and de 1 Eres goal BS 1 L g r 3 33 Hg Hg where gt 0 Other cross sections and scattering matrix terms are corrected the same wav as for the simplified P method 3 11 1 Data input for module SPH The SPH module perform a SPH equivalence calculation using information recovered in a macrolib and apply SPH factors to the corresponding EDITION L_EDIT MICROLIB L LIBRARV MACROLIB L MACROLIB or SAPHYB L_SAPHYB object This module is also u
64. 1993 G Marleau A H bert and R Roy New Computational Methods Used in the Lattice Code DRAGON Top Mtg on Advances in Reactor Physics Charleston SC March 8 11 1992 A H bert G Marleau and R Roy Application of the Lattice Code DRAGON to CANDU Analy sis Trans Am Nucl Soc 72 335 1995 A H bert and R Roy A Programmer s Guide for the GAN Generalized Driver FORTRAN 77 version Report IGE 158 Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al Institut de G nie Nucl aire 1994 R Roy The CLE 2000 Tool Box Report IGE 163 Institut de g nie nucl aire Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al Montr al Qu bec 1999 A Hoffman et al APOLLO Code Multigroupe de r solution de V guation du transport pour les neutrons thermiques et rapides CEA N 1610 Commisariat Energie Atomique France 1973 S Loubi re R Sanchez M Coste A H bert Z Stankovski C Van Der Gucht and I Zmijarevic APOLLO2 Twelve Years Later Int Conf on Mathematics and Computation Reactor Physics and Environmental Analysis in Nuclear Applications Madrid Spain September 27 30 1999 P J Laughton NJOYPREP and WILMAPREP UNIX Based Tools for WIMS AECL Cross Section Library Production Atomic Energy of Canada Report COG 92 414 Rev 0 June 1993 A H bert A Comparison of Three Techniques for Computing Probability Tables Int Conf on the Physics of Nuclear Science and Technology Long Island New Y
65. 2 Cr52 3529 4 79927E 5 Fe56 2056 4 45845E 5 Ni58 758 1 13521E 4 MoNat 796 4 03755E 6 A127 727 2 35231E 6 Mn55 2bDDS 4 15901E 7 BNat 71011 2 32761E 5 Zr91 91 8 92427E 4 MIX 4 579 9 016 760167 2 87335E 4 Cr52 752 7 07291E 5 Fed6 2056 1 38298E 4 Zr91 791 3 92175E 2 MIX 5 579 9 H1H20 730017 4 71346E 2 016H20 6016 2 35673E 2 Cr52 52 2 24991E 5 IGE 294 Fe56 72056 2 09013E 5 Mn55 55 1 94976E 7 BNat 710117 2 35598E 5 Zr91 7917 4 18372E 4 MIX 6 579 9 H1H20 730017 4 71676E 2 Fe56 72056 1 96130E 5 Mn55 755 1 82957E 7 BNat 710117 2 35753E 5 Zr91 91 3 92583E 4 MIX 7 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 72020E 2 Fe56 72056 1 82630E 5 Mn55 755 1 70365E 7 BNat 710117 2 35914E 5 Zr91 91 3 65562E 4 MIX 8 933 6 U235 2235 7 39237E 4 1 U238 78238 2 17285E 2 1 Geometry ASSMB contains Ci cell without fuel C2 normal fuel cell C3 peripheral cell C4 corner cell ASSMB GEO X DIAG X REFL CAR2D 9 9 Y SYME Y DIAG CELL C1 C2 C2 C1 C2 C2 Ci C2 C3 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C3 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C3 C1 C2 C2 C1 C2 C3 C2 C2 C2 C2 C3 C1 C2 C2 C3 C2 C2 C3 C2 C3 C4 211 C1 GEO CARCEL 2 MESHX 0 0 1 26472 MESHY 0 0 1 26472 RADIUS 0 0 O C2 GEO 211 C3 GEO C4 GEO k C1 Self Shielding calculation SYBIL Ni58 MoNat A127 016H20 Cr52 Ni58 MoNat A127 016H20 Cr52
66. 278 6 6 Depletion chain examples This test cases show how write a procedure permitting to define a depletion chain in cases where it is not available from the cross section library This is the case with APOLLO or MATXS type libraries The depletion chain for the heavy isotopes in represented in figure Figure 40 Input data for test case TCDAO1 c2m k o o TEST CASE TCDAO1 DEPLETION CHAIN EXAMPLE kX PARAMETER LIBRARY LINKED LIST LIBRARY MODULE LIB END LIBRARY CHAIN U234 U235 U236 U238 Np237 Np239 Pu238 Pu239 Pu240 Pu241 Pu242 Am241 Am242m Am243 Cm242 Cm243 Cm244 LIB EDIT 2 DEPL 120 922340 NFTOT 191 8 NG 5 2970 FROM DECAY 1 0 Pu238 N2N 1 0 U235 922350 NFTOT 193 1 NG 6 5452 N2N FROM NG 1 0 U234 922360 NFTOT 194 5 NG 5 4984 FROM NG 1 0 U235 922380 NFTOT 193 8 NG 5 7112 N2N 932370 NFTOT 196 4 NG 6 3385 FROM NG 1 0 U236 N2N 1 0 U238 932390 DECAY 3 39940E 02 NFTOT 196 3 NG 6 7371 N2N FROM NG 1 0 U238 942380 DECAY 2 50460E 02 NFTOT 197 4 NG 5 6470 FROM DECAY 1 0 Cm242 NG 1 0 Np237 N2N 1 0 Pu239 1 0 Np239 942390 NFTOT 198 5 NG 6 5336 N2N FROM DECAV 1 0 Np239 1 0 Cm243 NG 1 0 Pu238 N2N 1 0 Pu240 942400 NFTOT 199 5 NG 5 2415 N2N FROM DECAY 1 0 Cm244 NG 1 0 Pu239 N2N 1 0 Pu241 942410 DECAY 1 52540E 01 NFTOT 202 0 NG 6 3097 N2N FROM NG 1 0 Pu240 N2N 1 0 Pu242 942420 NFTOT 201 6 NG 5 2562 N2N FROM NG 1 0 Pu241 1416 Am241 952410 NFTOT 1
67. 294 284 e A native build is possible provided that Microsoft Visual Studio and Intel Visual Fortran are available A script named instver4 bat is available as of Version 4 0 4 to create executables exe from a MS DOS command window Follow the following steps Click Start point to All Programs Intel R Software Development Tools Intel R Visual Fortran Compiler Professional and finally Fortran Build Environment for applications running on IA 32 The Visual Studio Command Prompt automatically sets the correct paths of both C and Fortran compilers together with their associated libraries In the command window type md homepath WVersion4X script instver4 e A Unix type build is possible provided that Cygwin see http www cygwin com is properly installed on your PC Cygwin is a native implementation of a Unix shell After installation of Cygwin you obtain a native Unix terminal window where all Version4 components can be executed The DRAGON installation must proceed in the Cygwin shell Directory libraries contains open source Draglibs that can be used to test your implementation This directory must me installed as shown in Figure 41 before following the instructions of the readme file for executing multigroup tests The script named tdraglib access is automatically executed by the rdragon script when no other access script is provided The tdraglib access script creates a symbolic link between the draglib draglibJ
68. 4 8 module used to locate information on a data structure see Section 4 9 module used to find the zero of a tabulated function see Section 4 11 module used to terminate an execution controlled bv the generalized driver see Sec tion 4 13 2 5 The DRAGON Data Structures The transfer of information between the DRAGON execution modules is ensured by well defined data structure They are generally created or modified directly by one of the modules of DRAGON or by one of the utility modules Here we will give a brief description of these data structures but a more complete description of their content is also available upon request These data structures are memorv resident or persistent i e XSM type objects MACROLIB MICROLIB GEOMETRY TRACKING a standard data structure used by DRAGON to transfer group ordered macroscopic cross sections between its modules It can be a stand alone structure or it can be included into a larger structure such as a MICROLIB or an EDITION structure It can be created by the MAC LIB and EDI modules It can also be modified by the SHI USS and EVO modules Such a structure either stand alone or as part of a MICROLIB is also required for a successful execution of the ASM and FLU modules a standard data structure used by DRAGON to transfer microscopic and macroscopic cross sections between its modules It always include a MACROLIB substructure It can be a stand alone structure o
69. 5 10 0 SVMM 12 PIJ ASM LIBRARV VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU PIJ LIBRARV VOLMATF TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 121035 EDITION EDI LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX CANDU6F MERG REGI 6 610 7 710 1 1 8 810 1 1 9 910 1 1 2 3 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 COND 4 0 MICR ALL SAVE MGEO CANDU6F EDITION SPH EDITION VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX PIJ LIBRARY INTLINS VOLMATS CANDU6S VOLMATF CANDU6F INTLINF DELETE FLUX PIJ LIBRARY INTLINS VOLMATS CANDU6S VOLMATF CANDU6F INTLINF 12 2 group Burnup macro depletion pul DATABASE COMPO EDIT 5 COMM Multi parameter reactor database ENDC INIT DATABASE COMPO DATABASE EDITION EDIT 3 EDITION DELETE EDITION COMPO INTERPOLATION LIBRARY SPH DATABASE EDIT 1 STEP UP default STEP AT 1 MICRO OFF CANDU6F DATABASE STEP UP default STEP UP GEOMETRIES STEP AT 1 VOLMATF INTLINF EXCELT CANDU6F TITLE TCWU31 FEW GROUP BURNUP TRANSPORT TRACKING EDIT O MAXR 31 TRAK TISO 5 10 0 SYMM 12 PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU PIJ LIBRARY VOLMATF TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 121044 EDITION EDI LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX EDIT 1 MERGE COMP MICR ALL SAVE EVALUATE Timec 1 0 WHILE Timei Timec lt DO EVALUATE Timef Timei Delt IF Timei 0 0 THEN BURNUP LIBRARY EVO LIBRARY FLUX VOLMATF EDIT 3 DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt ELSE BURNUP L
70. BURN POWER KW KG 31 97130 URANIUM MASS 19 23600 U02 REAL DENSITY 10 59300 U02 EFF DENSITY 10 43750 U02 TEMPERATURE 941 28998 ENRICHMENT 0 71140 COOLANT D2 AT 99 222 MODERATOR D2 AT 99 911 IGE 294 NUMBER OF DAYS k a b c d x REAL Power 31 9713 k o o Power 237 MODERATOR CALENDRIA Figure 38 Geometry of the CANDU 6 cell 50 31 9713 kw kg for Burnup time interval Delt l owe 10 20 50 day for days for days for days for days for days for or 10 50 150 Define variables and initialize Burnup paremeters 0 0 to 300 0 days to 1 day to 5 days to 10 days to 50 days to 150 days to 300 days Days with burnup interval changes 1 0 5 0 10 0 50 0 150 0 and 300 0 days Burnup control time variables Timei Timef initial time Timei Timef final time Delt Timec Timei Timef 0 03 1 0 1 0 0 0 Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used LINKED_LIST LIBRARY CANDU6S CANDU6F VOLMATS VOLMATF PIJ FLUX BURNUP EDITION DATABASE ISOT SEQ_BINARY INTLINS INTLINF SEG ASCII database MODULE IGE 294 238 GEO EXCELT SHI ASM FLU EVO EDI PROCEDURE asserts oa Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 S PROCEDURE TCWUO5Lib INTEGER iedit 1 LIB
71. British Nucl Energy Soc 5 564 1966 R E Macfarlane TRANSX 2 A Code for Interfacing MATXS Cross Section Libraries to Nuclear Transport Codes LA 12312 MS Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory New Mexico 1992 G Marleau New Geometries Processing in DRAGON The NXT Module Technical Report IGE 260 Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al 2006 B G Carlson Tables of Equal Weight Quadrature EQ Over the Unit Sphere Technical Report LA 4734 Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory 1971 IGE 294 293 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 G Longoni and A Haghighat Development of New Quadrature Sets with the Ordinate Splitting Technique M amp C 2001 American Nuclear Society Topical Meeting in Mathematics and Computa tions Salt Lake City Utah 2001 Proceedings available on CD Rom R Sanchez L Mao and S Santandrea Treatment of Boundary Conditions in Trajectory Based Deterministic Transport Methods Nucl Sci Eng 140 23 50 2002 R Roy The Cyclic Characteristics Method Int Conf on the Physics of Nuclear Science and Technology Long Island New York October 5 8 1998 R Roy The Cyclic Characteristics Method with Anisotropic Scattering M C 99 Mathematics and Computation Reactor Physics and Environmental Analysis in Nuclear Applications Madrid Spain September 27
72. COMB 6 1 0 MIX 10 560 66 6 44 Fe56 22056 1 60000E 1 Ni58 758 6 00000E 2 Cr52 2527 1 10000E 1 BNat 71011 3 10000E 4 Zr91 791 9 97100E 1 MIX 11 560 66 0 81212 016 6016 7 99449E 1 D2D20 73002 1 99768E 1 H1H20 73001 7 83774E 4 MIX 12 560 66 6 57 Nb93 293 2 50000 BNat 71011 2 10000E 4 Zr91 791 9 75000E 1 MIX 13 345 66 0 0014 He4 24 1 00000E 2 MIX 14 345 66 6 44 Fe56 22056 1 60000E 1 Ni58 758 6 00000E 2 Cr52 252 1 10000E 1 BNat 71011 3 10000E 4 Zr91 791 9 97100E 1 MIX 15 345 66 1 082885 016 6016 7 98895E 1 D2D20 73002 2 01016E 1 H1H20 73001 8 96000E 5 MIX 16 941 29 10 4375010 016 6016 1 18473E 1 Xe135 74135 0 0 U235 2235 6 27118E 1 1 U238 78238 8 75256E 1 1 U236 7236 0 0 1 Pu239 6239 0 0 1 MIX 17 COMB 6 1 0 MIX 18 COMB 6 1 0 MIX 19 COMB 6 1 0 IGE 294 MIX 20 Ni58 BNat Zr91 MIX 21 Cr52 Si29 Mn55 END QUIT LIST 560 66 75 241 49 345 6 75 22 75 6 8 011 1 6 2 9 5 44 00 10 OT 56 79 25 000E 2 000E 4 100E 1 659E 3 072E 4 431E 3 Fe56 Crb2 Fe56 Ni58 C12 720567 JB2 72056 58 22012 273 1 60000E 1 1 10000E 1 6 19027E 2 6 83337E 3 1 46552E 4 6 5 18 TCWU31 Compo based two group burnup of a CANDU 6 type cell This case is similar to TCWU11 except that the two group burnup calculation recover all its infor mation from a COMPO database The MICRO
73. DAY e change delta t for burnup and final time if required roo IF Timef Timec THEN IF Timec 150 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 50 0 300 0 ENDIF IF Timec 50 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 20 0 150 0 ENDIF IF Timec 10 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 10 0 50 0 ENDIF IF Timec 5 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 5 0 10 0 ENDIF IGE 294 240 IF Timec 1 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 4 0 5 0 ENDIF ENDIF EVALUATE Timei Timef ENDWHILE assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 0 9539985 Export and access the database database DATABASE ISOT DATABASE STEP UP fuel STEP UP MIXTURES STEP AT 1 STEP UP CALCULATIONS STEP AT 5 STEP UP MAC RES assertS ISOT NWTO 1 9 724794E 00 assertS ISOT NWTO 2 2 582013E 01 ISOT DELETE ISOT ISOT DATABASE STEP UP moderator STEP UP MIXTURES STEP AT 1 STEP UP CALCULATIONS STEP AT 1 STEP UP MAC RES assertS ISOT NWTO 1 9 327801E 02 assertS ISOT NWTO 2 3 186788E 01 INTLINF INTLINS DELETE INTLINF INTLINS ECHO test TCWUO5 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 6 TCWU06 A CANDU 6 type supercell with control rods This test case treats both the CANDU cell with a cartesian moderator region similar to the cell described in defined Figure 38 and the supercell containing a stainless steel rod which can be either in the inserted or extracted position see Figure 32
74. DEPL MIXS LIB DRAGON MATXS MATXS2 WIMSD4 WIMS 19 keyword to activate the calculation of the CALENDF type mathematical probability ta bles and slowing down correlated weight matrices using the bin type cross section data as input l keyword to activate the calculation of a DRAGLIB library using the temperature interpo lated cross section data as input The bin type cross section data is processed keyword to force the calculation of the embedded macrolib By default the embedded macrolib is computed except if one of the key words SKIP INTR SUBG PT or NEWL is used keyword to specify the input of additional cross sections to be treated by DRAGON These cross sections are not needed to solve the transport equation but are recognized by the EDI and utility operators number of types of additional cross sections character 6 name of an additional cross section type This name also corresponds to vectorial reactions in a MATXS and MATXS2 format library For example NWTO NWT1 Po P library weight functions NTOTO NTOT1 P P neutron total cross sections NELAS Neutron elastic scattering cross sections MT 2 NINEL Neutron inelastic scattering cross sections MT 4 NG Neutron radiative capture cross sections MT 102 NFTOT Total fission cross sections MT 18 NUDEL Number of delayed secondary neutrons Nu D MT 455 NFSLO r slow fission cross section NHEAT Heat production cross section CHIS CHID
75. EDI MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 1 1 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 7 8 910 910 9 10 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 15 16 15 16 15 16 17 18 17 18 17 18 17 18 19 20 19 20 19 20 PWRTRK DELETE PWRTRK ECHO test TCMO2 completed END QUIT LIST IGE 294 194 6 4 3 TCM03 Watanabe and Maynard problem with a void region A scattering g o region E S 2 00 mn 3 G gt g O N N FO 125cm 5 00 cm 10 00 cm Figure 31 Geometry for test case TCM03 This test case is a one group problem with a central void region This benchmark was first proposed by Watanabe and Maynard Akroyd and Riyait used it to analyze the performance of various codes 24 2 53 Input data for test case TCM03 x2m a TEST CASE TCM03 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM CARTESIAN 3 X 3 ASSEMBLY REF Akroyd and Riyait Ann Nucl Energy 16 1 1989 R Roy et al Advances in Mathematics Computation and Reactor Physics April 28 May 2 1991 Pittsburgh R Roy Ann Nucl Energy 18 511 1991 XK XA XA XA XA XX XX X X xXx usa Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used Pasa LINKED_LIST WATA WATO8 WAT16 WAT24 TRACK MACRO SYS FLUX EDITION SEQ_BINARY WATATRK MODULE GEO EXCELT MAC ASM FLU EDI DELETE END IGE 294 PROCEDURE assertV a Macroscopic XS S MACRO MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 3 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 0 2 MIX 2 TOTAL 0 2 MIX 3 TOTAL 0 0 a
76. Figure 15 Numerotation of the sectors in an hexagonal cell 3 3 4 Physical properties of geometry In addition to specifying the mixture associated with each region in the geometry the descPP structure is also used to provide information on the sub geometry required in this geometry For example an optional procedure in DRAGON groups together regions so as to reduce the number of unknowns maxreg in the flux calculation In this way only the merged regions contribute to the cost of the calculation However the following points must be considered 1 All the cells belonging to the same merged region must have the same nuclear properties and dimensions 2 The grouping procedure is based on the approximation that all the regions belonging to the same merged region share the same flux IGE 294 47 TM AM O GAME MAMMA a NN WoO A NN i m Figure 16 Hexagonal geometry with triangular mesh that extends past the hexagonal boundary 3 The merging can also take into account region orientation by a rotation and or transposition before they are merged This procedure facilitates the merging of regions when a DIAG or SYME boundary condition is used The descPP structure has the following contents Table 20 Structure descPP MIX imix i i 1 n REPEAT PLANE iplan imix i i 1 lp SAME iplan1 CROWN imix i i 1 Jc ALL jmix SAME iplan1 UPTO ic ALL mix SAME iplan1 HMIX ihmix
77. France 1969 R Sanchez Quelques sch mas approximatifs dans la r solution par la m thode des probabilit s de collision de l quation int grale du transport deux dimensions CEA N 2165 Commissariat VEnergie Atomique France 1980 A H bert Application of a Dual Variational Formulation to Finite Element Reactor Calculations Ann nucl Energy 20 823 1993 A H bert TRIVAC A Modular Diffusion Code for Fuel Management and Design Applications Nucl J of Canada Vol 1 No 4 325 1987 A H bert The Search for Superconvergence in Spherical Harmonics Approximations Nucl Sci Eng 154 134 2006 A H bert and G Marleau Generalization of the Stamm ler Method for the Self Shielding of Res onant Isotopes in Arbitrary Geometries Nucl Sci Eng 108 230 1991 A H bert Revisiting the Stamm ler Self Shielding Method paper presented at the 25th CNS Annual Conference June 6 9 Toronto 2004 H Saygin and A H bert A New Self Shielding Method Based on a Detailed Cross Section Repre sentation in the Resolved Energy Domain Nucl Sci Eng 122 276 1996 IGE 294 294 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 M Coste Absorption r sonnante des noyaux lourds dans les r seaux h t rogenes I Formalisme du module d autoprotection d APOLLO2 CEA N 2746 Commiss
78. HETE R BUCK Z 5 00993E 04 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 195598 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L Bi HETE Z BUCK R 1 001986E 03 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 195598 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L Bi HETE assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 195598 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX SYS DELETE FLUX SYS k Tracking EXCELT MOSTELCV only update TRACK TRKSPC files since only change is in one material Solution TYPE K B or L Leakage Bi PNL Bi HETE gases TRACK TRKSPC EXCELT TRACK TRKSPC MOSTELCV TITLE TCMO5 ANNULAR GEOMETRY WITH MACROSCOPIC XS VOID SYS ASM MACRO TRACK TRKSPC PIJK FLUX FLU SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 227979 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE K Bi PNL BUCK 1 40181E 03 assertS FLUX K INFINITV 1 1 223228 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B Bi PNL KEFF 1 228007 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 227979 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B Bi PNL assertS FLUX K INFINITV 1 1 223224 EDITION EDI EDITION MACR
79. LIB NMIX 11 CTRA WIMS MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIX 1 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 76690E 2 016H20 6016 2 38345E 2 BNat 71011 2 38103E 5 MIX 2 579 9 016 760167 3 06711E 4 Cr52 752 7 54987E 5 Fed6 2056 1 47624E 4 Zr91 791 4 18621E 2 MIX 3 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 65292E 2 016H20 6016 2 32646E 2 Cr52 752 4 79927E 5 Fe56 2056 4 45845E 5 Ni58 758 1 13521E 4 MoNat 796 4 03755E 6 A127 277 2 35231E 6 Mn55 755 4 15901E 7 BNat 71011 2 32761E 5 Zr91 791 8 92427E 4 MIX 4 933 6 016 760167 4 49355E 2 U235 72235 7 39237E 4 1 U238 78238 2 17285E 2 1 MIX 5 579 9 In115 72115 7 57464E 3 Cd113 72113 2 62493E 3 Ag109 73109 4 49188E 2 IGE 294 231 MIX 6 579 9 Cr52 52 1 52702E 2 Fe56 72056 5 57670E 2 Nid8 758 7 51418E 3 Mn55 DD 8 02943E 4 MIX 7 579 9 H1H20 73001 3 06466E 2 016H20 76016 1 53233E 2 Fe56 720567 5 27485E 5 Cr52 762 2 69769E 5 BNat 71011 1 53077E 5 Zr91 91 1 49580E 2 MIX 8 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 65292E 2 016H20 6016 2 32646E 2 Cr52 762 4 79927E 5 Fe56 2056 4 45845E 5 Ni58 758 1 13521E 4 MoNat 796 4 03755E 6 A127 727 2 35231E 6 Mn55 55 4 15901E 7 BNat 10117 2 32761E 5 Zr91 791 8 92427E 4 MIX 9 579 9 016 760167 2 87335E 4 Cr52 S762 7 07291E 5 Fed6 2056 1 38298E 4 Zr91 2917 3 92175E 2 MIX 10 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 71346E 2 016H20 6016 2 356
80. MICROLIB 4 7 9 15 18 82 84 85 88 91 92 97 107 113 114 125 127 142 144 150 MILI 143 144 milie 56 MIN 178 MINVAL 171 MIX 12 13 15 24 27 28 47 48 53 98 100 302 135 148 149 152 MIX NAMES 48 55 MIXB 108 110 mixbrn 108 110 mixdil 56 mixgr 56 MIXP 108 110 mixpwr 108 110 MIXS 16 17 19 mixs 114 117 MIXTURE 157 160 161 MLIB 135 MOCC 7 257 MODI 137 MODNAME 3 MODULE 3 287 module 3 4 MOSTELA 188 MOSTELC 188 MPX 169 MPX 6 169 MSTR 173 MSTR 173 MULT 137 138 163 MULTICOMPO 5 7 113 114 MXIS 16 17 MXIT 82 83 MV ID 178 N 92 n 74 76 77 79 80 N2N 19 22 148 149 N2NF 19 N3N 19 22 N3NF 19 N4N 19 22 NA 19 23 145 naccel 92 93 NADF 98 102 nadi 79 80 nalbp 10 11 NALP 10 11 NAMALI 24 27 28 NAMDIR 126 127 129 131 NAMDPL 22 23 NAME 178 179 NAME 139 140 143 145 name 287 288 NAME1 162 163 165 170 175 179 NAME2 162 166 170 175 178 179 NAMES 168 171 175 NAMEFIL 16 20 121 122 NAMISO 24 25 28 NAMMIX 48 55 NAMPAR 22 23 NAMPIN 48 54 IGE 294 NAMS 24 25 nangl 63 65 67 69 70 72 nangl_z 63 66 nanis 63 67 155 156 naniso 10 12 16 18 155 180 NBAL 98 102 nbelem 173 nbiso 121 122 nbscat 12 14 nbsl 70 NBSLIN 67 70 nbslin 67 ncpu 178 NCR 8 nd2 122 NDAS 16 20 121 122 ndel 10 12 ndepl 16 20
81. MPI MODULES DRAGON contains two modules that enables MPI capabilities These modules are also available to any code built around the GAN generalized driver provided that it is properly compiled 5 1 The DRVMPI module This module is a utility module related to MPI It is mostly used to know the rank of the node running the current script The calling specifications are NAME DRVMPI Table 99 Structure DRVMPI EDIT iprint WORLD SIZE gt gt ncpu lt lt MY ID gt gt rank lt lt I SETLOOP BO B1 len gt gt beg lt lt gt gt end lt lt ALLREDUCE SUM PROD MAX MIN operand gt gt result lt lt TIME gt gt dTime lt lt BARRIER NAME EDIT iprint WORLD SIZE ncpu MY ID rank SETLOOP BO Bi len beg end ALLREDUCE SUM PROD MAX MIN operand character 12 name of a dummy data structure to be possibly used as NAME2 in the SNDMPI module It can be a linked list or an XSM file kevword used to modifv the print level iprint index used to control the printing of this module The amount of output produced bv this tracking module will varv substantiallv depending on the print level specified kevword used to recover ncpu total number of nodes in the MPI environment kevword used to recover rank rank of the node that is running the script keyword used to partition the set 0 len 1 or 1 len equitably over the nodes The result beg e
82. Nid8 758 6 83337E 3 129 7297 7 79072E 4 C12 720127 1 46552E 4 Mn55 755 1 25431E 3 EDITION TRACK INTLIN SVS FLUX DELETE EDITION TRACK INTLIN SVS FLUX k SUPERCELL CALCULATION Geometry BCO 27 regions 3D Cartesian geometry with rods out BCI 27 regions 3D Cartesian geometry with rods in k BCO GEO CARBD 3 2 2 X REFL X SYME Y REFL Y SYME Z REFL Z SYME CELL M MX MX MX FXY MXY M MX BX MX FXY BXY TURN A A A EF A A A A AF A A i M GEO CAR3D 1 1 1 MIX 3 MESHX 0 0 7 14375 MESHY 0 0 7 14375 MESHZ 8 25500 8 25500 SPLITZ 2 MX GEO M MESHX 7 14375 47 14375 SPLITX 2 MXY GEO MX MESHY 7 14375 47 14375 SPLITY 2 ti BX GEO CARCELY 2 1 MIX 3 3 3 MESHX 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITX 2 MESHY 0 0 7 14375 MESHZ 8 25500 8 25500 SPLITZ 2 RADIUS 0 0 3 5100 3 8100 BXY GEO BX MESHY 7 14375 47 14375 SPLITY 2 i FXY GEO CARCELZ 2 1 MIX 1 2 3 MESHX 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITX 2 MESHY 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITY 2 MESHZ 8 25500 8 25500 SPLITZ 2 RADIUS 0 0 5 16890 6 58750 BCI GEO BCO BX GEO BX MIX 343 BXY GEO BXY MIX 3 4 8 LS Transport calculation EXCEL Flux calculation for keff IGE 294 243 Homogenized properties for rod out k TRACK INTLIN EXCELT BCO EDIT O MAXR 40 TRAK TISO 2 1 0 SYS ASM LIBRARV2 TRACK INTLIN EDIT 0 FLUX FLU SVS LIBRARV2 TRACK TYPE K assertS
83. Physics April 28 May 2 1991 Pittsburgh XK XA XA XX XX XX XX xXx Pula Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used nas LINKED_LIST PWR TRACK MACRO SYS FLUX EDITION SEQ_BINARY PWRTRK MODULE GEO EXCELT MAC ASM FLU EDI END DELETE PROCEDURE assertV sata Macroscopic XS Pa MACRO MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 3 READ INPUT IGE 294 193 MIX i TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 1 1 1 242 FIXE 1 000 MIX 2 TOTAL 0 625 SCAT 1 1 0 355 FIXE 0 000 MIX 3 TOTAL 14 000 SCAT 11 0 000 FIXE 0 000 EE Geometry PWR Cartesian 4X4 Tracking EXCELT pec PWR GEO CAR2D 4 4 X DIAG X REFL Y SYME Y DIAG CELL PFFF FFF FF F F GEO CARCEL 1 RADIUS 0 000 0 450 MIX 2 1 MESHX 0 625 0 625 SPLITX 2 MESHY 0 625 0 625 SPLITY 2 ii Pos GEO F MIX 3 1 SPLITR 3 gt TRACK PWRTRK EXCELT PWR TITLE TCMO2 STANKOVSKI PWR ASSEMBLY MAXR 58 CUT 1 E 4 TRAK TSPC 12 8 0 gt Solution FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM Editing Absorption rates taken from STANKOVSKI cell 1 0 83799 0 00689 cell 2 0 73979 0 03571 cell 3 0 82218 0 03991 cell 4 0 85166 0 04104 cell 5 0 78722 0 03824 cell 6 1 67049 0 08092 cell 7 1 71199 0 08252 cell 8 0 85350 0 04120 cell 9 1 72122 0 08328 cell 10 0 86023 0 04174 NOTE There is a factor 4 0 with the EDI results of DRAGON SYS ASM MACRO TRACK PWRTRK FLUX FLU SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE S assertV FLUX FLUX GROUP 1 REGION 10 5 300486 EDITION
84. ROD1 GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2 GEO ROD1 MIX 7 10 NPIN 6 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 0 0000 ROD3 GEO ROD1 MIX 8 10 NPIN 12 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 0 261799 ROD4 GEO ROD1 MIX 9 10 NPIN 18 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 0 0 F2 GEO CARCEL 5 MESHX 14 2875 14 2875 MESHY 14 2875 14 2875 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 14 00 MIX 123455 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 ROD1 GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2 GEO ROD1 MIX 7 10 NPIN 6 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 0 0000 ROD3 GEO ROD1 MIX 8 10 NPIN 12 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 0 261799 ROD4 GEO ROD1 MIX 9 10 NPIN 18 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 0 0 i F3 GEO CARCEL 5 MESHX 14 2875 14 2875 MESHY 14 2875 14 2875 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 14 00 MIX 123455 CLUSTER RODi ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 IGE 294 ROD1 GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 F4 GEO GEO ROD1 GEO ROD1 GEO ROD1 CARCEL 5 MESHX 14 2875 14 2875 MESHY 14 2875 14 2875 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 MIX 123455 MIX 7 10 MIX 8 10 MIX 9 10 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 ROD1 GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 k GEO ROD1 GEO ROD1 GEO ROD1 MIX 7 10 MIX 8 10 MIX 9 10 Self Shielding calculation NXT Tr
85. Slow delayed fission spectrum F NNF N2NF N3NF v partial fission cross sections MT 19 20 21 and 38 2N N3N N4N n 2n n 3n n 4n cross sections MT 16 17 and 37 NP NA n p and n a transmutation cross sections MT 103 and 107 a By default DRAGON will always attempt to recover the additional cross sections NG NFTOT NHEAT and N2N which are required for the depletion calculations keyword to specify that the isotopic depletion burnup chain is to be read For a given LIB execution only one isotopic depletion chain can be read keyword to specify that the mixture description is to be read For a given LIB execution more than one cross section library can be read keyword to specify the type of library from which the isotopic depletion chain or microscopic cross section is to be read It is optional when preceded by the keyword DEPL in which case the isotopic depletion chain is read from the standard input file keyword to specify that the isotopic depletion chain or the microscopic cross sections are in the DRAGLIB format keyword to specify that the microscopic cross sections are in the MATXS format of NJOY II and NJOY 89 no depletion data available for libraries using this format keyword to specify that the microscopic cross sections are in the MATXS format of NJOY 91 no depletion data available for libraries using this format keyword to specify that the isotopic depletion chain and the microscopic cros
86. Structure descmodule MODULE name with name character 12 symbolic name of a module used in the procedure IGE 294 288 The LCM objects or files must be declared in the calling procedure using directives of the form Table 104 Structure descobject L LINKED LIST XSM_FILE SE ASCII SEQ_BINARY name XSM_FILE SE ASCII SEG BINARY name FILE path with name character 12 symbolic name of a LCM object memory resident or XSM file or of a seguential file used in the procedure FILE keyword used to set a file path path character 72 path name of a XSM or sequential file used in the procedure The FILE directive is useful to select or create a file anywhere in the directory structure of the computer It is also useful to tag a created file and avoid its deletion at end of execution With this user interface the input to a module named MOD with two embedded modules EMB1 and EMB2 will always be of the form list of output LCM objects or files MOD list of input LCM objects or files data input EMB1 data input for EMB1 EMB2 data input for EMB2 Note that the main use of embedded modules is to define gigogne geometries in module GEO The following user s directives are always followed by an application built around the generalized driver e An LCM object is resident in core memory if declared as LINKED_LIST in the input data or mapped in a
87. TOTAL 1 0 SCAT 1 1 0 00 GEOMETRIES ENTERED WITH SYMMETRIES LOYA 2X 2 REGIONS x LOY25 25 X 25 REGIONS LOYA GEO CAR2D 2 2 X REFL X VOID MESHX 0 00 0 52 1 00 Y REFL Y REFL MESHY 0 00 0 52 1 00 MIX 1 2 2 2 H LOV25 GEO LOVA SPLITX 13 12 SPLITV 13 12 SOLUTION FOR LOY25 TRACK LOYATRK EXCELT LOY25 TITLE TCM10 LOYANABE MAYNARD 24X24 MAXR 625 TRAK TSPC 12 100 0 TRACK MCCGT TRACK LOYATRK EDIT 1 lt lt PolarAng gt gt 2 AAC 1 TMT SCR O EPSI 1E 5 MAXI 100 KRYL 30 HDD 0 0 REPEAT IF i 1 THEN MACRO MACRO100 ELSEIF i 2 THEN MACRO MACROOSO ELSEIF i 3 THEN MACRO MACROO10 ELSEIF i 4 THEN MACRO MACROOOS ELSEIF i 5 THEN MACRO MACROOOO ENDIF SYS ASM MACRO TRACK LOYATRK EDIT 2 ARM FLUX FLU MACRO TRACK SYS LOYATRK TYPE S SOLUTION FOR LOY25 FLUX AT X Y 0 50 0 70 AND 0 98 SEE TABLE 2 ref p 412 EDITION EDI FLUX MACRO TRACK EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 IGE 294 ooooo Oo O o Q o o Oo O T O O G O O O OGG ooooo ooo TOGOG OGO ODO OGOOGO oe Oo Oo 0 Oo D O O O T oooooOo o ooo o O OO o o O O OOG ee eee o 0 0 0 o o o o Ecce Oo oOo 0 2 oooooOo O O O o ooo o oo0oooo oo0oooo OO O O O oo ooo o OOO o o o o Oo O ooooo O O
88. TRKSPC EDIT O NOLJ CP ASM LIBRARY DISCR TRKSPC CALC FLU CALC CP LIBRARY DISCR TYPE K assertS CALC K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8307597 OUT EDI OUT LIBRARY DISCR CALC EDIT 1 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 4 0 STAT ALL REFE 1 DISCR TRKSPC CP DELETE DISCR TRKSPC CP ECHO test TCWU01 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 2 TCWU02 A 17 x 17 PWR type assembly This test case represents a production calculation of a normal PWR assembly with cell grouping MERGE and TURN options Its configuration is shown in Figure 35 Input data for test case TCWU02 x2m TEST CASE TCWU02 17 X 17 PWR ASSEMBLY WITHOUT POISON WIMSD4 69 GROUPS LIBRARY FILE iaea FROM WLUP XXX XX xXx REF none IGE 294 5 Pe li o 3 5 O empty cell 3 O boundary cell a a 1 26472 cm 1 31472 cm g a 2 5 4 5 fuel cell S corner cell ki 1 26472 cm 1 31472 cm e e a generating cell number rient ti n b merged cell number i l Q Figure 35 Geometry for test case TCWUO2 x Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used k LINKED LIST ASSMB DISCR LIBRARY CP CALC OUT DATABASE ISOT SPHGEOM MTRACK SEQ_ASCII res MODULE LIB GEO SYBILT BIVACT SHI ASM FLU EDI COMPO SPH DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts fotos Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 ke a LIBRARV LIB NMIX 8 CTRA WIMS 226 IGE 294 MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIX 1 579 9 H1H20
89. The default value is maxcur max 18 4x maxreg for the SYBILT module keyword to specify the maximum amount of memory required to store the integration lines An insufficiently large value can lead to an execution failure core dump the maximum amount of memory required to store the integration lines The default value is maxint 10000 keyword to specify that the program is to be stopped at the end of the geometry calcula tions This option permits the geometry inputs to be checked the number of blocks and interface currents to be calculated and a conservative estimate of the memory required for storing the tracks to be made for mixed geometries keyword to specify the one dimensional integration parameters number of basis points for the angular integration of the blocks in a one dimensional geometry This parameter is not used for CAR1D geometries If a Gauss Legendre or Gauss Jacobi quadrature is used the values of iqual allowed are 1 to 20 24 28 32 or 64 The default value is iqual 5 keyword to specify the two dimensional integration parameters number of basis points for the angular integration of the blocks in a two dimensional geometry appearing during assembly calculations If a Gauss Legendre or Gauss Jacobi formula is used the values allowed for igua2 are 1 to 20 24 28 32 or 64 The default value is iqua2 3 and represents the number of angles in 0 7 4 for Cartesian geometries and 0 7 6 for hexagonal geometries
90. ZZZ array giving the Z limits cm of the regions making up the geometry These values must be given in order from Z to Z IGE 294 SPLITZ ispltz RADIUS ELF OFFCENTER disxyz SPLITR ispltr SECT isect jsect SIDE sideh hexmsh SPLITH isplth 42 kevword to specifv that a mesh splitting of the geometrv along the Z axis is to be performed array giving the number of zones that will be considered for each region along the Z axis By default ispltz 1 keyword to specify the spatial mesh along the radial direction array giving the radial limits cm of the annular regions cylindrical or spherical making up the geometry It is used for the following geometries TUBE TUBEZ SPHERE CARCEL CARCELX CARCELY CARCELZ HEXCEL and HEXCELZ It is important to note that we must have rrr 1 0 0 The other values of rrr in a CARCEL or HEXCEL type geometry are defined as shown in Figure 13 keyword to specify that the concentric annular regions in a CARCEL CARCELX CARCELY CARCELZ TUBE TUBEX TUBEY and TUBEZ geometry can now be displaced with respect to the center of the Cartesian mesh This option will only be treated when the EXCELT NXT and EXCELL modules are used array giving the x disxyz 1 y disxyz 2 and z disxyz 3 displacement cm of the concentric annular regions with respect to the center of the Cartesian mesh keyword to specify that a mesh splitting of the geometry alo
91. a read only MICROLIB that is copied in MICNAM FLUNAM character 12 name of a read only FLUXUNK at save point xts This information is used for in core depletion cases This information is not required for out of core depletion cases Otherwise it is mandatory TRKNAM character 12 name of a read only TRACKING constructed for the depleting geometry and consistent with object FLUNAM POWNAM character 12 name of a read only POWER object generated by DONJON at save point xts This information is used for micro depletion cases descevo structure containing the input data to this module see Section 3 10 1 For the in core depletion cases the tracking TRACKING data structure on which FLUNAM is based is automatically recovered in read only mode from the generalized driver dependencies 3 10 1 Data input for module EVO Table 50 Structure descevo EDIT iprint continued on next page IGE 294 108 Structure descevo continued from last page SAVE xts S DAY YEAR FLUX flux POWR fpower W CC apower NOSA EPS1 valeps1 EPS2 valeps2 EXPM valexp SATOFF H1 valh1 RUNG KAPS TIXS TDXS NOEX EXTR NOGL GLOB NSAT SAT NODI DIRA FLUX_FLUX FLUX MAC FLUX POW CHAIN PIFI DEPL xti xtf dxt S DAY YEAR COOL FLUX flux POWR fpower W CC apower KEEP SET xtr S DAY YEAR MIXB mixbrn MIXP mixpwr
92. a transport correction provided on the library Such information is available in WIMSD4 and WIMS AECL libraries This is the new recom mended option with WIMS type libraries This option has no effect on libraries that does not contain transport correction information keyword to specify that a WIMS type transport correction based on the P scattering cross sections is to be set This correction assumes that the micro reversibility principle is valid only for groups energies less than 4 0 eV For the remaining groups a 1 E current spectrum is considered in the evaluation of the transport correction This type of correction uses Pi scattering information present on the library A leakage correction is applied to the total and P within group scattering cross sections No transport correction is applied in this case keyword to specify the maximum level of anisotropy for the scattering cross sections number of Legendre orders for the representation of the scattering cross sections Isotropic scattering is represented by naniso 1 while naniso 2 represents linearly anisotropic scat tering Generally the linearly anisotropic P scattering contributions are taken into ac count via the transport correction see CTRA keyword in the transport calculation For Bi or P leakage calculations the linearly anisotropic scattering cross sections are taken into account explicitly The default value is naniso 2 keyword to specify the production of adjoint
93. an integer greater than O indicating the depletion step index keyword to specify that the contribution of some isotopes to the macroscopic cross sections associated with each homogenized mixture should be extracted before being stored on the reactor database The microscopic cross sections and concentrations associated with these isotopes should also be generated and stored on the reactor database keyword to specify that all the isotopes processed using the MICR option of the EDI module should be extracted from the macroscopic cross sections associated with each homogenized mixture character 12 name under which a given set of extracted isotope will be stored on the reactor database array of character 8 name of isotopes to be extracted from the macroscopic cross section associated with each homogenized mixture keyword to specify the prefix for the name of the sub directory where the information corresponding to a single homogenized region will be stored The fixed default is NDIR COMPO character 8 prefix for the name of the sub directory The complete name is con structed by the concatenation of NDIR with a four digit integer value keyword to specify that global parameters are used to index the database default option A global parameter is defined over the complete calculation domain keyword to specify that local parameters are used to index the database A local parameter is defined over each homogenization mixture
94. are then given in the following order 1 radially outward I 1 Ir for plane k 2 Ir 1 for the mixture outside the annular regions but inside the hexagonal region on plane k 3 from surface Z to surface Z k 1 Iz ee B E ee ee o F ee H o e Figure 17 Description of the various rotations allowed for Cartesian geometries OO O70 10 OS Figure 18 Description of the various rotation allowed for hexagonal geometries utda Figure 19 Typical cluster geometry IGE 294 53 The inputs associated with this structure have the following meaning MIX keyword to specify the isotopic mixture number or sub geometry associated with each region inside the geometry When diagonal symmetries are considered only the mixture associated with regions inside the symmetrized geometry need to be specified When a sub geometry is located inside symmetrized geometry but outside the calculation region it must be declared virtual for example the corners of a nuclear reactor imix array of ny lt N integers or character variables associated with each region An integer is a mixture number associated with a region imix lt maxmix see Sections 3 1 and 3 2 If imix 0 the corresponding volume is replaced by a void region If imix is a character variable it is replaced by the corresponding sub geometry or generating cell These values must be specified in the following order for most geometries radially from the inside out from
95. bal The DRVMPI module se s 0 000 660 Aa Ee ee a a 178 5 2 The SNDMEE module lt lt du a ia e a DARA sa we E a A 179 6 EXAMPLES 224 siewi bh bees ab k k eee Ba g ol ee Eb rs 180 IGE 294 vii 6 1 Scattering Gross BECHIONS aa GO a BARS eR 180 6 2 Geometries er b k k ani e b a ee a ae Be wee 180 6 3 MATXS7A microscopic cross section examples o 186 62 1 TCXA01 The Mosteller benchmark 186 6 4 Macroscopic cross sections examples 6 00000 190 6 4 1 TCMO1 Annular region lt lt 190 6 4 2 TCM02 The Stankovski test case LL aoa 191 6 4 3 TCM03 Watanabe and Maynard problem with a void region 193 6 4 4 TCM04 Adjuster rod in a CANDU type supercell 198 6 4 5 TCM05 Comparison of leakage models 201 6 4 6 TCM06 Buckling search without fission source 205 6 4 7 TCM07 Test of boundary conditions 207 6 4 8 TCM08 Fixed source problem with fission 208 6 4 9 TCM09 Solution of a 2 D fission source problem using MCCGT 210 6 4 10 TCM10 Solution of a 2 D fixed source problem using MCCGT 213 6 4 11 TCM11 Comparison of CP and MoC solutions 215 6 4 12 TCM12 Solution of a 3 D problem using the MCU module 219 6 4 13 TCM13 Hexagonal assembly with hexagonal cells containing clusters 220 6 5 WIMSD4 microsco
96. be performed keyword to specify that a constant flux burnup calculation is to be performed flux expressed in em 257 kevword to specifv that a constant fuel power depletion calculation is to be performed The energy released outside the fuel e g by n y reactions is not taken into account in the flux normalization unless the GLOB option is set fuel power expressed in KW Kg MW tonne keyword to specify that a constant assembly power depletion calculation is to be per formed The energy released outside the fuel e g by n y reactions is always taken into account in the flux normalization assembly power density expressed in W cm Power per unit assembly volume keyword to specify that the flux is used without been normalized This option is useful in cases where the flux was already normalized before the call to EVO module keyword to specify the tolerance used in the algorithm for the solution of the depletion equations the tolerance used in the algorithm for the solution of the depletion equations The default value is valeps1 1 0 x 1075 keyword to specify the tolerance used in the search algorithm for a final fixed power used if the POWR or W CC option is activated the tolerance used in the search algorithm for a final fixed power The default value is valeps2 1 0 x 107 keyword to specify the selection criterion for non fissile isotopes that are at saturation the isotopes for which A x xtf
97. degcexeel rosarios ke AME a AAA 63 structure WATS yea cead diii g ER ORES aa ea ee ee es 67 Structure descritas ER EEE RE aaa 67 Structure MOCCGE J Lk bbe eh ERD A a ee ee dae bees 71 Structure desemiccg La ee ee EE Ree eed ae 71 Since SNE 3 25 ps E oe ER NER ba ee Se 74 Structure desesn o e ea aa Be RE eee A a ee eee 74 Structure BIVACGIES ir e a a A A 76 Structure desebiva cc aa 0 0 68 666 pee eG A 76 Structure CTRIVAT L e cidad ka et K LL EE eee es 79 Structure dese TREVAC 6 6054 44464 bb eee oe A wes 79 Sucre SHE edad ER ke EEE Aa 82 structure deseshi lt na salb ibet i a ma a es 82 Structire USSI pi ok ne be sew a a Deed ae ee ead Be Mee 84 Structure deseuss 44 5 ne we a bw a Pe e 85 Structure ASM o ece ea edd A eR oe ee eR E 88 Structure deseasi ca ee Ree Ra PE ee hee eh Gee RE RE ai 88 Structure PLUS o s aoco 48 000 K pee ba SEEM b ERR a EO 91 Structure desctlaf LL ki L ERS k SELL LASS 92 Structure deseleak 4 k 440502 BN A e Re ERS See ee 94 Structure IDE 2 os mazz L L R A L A 97 Structure deseedi ks bento A E da k L 97 Strii ture EVOP 5 5 imb i TA a a A Be OES 107 Structure AE866VA o oee a ie a LA A a k a Oe we 107 Sittichure SPE gs d ae Sere O a ee lhe k 113 Structure desesph c eio ad i a ee abba Pee Pe a bee 114 Structure CPCs oc bss dade eee eee pee EN HERR RG EH dG ee wee 118 IGE 294 X Siructure o Lela f casar AAA Oe ae ee a i 119 structure
98. effects 1 use the Nordheim PIC distributed self shielding modell 2 use both Nordheim PIC distributed self shielding model and Riemann integration methodP 1 By default ilev 0 keyword to specify the use of complete collision probabilities in the self shielding cal culations of SHI This is the default option for EXCELT and SYBILT trackings This option is not available for MCCGT trackings keyword to specify the use of iterative flux techniques in the self shielding calculations of SHI This is the default option for MCCGT trackings IGE 294 84 3 6 The USS module The universal self shielding module in DRAGON called USS allows the correction of the microscopic cross sections to take into account the self shielding effects related to the resonant isotopes These isotopes are identified as such by the inrs parameter as defined in Section 3 2 The universal self shielding module is based on the following models e The Livolant Jeanpierre flux factorization and approximations are used to uncouple the self shielding treatment from the main flux calculation e The resonant cross sections are represented using probability tables computed in the LIB module the keyword SUBG or PTSL must be used Two approaches can be used to compute the probability tables 1 Physical probability tables can be computed using a RMS approach similar to the one used in Wims 7 and Helios In this case the slowing down operator of
99. eight possible orientations are shown in Figure 17 while for hexagonal geometries the permitted orientations are shown in Figure 18 For 3 D cells the same letters can be used to describe the rotation in the X Y plane However an additional sign can be glued to the 2 D rotation identifier to indicate reflection of the cell along the Z axis A to L keyword to specify that pin cylindrical sub geometry will be inserted in the geometry see Figure 19 array of cylindrical sub geometry character 12 name representing a pin This sub geometry must be of type TUBE TUBEX TUBEY or TUBEZ IGE 294 55 MIX NAMES keyword to specify character names to material mixtures By default the material mixtures are not named NAMMIX array of character 12 names for the material mixtures IGE 294 56 3 3 5 Double heterogeneity The structure descDH provides the possibility to define a stochastic mixture of cylindrical or spher ical micro structures that can be distributed inside composite mixtures of the current macro geometry A composite mixture is represented by a material mixture index with a value greater than maxmix the maximum number of real mixtures Each micro structure can be composed of many micro volumes l 7 Table 21 Structure descDH BIHET TUBE SPHE nmistr nmilg ns i i 1 nmistr rs i j j 1 ns i 1 i 1 nmistr milie i i 1 nmilg mixdil i i 1 nmilg fract i j j 1l nmistr mixgr i j k k 1 ns j
100. equivalence scheme which modifies the self shielded averaged neutron fluxes in heterogeneous geometries The default option is to perform SPH equivalence keyword to activate the transport correction option for self shielding calculations see CTRA in Sections 3 1 and 3 2 This is the default option keyword to deactivate the transport correction option for self shielding calculations see CTRA in Sections 3 1 and 3 2 keyword to specify the use of complete collision probabilities in the subgroup and SPH equivalence calculations of USS This is the default option for EXCELT and SYBILT trackings This option is not available for MCCGT trackings keyword to specify the use of iterative flux techniques in the subgroup and SPH equiv alence calculations of USS This is the default option for MCCGT trackings keyword to set the maximum number of fixed point iterations for the ST scattering source convergence the maximum number of ST iterations The default is imax 50 A non iterative response matrix approach is available with the subgroup projection method SPM by setting imax 0 keyword to activate the simplified self shielding approximation in which a single self shielded isotope is shared by many resonant mixtures keyword to specify a set of isotopes and mixtures that will be self shielded together All the self shielded isotopes in this group will share the same 4 digit suffix character 4 suffix for the isotope names in
101. greater or equal to 2 The burnup B corresponding to an elapsed time At is therefore given as B fourmup At 3 26 where B is expressed in MWday tonne 1 and At is expressed in day The unit of the reaction rates depends on the normalization applied to the flux This normalization takes place after the flux calculation using the EVO module Here is an example INTEGER istep 1 REAL Tend 0 0 REAL Fuelpwr 38 4 expressed in MW tonne BURN MICROLIB EVO MICROLIB FLUX TRACKN EDIT 0 SAVE lt lt Tend gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Fuelpwr gt gt where BURN is the burnup object MICROLIB is the Microlib used to compute the flux FLUX is the flux object and TRACKN is the tracking object used to compute the flux After this call the record FLUX NORM in BURN contains a unique real number equal to the flux normalization factor If MICROLIB is obtained using the LIB module the DEPL keyword with following data must be set see Section 3 2 1 Unfortunately the normalization factor is kept aside and is not applied to the flux present in object FLUX In fact only the advanced post processing modules COMPO see Section 3 14 and SAP see Section 3 19 are making use of this normalization factor IGE 294 112 3 11 The SPH module The superhomog n isation SPH equivalence technique is based on the calculation of a set of equiv alence factors Um k Mm Cm and k My where Cm and My is a macro region and a coarse
102. i Tn B X 3 Pg 2 Ysi gh B 3 10 where iJ g B is the multigroup fundamental current Nein diag Usiigen Vi and where X I Py Sages Po 3 11 HETE kevword used to perform a T IBERE tvpe leakage calculation taking into account anisotropic streaming effects This method introduces an heterogeneous buckling contribution as a group dependent correction to the source term 2 The heterogeneous buckling con tribution is introduced in the B model using directional collision probabilities PIJK method It is then necessary to set the keyword PIJK in module ASM see Section 3 7 1 IGE 294 G BUCK valb2 valbr2 valbz2 valbx2 valby2 KEFF valk IDEM 96 keyword used to specify that the buckling search will assume all directional buckling to be identical floating default option keyword used to specify that a radial buckling search will be considered assuming an imposed z direction buckling keyword used to specify that a z direction buckling search will be considered assuming an imposed x direction and y direction buckling keyword used to specify that a x direction buckling search will be considered assuming an imposed y direction and z direction buckling keyword used to specify that a y direction buckling search will be considered assuming an imposed x direction and z direction buckling keyword used to specify the initial for a buckling eigenvalue problem or fixed for a effective mul
103. i i 1 N REPEAT CELL HCELL i i 1 N MERGE imerge i i 1 N TURN HTURN i i 1 N continued on next page IGE 294 48 Structure descPP continued from last page CLUSTER NAMPIN i i 1 N MIX NAMES NAMMIX i i 1 maxmix Here N is the number of pin types in the cluster In addition to the real physical mixture imix present in a given region of space and specified by the keyword MIX a virtual mixture ihmix can also be provided using the keyword HMIX This mixture can be used to identify the regions that will be combined in the EDI module to create homogenized region ihmix see Section 3 9 Here N is computed in a way similar to Lzones namely e SPHERE geometry N lr The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 radially outward l 1 Ir e TUBE geometry N Ir x lex ly The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 radially outward 1 1 Ir and such that imix is arbitrary not used if radial region 1 does not intersect Cartesian region i 7 2 from surface X to surface X i 1 lz for each j 3 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly e TUBEX geometry Ne lr x ly x lz x lx The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 radially outward 1 1 lr and such that imix is arbitrary not used if radial region 1 does not intersect Cartesian region j k i 2 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly for each k and i 3 from
104. illustrate the use of the various geometries presented in Section 3 3 lets us consider a few examples that can be treated by DRAGON e 1 D Slab geometry see Figure 23 This geometry can be analyzed using a SYBILT tracking modules PLATE GEO CAR1D 6 X VOID X ALBE 1 2 MESHX 0 0 0 1 0 3 0 5 0 6 0 8 1 0 SPLITX 2 2 2 1 2 1 MIX 1 2 3 4 5 6 IGE 294 181 gt X Figure 23 Slab geometry with mesh splitting Q Figure 24 Two dimensional Cartesian assemblv containing micro structures e 2 D Cartesian geometry containing micro structures see figure Figure 24 This geometry can be analyzed only using SYBILT tracking modules CARNSG GEO CAR2D 3 3 X DIAG X REFL Y SYME Y DIAG MIX C1 Ci C2 C3 C2 c3 BIHET SPHE NG 2 NMILG 2 SPHERICAL MICRO STRUCTURE x NS 33 M S 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 M S 2 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 5 COMPOSITE MIXTURES 4 5 MIXTURES SURROUNDING M S 1 1 COMPOSITE MIXTURE 4 FRACT 0 4 0 0 REAL MIXTURE CONTENT M S 1 3 1 3 COMPOSITE MIXTURE 5 FRACT 0 2 0 1 REAL MIXTURE CONTENT M S 1 1 2 1 REAL MIXTURE CONTENT M S 2 2 3 1 i C1 GEO CAR2D 1 1 HOMOGENEOUS CELL WITH M S MESHX 0 0 1 45 MESHY 0 0 1 45 MIX 4 i C2 GEO C1 HOMOGENEOUS CELL WITHOUT M S MIX 1 C3 GEO CARCEL 2 CELL WITH M S TUBE IGE 294 182 MESHX 0 0 1 45 MESHY 0 0 1 45 RADIUS 0 0 0 6 0 7 MX 521
105. in SAPNAM or CPONAM index of the elementary calculation keyword to force the production of a LCM object of the same type as the RHS keyword to force the production of a macrolib at LHS keyword to force the production of a microlib at LHS keyword to specify the SPH factors are all set to 1 0 meaning no correction This keyword is useful to get rid of a SPH correction which have been set previously By default the PN or SN option is activated keyword to specify that the SPH factors are read from input if nmerge ngcond and sph are set or recovered from a RHS object otherwise number of regions number of energy groups initial value of each SPH factor in each mixture inner loop and each group outer loop keyword to specify that the SPH factors are uniform over the complete macro geometry This option is generally used with a complete homogenization of the reference geom etry obtained using option MERG COMP In this case the neutron flux transport or diffusion will be uniform which allows the SPH factors to be obtained one per macro group using a non iterative strategy For a given macro group the SPH factor will be equal to the ratio between the average flux of the region and the surface flux if the SELE option is used otherwise the SPH factor are all set equal to 1 0 no correc tion The SELE option allows an SPH factor equal to the inverse of the discontinuity factor to be calculated keyword to specify that the alb
106. in module DUO 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value ENERGY keyword used to perform a perturbation analysis as a function of the energy group indices ISOTOPE keyword used to perform a perturbation analysis as a function of the isotopes present in the geometry MIXTURE keyword used to perform a perturbation analysis as a function of the mixtures indices REAC keyword used to perform a perturbation analysis for specific nuclear reactions IGE 294 reac PICK deltaRho ENDREAC 3 25 2 Theory 158 character 8 name of a nuclear reaction oy The reactivity effect is computed using the formula pi Sy Pa SA PY Pi Pz da 3 34 where S is a matrix containing the the contributions of the reaction o The other symbols are defined in Sect 3 25 2 Examples of reaction names are NTOTO total cross section NG radiative capture cross section N2N n 2n cross section NFTOT fission cross section NELAS elastic scattering cross section SCATOO scattering matrix NUSIGF dyadic product of the fission spectrum times v fission cross section LEAK neutron leakage The balance relation for the global reactivity effect is O AnustcF dA Anroro OAscatoo Ke OALEaK 3 35 eff where Keg is the effective multiplication factor keyword used to recover the delta rho discrepancy for reaction reac in a CLE 2000 variable character 12 CLE 2000 variable name in which the ex
107. is used to perform an explicit sensitivity analysis of keff to nuclear data represented by the cross sections The calculations are performed using adjoint based first order linear perturbation theory and require the adjoint flux see Section 3 8 The sensitivity coefficients are stored in a SDF text file that is compatible with the JAVAPENO module of SCALE this compatibility is achieved via a slight modification of the rdragon execution script An example of modification is presented in the file sens save from the non regression testcase sens x2m The calling specifications are Table 80 Structure SENS SENS sdf SENS FLUNAM ADJ_FLUNAM TRKNAM MACRO SENS data where SENS sdf character 12 name of a SDF file object that is created by SENS FLUNAM character 12 name of the required FLUX type L_FLUX object open in read only mode ADJ FLUNAM character 12 name of the required ADJOINT FLUX type L_FLUX object open in read only mode TRKNAM character 12 name of the required TRACKING type L_TRACK object open in read only mode MACRO character 12 name of the required MACROLIB type L MACROLIB object open in read only mode SENS_data input data structure containing specific data see Section 3 24 1 3 24 1 Data input for module SENS Table 81 Structure SENS data LEDIT iprint ANIS nanis where EDIT keyword used to set iprint iprint index used to control the printing in module SENS 0 f
108. kak eA a i ed ee 281 7 THE DRAGON PACKAGE k ik a K b LA b a a OOH ee 283 8 THE GAN GENERALIZED DRIVER L 287 9 THE CLE 2000 CONTROL LANGUAGE co o e 289 Relerences a ee we A yade A ee ae ew he aw al ee B bo 291 WAG Salar Ah ss e a a a ase eRe Res ae ee Ss a a we a we we DE aaa 296 IGE 294 OANaw kwnr List of Figures Hexagonal geometry with triangular mesh containing 4 concentric hexagon Diagonal boundary conditions in Cartesian geometry ks Various boundary conditions in Cartesian geometry s 2 2 ee ee Translation rotation boundary conditions in Cartesian geometry Representing a checkerboard in Cartesian geometry 1 0 00 000000004 Hexagonal geometries of type S30 and SA60 02 2002000 ee eee Hexagonal geometries of type SB60 and S90 LL 000 Hexagonal geometries of type R120 and R180 o e 0020000 Hexagonal geometry of type SA180 L LL 0000 Hexagonal geometry of type SB180 000000 Hexagonal geometry of type COMPLETE o e 0000000 Cylindrical correction in Cartesian geometry lt a Definition of the radii in a CARCEL or HEXCEL type geometry Numerotation of the sectors in a Cartesian cell 00000 Numerotation of the sectors in an hexagonal cell is Hexagonal geometry with triangular mesh that extends past the hexagonal boundary Description of the various rotations allowed for Cartesian geometries
109. mixture on the GOXS file is not included in the MACROLIB In the cases where imat is absent all the mixtures on the GOXS file are available in a DRAGON execution They are numbered consecutively starting at 1 or from the last number reached during a previous execution of the MAC module GOXSRN character 7 name of the GOXS file to be read DELE keyword to specify that the GOXS file is deleted after being read Revision 3 03 only INPUT keyword to specify that mixture cross sections will be read on the input stream descxs structure describing the format used for reading the mixture cross sections from the input stream see Section 3 1 2 STEP keyword used to create a perturbation directory istep the index of the perturbation directory NORM keyword to specify that the macroscopic scattering cross sections and the fission spec trum have to be normalized This option is available even if the mixture cross sections were not read by the MAC module 3 1 2 Macroscopic cross section definition Table 4 Structure descxs MIX matnum NTOTO TOTAL xssigt jg jg 1 ngroup NTOT1 xssigl jg jg 1 ngroup TRANC xsstra jg jg 1 ngroup NUSIGF xssigf jf jg jg 1 ngroup jf 1 nifiss CHI xschi jf jg jg 1 ngroup jf 1 nifiss FIXE xsfixe jg jg 1 ngroup DIFF diff jg j 1 ngroup DIFFX xdiffx jg jg 1 ngroup DIFFY xdiffy jg jg 1 ngroup DIFFZ xdiffz jg jg 1 ngroup NUSIGD
110. ou e15 ou 216 IGE 294 k MACRO MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 19 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 11 1 242 FIXE MIX 2 TOTAL 0 625 SCAT 11 0 355 FIXE MIX 3 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 11 1 242 FIXE MIX 4 TOTAL 0 625 SCAT 1 1 0 355 FIXE MIX 5 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 11 1 242 FIXE MIX 6 TOTAL 0 625 SCAT 11 0 355 FIXE MIX 7 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 11 1 242 FIXE MIX 8 TOTAL 0 625 SCAT 11 0 355 FIXE MIX 9 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 1 1 1 242 FIXE MIX 10 TOTAL 14 000 SCAT 11 0 000 FIXE MIX 11 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 1 1 1 242 FIXE MIX 12 TOTAL 0 625 SCAT 11 0 355 FIXE MIX 13 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 1 1 1 242 FIXE MIX 14 TOTAL 0 625 SCAT 11 0 355 FIXE MIX 15 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 11 1 242 FIXE MIX 16 TOTAL 0 625 SCAT 11 0 355 FIXE MIX 17 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 11 1 242 FIXE MIX 18 TOTAL 0 625 SCAT 11 0 355 FIXE MIX 19 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 11 1 242 FIXE Puri Geometry PWR Cartesian 7x7 Tracking EXCELT goon PWR GEO CAR2D 4 4 X DIAG X REFL Y SYME Y DIAG CELL WA F2 F4 F6 F8 P10 F12 F14 F16 F18 WA GEO CAR2D 1 1 MESHX 0 625 0 625 SPLITX lt lt Nsplit gt gt MESHY 0 625 0 625 SPLITY lt lt Nsplit gt gt MIX 1 F2 GEO CARCEL 1 MESHX 0 625 0 625 SPLITX lt lt Nsplit gt gt MESHY 0 625 0 625 SPLITY lt lt Nsplit gt gt RADIUS 0 000 0 450 MIX 2 3 ti F4 GEO F2 MIX 4 5 H F6 GEO F2 MIX 6 7 i F8 GEO F2 MIX 8 9 PIO GEO F2 MIX 10 11 SPLITR 3 F12 GEO F2 MIX 12 13 F14 GEO F2 MIX 14 15 gt
111. powerref 119 powerup 119 POWNAM 107 110 POWR 108 111 126 127 PREFIX 139 140 PRIM 76 79 PRIX 63 64 PRIY 63 64 PRIZ 63 65 67 70 PROCEL 57 PROD 98 102 103 178 PROF 145 PROM 16 18 PRTV 79 80 PSGEO 160 PSP 160 PSP 5 70 148 160 PSPC 63 64 67 68 PT 16 19 24 26 PTMC 16 18 24 26 PTSL 16 17 19 24 26 84 PUIS 143 144 PUR 121 122 purity 121 122 puritydown 119 120 purityref 119 120 PUT 173 PWR 119 GRN 67 70 QUA1 60 61 QUA2 60 61 GUAB 60 62 64 67 68 74 75 GUAD 74 75 IGE 294 R 94 96 R 33 R120 33 34 R180 33 34 RADIUS 41 42 RADS 33 35 rank 178 RATE 98 101 151 152 REAC 98 100 143 145 157 reac 157 158 reaction 22 23 READ 10 12 REAL 126 127 real 169 REBA 92 93 rec 173 recname 173 recnamel 173 recname2 173 RECOVER 167 RECOVER 6 167 RECT 60 62 REFE 98 101 REFGEO 97 99 REFL 32 33 REFPIJ 97 REGI 85 86 98 99 148 149 152 REGION 160 161 REL 163 164 relden 27 28 relvol 24 26 REMIX 98 99 REND 59 68 RENM 59 RENO 59 REPEAT 47 53 RES 98 100 REST 143 145 result 178 179 RGB 160 161 RHOC 119 120 RHOM 119 120 RHS 94 RMS 153 154 RMS_VAL 153 154 RNAME 119 RNANE 119 ROOT 163 ROT 60 62 ROTH 60 62 RPIN 41 43 rpin 58 rpins 41 43 rrad 33 35 rRoot 175 305 rrr 41 42 rs 56 RTHETA 29 31 RUNG 108 109 S 92 108
112. surface X to surface X 1 2 3 from surface Y to surface Y 4 from surface Z to surface Z In the cases where a CARCELX and a TUBEX geometry are defined then we will use 1 radially from the inside out Ir 1 mixtures for CARCELX and Ir for TUBEX 2 from surface Y to surface Y 3 from surface Z to surface Z 4 from surface X to surface X Finally for a CARCELY and TUBEY geometry are defined the following order is considered 1 radially from the inside out Ir 1 mixtures for CARCELY and Ir for TUBEY 2 from surface Z to surface Z 3 from surface X to surface X 4 from surface Y to surface Y In the cases where a sectorized cell geometry is defined imix must be defined in each sector following the order shown in Figure 14 and 15 Also note that imix is not affected by the values of the mesh splitting indices ispltx isplty ispltz or ispltr REPEAT keyword to specify the previous list of mixtures will be repeated This is valid only when N nz is an integer If this keyword is absent and nz lt Ni then the missing mixtures will be replaced with void imix i 0 PLANE keyword to attribute mixture numbers to each volume inside a single 2 D plane This option is valid only for 3 D geometries Cartesian or hexagonal iplan plane number for which material mixture are input SAME keyword to attribute the same material mixture numbers of the iplan1 plane to the iplan plane In hexagonal geometry it c
113. surface Z to surface Z k 1 lz for each i 4 from surface X to surface X i 1 Iz e TUBEY geometry N Ir x lz x lxx ly The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 radially outward 1 1 Ir and such that imix is arbitrary not used if radial region 1 does not intersect Cartesian region k j 2 from surface Z to surface Z k 1 lz for each i and j 3 from surface X to surface X i 1 lz for each j 4 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly IGE 294 49 e TUBEZ geometry Ni lr x lax ly x lz The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 radially outward 1 1 Ir and such that imix is arbitrary not used if radial region 1 does not intersect Cartesian region i j k 2 from surface X to surface X i 1 lx for each j and k 3 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly for each k 4 from surface Z to surface Z k 1 lz e CAR1D geometry N lx The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 from surface X to surface X i 1 Ia e CAR2D geometry without diagonal symmetry N lz x ly The mixtures or cells are then given in the following order 1 from surface X to surface X i 1 lx for each j 2 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly with diagonal symmetry X and Y lz x la 1 2 The mixtures or cells are then given in the following order N 1 from surface X to surface X i j lx for each j
114. the annular geometry using the SYBILT tracking module allows the geometry named MOSTEL to be discretized by the full CP tracking algorithm A new tracking file sequential binary is created and named TRACKS together with a TRACKINGI structure named DISCR A periodic tracking with 12 angles and 20 0 tracks per cm is considered here The ASM module uses macroscopic cross section data contained in the embedded MACROLIB of LIBRARY and tracking information contained in DISCR and TRACKS in order to compute the re duced and scattering modified collision probability matrices for each of the 69 energy groups We have not used the important capability of DRAGON to use a different tracking to perform self shielding and flux calculations The FLU module uses macroscopic cross section data contained in LIBRARV recovered from the dependency tree and CPs contained in CP in order to compute the neutron flux for each of the 69 energy groups The transport equation is solved for the effective multiplication factor without buckling or leakage model Next the EDI module performs spatial homogenization the cross sections are smeared over the complete cell and coarse energy group condensation The first coarse energy group contains the micro groups 1 to 27 the second coarse energy group contains the remaining micro groups IGE 294 190 6 4 Macroscopic cross sections examples The sample test cases we will consider here use the MAC module t
115. the maximum number of regions for which solutions were obtained iregm array of homogenized region numbers to which are associated the old regions In the editing routines a value of iregm 0 allows the corresponding region to be neglected MIX keyword to specify that the homogenization of the neutron flux will take place over the following mixtures Here we must have nbmix lt maxmix where maxmix is the maximum number of mixtures in the macroscopic cross section library imixm array of homogenized region numbers to which are associated the material mixtures In the editing routines a value of imixm 0 allows the corresponding isotopic mixtures to be neglected For a mixture in this library which is not used in the geometry one should insert a value of 0 for the new region number associated with this mixture By default if MIX is set and imixm is not set imixm ii ii is assumed COMP keyword to specify that the a complete homogenization is to take place COND keyword to specify that a group condensation of the flux is to be performed icond array of increasing energy group limits that will be associated with each of the ngcond condensed groups The final value of icond will automatically be set to ngroup while the values of icond gt ngroup will be droped from the condensation We must have ngcond lt ngroup By default if COND is set and icond is not set all energy groups are condensed together ENDR keyword used to terminate the definition of
116. this case keyword to specify the use of flux volume normalization for the SPH factors default option In each macro group the macro fluxes in macro regions i are normalized using ii 1 Oref bi 615 l i Ome where ye is the averaged volumic flux of the reference calculation and mc is the averaged volumic flux of the macro calculation Using this definition the averaged SPH factor is equal to one keyword to specify the use of Selengut normalization for the SPH factors It is neces sary to know the averaged surfacic flux of the reference calculation Two possibilities exist e We use collision probabilities We define the reference geometry with VOID ex ternal boundary conditions see Section 3 3 2 and to close the region for the collision probability calculations using the ALBS option see Section 3 7 1 e We perform a flux calculation with the current iteration method in Eurydice This option is only available if a SYBILT tracking is used and if keyword ARM is set in module ASM see Section 3 7 1 keyword to specify the use of Selengut normalization for the SPH factors It is neces sary to know the averaged surfacic flux of the reference calculation This value can be obtained by defining a small region near boundary in the reference geometry and by using the ADF FD_B data structure in Section 3 9 1 In each macro group the macro fluxes in macro regions are normalized using l gap Qi 6 2 M Ome where 65
117. to MPI It is possible to send a linked list into an XSM file and vice versa The module is blocked until the message is sent or received The calling specifications are Table 100 Structure SNDMPI INAMEI SNDMPI NAME2 EDIT iprint FROM From TO To ALL ITEM from gt gt to lt lt NAMEI1 character 12 name of the data structure that will be received It can be a linked list or an XSM file NAME2 character 12 name of the data structure that will be sent It can be a linked list or an XSM file Since on the RHS it has to exist even for receiving scripts In this case it is recommanded to create an empty data structure NAME2 by calling the DRVMPI module EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of this module The amount of output produced by this tracking module will vary substantially depending on the print level specified FROM keyword used to set iFrom iFrom rank of the node from which NAME2 has to be read TO keyword used to set iTo iTo rank of the node where NAME1 has to be written ALL keyword to make every node receive NAME2 except the node iFrom ITEM keyword used to send the value from to to either on To or ALL nodes NAME1 and NAME are optional since they will be ignored from value to send Can be an integer a real a double or a logical to variable used to receive from value Must match from type IGE 294 180 6 EXAMPL
118. to perform self shielding calculations using a subgroup method see Sec tion 3 6 A method using physical probability tables cf Wims 7 and Helios and the Ribon extended method are available module which uses the tracking information to generate a multigroup response or collision probability matrix see Section 3 7 module which uses inner iteration approach or collision probability matrix to solve the transport equation for the fluxes see Section 3 8 Various leakage models are available editing module see Section 3 9 An equivalence method based on SPH method is available burnup module see Section 3 10 supermomog n isation SPH module see Section 3 11 The SPH module can also be used to extract a MICROLIB or MACROLIB from a MULTICOMPO or SAPHYB utility to compute number densities for selected isotopes in materials such as UO2 or ThUO see Section 3 13 multi parameter reactor database construction module see Section 3 14 module used to generate a Matlab M file to obtain a graphics representation of the NXT tracking lines see Section 3 15 interface module for transforming a macrolib into a Trimaran Tripoli multigroup file see Section 3 16 cross section perturbation module similar to CHABINT see Section 3 17 burnup dependent mono parameter reactor database construction module see Sec tion 3 18 multi parameter reactor database construction module in SAPHYB format see Sec tion 3 19
119. tracking with isotropic 19 or specular l surface current The NXT module is an extension of the EXCELT module to more complex geometry including assemblies of clusters in two and three dimensions The MCCGT module is an implementation of the open characteristics method of I R Suslov P0 211 These are the transport tracking modules which can be used everywhere in the code where tracking information needs to be generated The SNT module is an implementation of the discrete ordinates or Sy method in 1 D 2 D 3 D geometries The module BIVACT is used to perform a finite element diffusion or SP 1 D 2 D tracking which may be required for diffusion synthetic acceleration DSA or homogenization purposes The final module TRIVAT is used to perform a finite element 1 D 2 D 3 D tracking which may be required for DSA or homogenization purposes l None of these modules can analyzed all of the geometry available in the code DRAGON In general the restrictions that apply to a given tracking module result directly from the approximation associated with this method Moreover in other instances some geometries which would have had the same tracking file generated by two different method such as tube geometry for the SYBILT and EXCELT module have been made available only to one of these tracking module module SYBILT in this case The general information resulting from these tracking is stored in a TRACKING data structure For the E
120. value all character 12 isotope names prefixed by HISOT are modified N2N n 2n cross section The scattering SIGSO0 and SCATOO and total NTOTO N3N n 3n cross section The scattering SIGSO0 and SCATOO and total NTOTO NAN n 4n cross section The scattering SIGSO0 and SCATOO and total NTOTO IGE 294 139 3 18 The CPO module The CPO module is used to generate the reactor cross section database in Version3 format to be used in a full core calculation using DONJON This type of database is only parametrized in burnup or irradiation The calling specifications are Table 68 Structure CPO CPONAM CPO CPONAM EDINAM BRNNAM desccpo where CPONAM character 12 name of the CPO data structure containing the reactor database Addi tional contributions can be included in the reactor cross section database if CPONAM appears on the RHS EDINAM character 12 name of the read only EDITION data structure BRNNAM character 12 name of the read only BURNUP data structure containing the depletion history This information is given only if the reactor database is to contain burnup dependent data desccpo structure containing the input data to this module see Section 3 18 1 3 18 1 Data input for module CPO Table 69 Structure desccpo EDIT iprint B2 NOTR STEP NOMDIR BURNUP PREFIX l EXTRACT ALL NEWNAME OLDNAME I i 1 niext NAME NDI
121. which library file the microscopic cross sections associated with isotope U236 zero concentration are to be read or omit U236 from the mixture description in which case DRAGON will assume that the microscopic cross sections associated with isotope U236 are to be read from the same library as the cross section for isotope U235 Note that the isotopes added automatically will remain at infinite dilution If the SHI module implementing the generalized Stamm ler method is used the self shielding data for an isotope takes the form U235 U235 5 105E 5 1 where the last index indicates the self shielding region 1 in this case If the USS module implementing the subgroup method is used additional self shielding data is re quired e Physical probability tables are used keyword SUBG Consider the following data U235 U235 5 105E 5 1 IRSET 0 0 81 The data IRSET 0 0 81 indicates that a Goldstein Cohen parameter Ag equal to 0 0 is used for all energy groups with an index equal or greater than 81 A value of Ag 1 0 corresponding to a statistical model is used by default e Mathematical probability tables with slowing down correlated weight matrices are used keyword PTSL or mathematical probability tables with the subgroup projection method SPM are used keyword PT or PTMC Consider the following data U235 U235 5 105E 5 1 IRSET PT 5 The Goldstein Cohen approximation is not used with mathematical CALENDF probabili
122. will be checked if iprint is greater than or equal to 5 NGRO keyword to specify the number of energy groups for which the macroscopic cross sec tions will be provided This information is required only if MACLIB is created and the cross sections are taken directly from the input data stream ngroup the number of energy groups used for the calculations in DRAGON The default value is ngroup 1 NMIX keyword used to define the number of material mixtures This information is required only if MACLIB is created and the cross sections are taken directly from the input data stream or from a GOXS file ninixt the maximum number of mixtures a mixture is characterized by a distinct set of macroscopic cross sections the MACROLIB may contain The default value is nmixt 1 NIFI keyword used to specify the maximum number of fissile spectrum associated with each mixture Each fission spectrum generally represents a fissile isotope This information IGE 294 nifiss DELP ndel ANIS naniso CTRA NONE APOL WIMS LEAK NALP nalbp ALBP albedp WRIT GOXSWN ENER energy VOLUME volume ADD 11 is required only if MACLIB is created and the cross sections are taken directly from the input data stream the maximum number of fissile isotopes per mixture The default value is nifiss 1 keyword used to specify the number of delayed neutron groups the number of delayed neutron groups The default value is ndel 0 keyword used
123. x LINKED LIST MOSTELA MOSTELC DISCR LIBRARY CP CALC OUT SEQ_BINARY TRKSPC MODULE LIB GEO SYBILT EXCELT SHI ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts 1241 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 E IGE 294 LIBRARY LIB NMIX 3 CTRA WIMS MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL MIX 1 600 0 U235 72235 U238 8238 MIX 2 600 0 Zr91 791 MIX 3 600 0 H1H20 730017 BNat 710117 ass Geometry MOSTELA an MOSTELC Ca k MOSTELA GEO TUBE R REFL RADIUS 0 0 0 3 MIX 123 MOSTELC GEO CARCE X REFL X REFL MESHX Y REFL Y REFL MESHY RADIUS 0 0 0 39306 0 4 MIX 123 a Case 1 annular Self Shielding calcul Transport calculation Flux calculation for Hoces DISCR TITLE TCWUO1 MOSTELL MAXR 4 QUAI 5 224 iaea 016 6016 4 61309E 2 1 66078E 4 1 2 28994E 2 1 3 83243E 2 4 42326E 2 1 02133E 5 016H20 7 6016 2 21163E 2 nular 3 region geometrv rtesian 3 region geometrv 3 9306 0 45802 0 71206 SPLITR 2 1 1 L 2 0 0 1 26209 0 0 1 26209 5802 SPLITR 2 1 ation SYBIL SYBIL K no leakage SYBILT MOSTELA ER BENCHMARK SYBIL SYBIL LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY DISCR EDIT O NOLJ CP ASM LIBRARY DISCR CALC FLU CP LIBRARY DISCR TYPE K assertS CALC K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8276153 OUT EDI LIBRARY DISCR CALC EDIT 4 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 4 0 SAVE DISCR CP DELETE DISC
124. 0 0000 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2 GEO ROD1 MIX 7 10 NPIN 6 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 0 0000 ROD3 GEO ROD1 MIX 8 10 NPIN 12 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 0 261799 ROD4 GEO ROD1 MIX 9 10 NPIN 18 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 0 0 CANDU6F GEO CANDU6S SPLITR 611110 ROD1 GEO ROD1 SPLITR 2 1 ROD2 GEO ROD2 SPLITR 2 1 ROD3 GEO ROD3 SPLITR 2 1 RODA GEO ROD4 SPLITR 2 1 fosas Self Shielding calculation EXCEL Transport calculation EXCEL Flux calculation for keff Hui TRACK INTLIN EXCELT CANDU6S TITLE TCWU06 CANDU 6 CARTESIAN FUEL TEMP 941 29 EDIT O MAXR 14 TRAK TISO 29 20 0 SYMM 4 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY TRACK INTLIN EDIT O NOLJ TRACK INTLIN DELETE TRACK INTLIN TRACK INTLIN EXCELT CANDU6F TITLE TCWU06 CANDU 6 CARTESIAN FUEL TEMP 941 29 EDIT O MAXR 32 TRAK TISO 29 20 0 SYMM 4 SYS ASM LIBRARY TRACK INTLIN EDITO IGE 294 242 FLUX FLU SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 120661 yond Microscopic cross sections from WIMSLIB for stainless steel MIX 1 2 3 from EDI fuel structure material and moderator MIX 4 stainless steel rods poo EDITION EDI LIBRARY TRACK FLUX EDIT O MERGE MIX 12223 1 1 1 1 1 SAVE ON SSRODS SSRODS EDITION STEP UP SSRODS LIBRARY2 LIB SSRODS EDIT O NMIX 4 CTRA WIMS MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIX 4 345 66 Fe56 72056 6 19027E 2 Cr52 762 1 56659E 3
125. 1 0 MIX 2 TOTAL 0 53 SCAT 1 1 0 5 MIX 3 TOTAL 0 45 SCAT 1 1 0 347 NUSIGF 0 17 CHI 1 0 MIX 4 TOTAL 0 3 SCAT 1 1 0 2 NUSIGF 0 1 CHI 1 0 GEOMETRY GEO HEXZ 2 2 EDIT 2 HBC S30 REFL Z REFL Z REFL MIX UDEPLETED_1 UDEPLETED_1 UDEPLETED_2 UDEPLETED_2 UDEPLETED 1 GEO HEXCELZ 4 1 EDIT 2 SIDE 2 804 RADIUS 0 0 2 23 2 275 2 4 2 5 MESHZ 0 0 0 7 MIX 134 22 UDEPLETED 2 GEO HEXCELZ 4 1 EDIT 2 SIDE 2 804 RADIUS 0 0 2 23 2 275 2 4 2 5 MESHZ 0 7 1 0 MIX 431 22 IGE 294 220 TRACKING TRKSPC EXCELT GEOMETRY EDIT 2 MAXR 200 TRAK TISO 6 10 10 5 ASSEMBLY ASM MACLIB TRACKING TRKSPC EDIT 1 FLUX FLU ASSEMBLY MACLIB TRACKING TRKSPC TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 0 9292231 ECHO test TCM12 completed END QUIT 6 4 13 TCM13 Hexagonal assembly with hexagonal cells containing clusters This test represents an example of a 2 D hexagonal assembly filled with triangular hexagonal cells containing clusters see Figure 33 that can be analyzed with NXT Colored by Region Figure 33 Geometry of a 2 D hexagonal assembly filled with triangular hexagonal cells Input data for test case TCM13 x2m TEST CASE TCM13 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS FISSION SOURCE PROBLEM IGE 294 HEXAGONAL CELL with PINS ik Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used k o LINKED_LIST MacLib GlobalGeo Tracking Pij Flux SEG ASCII Fig ps SEQ BINARY Line
126. 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 9 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 1 74532925 2 09439510 2 44346095 2 79252680 3 14159265 3 49065850 3 83972435 4 18879020 4 53785606 RODAR GEO TUBE 2 MIX 19 20 HMIX 1 1 IGE 294 270 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 9 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 1 39626340 1 04719755 0 69813170 0 34906585 0 0 0 34906585 0 69813170 1 04719755 1 39626340 FXYR GEO CARCEL 5 2 1 MESHX 7 14375 0 0 7 14375 SPLITX 3 3 MESHY 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITV 6 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 7 00 HMIX 1 1 al 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIX 11 12 13 14 15 15 1 2 3 4 5 5 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2L ROD2R ROD3L ROD3R ROD4L ROD4R ROD1 GEO TUBE 2 1 2 MIX 16 20 610 HMIX 1100 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 MESHX 0 6540 0 6540 MESHY 0 6540 0 0 0 6540 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2L GEO TUBE 2 MIX 17 20 HMIX 1 1 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 3 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 2 09439510 3 14159265 4 18879020 ROD2R GEO TUBE 2 MIX 7 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 3 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 1 04719755 0 0000 1 04719755 ROD3L GEO TUBE 2 MIX 18 20 HMIX 1 1 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 6 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 2 87979327 2 35619449 1 83259571 1 83259571 2 35619449 2 87979327 ROD3R GEO TUBE 2 MIX 8 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 6 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 1 30899694 0 78539816 0 26179939 0 26179939 0 78539816 1 30899694 RODAL GEO TUBE 2 MIX 19 20 HMIX 1 1
127. 2 TRKFLP 91 TRKGPT 91 TRKNAM 99 TRKNAM 60 63 67 70 71 74 76 79 82 84 88 91 97 107 113 114 132 155 160 true 175 TSPC 63 65 67 69 223 IGE 294 TUBE 29 30 42 44 48 54 56 60 74 TUBEX 29 30 42 44 48 53 54 TUBEY 29 30 42 44 48 53 54 TUBEZ 29 30 42 44 49 54 74 TURN 47 54 225 tval 135 136 TYPE 98 102 TYPE 92 160 161 171 173 type 173 TYPSEC 137 U 132 133 UNKT 92 93 U02 121 123 UP 114 115 126 127 129 130 162 163 166 167 171 UPDL 15 UPS 98 UPTO 47 54 USS 84 USS 5 7 84 85 UTL 163 UTL 6 163 V 132 133 val 137 138 valb2 94 96 valbr2 94 96 valbx2 94 96 valby2 94 96 valbz2 94 96 valc 163 164 VALE 137 138 143 144 valeps 82 83 valeps1 108 109 valeps2 108 109 valexp 105 108 109 valh1 108 109 valk 94 96 VALU 126 127 value 129 130 137 138 145 146 171 174 179 281 values 281 VECT 79 80 VIRTUAL 29 30 60 VOID 32 33 76 77 79 80 89 92 93 95 102 115 116 VOLUME 10 11 volume 10 11 W CC 108 109 111 WARNING ONLV 130 146 147 WATER 121 123 WGT 121 123 WIGN 60 61 WIMS 10 11 16 18 19 121 122 307 WIMSAECL 16 20 121 122 WIMSD4 16 19 121 122 WORLD SIZE 178 WRIT 10 11 X 94 96 175 X 32 33 41 48 51 53 54 X 32 33 41 48 51 53 54 x1 175 x2 175 XABORT 176 XCLL 8 63 64 67 68
128. 242 3 311E 02 Am242m 5 977E 02 U238 4 941E 02 Pu240 4 575E 02 Pu242 3 630E 02 Am242m IGE 294 281 6 7 Assert procedures These two procedures are used in non regression testcases to ensure that existing capabilities of Dragon are not lost with subsequent updates of the code Procedure asserts is used to assert a single real value taken from record KEY of a LCM associative table Its calling specification is Table 101 Structure assertS assertS LCMNAM KEY ipos value where LCMNAM character 12 name of the LCM data structure KEY character 12 name of the real array we want to assert ipos integer index of the component in the real array we want to assert values real reference value of the ipos th component Procedure assertV is used to assert a single real value taken from an heterogeneous list named KEY where each component is a real array Its calling specification is Table 102 Structure assert V assertV LCMNAM KEY iset ipos value where LCMNAM character 12 name of the LCM data structure KEY character 12 name of the heterogeneous list we want to assert ipos integer index of the component in the heterogeneous list ipos integer index of the component in the real arrav we want to assert values real reference value of the ipos th component Input data for test case assertS c2m Assert procedure for non regression testing Recover a value from a real arrav Author A Hebert x XA XXX PARAMETER
129. 30 1999 A Leonard and C T McDaniel Optimal Polar Angles and Weights for the Characteristics Method Trans Am Nucl Soc 73 172 1995 R Le Tellier and A H bert Anisotropy and Particle Conservation for Trajectorv Based Determin istic Methods Nucl Sci Eng 158 28 39 2008 M J Halsall CACTUS A Characteristics Solution to the Neutron Transport Equation in Compli cated Geometries Report AEEW R 1291 Atomic Energy Establishment Winfrith 1980 A H bert G Marleau and R Roy A Description of the DRAGON and TRIVAC Version4 Data Structures Report IGE 295 Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al August 2006 R Sanchez Renormalized Treatment of the Double Heterogeneity with the Method of Characteris tics Int Mtg on the Physics of Fuel Cycles and Advanced Nuclear Systems Global Developments PHYSOR 2004 Chicago Illinois April 25 29 2004 A H bert A Collision Probability Analysis of the Double Heterogeneity Problem Nucl Sci Eng 115 177 1993 A Hoffmann F Jeanpierre A Kavenoky M Livolant and H Lorain APOLLO Code Multigroupe de R solution de VEguation du Transport pour les Neutrons Thermiques et Rapides Note CEA N 1610 Commissariat l Energie Atomique Saclay France 1973 A Kavenoky Calcul et utilisation des probabilit s de premi re collision pour les milieux h t rog nes a une dimension CEA N 1077 Commissariat l Energie Atomique
130. 4440800 bag eee ead we wee ee ee ea ea eas 150 3 22 The MAC module ssa ee kk RA ee A ee 151 3 22 1 Data input for module DMAC L so ca ia cee ee ee ee 151 323 The DREF Module uso 544 cbc c bbe ee ee ERE ELAS RES 153 3 24 The SENS module 000 06 k hE baa a ee ba Le a 155 324 1 Dats input for module SENS ne es a b B RM 155 ceo Une DUYU mod le ss siae e ar 4644 red ae b dd oe eda Shoe ee 157 3 25 1 Data input for module DUO 2 0 0 6 6588 5c new eee ee es 157 poe DEE ias a LLS A ks k ks 158 3 20 The PSP M QULS osuna aa Oe a ee k ER 160 326 1 Data input fer module PSP 6344 42 26 A beh bd fee bd e me 160 4 THE UTILITY MODULES 4 00086 be hee Gada a wee eA ea a i 162 4 1 lis equglitv module co rec en keke ds eee hbo ERS SS 162 4 2 The UTL module lt a as 8 6 e e ee be Pe ee Se 163 4 3 The DELETE Module 24 wi dik ek PARE ORR ERR Ye e oe 165 4 4 The BACKUP module sc imei ak a dd e we 166 4 5 The RECOVER MOUSE AA 167 4 6 Tha ADO Tale lt a E als AE SS 168 4 7 The MPX module e 4 2 hoger as A a a e a E ai 169 4 8 The STAT motile 2 556604 A a e dd es 170 4 9 The GREP mod le scsi iaa oO ee eee ARES He we 171 LLO Cie MSIR modules irte Oe ee ee eh bh Ee we 173 AT The FINDO module gt 4 406802 ou bo eed e A ee ee ee E a 175 412 The ABORD modul c ss 244 2422 si bie E AR a RRA Oe ee 176 4 13 The BND module o caca naci 54200 04440 i ES Law a 177 5 THE MPI MODULES 1 2 442 564 0506 4 A k a EE E h a ba Eaa a a 178
131. 63 165 171 173 175 179 281 287 288 24 163 164 2 dir rec 173 A 132 133 a 132 133 AAC 71 72 ABORT 176 ABORT 176 ABS 163 164 ABSO 145 ACCE 92 93 ACTI 98 101 ACYL 32 34 ADD 10 11 163 164 ADD 168 ADD 6 168 ADED 16 19 ADF 98 102 ADF FD_B 116 ADF FDH 117 ADI 79 80 ADJ 16 18 71 73 ADJ_FLUNAM 155 AFM 7 ALBE 32 34 albedo 32 34 albedp 10 11 ALBP 10 11 ALBS 88 89 94 95 97 98 102 114 116 ALL 47 54 85 86 98 100 101 139 140 179 ALLG 63 64 67 68 ALLREDUCE 178 179 ALLX 98 100 129 ALSB 92 93 296 ANG 33 35 ang 33 35 ANIS 10 11 16 18 63 67 155 APIN 41 43 apin 58 apins 41 43 APLIB1 16 20 121 122 APLIB2 16 20 23 121 122 APOL 10 11 16 18 apower 108 109 111 APTRIM 135 APXSM 16 20 23 ARM 82 83 85 86 88 89 102 114 116 117 ASCII 98 101 132 ASKE 60 62 ASM 88 ASM 2 5 7 64 68 88 92 93 95 102 115 116 ASMPIJ 2 7 88 91 97 assertS 281 asserts 180 281 assertV 281 assertV 180 281 ASYM 114 117 AT 114 115 162 163 166 167 171 ATM 121 122 B 92 94 132 133 b 132 134 BO 94 178 BOTR 94 B1 94 178 B2 139 b2 114 117 BACKUP 166 BACKUP 6 166 BARRIER 178 179 beg 178 BIHET 56 BIVACT 76 BIVACT 4 58 59 76 BLOCK 163 164 171 172 BRNNAM 107 108 110 125 127 129 139 142 144
132. 6540 NPIN 3 RPIN 1 4885 IGE 294 APIN 1 04719755 0 0000 1 04719755 ROD3L GEO TUBE 2 MIX 18 20 HMIX 1 1 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 6 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 2 87979327 2 35619449 1 83259571 1 83259571 2 35619449 2 87979327 ROD3R GEO TUBE 2 MIX 8 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 6 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 1 30899694 0 78539816 0 26179939 0 26179939 0 78539816 1 30899694 RODAL GEO TUBE 2 MIX 19 20 HMIX 1 1 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 9 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 1 74532925 2 09439510 2 44346095 2 79252680 3 14159265 3 49065850 3 83972435 4 18879020 4 53785606 ROD4R GEO TUBE 2 MIX 9 10 HMIX 0 0 SORIN EDIT 0 X REFL Y REFL CELL M MY M M MESHX MESHY HMIX 0 MXL MESHX MESHY HMIX MIX MX2 MESHX MESHY HMIX MIX MXR MESHX MESHV HMIX MIX sf MY MESHY MESHX MIX 5 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 9 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 1 39626340 1 04719755 0 69813170 0 34906585 0 0 0 34906585 0 69813170 1 04719755 1 39626340 GEO CAR2D 5 3 X REFL Y REFL MXL MX2 MXR M FXYL BXY FXYR MY MXL MX2 MXR M GEO CAR2D 1 1 0 0 7 14375 SPLITX 2 0 0 7 14375 SPLITY 2 GEO CAR2D 2 1 7 14375 0 0 7 14375 SPLITX 3 3 0 0 7 14375 SPLITY 3 GEO CAR2D 1 1 7 14375 7 14375 SPLITX 6 0 0 7 14375 SPLITV 3 1 15 55 GEO CAR2D 2 1 7 14375 0 0 7 14375 SPLITX 3 3 0 0 7 14375 SPLITV 3 1 0 15 5 3 GEO CAR2D 1 2
133. 73E 2 Cr52 762 2 24991E 5 Fe56 72056 2 09013E 5 Ni58 758 5 32188E 5 MoNat 796 1 89281E 6 A127 727 1 10277E 6 Mn55 755 1 94976E 7 BNat 710117 2 35598E 5 Zr91 791 4 18372E 4 MIX 11 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 71676E 2 016H20 6016 2 35838E 2 Cr52 762 2 11122E 5 Fe56 2056 1 96130E 5 Ni58 758 4 99383E 5 MoNat 796 1 77614E 6 A127 727 1 03479E 6 Mn55 755 1 82957E 7 BNat 71011 2 35753E 5 Zr91 791 3 92583E 4 pati Geometry ASSMBH hexagonal assembly with poison contains C1 cell without fuel C2 poison cell C3 normal fuel cell C4 peripheral cell EE ASSMBH GEO HEX 36 HBC 830 REFL CELL Ci C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C2 C3 C3 C3 C2 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C2 C3 C3 C2 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 TURN A A A A A A A A BOD ATI AC F J BA F A A E E A A E A A A A A A A A AA MERGE 1 2 3 4 5 4 6 7 8 7 9 810 7 7 4 7 11 12 13 14 15 12 16 17 12 16 18 18 19 20 21 21 22 22 23 21 C1 GEO HEXCEL 2 SIDE 0 707297 RADIUS 0 0 0 412282 0 475917 IGE 294 232 MIX 123 C2 GEO HEXCEL 5 SIDE 0 707297 RADIUS 0 0 0 25057 0 354359 0 436 0 486 0 6125 MIX55567 8 211 C3 GEO C1 MIX 49 10 i CA GEO C3 MIX 49 11 Self Shielding calculation JPM Transport calculation SYBIL Flux calculation for B1 homogeneous leakage Editing using SPH model for transport diffusion a DISCR SYBILT ASSMBH TITLE TCWUO3 MULTICELL HEXAGONAL ASS
134. 8 782387 lt lt WU238F gt gt 1 MIX 3 COMB 1 0 5 0 0 5 MIX 4 COMB 1 0 1 2 0 9 ISOT LIBRARY STEP UP U238 0004 asserts ISOT ECHO test TCWU12 completed END QUIT LIST NG 35 5 000504E 01 gt IGE 294 257 6 5 13 TCWU13 Solution by the method of cyclic characteristics This case illustrates the use of the MOCC module of DRAGON for a solution by the transport equation by the method of cyclic characteristics This test case also uses the embedded DRAGON procedure stored in the TCWUO5Lib c2m file Input data for test case TCWU13 x2m x TEST CASE TCWU13 17 X 17 PWR ASSEMBLY WITHOUT POISON WIMSD4 69 GROUPS LIBRARY FILE iaea FROM WLUP REF none XK XA XA XX XX X k x Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used LINKED LIST ASSMB DISCR1 DISCR2 LIBRARY CP CALC OUT DATABASE ISOT SPHGEOM MTRACK SEQ_BINARY FILTRK SEQ_ASCII res MODULE LIB GEO SYBILT NXT BIVACT SHI ASM FLU EDI COMPO SPH DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 LIBRARY LIB NMIX 8 CTRA WIMS MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIX 1 579 9 H1H20 73001 4 76690E 2 016H20 6016 2 38345E 2 BNat 71011 2 38103E 5 MIX 2 579 9 016 76016 3 06711E 4 Cr52 262 7 54987E 5 Fed6 72056 1 47624E 4 Zr91 791 4 18621E 2 MIX 3 579 9 H1H20 730017 4 65292E 2 016H20 6016 2 32646E
135. 87335E 4 Be R O0NN 38298E 4 35673E 2 24991E 5 32188E 5 89281E 6 10277E 6 35838E 2 11122E 5 99383E 5 77614E 6 03479E 6 36010E 2 96591E 5 65011E 5 65389E 6 63569E 7 4 49355E 2 227 IGE 294 C4 corner cell Pude ASSMB GEO CAR2D 9 9 X DIAG X REFL Y SYME Y DIAG CELL C1 C2 C2 C1 C2 C2 C1 C2 C3 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C3 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C3 Ci C2 C2 C1 C2 C3 C2 C2 C2 C2 C3 C1 C2 C2 C3 C2 C2 C3 C2 C3 CA MERGE 1 3 12 11 12 12 11 12 are a 13 5 O 13 N a N oO o NX JO 0NMO0 O 1 iS TURN H gt w THO Tome Mm Taya Q b TINA rrrtinthaa rrrrrrr Fr FO WO WO O CO WO WO Oo C1 GEO CARCEL 2 MESHX 0 0 1 26472 MESHY 0 0 1 26472 RADIUS 0 0 0 572435 0 613142 MIX 123 C2 GEO C1 RADIUS 0 0 0 412660 0 474364 MIX 845 21 C3 GEO C2 MESHX 0 0 1 31472 MIX 8 4 6 C4 GEO C3 MESHV 0 0 1 31472 MIX 847 po Self Shielding calculation SYBIL Transport calculation SYBIL Flux calculation for B1 homogeneous leakage Editing using SPH model for transport diffusion B DISCR SYBILT ASSMB TITLE TCWUO2 17 X 17 MULTICELL PWR BENCHMARK WITHOUT POISON MAXR 400 QUA2 6 3 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY DISCR EDIT O NOLJ CP ASM LIBRARY DISCR CALC FLU CP LIBRARY DISCR TYPE B B1 asserts CALC K INFINITV 1 1 257190 OUT EDI LIBRARY DISCR CALC ASSMB EDIT 3 UPS SAVE MICR RES MERGE CELL COND 4 0
136. 99 0 NG 5 7119 FROM DECAY 1 0 Pu241 952421 DECAY 1 55780E 02 NFTOT 202 3 NG 6 3640 FROM NG 1150 Am241 952430 NFTOT 203 6 NG 6 5320 FROM NG 1 0 Am242m 1 0 Pu242 962420 DECAY 4 92360E 00 NFTOT 202 6 NG 5 7010 FROM NG 7434 Am241 962430 DECAY 7 32170E 02 NFTOT 204 0 NG 6 7990 FROM NG 1 0 Cm242 962440 DECAY 1 21350E 01 NFTOT 203 0 NG 5 5200 FROM NG 1 0 Cm243 1 0 Am243 Fission products are following IGE 294 279 Zr95 Figure 40 An example of depletion chain 400950 DECAY 1 25390E 01 NG 7 8377 FROM NFTOT 6 463E 02 U235 5 113E 02 U238 4 897E 02 Pu239 4 369E 02 Pu240 IGE 294 Zr96 3 916E 02 Pu241 3 830E 02 Am241 400960 NG 5 5751 FROM NFTOT 6 248E 02 U235 5 002E 02 Pu239 4 376E 02 Pu241 4 551E 02 Am241 NG 1 0 Zr95 example truncated Stable isotopes producing energy are following 9 7 10 Fe54 Fe56 Fe57 Fe58 Cr50 Cr52 Cr53 Cr54 Ni58 Ni60 Ni61 Ni62 Ni64 Mn55 H20 Zr nat 016 Mo95 Nb93 Ti nat ENDCHAIN END NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG 10 ON OF ON OND 7 9 T 9 7 9 TA 2990 6460 4400 8890 2930 9400 7190 1830 0000 8200 6000 8423 1830 7554 2251 1395 1434 1540 2139 5137 STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE STABLE 4 113E 02 Pu
137. ACNAM 113 114 MACNEW 113 MACR 16 17 19 143 144 MACREF 153 154 MACRO 148 151 153 155 156 MACRO 114 115 129 MACROGEO 97 99 MACROLIB 4 7 9 12 15 16 88 91 92 97 101 107 113 114 150 189 MASL 126 127 143 144 MASS 121 mass 121 122 mati 24 26 matnum 12 14 24 26 28 matold 27 28 MATXS 16 18 19 25 121 122 MATXS2 16 18 19 25 121 122 MATXS7A 186 MAX 178 MAXCAL 126 127 maxcal 126 127 maxcur 60 61 MAXI 71 75 maxi 74 75 maxint 60 61 MAXJ 60 IGE 294 maxmix 48 53 56 99 101 149 152 MAXNB 114 117 maxnb 114 117 maxout 92 93 114 117 maxpts 98 102 MAXR 59 98 102 maxreg 43 46 57 59 61 98 99 149 152 MAXS 17 20 MAXST 85 86 maxthr 92 93 MAXVAL 171 MAXZ 60 61 MC 67 70 148 MC 148 MC 5 148 MC data 148 MC data 148 MCCGT 71 MCCGT 1 4 6 7 58 64 65 70 71 83 86 89 210 213 MCFD 76 79 80 MCU 71 73 MCU 219 MEAN 171 172 MEDI 63 65 67 70 MERG 98 101 102 115 148 149 151 152 MERGE 47 54 225 MESHX 41 183 MESHY 41 183 MESHZ 41 MFILE 132 MGEO 98 102 MGFLUX 160 161 MICLIB 9 16 17 20 28 82 84 85 MICLIB1 157 MICLIB2 157 MICLIB SG 84 MICNAM 107 110 MICNAM 108 micnam 143 MICR 98 100 101 140 MICREF 153 154 MICRO 148 151 153 MICRO 114 115 MICRO1 137 MICRO2 137 MICROLIB 111
138. AT TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8276187 OUT EDI LIBRARY VOLMAT FLUX EDIT 4 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 4 0 FLUX DELETE FLUX FLUX FLU PIJ LIBRARY VOLMAT EDIT 99 TYPE S EXTE 30 UNKT 1 0E 3 assertV FLUX FLUX GROUP 10 REGION 4 4 291752E 05 OUT EDI OUT LIBRARY VOLMAT FLUX EDIT 4 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 4 0 OUT FLUX PIJ LIBRARY VOLMAT DELETE OUT FLUX PIJ LIBRARY VOLMAT ECHO test TCWU10 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 11 TCWU11 Two group burnup of a CANDU 6 type cell This case is similar to TC WU05 except that the burnup module uses DRAGON generated two groups time dependent microscopic cross sections The MICROLIB is defined by the procedure TCWUO5Lib c2m presented in Section 6 5 19 Input data for test case TCWU11 x2m k TEST CASE TCWU11 CANDU 6 ANNULAR CELL x iaea WLUP Library TWO GROUP BURNUP POWER KW 615 00000 BURN POWER KW KG 31 97130 URANIUM MASS 19 23600 U02 REAL DENSITY 10 59300 U02 EFF DENSITY 10 43750 IGE 294 252 U02 TEMPERATURE 941 28998 ENRICHMENT 0 71140 COOLANT D2 AT 1 99 222 MODERATOR D2 AT 99 911 NUMBER OF DAYS 50 XK XA XA XX XX xXx poros Define variables Burnup paremeters a Power 31 9713 kw kg for 0 0 to 300 0 days b 69 Groups Burnup time interval Delt 300 day for O to 300 day c 2 Groups Burnup time interval Delt 1 day for to 1 day 4 days for to 5 days 5 days for to 10 d
139. AVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L Bi HETE assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 222996 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE TRKSPC DELETE TRKSPC ECHO test TCMO5 completed END QUIT LIST 6 4 6 TCM06 Buckling search without fission source This test is for an homogeneous water cell A buckling eigenvalue problem is solved in the abscence of fission source for the neutron flux distribution inside this cell Input data for test case TCM06 x2m TEST CASE TCM06 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS IGE 294 BUCKLING SEARCH PROBLEM WITHOUT FISSION SOURCE HOMOGENEOUS GEOMETRY REF none Him Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used posos LINKED_LIST WATER TRACK MACRO SYS FLUX EDITION MODULE GEO SYBILT MAC ASM FLU EDI END PROCEDURE asserts Macroscopic XS poses MACRO MAC EDIT 2 NGRO 1 ANIS 2 NMIX 1 NIFI 0 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 3 59 SCAT 1 1 3 57 1 1 2 38 goo Geometry WATER Homogeneous geometry Tracking SYBILT reat WATER GEO HOMOGE MIX 1 TRACK SVBILT WATER TITLE TCMO6 ENE6101 EXAM MAXR 1 k Solution TYPE L Leakage BO PNL PO PNL B1 PNL Pi PNL k SYS ASM MACRO TRACK FLUX FLU SVS MACRO TRACK TYPE L BO SIGS EXTE 5 1 0E 5 BUCK 0 07 assertS FLUX 7B2 B1HOM 1 2 14440E 01 EDITION EDI MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS
140. B USS MICLIB_SG MICLIB TRKNAM TRKFIL descuss where MICLIB character 12 name of the MICROLIB that will contain the microscopic and macro scopic cross sections updated by the self shielding module If MICLIB appears on both LHS and RHS it is updated otherwise MICLIB is created MICLIB_SG character 12 name of the MICROLIB builded by module LIB and containing proba bility table information the keyword SUBG must be used in module LIB TRKNAM character 12 name of the reguired TRACKING data structure IGE 294 85 TRKFIL character 12 name of the seguential binary tracking file used to store the tracks lengths This file is given if and only if it was required in the previous tracking module call see Section 3 4 descuss structure describing the self shielding options Each time the USS module is called a sub directory is updated in the MICROLIB data structure to hold the last values defined in the descuss structure The next time this module is called these values will be used as floating defaults 3 6 1 Data input for module USS Table 41 Structure descuss EDIT iprint GRMIN Igrmin GRMAX Igrmax PASS ipass NOCO NOSP TRAN NOTR PIJ ARM l MAXST imax CALC l REGI suffix isot ALL imix i i 1 nmix ENDC where EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of this module The amount o
141. C ie MOSTELA GEO TUBE 3 RADIUS 0 0 0 39306 0 45802 0 71206 SPLITR 2 1 1 MIX 1 2 3 R REFL MOSTELV GEQ MOSTELA R VOID Self Shielding calculation SYBIL Transport calculation SYBIL Flux calculation for keff kX VOLMAT SYBILT MOSTELA TITLE TCWUO9 SYBIL TRACK MOSTELLER BENCHMARK REFLECTIVE BC MAXR 4 QUAI 5 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY VOLMAT EDIT O NOLJ PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMAT FLUX FLU PIJ LIBRARY VOLMAT TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8276187 OUT EDI LIBRARY VOLMAT FLUX EDIT 4 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 4 0 SAVE PIJ VOLMAT VOLMAT TITLE MAXR 4 QUAI 5 PIJ FLUX TYPE K assertS FLUX OUT EDI K EFFECTIVE OUT LIBRARV VOLMAT FLUX DELETE PIJ VOLMAT SYBILT MOSTELV TCWUO9 SYBIL TRACK MOSTELLER BENCHMARK VOID BC ASM LIBRARY VOLMAT FLU FLUX PIJ LIBRARY VOLMAT 1 1 023486E 02 EDIT 4 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 4 0 SAVE OUT FLUX PIJ LIBRARY VOLMAT DELETE IGE 294 250 OUT FLUX PIJ LIBRARY VOLMAT ECHO test TCWUO9 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 10 TCWU10 Fixed source problem in multiplicative media This case verify the use of a fixed source inside a cell where fission also takes place Input data for test case TCWU10 x2m fol TEST CASE TCWU10 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK FOR 1 D ANNULAR CELL iaea WLUP Library FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM IN MULTIPLICATIVE MEDIA REF None
142. CHAB 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value MODI keyword used to define a modification of a nuclear reaction belonging to a given isotope TYPSEC character 8 name of an existing nuclear reaction chosen among the following values INTOTO Total cross section NG Radiative capture cross section The total NTOTO cross section is modified accordingly NA n a cross section The total NTOTO NP n p cross section The total NTOTO ND n d cross section The total NTOTO NT n t cross section The total NTOTO cross section is modified accordingly cross section is modified accordingly cross section is modified accordingly BLA Ge cross section is modified accordingly IGE 294 igm igp VALE val CONS PLUS MULT value HISOT 138 CAPT Capture cross sections Each present reaction of capture NG NA NP ND NT are taken into account The total NTOTO cross section is modified accordingly Only the keyword MULT indicating a multiplication of the all cross sections is available NELAS Elastic scattering cross section The scattering SIGS00 and SCATOO and total NTOTO cross sections are modified accordingly NINEL Inelastic scattering cross section The scattering SIGS00 and SCATOO and total NTOTO cross sections are modified accordingly cross sections are modified accordingly cross sections are modified accordingly
143. CMO3 completed END QUIT LIST 6 4 4 TCM04 Adjuster rod in a CANDU type supercell This test case represents a two group calculation of incremental cross sections resulting from the insertion of stainless steel adjuster rods in a CANDU 6 supercell IGE 294 Input data for test case TCM04 x2m TEST CASE TCMO4 XK XA XA XX XX X REF none MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS FISSION SOURCE PROBLEM CANDU 3 D ADJUSTER ROD 1 8 ASSEMBLY Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used k LINKED LIST BC TRACK MACRO SVS FLUX EDITION TRACK2 SYS2 FLUX2 EDITION2 SEQ_BINARY BCTRK MODULE GEO EXCELT MAC PROCEDURE asserts Macroscopic XS A MACRO MAC NGRO 2 NMIX 4 NIFI READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL NUSIGF CHI SCAT 2 2 MIX 2 TOTAL SCAT 2 2 22 MIX 3 TOTAL ASM FLU EDI 3 22798014E 1 5 46564534E 3 1 0 3 13575147E 4 22 3 1 7 1 2 24143648E 1 49818063E 1 40572286E 5 57371104E 1 60458171E 1 WrRrRPrREN WON W DELETE END 81341100E 1 17375278E 2 0 11233580E 1 19577667E 3 59792125E 1 47693634E 1 30506000E 3 77224326E 1 WT l L Figure 32 Geometrv of the CANDU 6 supercell with stainless steel rods 199 IGE 294 200 SCAT 2 2 5 98954648E 5 2 49342978E 1 22 3 77127469E 1 1 11155845E 2 MIX 4 TOTAL 2 60458171E 1 3 77224326E 1 SCAT 2 2 5 98954648E 5 2 49342978E 1 22 3 77127469E 1 1 11155845E 2 x
144. D4 FIL iaea MIX 1 300 0 Hi 73001 2 00000E 1 U235 72235 1 0 1 U236 78238 0 0 al m Geometry HOM Homogeneous geometry poses HOM GEO HOMOGE MIX 1 e Self Shielding calculation SYBIL Transport calculation SYBIL Flux calculation for keff RSS TRACK SYBILT HOM TITLE TCWWO8 HOMOGENEOUS BENCHMARK WITH BURNUP LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY TRACK EDIT 0 NOLJ PIJ ASM LIBRARY TRACK FLUX FLU PIJ LIBRARY TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 871363 EDITION EDI LIBRARY TRACK FLUX COND 4 0 MERGE COMP SAVE B Burnup loop for first step BURNUP is created while for other steps it is modified Fa WHILE Timei TotalTime lt DO EVALUATE Timef Timei Delt IF Timef Timec THEN EVALUATE Iprint 3 ELSE EVALUATE Iprint 1 ENDIF IF Timei 0 0 THEN BURNUP LIBRARY EVO LIBRARY FLUX TRACK EDIT lt lt Iprint gt gt DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt IGE 294 248 ELSE BURNUP LIBRARY EVO BURNUP LIBRARY FLUX TRACK EDIT lt lt Iprint gt gt NOEX DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt ENDIF LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY TRACK EDIT O NOLJ PIJ DELETE PIJ PIJ ASM LIBRARY TRACK FLUX FLU FLUX PIJ LIBRARY TRACK TYPE K IF Iprint 3 THEN EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY TRACK FLUX SAVE ENDIF ik change delta t for burn
145. D_LIST PWRF TRACF SYSF FLUXF EDITF PWRS TRACS SYSS FLUXS EDITS MACRO SEQ_BINARY PWRTRKF PWRTRKS MODULE GEO EXCELT MAC ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE assertS assertV Macroscopic XS Sala MACRO MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 4 NIFI 1 208 IGE 294 209 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 1 1 1 242 NUSIGF 0 15 CHI 1 0 MIX 2 TOTAL 0 625 SCAT 1 1 0 355 FIXE 0 000 MIX 3 TOTAL 14 000 SCAT 11 0 000 FIXE 1 000 MIX 4 TOTAL 1 250 SCAT 1 1 1 242 FIXE 0 000 aa Geometry PWRF Cartesian 2D assembly with fission PWRS Cartesian 2D assembly without fission Tracking EXCELT SRL i PWRF GEO CAR2D 4 4 X DIAG X REFL Y SYME Y DIAG CELL PFFF FFF F F F F GEO CARCEL 1 RADIUS 0 000 0 450 MIX 2 1 MESHX 0 625 0 625 SPLITX 2 MESHY 0 625 0 625 SPLITY 2 P GEO F MIX 3 1 SPLITR 3 PWRS GEO CAR2D 4 4 X DIAG X REFL Y SYME Y DIAG CELL PFFF FFF F F F F GEO CARCEL 1 RADIUS 0 000 0 450 MIX 2 4 MESHX 0 625 0 625 SPLITX 2 MESHY 0 625 0 625 SPLITY 2 P GEO F MIX 3 4 SPLITR 3 TRACF PWRTRKF EXCELT PWRF TITLE TCMO8 STANKOVSKI PWR ASSEMBLY MAXR 58 TRAK TISO 12 8 0 SYSF ASM MACRO TRACF PWRTRKF TRACS PWRTRKS EXCELT PWRS TITLE TCMO8 STANKOVSKI PWR ASSEMBLY MAXR 58 TRAK TISO 12 8 0 SYSS ASM MACRO TRACS PWRTRKS jk Solution TYPE K to test if k lt 1 0 IGE 294 210 TYPE S to include fixed source k
146. E REFVALUE REFVALUE ABS IF DELTA 1 0E 4 lt THEN PRINT TEST SUCCESSFUL DELTA DELTA ELSE PRINT ys PRINT TEST FAILURE PRINT L PRINT REFERENCE REFVALUE CALCULATED VALUE ABORT ENDIF END IGE 294 283 7 THE DRAGON PACKAGE The following files are reguired to install DRAGON Version4_nnn tgz libraries_nnn tgz Information is recovered from the two archives using tar xviz Version4_nnn tgz tar xvfz libraries nnn tgz The tar xvfz operations will create two directories named Version4 and libraries made of various components files and directories as shown in Figure 41 m b endian libraries L 1 endian readme install H Njoy99 rdragon HE Dragon data i pia lib l L Version4 Trivac HE Utilib H Ganlib eae install IGE174 IGE174 pdf install E doc J l script Working Copy Figure 41 Distribution content Directory Version4 contains the information reguired to install and configure DRAGON It is a copy of the Subversion Working Copy used by the developers of the code Inside Version4 is a file named readme that contain the information required to configure DRAGON on your system This configuration process has the effect to add a few directories and binary files to the Version4 directory On Windows Version4 components an be build in two possible ways IGE
147. ELT automatically try to take into account geometric symmetries in order to reduce the number of tracks and the CPU time The NOSY keyword desactivates this automatic capability keyword to specify that the program is to be stopped after the analysis of the geometry without the explicit tracking being performed IGE 294 67 3 4 3 The NXT tracking module The calling specification for this module is Table 28 Structure NXT I TRKFIL TRKNAM NXT TRKNAM GEONAM desctrack descnxt where TRKNAM character 12 name of the TRACKING data structure that will contain region volume and surface area vectors in addition to region identification pointers and other tracking information If TRKNAM also appears on the RHS the previous tracking parameters will be applied by default on the current geometry TRKFIL character 12 name of the sequential binary tracking file used to store the tracks lengths If TRKFIL does not appear the keyword XCLL is set automatically If the user wants to use a tracking file TRKFIL is required GEONAM character 12 name of the GEOMETRY data structure desctrack structure describing the general tracking data see Section 3 4 descnxt structure describing the transport tracking data specific to NXT The NXT specific tracking data in descnxt is defined as Table 29 Structure descnxt ANIS nanis ONEG ALLG XCLL QUAB iquab SAPO HEBE PISO PSPC CUT p
148. ELY and CARCELZ are numbered assuming that the third component corresponds to X Y and Z respectively We should also note that symmetry conditions implicitly force the grouping of certain calculation zones All the tracking operators of DRAGON share an identical general tracking data structure defined as IGE 294 59 Table 23 Structure desctrack EDIT iprint TITL TITLE MAXR maxreg RENO NORE RENM REND l with EDIT kevword used to modifv the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of this operator The amount of output produced bv this tracking operators will varv substantiallv depending on the print level specified For example e when iprint 0 no output is produced e when iprint 1 a minimum amount of output is produced the main geometry prop erties are printed fixed default option e when iprint gt 2 In addition to the information printed when using iprint 1 the zone numbering zones associated with a flux is printed TITL kevword which allows the run title to be set TITLE the title associated with a DRAGON run This title mav contain up to 72 characters The default when TITL is not specified is no title MAXR keyword which permits the maximum number of regions to be considered during a DRAGON run to be specified maxreg maximum dimensions of the problem to be considered The default value is set to the number of regions previously computed by the GEO
149. EMBLY WITH POISON MAXR 400 MAXZ 15000 QUA2 6 3 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY DISCR EDIT 0 NOLJ CP ASM LIBRARY DISCR CALC FLU CP LIBRARY DISCR TYPE B Bl assertS CALC K INFINITV 1 0 7116683 OUT EDI LIBRARY DISCR CALC ASSMBH EDIT 3 UPS SAVE MICR RES MERGE CELL COND 4 0 SPHGEOM OUT STEP UP MACRO GEOM MTRACK BIVACT SPHGEOM PRIM 1 2 1 OUT SPH OUT MTRACK SPHGEOM MTRACK DELETE SPHGEOM MTRACK DATABASE COMPO EDIT 5 COMM Multi parameter reactor database ENDC INIT DATABASE COMPO DATABASE OUT EDIT 3 res DATABASE ISOT DATABASE STEP UP default STEP UP MIXTURES STEP AT 5 STEP UP CALCULATIONS STEP AT 1 STEP UP xMACXRES assertS ISOT NWTO 1 1 442307E 00 assertS ISOT NWTO 2 1 477404E 01 ECHO test TCWUO3 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 4 TCWU04 A Cylindrical cell with burnup This test case represents a burnup calculation for the mosteller annular geometry IGE 294 233 Figure 37 Depletion chain of heavy isotopes Input data for test case TCWU04 x2m x TEST CASE TCWU04 iaea WLUP Library ANNULAR MOSTELLER BENCHMARK WITH BURNUP REF R Mosteller et al Nucl Sci Eng 107 265 1991 XK XA XA XX XX X k o IGE 294 234 Define variables k INTEGER istep 1 REAL evobeg evoend REAL step2 step3 step4 step5 1 0 27 1739 67 9348 135 8696 goo
150. ES We will now present a few examples of DRAGON input structures in such as to clarify and illustrate some of the options presented in Sections 3 and 4 These examples are non regression testcases used to ensure that existing capabilities of Dragon are not lost with subseguent updates of the code They make use of two assert procedures defined in CLE 2000 language assertS and assertV defined in Section 6 7 These procedures are generally not used in computational schemes 6 1 Scattering cross sections In DRAGON the angular dependence of the scattering cross section is expressed in a Legendre series expansion of the form L 2020 2 0 V FEY zun l 0 Since the Legendre polvnomials satisfv the following orthogonalitv conditions T duP u Pm u rei we will have F 6 i Tais fa far 2 fer 0 1 1 Let us now consider the following three group ngroup 3 isotropic and linearly anisotropic scattering cross sections L naniso 2 given by XII sl em Diy cm71 ue em In DRAGON this scattering cross section must be entered as SCAT x L 0 1 1 3 gt 1 x x 2 21 x l 21 x 0 90 3 3 x 3 gt 2 x 0 30 2 gt 2 x 0 70 x l 22 x 0 80 2 3 x 3 23 x 0 40 x 2 gt 3 x 0 60 1 gt 3 x SCAT x L 1 x 3 3 3 21 0 03 x 2 gt 1 0 00 x l 21 0 09 2 2 3 gt 2 x 2 gt 2 0 07 1 gt 2 0 05 3 3 x 3 gt 3 x 0 04 2 gt 3 x 0 06 1 gt 3 0 08 6 2 Geometries In order to
151. ETE END PROCEDURE asserts poe Microscopic cross sections from file MATXS7A format MATXS Fosa LIBRARY LIB NMIX 3 CTRA OLDW MIXS LIB MATXS FIL MATXS7A MIX 1 600 0 016 016 4 61309E 2 THER 42 FREE U235 U235 1 66078E 4 1 THER 42 FREE U238 U238 2 28994E 2 1 THER 42 FREE MIX 2 600 0 Zr91 ZRNAT 3 83243E 2 THER 42 FREE MIX 3 600 0 H1H20 Hi 4 42326E 2 THER 42 H20 016H20 016 2 21163E 2 THER 42 FREE BNat B10 2 03245E 6 THER 42 FREE Geometry MOSTELA annular 3 region geometry MOSTELC Cartesian 3 region geometry ja MOSTELA GEO TUBE 3 R REFL RADIUS 0 0 0 39306 0 45802 0 71206 SPLITR 2 1 1 MIX 123 MOSTELC GEO CARCEL 2 X REFL X REFL MESHX 0 0 1 26209 IGE 294 187 Y REFL Y REFL MESHY 0 0 1 26209 RADIUS 0 0 0 39306 0 45802 SPLITR 2 1 MIX 123 mr Case 1 annular Self Shielding calculation SYBIL Transport calculation SYBIL Flux calculation for K no leakage DISCR SYBILT MOSTELA TITLE TCWMO1 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK SYBIL SYBIL MAXR 4 QUA1 5 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY DISCR EDIT 1 NOGC NOLJ GRMIN 5 GRMAX 27 CP ASM LIBRARY DISCR PIJ 3 CALC FLU CP LIBRARY DISCR TYPE K assertS CALC K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8214942 OUT EDI LIBRARY DISCR CALC EDIT 4 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 27 69 SAVE DISCR CP DELETE DISCR CP Case 2 Cartesian Self Shielding calculation SYBIL Transport calculation SYBIL Flux c
152. EVALUATE is also provided An example of conditional testing is shown in the following example involving two modules INTEGER INDEX MODULE MODi MOD2 EVALUATE INDEX REPEAT EVALUATE INDEX INDEX 1 IF INDEX 3 gt THEN list of output objects MOD1 list of input objects data input for MOD1 ELSE list of output objects MOD2 list of input objects data input for MOD2 ENDIF UNTIL INDEX 7 gt An input deck will be built as a collection of e PARAMETER MODULE PROCEDURE LINKED LIST XSM_FILE SEQ BINARY SEQ_ASCII and DIRECT_ACCESS INTEGER REAL CHARACTER DOUBLE and LOGICAL declarations e REDGET calls into procedures only e EVALUATE statements PRINT statements and conditional logic involving variables This type of programming provides the user with much more flexibility than the conventional ap proaches It is possible to build new applications without recompilation simply by changing the order of the module calls and by making modifications to the conditional logic It is very simple to develop a user defined function even if this possibility is not programmed into any module The CLE 2000 control language brings the following capabilities to any code built around the gener alized driver e INTEGER REAL CHARACTER DOUBLE and LOGICAL declarations to contain control language and macro processor variables e macro processor variables For example it is possible to define a
153. FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 127695 EDITION EDI LIBRARY2 TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 MERG COMP COND 4 0 SAVE ON NOBC SYS TRACK INTLIN DELETE SYS TRACK INTLIN kates Transport calculation EXCEL Flux calculation for keff Homogenized properties for rod in fone TRACK INTLIN EXCELT BCI EDIT O MAXR 40 TRAK TISO 2 1 0 SYS ASM LIBRARY2 TRACK INTLIN EDIT 0 FLUX FLU FLUX SVS LIBRARV2 TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 042922 EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY2 TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 MERG COMP COND 4 0 STAT DELS REFE NOBC TRACK INTLIN SYS DELETE TRACK INTLIN SYS ECHO test TCWU06 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 7 TCWUO7 A CANDU 6 type calculation using various leakage options This test case treats the CANDU cell with a cartesian moderator region similar to the cell de scribed in defined Figure 38 using various leakage options The MICROLIB is defined by the procedure TCWUO5Lib c2m presented in Section 6 5 19 Input data for test case TCWUO7 x2m B TEST CASE TCWUO7 CANDU 6 CARTESIAN CELL iaea WLUP Library TEST VARIOUS LEAKAGE OPTIONS x XA XXX E Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used Pa LINKED_LIST LIBRARY CANDU6S CANDU6T CANDU6SV CANDUGTV TRACK SYS FLUX EDITION MODULE GEO EXCELT LIB SHI ASM FLU EDI DELETE END SEQ_BINARY IGE 294 244 INTLIN PROCEDURE assertS k Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 Micr
154. G 32 33 47 64 68 71 72 88 89 DIAM 74 DIFC 71 72 DIFF 12 13 76 77 79 80 145 diff 12 13 DIFFX 12 13 DIFFY 12 13 DIFFZ 12 13 dil 24 DIR 132 133 163 dir 173 DIRA 108 110 DIRE 98 102 DIRECTIONS 132 133 DIRN 98 101 DIRO 98 102 DISCR 188 DIST 132 133 dist 132 133 disxyz 41 42 DMAC 151 DMAC 5 151 DMAC data 151 152 DMAC data 151 DNAME 119 DOWN 163 DPOO 60 61 DPO1 60 61 DPIN 41 43 dpins 41 43 DRAGLIB 7 DRAGLIB1 137 DRAGLIB2 137 DRAGON 2 3 298 DRAGON 16 19 121 122 DREF 153 DREF 153 DRVMPI 178 DRVMPI 178 DSA 74 75 dTime 178 179 DUAL 76 79 80 DUMP 163 164 DUO 157 DUO 5 157 DUO data 157 DUO data 157 dvalc 163 164 dxt 108 ECCO 88 90 93 95 EDI 97 EDI 5 7 19 48 97 125 129 140 142 259 EDINA2 125 128 EDINAM 97 99 102 113 115 125 127 129 139 140 142 144 EDINEW 113 EDIT 10 15 17 30 31 59 71 82 85 88 92 97 98 107 108 114 115 119 121 126 129 132 135 137 139 143 145 146 148 151 155 157 160 162 166 167 171 173 178 179 EDITION 6 7 97 101 113 114 139 EFIS 145 EGAM 145 end 178 END 177 END 3 4 6 177 ENDC 85 86 126 127 143 NDCHAIN 22 23 NDM 98 NDMIX 135 136 NDR 98 152 NDREAC 157 158 NDT 148 149 NER 10 11 145 NERGY 157 energy 10 11 22 23 98 100 ENR 121
155. GO O Q o o ooo 0 00 00 LCL G O C O O O O OU Oo o 00 o oooO oooooOo IF i 1 THEN assertV FLUX ELSEIF i 2 THEN assertV FLUX ELSEIF i 3 THEN assertV FLUX ELSEIF i 4 THEN assertV FLUX ELSEIF i 5 THEN assertV FLUX ENDIF SYS FLUX MACRO EDITION EVALUATE i i 1 UNTIL i 6 FLUX FLUX gt FLUX gt FLUX gt FLUX D O O G O oooo o O O O O O OOOO 0 OOOO 0 oo 0 0 0 O O OOG ooroo OOOO Oo oo0ooooO oo o oo OOOO O DO o o o O OOOO O OOOO OGOOGO OG OOGO eee 2 Oo OGOOGO oo0ooooO GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP LOYATRK DELETE LOYATRK ECHO test TCM10 completed END QUIT LIST ooooo 0 00 0 O ooo O oo o o O O o o Oo ooooo oouoooSo ooooo O o GOG O O O o o o o O oo Oo o ooo O ONOO O O ooo O OOOO gt OOOO oO oooO O O 0 0 0 oo ooo oo ooo 1 REGION 1 REGION 1 REGIONx 1 REGION 1 REGION 6 4 11 TCM11 Comparison of CP and MoC solutions oococc0o OOOO ke o o ooo Ooo0ooo Q OGOGO OGOOGO oooooO 0 0 0 00 0 0000 oooooO OOO O o OOOO ooooo O O OQO oo0oooO oooooO OOOO ooooo oo0oooO Woodend 30 1 708198 30 0 7793926 30 0 5732016 30 0 5556656 30 0 5392905 DELETE SYS FLUX MACRO EDITION gi gt 9 215 This test case is for a 4 x 4 Cartesian assembly in 2 D It i
156. Geometry WATA 18 WATO8 8 WAT16 16 WAT24 24 Tracking EXCELT m WATA GEO CAR2D 3 3 X DIAG X VOID Y REFL MESHX 0 00 1 25 5 00 10 MIX 1 3 2 3 2 2 WATO8 GEO WATA SPLITX 1 3 4 SPLITY WAT16 GEO WATA SPLITX 2 6 8 SPLITY WAT24 GEO WATA SPLITX 3 9 12 SPLITY k o nun un Q gt H erer kike ooo to 19 FIXE 6 4 o o 3 REGIONS 8 REGIONS 16 REGIONS 4 X X X X 24 REGIONS Y DIAG 00 MESHY 0 00 1 25 5 00 10 00 3 912 Tracking EXCELT WATO8 Solution FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM Editing 1 UPPER QUADRANT FLUX 2 FLUX AT X 5 625CM x TRACK WATATRK EXCELT WATOS TITLE TCMO3 WATANABE MAYNARD 8X8 MAXR 300 CUT 1 E 4 TRAK TSPC 12 4 0 SYS ASM MACRO TRACK WATATRK SKIP FLUX FLU SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE S THER 1 E 6 100 EXTE 1 E 6 100 gt assertV FLUX FLUX GROUP 1 REGION 10 4 037368 EDITION EDI MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 195 IGE 294 196 O O ooo PROOO G oO OG O 050wOoO0oOo ONF OVO 10 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 000 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 o 4 0 0 0 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 TRACK WATATRK SYS FLUX DELETE TRACK WATATRK SYS FLUX kasas Tracking EXCELT WAT16 Solution FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM Editing 1 UPPER QUADRANT FLUX 2 FLUX AT X 5 625CM k
157. IBRARY EVO BURNUP LIBRARY FLUX VOLMATF IGE 276 EDIT 3 NOEX DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt 294 ENDIF PIJ DELETE PIJ PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU FLUX PIJ LIBRARY VOLMATF TYPE K EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX SAVE x change delta t for burnup ik IF Timef Timec THEN IF Timec 5 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec ENDIF IF Timec 1 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec ENDIF ENDIF EVALUATE Timei Timef ENDWHILE assertS FLUX res EDITION BURNUP FLUX PIJ LIBRARY INTLINF VOLMATF CANDU6F EDITION K EFFECTIVE and final time if required 5 0 10 0 4 0 5 0 1 1 075343 DELETE EDITION BURNUP FLUX PIJ LIBRARY INTLINF VOLMATF CANDU6F ECHO test TCWU31 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 19 TCWUO5Lib Microlib definition This CLE 2000 procedure is used in previous data sets to define the MICROLIB isotopic content Input data for test case TCWUO5Lib c2m x Procedure TCWUO5Lib Create Library for test CASE TCWUO5 Calling LIBRARY TCWUO5Lib with LIBRARY Linked list TCWU05 iprint print level ikR Define PARAMETERS STRUCTURES and MODULES used PARAMETER LIBRARY MODULE LIB END x Define and read LIB EDIT INTEGER iedit H
158. IGE 294 229 SPHGEOM OUT STEP UP MACRO GEOM MTRACK BIVACT SPHGEOM PRIM 1 2 EDITO OUT SPH OUT MTRACK SPHGEOM MTRACK DELETE SPHGEOM MTRACK DATABASE COMPO EDIT 5 COMM Multi parameter reactor database ENDC INIT DATABASE COMPO DATABASE OUT EDIT 3 res DATABASE ISOT DATABASE STEP UP default STEP UP MIXTURES STEP AT 5 STEP UP CALCULATIONS STEP AT 1 STEP UP MAC RES assertS ISOT NWTO 1 5 186729E 01 assertS ISOT NWTO 2 1 305927E 01 ECHO test TCWU02 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 3 TCWU03 An hexagonal assembly This test case represents a production calculation of a typical hexagonal control assembly Its config uration is presented in Figure 36 Input data for test case TCWU03 x2m TEST CASE TCWU03 MULTICELL HEXAGONAL ASSEMBLY WITH POISON iaea WLUP Library REF none Xxx XX XX X Hui Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used panal LINKED_LIST ASSMBH DISCR LIBRARY CP CALC OUT DATABASE ISOT SPHGEOM MTRACK SEQ_ASCII res MODULE GEO SYBILT BIVACT LIB SHI ASM FLU EDI COMPO SPH DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts yo Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 IGE 294 230 1 3 empty cell fuel cell 0 707297 cm 2 4 poison cell boundary cell generating cell number merged cell number 4 orientation Figure 36 Geometry for test case TCWU03 k LIBRARV
159. ILT Solution PIJ 1 KEFF WITHOUT BUCKLING 2 BUCKLING WITH KEFF 1 3 LEAKAGE WITH KEFF 1 Pais TRACK SYBILT ANGEO TITLE TCMO1 ANNULAR GEOMETRY WITH MACROSCOPIC XS SYBIL EDIT 1 MAXR 5 QUA1 5 SYS ASM MACRO TRACK FLUX FLU SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 4 048651E 01 EDITION EDI MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B BO assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 4 060840E 01 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L BO assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 4 060870E 01 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE FLUX SYS TRACK DELETE FLUX SYS TRACK ECHO test TCMO1 completed END QUIT LIST 6 4 2 TCM02 The Stankovski test case This test case represents a one group calculation of a 7 x 7 PWR assembly The reaction rates obtained from DRAGON can be compared with those obtained using the MARSYAS code 7 The corresponding geometry is shown in Figure 30 where the cell numbers generated by DRAGON are shown IGE 294 192 Figure 30 Geometry for test case TCM02 Input data for test case TCMO2 x2m EE TEST CASE TCM02 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM FOR 1 8 7X7 PWR ASSEMBLY REF Z Stankovski Nucl Sci Eng 92 255 1986 R Roy et al Advances in Mathematics Computation and Reactor
160. INF INTLINS ECHO test TCWU15 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 16 TCWU17 A 2 D CANDU 6 supercell with control rods This test case treats a 2 D CANDU 6 supercell containing fuel clusters and control rods see Fig ure 39 The use of the virtual homogenization mixtures defined by HMIX is also illustrated This test case uses the embedded DRAGON procedure stored in the TCWU17Lib c2m file IGE 294 265 Colored by Region Figure 39 Geometry of 2 D CANDU 6 supercell with control rods Input data for test case TCWU17 x2m B Exemple of the use of HMIX for cell homogenization 2 D supercell with fuel clusters based on AECL supercell model for G2 SOR and MCA with fuel and reactivity devices parallel References PREPARED BY G Marleau on 2013 06 11 koai x modules and data structures k SEQ ASCII MACROLIBF LINKED LIST SORINS SORIN TRACK MicLib FLUX EDITION XSM FILE ASMPIJ SEQ ASCII FigReg ps FigMix ps FigHom ps SEQ ASCII HomMix txt HomHMix txt SEQ BINARV Lines MODULE GEO EXCELT EXCELL SHI ASM LIB FLU EDI UTL DELETE FREE END INFO CPO MAC NXT PSP PROCEDURE TCWU17Lib PROCEDURE assertS INTEGER iedit 1 MicLib TCWU17Lib lt lt iedit gt gt x DEFINE GEOMETRV FOR SUPERCELL CALCULATION SORINS 2D self shielding geometry with SHUT OFF ROD GT in for annular fuel SORIN 2D transport geometry with SHUT OFF ROD
161. INS VOLMATS CANDU6S DELETE BURNUP FLUX PIJ LIBRARY INTLINS VOLMATS CANDU6S IGE 294 254 et 2 group Burnup Pais LIBRARY EDITION STEP UP REF CASEOOO1 EDITION DELETE EDITION PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU PIJ LIBRARY VOLMATF TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 121052 EDITION EDI LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX EDIT 1 MERGE COMP MICR ALL SAVE EVALUATE Timec 1 0 WHILE Timei Timec lt DO EVALUATE Timef Timei Delt IF Timei 0 0 THEN BURNUP LIBRARY EVO LIBRARY FLUX VOLMATF EDIT 3 DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt ELSE BURNUP LIBRARY EVO BURNUP LIBRARY FLUX VOLMATF EDIT 3 NOEX DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt ENDIF PIJ DELETE PIJ PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU FLUX PIJ LIBRARY VOLMATF TYPE K EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX SAVE 225 change delta t for burnup and final time if reguired x IF Timef Timec THEN IF Timec 5 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 5 0 10 0 ENDIF IF Timec 1 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 4 0 5 0 ENDIF ENDIF EVALUATE Timei Timef ENDWHILE assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 075327 res EDITION EDITION BURNUP FLUX PIJ LIBRARY INTLINF VOLMATF CANDU6F DELETE EDITION BURNUP FLUX PIJ LIBRARY INTLINF VOLMATF CANDU6F ECHO test TCWU11 completed END
162. K XA XA XA xXx XX XX AX pu Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used pao LINKED_LIST MOSTELC MOSTELCV TRACK MACRO SYS FLUX EDITION SEQ_BINARY TRKSPC MODULE GEO EXCELT MAC ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts geass Macroscopic XS ee MACRO MAC NGRO 2 ANIS 2 NMIX 2 NIFI 1 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 0 222222 0 833333 SCAT 11 0 19222 2 2 0 75333 0 02 1 1 0 1 22 0 5 0 01 NUSIGF 0 0 0 135 CHI 1 0 0 0 MIX 2 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 2 1 10111 0 04 22 0 0001 0 1 22 0 5 0 01 Geometry MOSTELC Cartesian 2D cell without void region MOSTELCV Cartesian 2D cell with void region Saa MOSTELC GEO CARCEL 2 X REFL X REFL Y REFL Y REFL MESHX 0 0 1 26209 MESHY 0 0 1 26209 RADIUS 0 0 0 39306 0 45802 SPLITR 2 1 MIX 122 MOSTELCV GEO MOSTELC MIX 102 a Tracking EXCELT MOSTELC ANIS 2 for adequate dimensions in PIJK Solution TYPE K B or L Leakage B1 PNL B1 HETE XX xXx IGE 294 haa TRACK TRKSPC EXCELT MOSTELC TITLE TCMO5 ANNULAR GEOMETRY WITH MACROSCOPIC XS MAXR 5 ANIS 2 TRAK TISO 12 20 0 SYS ASM MACRO TRACK TRKSPC PIJK 3 FLUX FLU SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 199508 EDITION EDI MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE K B1 PNL BUCK 1 51429E 03 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 195777 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX
163. L e TUBEZ geometry Lones Ly Ly LL e CAR1D geometry Lzones La e CAR2D geometry without diagonal symmetry Lisos Lyly IGE 294 45 with diagonal symmetry Lally 1 _ Lz 1 Ly zones 9 75 e CARCEL geometries Lones Lp Er F 1 e CAR3D geometry without diagonal symmetry Liones LyLyLz with diagonal symmetry A AA Lzones A 2 2 e CARCELX geometiv Lzones LeL L L T 1 e CARCELY geometry Lzones L L L Lr 1 CARCELZ geometries Lzones L L L Lr 1 e HEX geometry Lzones Ln e HEXT geometry Lares L e HEXCEL geometries Lzones L 1 e HEXZ geometry Liones L Lr e HEXTZ geometry Lzones Lely e HEXCELZ geometries Lzones L L 1 IGE 294 46 For cluster geometries only one region is associated with each zone in a pin even if this pin is repeated npins times For mixed geometries it is important to ensure that Lzones which represents the sum over all the sub geometries of the total number of regions Li associated with each pure sub geometry i computed using the technique described above For cluster geometries only one region is associated with each zone in a pin even if this pin is repeated npins times OR CED XIX Oe isect 1 jsect 0 isect 1 jsect 0 isect 1 jsect 2 isect 1 jsect 2 isect 2 jsect 2 Figure 14 Numerotation of the sectors in a Cartesian cell isect 1 jsect 0 isect 1 jsect 2
164. L keyword to specify that a non multiplicative medium eigenvalue problem is to be treated The eigenvalue in this case is the critical buckling with vanishing fission cross sections The buckling eigenvalue has meaning only in the case of a cell without leakages see the structure descBC in Section 3 3 2 It is also possible to use an open geometry with IGE 294 descleak EXTE maxout epsout THER maxthr epsthr UNKT epsunk REBA OFF ACCE nlibre naccel 93 VOID boundary conditions provided it is closed by the ASM module see Section 3 7 1 using the keywords NORM or ALSB structure describing the general leakage parameters options see Section 3 8 2 keyword to specify that the control parameters for the external iteration are to be mod ified maximum number of external iterations The fixed default value for a case with no leakage model is maxout 2 x np 1 where ny is the number of regions containing fuel The fixed default value for a case with a leakage model is maxout 10 x np 1 convergence criterion for the external iterations The fixed default value is epsout 5 0 x 10 keyword to specify that the control parameters for the thermal iterations are to be modified maximum number of thermal iterations The fixed default value is maxthr 2x ngroup 1 using scattering modified CP or maxthr 4x ngroup 1 using standard CP convergence criterion for the thermal iterations The fixed defa
165. LCMNAM LINKED LIST LCMNAM CHARACTER KEY INTEGER ISET IPOS REAL REFVALUE gt gt KEY lt lt gt gt IPOS lt lt gt gt REFVALUE lt lt INTEGER ITYLCM IGE 294 282 REAL VALUE DELTA MODULE GREP ABORT END GREP LCMNAM TYPE lt lt KEY gt gt gt gt ITYLCM lt lt IF ITYLCM 2 THEN GREP LCMNAM GETVAL lt lt KEY gt gt lt lt IPOS gt gt gt gt VALUE lt lt ELSE PRINT assertS INVALID TYPE ITYLCM ABORT ENDIF EVALUATE DELTA VALUE REFVALUE REFVALUE ABS IF DELTA 1 0E 4 lt THEN PRINT TEST SUCCESSFUL DELTA DELTA ELSE PRINT L PRINT TEST FAILURE PRINT us PRINT REFERENCE REFVALUE CALCULATED VALUE ABORT ENDIF END Input data for test case assert V c2m Assert procedure for non regression testing Recover a value from a list of real arrays Author A Hebert XX XA XX X PARAMETER LCMNAM LINKED_LIST LCMNAM CHARACTER KEY INTEGER ISET IPOS REAL REFVALUE 11 gt gt KEY lt lt gt gt ISET lt lt gt gt IPOS lt lt gt gt REFVALUE lt lt INTEGER ITYLCM REAL VALUE DELTA MODULE GREP ABORT END GREP LCMNAM TYPE lt lt KEY gt gt gt gt ITYLCM lt lt IF ITYLCM 10 THEN GREP LCMNAM STEP UP lt lt KEY gt gt GETVAL lt lt ISET gt gt lt lt IPOS gt gt gt gt VALUE lt lt ELSE PRINT assertV INVALID TYPE ITYLCM ABORT ENDIF EVALUATE DELTA VALU
166. LIB is defined by the procedure TCWUO5Lib c2m presented in Section 6 5 19 Input data for test case TCWU31 x2m k oo AA a b c c d Power UN I 31 9713 kw kg for 69 Groups Burnup time interval Delt TEST CASE TCWU31 CANDU 6 ANNULAR CELL iaea WLUP Library MULTI PARAMETER COMPO ACCESS FOR MACRO DEPLETION TWO GROUP BURNUP POWER KW BURN POWER KW KG URANIUM MASS U02 REAL DENSITY U02 EFF DENSITY U02 TEMPERATURE ENRICHMENT COOLANT D2 AT Y MODERATOR D2 AT NUMBER OF DAYS Define variables Burnup paremeters 615 31 19 10 10 941 99 99 50 00000 97130 23600 59300 43750 28998 71140 222 911 300 day for O to 300 day Groups Burnup time interval Delt 1 day for 0 to 1 day 4 days for 1 to 5 days 5 days for 5 to 10 days 10 days for 10 to 50 days 20 days for 50 to 150 days 50 days for 150 to 300 days Days with burnup interval changes 1 0 5 0 10 0 50 0 150 0 and 300 0 days Burnup control time variables Timei Timef 0 0 to 300 0 days IGE 294 274 Timei initial time Timef final time E REAL Power Delt Timec Timei Timef 31 9713 1 0 300 0 0 0 0 0 us Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used pi LINKED LIST LIBRARV LINKED LIST CANDU6S CANDU6F VOLMATS VOLMATF PIJ FLUX BURNUP EDITION DATABASE SEQ_BINARY INTLINS INTLINF SEQ ASCII res
167. M object to be transfer to the backup LCM object This LCM object must be in a memory resident or XSM based format EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of this module The amount of output produced by this tracking module will vary substantially depending on the print level specified STEP keyword used to move in the LCM object hierarchy of NAME2 before making the backup UP keyword used to move up towards a sub directory of NAME2 of the active directory NOMDIR backup the information into the sub directory named NOMDIR AT keyword used to move up towards a component in an heterogeneous list of NAME2 index backup the information into the index th component of the heterogeneous list If NAME1 appears only on the LHS it is created If NAME1 appears on both the LHS and the RHS it is updated IGE 294 167 4 5 The RECOVER module This module is used to recover from a backup LCM object see Section 4 4 one or many LCM objects memory resident or XSM based The calling specifications are Table 90 Structure RECOVER NAME RECOVER NAME NAMEI EDIT iprint STEP UP NOMDIR AT index NAME1 character 12 name of the LCM objects that are to be recovered NAME2 character 12 name of a backup LCM object EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of this module The amount of output produ
168. MACRO TRACK TYPE L PO SIGS EXTE 5 1 0E 5 BUCK 0 07 assertS FLUX 7B2 B1HOM 1 2 15400E 01 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L B1 SIGS EXTE 5 1 0E 5 BUCK 0 07 assertS FLUX 7B2 B1HOM 1 7 22773E 02 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L P1 SIGS EXTE 5 1 0E 5 BUCK 0 07 assertS FLUX 7B2 B1HOM 1 7 25999E 02 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX 206 IGE 294 207 EDIT 3 SAVE ECHO test TCMO6 completed END QUIT LIST 6 4 7 TCM07 Test of boundary conditions This test is for a 2 D Cartesian cell with refelctive and void boundary conditions Input data for test case TCMO7 x2m SLS TEST CASE TCMO7 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS FISSION SOURCE PROBLEM 2 D CARTESIAN CELL REFLECTIVE AND VOID BOUNDARY CONDITIONS XK XA XA XA XX XX xXx REF none deis Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used bos LINKED_LIST MACRO LATGEOR LATREGR SYSR FLUXR EDITR LATGEOV LATREGV SYSV FLUXV EDITV SEQ_BINARY TRKR TRKV MODULE MAC GEO EXCELT ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts dos Macroscopic XS esos MACRO MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 2 NIFI 1 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 0 75 SCAT 1 1 0 50 NUSIGF 1 00 CHI 1 0 MIX 2 TOTAL 0 75 SCAT 1 1 0 50 yoo Geometry LATGEOR Cartesian 2D with reflection BC LATGEOR Cartesian 2D with void BC Tracking EXCELT
169. MSD4 WIMSAECL NDAS APLIB1 APLIB2 APXSM FIL NAMEFIL descmix1 It is possible to reset an existing microlib i e MICLIB is present in the RHS and to reprocess all the isotopes from the cross section libraries In this case desclib takes the simplified form IGE 294 17 Table 8 Structure desclib EDIT iprint INTR SUBG PT PTMC PTSL NEWL MACR MIXS Alternatively if OLDLIB is absent or represents a second MICROLIB desclib takes the form Table 9 Structure desclib EDIT iprint MAXS descmix2 Finally if OLDLIB represents BURNUP structure desclib takes the form Table 10 Structure desclib EDIT iprint BURN iburn tburn descmix2 with EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing in this operator It must be set to 0 if no printing on the output file is reguired while values gt 0 will increase in steps the amount of information transferred to the output file If iprint gt 10 the depletion chain is printed in the format of structure descdepl If iprint gt 20 the depletion chain is also printed in the format of structure descdeplA2 MXIS keyword used to redefine the maximum number of isotopes per mixture nmisot the maximum number of isotopes per mixture By default up to 300 different isotopes per mixture are permitted NMIX keyword used to define the number of material m
170. N IN TABLE 1 ref p 411 EDITION EDI FLUX MACRO TRACK 212 IGE 294 EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 000 0 000 0 00 0 0 000000000000 o 00 0 O O O 0 0 0 0 0 00000000000 000 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0000000000 0000 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 000000000 0000 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00000000 0000 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0000000 0000 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 000000 0000 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 000 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 00000 0000 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 000 0 O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0000 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000 0 0 0 0 0 002 0 03 00 4 0 000 0 00 0 0 0 0 1 000 0 0 00 0 0 5 0 0 60 0 7 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 8 00 9 O 0 0 0 0 5 625CM FOR 24X24 FLUX AT X EDITION EDI EDITION FLUX MACRO TRACK EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION o 00 0 0 O O 0 0 0 1 0 000000000000 0200000 0 00 0 0 00000000000 0 300000 0 0 0 0 o 0000000000 0 40 00000 0 0 0 0 000000000 0500000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 o 60000 00 0 0 0 0 0000000 0 700 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 000000 0 8 0000 0 0 0 0 0 o 00000 09 00000 0 0 0 0 0 0000 010 000000 0 0 0 O 00 00 0 0 000 0 00 0 0 0 0 11 012 000000 0 0 0 0 0 013 000000 0 0 0 O 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 000 0 000 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IGE 294 213 WATATRK DELETE WATATRK assertV FLUX FLUX GROUP 1 REGION 30 4 896158 ECHO test TCMO9 completed
171. Ni58 MoNat A127 016 572435 0 613142 MIX 123 RADIUS 0 0 0 412660 0 474364 MIX 8 4 5 C2 MESHX 0 0 1 31472 MIX 8 4 6 258 296 227 760167 252 258 296 227 760167 252 258 296 227 6016 a 17 X 17 normal PWR assembly gt C3 MESHY 0 0 1 31472 MIX 847 32188E 5 89281E 6 10277E 6 35838E 2 11122E 5 99383E 5 77614E 6 03479E 6 36010E 2 96591E 5 65011E 5 65389E 6 63569E 7 4 49355E 2 258 IGE 294 Transport calculation SYBIL Flux calculation for B1 homogeneous leakage Editing using SPH model for transport diffusion ease DISCR1 SYBILT ASSMB TITLE TCWU13 17 X 17 MULTICELL PWR BENCHMARK WITHOUT POISON MAXR 400 QUA2 6 3 DISCR2 FILTRK NXT ASSMB TITLE TCWU13 17 X 17 MULTICELL PWR BENCHMARK WITHOUT POISON TISO 10 20 0 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY DISCR1 EDIT O NOLJ CP ASM LIBRARY DISCR2 FILTRK CALC FLU CP LIBRARY DISCR2 TYPE B B1 assertS CALC K INFINITY 1 1 256567 OUT EDI LIBRARY DISCR1 CALC ASSMB EDIT 3 UPS SAVE MICR RES MERGE CELL COND 4 0 ECHO test TCWU13 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 14 TCWU14 SPH Homogenisation without tracking 259 This case illustrates the use of the SPH homogenisation procedure in the EDI module of DRAGON when a tracking data structure is provided as input This test case also uses the embedded DRAGON procedure stored in the TCWUO5Lib c2m fil
172. O TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L Bi PNL assertS FLUX K INFINITV 1 1 223230 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX DELETE FLUX FLUX FLU SYS MACRO TRACK IGE 294 205 TYPE K B1 HETE BUCK 1 40181E 03 assertS FLUX K INFINITV 1 1 222947 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B B1 HETE KEFF 1 228007 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 227979 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B Bi HETE R BUCK Z 5 00993E 04 assertS FLUX K INFINITV 1 1 222990 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B Bi HETE Z BUCK R 1 001986E 03 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 223001 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE B B1 HETE assertS FLUX K INFINITV 1 1 223001 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L B1 HETE R BUCK Z 5 00993E 04 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 222994 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE L Bi HETE Z BUCK R 1 001986E 03 assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 223001 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 S
173. O keyword used to compute the P scattering reduced collision probability or system ma trices required by the ECCO isotropic streaming model By default this information is not calculated IGE 294 91 3 8 The FLU module The FLU module is used to solve the linear system of multigroup collision probability or response matrix equations in DRAGON Different types of solution are available such as fixed source problem fixed source eigenvalue problem GPT type or different types of eigenvalue problems The calling specifications are Table 44 Structure FLU FLUNAM FLU FLUNAM PIJNAM LIBNAM TRKNAM TRKFIL TRKFLP TRKGPT descflu where FLUNAM character 12 name of the FLUXUNK data structure containing the solution L_FLUX signature If FLUNAM appears on the RHS the solution previously stored in FLU NAM flux and buckling is used to initialize the new iterative process otherwise a uniform unknown vector and a zero buckling are used PIJNAM character 12 name of the ASMPIJ data structure containing the group dependent system matrices L PIJ signature see Section 3 7 LIBNAM character 12 name of the MACROLIB or MICROLIB data structure that contains the macroscopic cross sections L MACROLIB or L_LIBRARY signature see Sections 3 1 and 3 2 Module FLU is performing a direct or adjoint calculation depending if the adjoint flag is set to false or true in the STATE VECTOR record of the MACROLIB TRKNAM ch
174. O206 gt gt lt lt COMBO506 gt gt lt lt COMBO301 gt gt lt lt COMB0302 gt gt lt lt COMB0303 gt gt lt lt COMB0304 gt gt lt lt COMBO305 gt gt lt lt COMBO306 gt gt 87 In this case U is self shielded within six distributed regions labeled W1 to W6 and each of these regions are merging volumes belonging to five different fuel rods The mixture indices of the 30 resonant volumes belonging to the fuel are CLE 2000 variables labeled lt lt COMB0101 gt gt to lt lt COMBO506 gt gt IGE 294 88 3 7 The ASM module We will now describe the assembly modules which can be used to prepare the group dependent com plete collision probability or the assembly matrices reguired by the flux solution module of DRAGON The assembly module ASM is generally called after a tracking module it recovers tracking lengths and material numbers from the sequential tracking file and then computes the collision probability or group dependent system matrices under various normalizations The calling specifications are Table 42 Structure ASM PIJNAM ASM PIJNAM LIBNAM TRKNAM TRKFIL descasm where PIJNAM character 12 name of ASMPIJ data structure containing the system matrices If PIJ NAM appears on the RHS the descasm information previously stored in PIJNAM is kept LIBNAM character 12 name of the MACROLIB or MICROLIB data structure that contains the macroscopic cross sections see Sec
175. OD2R GEO TUBE 2 MIX 17 20 HMIX 1 1 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 3 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 1 04719755 0 0000 1 04719755 ROD3L GEO TUBE 2 MIX 8 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 6 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 2 87979327 2 35619449 1 83259571 1 83259571 2 35619449 2 87979327 ROD3R GEO TUBE 2 MIX 18 20 HMIX 1 1 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 6 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 1 30899694 0 78539816 0 26179939 0 26179939 0 78539816 1 30899694 ROD4L GEO TUBE 2 MIX 9 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 9 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 1 74532925 2 09439510 2 44346095 2 79252680 3 14159265 3 49065850 3 83972435 4 18879020 4 53785606 RODAR GEO TUBE 2 MIX 19 20 HMIX 1 1 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 9 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 1 39626340 1 04719755 0 69813170 0 34906585 0 0 0 34906585 0 69813170 1 04719755 1 39626340 FXYR GEO CARCEL 5 2 1 MESHX 7 14375 0 0 7 14375 MESHY 7 14375 7 14375 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 7 00 HMIX 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIX Li 12 13 14 15 15 1 2 3 4 5 5 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2L ROD2R ROD3L ROD3R ROD4L ROD4R ROD1 GEO TUBE 2 1 2 MIX 16 20 610 HMIX 1100 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 MESHX 0 6540 0 6540 MESHY 0 6540 0 0 0 6540 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2L GEO TUBE 2 MIX 17 20 HMIX 1 1 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 3 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 2 09439510 3 14159265 4 18879020 ROD2R GEO TUBE 2 MIX 7 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0
176. OWER object named POWNAM generated in DON JON This option is useful in micro depletion cases The neutron flux recovered from POWNAM is generally normalized to the power of the full core It is therefore recom mended to use the KEEP option in DEPL data structure recover the fission yield data from DEPL CHAIN directory of MICNAM or OLDMIC object default option With this option the fission yield data is the same in all material mixtures recover the fission yield data from PIFI and PVIELD records present in isotopic directories of MICNAM or OLDMIC object With this option the fission yield data is mixture dependent This option is useful in micro depletion cases keyword to select depleting material mixtures By default all mixtures with depleting isotopes are set as depleting indices of depleting material mixtures keyword to select material mixtures producing power By default e if MIXB is not set all mixtures with isotopes producing power are set as producing power e if MIXB is set the same mixtures mixbrn are set as producing power indices of material mixtures producing power IGE 294 111 3 10 2 Power normalization in EVO Flux induced depletion is dependent of the flux or power normalization factor given after key words FLUX POWR or W CC The depletion steps given after key words SAVE DEPL or SET are set in time units Traditionally the power normalization factor is given in MW tonne l and the depletion st
177. POWER 31 971 FUEL TEMP SHI LIBRARY VOLMATS INTLINS EXCELT CANDU6F EDIT 0 NOLJ 941 29 EDIT O MAXR 31 TRAK TISO 5 10 0 SYMM 12 IGE 294 239 PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU PIJ LIBRARY VOLMATF TYPE K assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 121034 EDITION EDI LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX COND 4 0 MERGE MIX 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 O MICR RES SAVE ON moderator DATABASE COMPO DATABASE EDITION EDIT 3 STEP UP EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX COND 4 0 MERGE COMP MICR 1 Xe135 SAVE ON fuel s Burnup loop for first step BURNUP is created while for other steps it is modified a WHILE Timei Timec lt DO EVALUATE Timef Timei Delt IF Timei 0 0 THEN BURNUP LIBRARY EVO LIBRARY FLUX VOLMATF DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt ELSE BURNUP LIBRARY EVO BURNUP LIBRARY FLUX VOLMATF NOEX DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt ENDIF LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY VOLMATS INTLINS EDIT O NOLJ PIJ DELETE PIJ PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU FLUX PIJ LIBRARY VOLMATF TYPE K EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX SAVE ON fuel BURNUP LIBRARY EVO BURNUP LIBRARY FLUX VOLMATF SAVE lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt DATABASE COMPO DATABASE EDITION BURNUP LIBRARY EDIT 3 STEP UP SET lt lt Timef gt gt
178. R GLOB LOCA where EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of this module The amount of output produced by this tracking module will vary substantially depending on the print level specified B2 keyword to specify that the buckling correction dB is to be applied to the cross sec tion to be stored on the reactor database By default fixed default such a correction is not taken into account NOTR keyword to specify that the cross section to be stored on the reactor database are not to be transport corrected By default fixed default transport corrected cross section IGE 294 STEP NOMDIR BURNUP PREFIX EXTRACT ALL NEWNAME OLDNAME NAME NDIR GLOB LOCA 140 are considered when the CTRA option is activated in MAC or LIB see Sections 3 1 and 3 2 keyword to specify that a specific cross section directory stored in EDINAM via the SAVE option in the EDI module is to be transferred to CPONAM character 12 name of the specific cross section directory to be treated keyword to specify that a chain of cross section directory stored in EDINAM via the SAVE option in the EDI module will be transferred to CPONAM character 8 prefix name of the cross section directory to be treated DRAGON will transfer into the reactor database all the directories with full name NAMDIR created using WRITE NAMDIR A8 14 PREFIX nb where nb is
179. RACK INTLIN EXCELT CANDU6SV TITLE TCWUO7 CANDU 6 CARTESIAN FUEL TEMP 941 29 EDIT O MAXR 14 TRAK TISO 7 20 0 SYMM 4 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY TRACK INTLIN EDIT O NOLJ TRACK INTLIN DELETE TRACK INTLIN TRACK INTLIN EXCELT CANDU6TV TITLE TCWUO7 CANDU 6 CARTESIAN FUEL TEMP 941 29 EDIT O MAXR 32 ANIS 2 TRAK TISO 7 20 0 SYMM 4 SYS ASM LIBRARY TRACK INTLIN EDIT O PIJK FLUX FLU SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 139288 EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE COND 4 0 TAKE REGI 1 4 7 10 16 24 FLUX FLU FLUX SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE B B1 PNL assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 131289 EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE COND 4 0 TAKE REGI 1 4 7 10 16 24 FLUX FLU FLUX SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE B B1 HETE assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 131540 EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY TRACK FLUX IGE 294 EDIT 3 SAVE COND 4 0 TAKE REGI 1 4 7 10 16 24 FLUX SYS DELETE FLUX SYS SYS ASM LIBRARY TRACK INTLIN EDIT O PIJ ECCO FLUX FLU SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE B B1 ECCO assertS FLUX K INFINITY 1 1 131549 EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 SAVE COND 4 0 TAKE REGI 1 4 7 10 16 24 FLUX SYS TRACK INTLIN DELETE FLUX SYS TRACK INTLIN ECHO test TCWUO7 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 8 TCWU08 Burnup of an homogeneous cell 246 This case
180. RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 9 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 1 74532925 2 09439510 2 44346095 2 79252680 3 14159265 3 49065850 3 83972435 4 18879020 4 53785606 ROD4R GEO TUBE 2 MIX 9 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 9 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 1 39626340 1 04719755 0 69813170 0 34906585 0 0 0 34906585 0 69813170 1 04719755 1 39626340 X Rod and GT absent k IGE 294 271 TRACK Lines NXT SORINS EDIT 5 TISO 40 30 0 MicLib SHI MicLib TRACK Lines H TRACK Lines DELETE TRACK Lines TRACK Lines NXT SORIN EDIT 5 TISO 40 30 0 H FigReg ps PSP TRACK TYPE REGI FigMix ps PSP TRACK TYPE MIXT FigHom ps PSP TRACK TYPE HMIX ASMPIJ ASM MicLib TRACK Lines PIJ FLUX FLU ASMPIJ MicLib TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 036408 EDITION EDI FLUX MicLib TRACK EDIT 3 COND 0 625 MERG HMIX SAVE ON SORINHMIX HomHMix txt EDITION EDITION DELETE EDITION EDITION EDI FLUX MicLib TRACK EDIT 3 COND 0 625 MERG MIX0000000000 11111111111 SAVE ON SORINMIX HomMix txt EDITION EDITION DELETE EDITION TRACK FLUX ASMPIJ Lines DELETE TRACK FLUX ASMPIJ Lines ECHO test TCWU17 completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 17 TCWU17Lib Microlib definition This CLE 2000 procedure is used in data set TCWU17 to define the MICROLIB isotopic content Input data for test case TCWU17Lib c2m gone
181. RARY TCWUO5Lib goo Geometry CANDU6S CANDUG6F COMPO DELETE END lt lt iedit gt gt 13 regions annular cluster for self shielding 31 regions annular cluster for transport oie CANDU6S GEO TUBE 5 R REFL RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 16 12171 MIX 12345 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 RODI GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 CANDU6F ROD1 ROD2 RODS ROD4 omo Create Si DATABASE EDIT 5 STEP UP COMM INIT STEP UP COMM PARA PARA INIT iaa Self Sh PEO VOLMATS INTLINS TITLE GEO ROD1 GEO ROD1 GEO ROD1 GEO ROD1 GEO ROD2 GEO ROD3 GEO ROD4 GEO CANDU6S MIX 7 10 MIX 8 10 MIX 9 10 SPLITR SPLITR 2 1 SPLITR 2 1 SPLITR 2 1 SPLITR 2 1 NPIN 6 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 0 0000 NPIN 12 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 0 261799 NPIN 18 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 0 0 611110 Transport calculation Flux calculation for keff TCWU05 CANDU 6 ANNULAR POWER 31 971 FUEL TEMP the reactor database COMPO moderator Multi parameter reactor database for moderator ENDC gt fuel Multi parameter reactor database for fuel ENDC BURN IRRA FLUB FLUB ielding calculation EXCEL EXCEL EXCELT CANDU6S 941 29 EDIT O MAXR 13 TRAK TISO 5 10 0 SYMM 12 LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF TITLE TCWU05 CANDU 6 ANNULAR
182. REFL MESHX 14 2875 14 2875 Y REFL Y REFL MESHY 14 2875 14 2875 263 31 regions annular cluster for transport RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 14 00 MIX 123455 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 ROD1 GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2 GEO ROD1 MIX 7 10 NPIN 6 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 0 0000 ROD3 GEO ROD1 MIX 8 10 NPIN 12 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 0 261799 ROD4 GEO ROD1 MIX 9 10 NPIN 18 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 0 0 CANDU6F GEO CANDU6S SPLITR 611110 ROD1 GEO RODI SPLITR 2 1 ROD2 GEO ROD2 SPLITR 2 1 ROD3 GEO ROD3 SPLITR 2 1 RODA GEO ROD4 SPLITR 2 1 fosos Self Shielding calculation EXCEL Transport calculation EXCEL Flux calculation for keff oe VOLMATS INTLINS NXT CANDU6S TITLE TCWUOS CANDU 6 CARTESIAN POWER EDIT O TRAK TISO 5 10 0 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY VOLMATS INTLINS EDIT 0 VOLMATF INTLINF NXT CANDUGF TITLE TCWUO5 CANDU 6 CARTESIAN POWER EDIT O TRAK TISO 5 10 0 PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU PIJ LIBRARY VOLMATF TYPE K asserts FLUX EDITION COND 4 EDITION COND 4 yoo K EFFECTIVE 1 1 120613 EDI FLUX LIBRARY VOLMATF O MERGE MIX 0 0 0 0 1 00 0 0 0 SAVE ON EDI EDITION FLUX LIBRARY VOLMATF O MERGE COMP MICR 1 Xe135 SAVE Burnup loop for first step BURNUP is created while for other steps it is modified ae WHILE T
183. ROCEL keyword to specify that in a do it yourself type geometry rather than using a statistical arrangement of cells a pre calculated cell distribution is to be considered If the POURCE structure is given without the PROCEL structure a statistical approximation is used as defined in Ref 48 ijcel array giving the pre calculated probability for a neutron leaving a cell of type i to enter PJ y giving 8 a cell of tvpe j without crossing anv other cell We require S pcinl i pijeel i j S J peinl j pijcel j 7 lt 1074 where S and S j are the exterior surfaces area of the cells of type i and j respectively Examples of geometry definitions can be found in Section 6 2 IGE 294 58 3 4 The tracking modules A tracking module is required to analyze a spatial domain geometry assuming a specific algorithm will be used for the collision probability or method of characteristics calculations It performs zone num bering operations volume and surface area calculations and generates the required integration lines for a geometry that was previously defined in the GEO module These operations are carried out differently depending on the solution algorithm used Many different operators are available for tracking in DRAGON The SYBILT module is used for l D geometries either plane cylindrical or spherical and interface current tracking inside heterogeneous blocks The EXCELT module is used to perform full cell collision probability
184. RTUAL sub geometries 4 S type two dimensional non standard geometries IS 5 The double heterogeneity option The calling specification for this module is Table 24 Structure SVBILT TRKNAM SYBILT TRKNAM GEONAM desctrack descsybil where TRKNAM character 12 name of the TRACKING data structure that will contain region volume and surface area vectors in addition to region identification pointers and other tracking information If TRKNAM also appears on the RHS the previous tracking parameters will be applied by default on the current geometry GEONAM character 12 name of the GEOMETRY data structure desctrack structure describing the general tracking data see Section 3 4 descsybil structure describing the transport tracking data specific to SYBILT The SYBILT specific tracking data in descsybil is defined as Table 25 Structure descsybil MAXJ maxcur MAXZ maxint HALT QUA1 iqual QUA2 iqua2 nsegment EQW GAUS l l ROTH ROT DPOO DPO1 WIGN ASKE SANC LIGN RECT QUAB iquab SAPO HEBE where MAXJ keyword to specify the maximum number of interface currents surrounding the blocks in the calculations IGE 294 maxcur MAXZ maxint HALT QUAL iqual QUA2 iqua2 nsegment EQW GAUS ROTH ROT DP00 DPO1 WIGN 61 the maximum number of interface currents surrounding the blocks
185. S EDIT O NOLJ TRACK SYBILT MOSTELA TITLE TCWU04 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK WITH BURNUP EDIT 1 MAXR 4 SYS ASM LIBRARY TRACK FLUX FLU SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE K Bi PNL BUCK 0 2948E 2 EDITION EDI LIBRARY TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 MICR RES MERG COMP COND 4 0 SAVE flv Burnup loop for first step BURNUP is created while for other steps it is modified two burnup per step 1 get a first approximation of final composition followed by a transport calculation 2 use approximation for final flux distribution to get a better approximation for final composition XK XA XA XA XX XX Xx pus EVALUATE evoend 0 0 WHILE evoend step2 lt DO EVALUATE evobeg evoend EVALUATE evoend step2 IF istep 1 THEN BURNUP LIBRARY EVO LIBRARY FLUX TRACK SAVE lt lt evobeg gt gt DAY POWR 36 8 DEPL lt lt evobeg gt gt lt lt evoend gt gt DAY POWR 36 8 SET lt lt evoend gt gt DAY ELSE BURNUP LIBRARY EVO BURNUP LIBRARY FLUX TRACK SAVE lt lt evobeg gt gt DAY POWR 36 8 NOEX DEPL lt lt evobeg gt gt lt lt evoend gt gt DAY POWR 36 8 SET lt lt evoend gt gt DAY ENDIF LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY TRACKS EDIT O NOLJ SYS DELETE SYS SYS ASM LIBRARY TRACK FLUX FLU FLUX SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE K Bi PNL BUCK 0 2948E 2 BURNUP LIBRARY EVO BURNUP LIBRARY FLUX TRACK SAVE lt lt evoend gt gt DAY POWR 36 8 DEPL lt lt evobeg gt gt lt lt evoend gt gt DAY POWR 36 8
186. SET lt lt evoend gt gt DAY LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY TRACKS EDIT O NOLJ IGE 294 236 SYS DELETE SYS SYS ASM LIBRARY TRACK FLUX FLU FLUX SYS LIBRARY TRACK TYPE K B1 PNL BUCK 0 2948E 2 EDITION EDI EDIT 3 SAVE BURNUP LIBRARY DATABASE EDIT 3 SET lt lt evoend gt gt DAY COMPO EVALUATE step2 step3 step4 step5 step3 step4 step5 step2 EVALUATE istep ENDWHILE istep 1 EDITION LIBRARY TRACK FLUX EVO BURNUP LIBRARY FLUX TRACK SAVE lt lt evoend gt gt DAY POWR 36 8 DATABASE EDITION BURNUP assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 0 7322814 res DATABASE ISOT DATABASE STEP UP default STEP UP MIXTURES STEP AT 1 STEP STEP NWTO 1 NWTO 2 asserts ISOT assertS ISOT ECHO test TCWU04 completed END QUIT LIST UP CALCULATIONS STEP AT 2 UP MAC RES 3 838717E 01 1 695042E 01 6 5 5 TCWU05 A CANDU 6 type annular cell with burnup This test case represents the typical CANDU type cell with an annular moderator region defined in Figure 38 Both its cross section and depletion data are taken from the same WIMSD4 file Depletion calculations are performed for 50 day at a fixed power The MICROLIB is defined by the procedure TCWUO5Lib c2m presented in Section 6 5 19 Input data for test case TCWU05 x2m ko TEST CASE TCWUO5 CANDU 6 ANNULAR CELL x iaea WLUP Library POWER KW 615 00000
187. SQ 121 122 ISONAM 121 122 isonaml 143 isonam2 143 144 IGE 294 ISOT 126 128 143 144 isot 85 86 ISOTOPE 157 ISOTXS 98 101 isplh 76 77 79 81 isplth 41 42 ispltr 41 42 53 ispltx 41 53 isplty 41 53 ispltz 41 42 53 istep 10 12 istis 71 73 isymm 63 66 67 69 ITEM 179 ITER 114 117 ITMAX 175 itmax 175 iTo 179 itype 171 iuv 132 133 ivalc 163 164 izae 22 JAVAPENO 155 jmix 47 54 JOUT 98 102 JPMT 43 jsect 41 42 K 92 94 121 122 KAPS 108 109 KCODE 148 149 kct 148 149 KEEP 108 110 KEFF 94 96 KEY 281 KRYL 71 73 L 92 LO 175 lc 47 54 LCMD 63 65 67 69 71 72 LCMNAM 281 LEAK 10 11 16 18 114 117 len 178 LEVEL 82 83 LEXA 71 72 LEXF 71 73 IFlag 175 Igrmax 82 83 85 Igrmin 82 83 85 lh 30 31 LIB 16 LIB 4 6 8 16 19 83 84 109 111 121 140 150 186 223 254 LIBNAM 88 91 94 96 97 113 114 301 LIBNEW 113 LIBRARY 150 LIBRARY 188 LIGN 60 62 LINKED_LIST 3 288 LIVO 74 75 LJ 82 83 LKRD 94 LOCA 126 127 139 140 143 LONG 67 70 lp 30 31 47 53 57 lr 29 31 41 42 LSN 67 69 LUMP 79 80 Ix 29 31 41 ly 29 31 41 Iz 29 31 41 m 74 75 m file 132 M2T 135 M2T 5 135 M2T data 135 M2T data 135 MAC 9 MAC 4 6 9 12 34 140 150 190 MACGEO 98 102 MACLIB 9 11 15 MACLIB1 150 MACLIB2 150 M
188. STAT 6 170 STD 114 116 STEP 10 12 114 115 126 129 130 139 140 162 163 166 167 171 STIS 71 73 STRD 145 STRNAME 3 STRUCT 173 SUBG 16 19 84 SUBGEO 30 32 suffix 85 86 SUM 178 SYBIL 98 99 SYBILT 60 SYBILT 1 4 6 48 58 60 61 83 86 89 102 116 117 180 181 183 185 188 190 223 SYME 32 34 47 64 68 SYMM 63 66 67 69 NrnNnNrDN un T 150 T 5 150 TAKE 98 99 101 TALLY 148 149 TALLY ENDT 149 tburn 17 20 TCOH 24 25 TCOOL 119 306 tcooldown 119 tcoolref 119 tcoolup 119 TCWUO5 261 TDXS 108 110 TEMP 126 127 135 136 143 144 temp 24 25 121 122 tempd 24 25 TEXT80 114 117 TFUEL 119 120 tfueldown 119 120 tfuelref 119 120 tfuelup 119 120 THER 24 25 92 93 THO2 121 123 TIME 126 127 142 144 178 179 TISO 63 65 67 69 223 TITL 59 TITLE 59 119 TIXS 108 110 TLM 132 TLM 5 70 132 TMODE 119 tmodedown 119 120 tmoderef 119 120 tmodeup 119 120 TMP 121 122 TMT 71 73 TO 137 179 to 179 TOL 175 tol 175 TOP1 145 TOTA 145 TOTAL 12 13 TOUT 143 145 TRACK 148 151 153 TRACKING 6 58 60 63 67 71 74 76 79 82 84 88 91 97 99 107 114 132 188 189 TRACKN 111 TRAK 63 65 TRAN 32 33 85 86 135 145 TRANC 11 13 TRIVAT 79 TRIVAT 4 58 59 79 TRKFIL 63 64 67 68 71 82 84 85 88 91 113 114 13
189. STRUCTURE OF THE DRAGON INPUT 2 2 1 Data OTRA a i a bate ee ek eee ee ee as ee ee 2 2 2 DRAGON Data Structure and Module Declarations 3 2 3 The DRAGON Modules ahaaa aaa 4 2 4 The Utility Modules uv uste a a ee ee oe eA OE a 6 2 5 The DRAGON Data Structures k a tk k k OH 6 2 6 Main Updates in DRAGON as 7 3 THE DRAGON MODULES siccae k k k ee he bee es 9 SL The MAG modulo dios ook aa a a a Res 9 poled Input structure for module MAC 0 0 10 Sele Macroscopic cross section definition 0008 ee eee 12 Delay Update structure for operator MAC Ls 14 3 2 The LIB mod le cid Pee he OE Ew eee be ee ee ee as 16 Beal Data input for module LIBS 222 be aa ee Rw Sa 16 oe Depletion data structure e 22 3 2 3 Mixture description structure oaoa a ee 23 de The BROS modules io a cn ok d E a cs ES 29 aL Data input for module GEG k we i PE 29 3 0 2 Boundary CONTIGO K pL koe eae Cae Ree aon ee 32 DA Spatial properties of geometry Ls 41 3 3 4 Physical properties of geometry eee ee ee 46 3 3 0 Double heterogeneity o ee ee 56 3 3 6 Do it yourself geometries lt 56 3 4 The tracking modules oe o wed oud ee ee ee oe es 58 3 4 1 The SVBILT tracking module sa a we Ra a 60 3 4 2 The EXCELT tracking module o 63 3 4 3 The UXT tracking Modules K A e a eee Re 67 3 4 4 The MCCGT tracking m
190. Section 3 4 descshi structure describing the self shielding options Each time the SHI module is called a sub directory is updated in the MICROLIB data structure to hold the last values defined in the descshi structure The next time this module is called these values will be used as floating defaults 3 5 1 Data input for module SHI Table 39 Structure descshi EDIT iprint GRMIN Igrmin GRMAX lermax MXIT imxit EPS valeps LJ NOLJ GC NOGC NOTR l LEVEL ilev PIJJARM where EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint IGE 294 iprint GRMIN Igrmin GRMAX Igrmax MXIT imxit EPS valeps LJ NOLJ GC NOGC NOTR LEVEL ilev PIJ ARM 83 index used to control the printing of this module The amount of output produced by this tracking module will vary substantially depending on the print level specified keyword to specify the minimum group number considered during the self shielding process first group number considered during the self shielding process By default Igrmin is set to the first group number containing self shielding data in the library keyword to specify the maximum group number considered during the self shielding process last group number considered during the self shielding process By default Igrmax is set is set to the last group number containing self shielding data in the library keywor
191. TECHNICAL REPORT IGE 294 A USER GUIDE FOR DRAGON VERSION4 G MARLEAU A H BERT AND R RoY Institut de g nie nucl aire D partement de g nie m canique Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al September 22 2015 IGE 294 i Copyright Notice for DRAGON The development of DRAGON is financially supported directly or indirectly by various organiza tions including Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al Hydro Qu bec and the Hydro Qu bec chair in nuclear engineering the Natural Science and Engineering Research Council of Canada NSERC Atomic Energy of Canada limited AECL and the CANDU Owners Group COG The code DRAGON and its users guide are and will remain the property of Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al The PostScript utility module used in DRAGON is based on PSPLOT which is owned by Kevin E Kohler at the Nova Southeastern University Oceanographic Center in Florida Dragon is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version Permission is granted to the public to copy DRAGON without charge Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al makes no warranty express or implied and assumes no liability or responsibility for the use of DRAGON IGE 294 111 Acknowledgments The computer code DRAGON results from a concerted effort made at cole Polytechnique de Montr
192. The UTL module is used to perform utility actions on a LCM object The calling specifications are Table 87 Structure UTL NAMEI UTL NAME1 DIR STEP UP NOMDIR AT index DOWN ROOT IMPR BLOCK index ileni CREA BLOCK index ilencl ilenc2 valc i i ilencl ilenc2 ivale i i ilenc1 ilenc2 hvalc i i ilencl ilenc2 dvalc i i ilencl ilenc2 y DEL BLOCK MULT BLOCK index flott COPY STAT REL ABS ADD NOMREF NOMALT DUMP NAME1 character 12 name of the LCM object that will be treated by the utility module DIR keyword used to print the active directory content STEP keyword used to move in the LCM object hierarchy UP keyword used to move up towards a sub directory of the active directory NOMDIR name of the sub directory to which we wish to head AT keyword used to move towards a component in an heterogeneous list of NAME1 index access the information located in the index th component of the heterogeneous list DOWN keyword to return to the sub directory containing the active directory ROOT keyword to return to the root directory of the LCM object IMPR keyword to print the complete contents or part of the record BLOCK or component index located on the current directory MULT keyword to multiply each element of a block or sub directory in the active directory by areal constant If BLOCK is a sub directory only floating po
193. Two groups incremental cross sections corresponding to the rod in the inserted and extracted position with respect to the original supercell containing only 3 D fuel elements are computed The MICROLIB is defined by the procedure TCWUO5Lib c2m presented in Section 6 5 19 Input data for test case TCWU06 x2m Pe TEST CASE TCWU06 CANDU 6 CARTESIAN CELL x iaea WLUP Library STAINLESS STELL RODS IN 3D SUPERCELL REF R Roy et al Ann Nucl Energy 21 115 1994 k Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used k IGE 294 241 LINKED LIST LIBRARY LIBRARY2 CANDU6F CANDU6S TRACK SYS FLUX EDITION BCO BCI SSRODS SEQ_BINARY INTLIN MODULE GEO EXCELT LIB SHI ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts pu Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 P PROCEDURE TCWUO5Lib INTEGER iedit 1 LIBRARY TCWUOSLib lt lt iedit gt gt Hao CELL CALCULATION Geometry CANDU6S 14 regions Cartesian cluster for self shielding CANDU6F 32 regions Cartesian cluster for transport BCO 48 regions 3D Cartesian geometry BCI 48 regions 3D Cartesian geometry kama CANDU6S GEO CARCEL 5 X REFL X REFL MESHX 14 2875 14 2875 Y REFL Y REFL MESHY 14 2875 14 2875 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 14 00 MIX 123455 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 RODI GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN
194. U6S SPLITR 6 1 1 1 10 RODI GEO RODI SPLITR 2 1 21 ROD2 GEO ROD2 SPLITR 2 1 21 ROD3 GEO ROD3 SPLITR 2 1 ROD4 GEO ROD4 SPLITR 2 1 gone Self Shielding calculation EXCEL Transport calculation EXCEL Flux calculation for keff ps VOLMATS INTLINS EXCELT CANDU6S TITLE TCWU11 FEW GROUP BURNUP SELF SHIELDING TRACKING EDIT O MAXR 13 TRAK TISO 5 10 0 SYMM 12 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY VOLMATS INTLINS EDIT O NOLJ VOLMATF INTLINF EXCELT CANDU6F TITLE TCWU11 FEW GROUP BURNUP TRANSPORT TRACKING EDIT O MAXR 31 TRAK TISO 5 10 0 SYMM 12 PIJ ASM LIBRARV VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU PIJ LIBRARV VOLMATF TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 121035 EDITION EDI LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX CANDU6F MERG REGI 6 610 7 710 1 1 8 810 1 1 9 910 1 1 2 3 4 5 5 5 5 6 5 5555 COND 4 0 MICR ALL SAVE MGEO CANDU6F EDITION SPH EDITION VOLMATF INTLINF Para 69 group Burnup ini BURNUP LIBRARY EVO LIBRARY FLUX VOLMATF EDIT 3 EXPM 200 0 DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timec gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY VOLMATS INTLINS EDIT O NOLJ PIJ DELETE PIJ PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU FLUX PIJ LIBRARY VOLMATF TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 0 9414081 EDITION EDI EDITION LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX CANDU6F MGEO CANDU6F EDITION SPH EDITION VOLMATF INTLINF BURNUP FLUX PIJ LIBRARY INTL
195. UX FLU FLUX SYS2 MACRO TRACK2 TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 103921 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK2 FLUX EDIT 3 UPS MERG COMP STAT ALL REFE NOROD EDITION2 EDI MACRO TRACK2 FLUX EDIT 3 UPS MERG COMP SAVE ON NOROD SYS SYS2 DELETE SYS SYS2 Modify Macrolib for adjuster rod material Solution K EFFECTIVE Editing Compute Delta Sigma MACRO MAC MACRO READ INPUT MIX 4 TOTAL 6 96358740E 1 1 12379551E 0 SCAT 2 2 2 55611958E 4 6 77430272E 1 22 9 55488145E 1 3 16311372E 3 SYS ASM MACRO TRACK BCTRK SYS2 ASM MACRO TRACK2 FLUX FLU FLUX SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 016438 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 UPS MERG COMP STAT DELS REFE NOROD FLUX FLU FLUX SYS2 MACRO TRACK2 TYPE K assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 016686 EDITION2 EDI EDITION2 MACRO TRACK2 FLUX EDIT 3 UPS MERG COMP STAT DELS REFE NOROD BCTRK DELETE BCTRK ECHO test TCMO4 completed END QUIT LIST IGE 294 202 6 4 5 TCM05 Comparison of leakage models This test presents various homogeneous and heterogeneous leakage models on a simple cell Input data for test case TCM05 x2m TEST CASE TCMO5 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS FISSION SOURCE PROBLEM 2 D CARTESIAN ANNULAR CELL Validating leakage options TYPE K B L FOR MOSTELC NO VOID TYPE K B L FOR MOSTELCV MOSTELC WITH VOID X
196. VAC where TRKNAM character 12 name of the TRACKING data structure that will contain region volume and surface area vectors in addition to region identification pointers and other tracking information If TRKNAM also appears on the RHS the previous tracking parameters will be applied by default on the current geometry GEONAM character 12 name of the GEOMETRY data structure desctrack structure describing the general tracking data see Section 3 4 descTRIVAC structure describing the transport tracking data specific to TRIVAT The TRIVAT specific tracking data in descTRIVAC is defined as Table 37 Structure descTRIVAC PRIM ielem isplh DUAL ielem icol isplh MCFD ielem isplh LUMP ielem y SPN n SCAT DIFF iscat VOID nvd ADI nadi l VECT iseg PRTV impv where desctrack structure describing the general tracking data see Section 3 4 PRIM key word to set a discretization based on the variational collocation method IGE 294 DUAL MCFD LUMP ielem icol isplh SPN SCAT DIFF iscat VOID nvd ADI nadi VECT iseg PRTV 80 key word to set a mixed dual finite element discretization If the geometry is hexagonal a Thomas Raviart Schneider method is used key word to set a discretization based on the nodal collocation method The mesh centered finite difference approximation is the default option and is
197. XCELT and NXT modules an additional sequential binary tracking file may be generated The global numbering of the zones in a geometry proceeds following an order of priorities given by e the different rings of a cylindrical or spherical region starting with the inner most after mesh splitting e for acluster regions located in a ring two different numbering schemes are possible For the EXCELT module one first numbers the region inside the pin in the same way as for cylindrical regions and finishes by associating the next region number to the shell of the global geometry which contains this pin If two cluster types are located in a given ring they are classified according to increasing rpin and apin and then numbered in this order Cluster overlapping annular region are numbered before considering the annular regions For the NXT module each pin is numbered individually in a Cartesian region according to their ordered in the CLUSTER keywords and then the Cartesian regions are numbered sequentially A description of the explicit numbering of regions and surfaces can be found in report IGE 260 P6 e the zones in ascending order corresponding to the first axial component normally X after mesh splitting e the zones in ascending order corresponding to the second axial component normally V after mesh splitting e the hexagonal zones corresponding to the order described in Figure 6 to Figure 11 e the sub geometry of type CARCELX CARC
198. ace X to surface X i 1 j for each j and k 2 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly for each k 3 from surface Z to surface Z k 1 Iz e CARCELX geometry N Ir 1 x ly x lz x la The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 radially outward 1 1 lr and such that imix is arbitrary not used if radial region does not intersect Cartesian region j k i l lr 1 for the mixture outside the annular regions but inside Cartesian region j k i 2 3 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly for each k and i 4 from surface Z to surface Z k 1 lz for each i 5 from surface X to surface X i 1 Ia e CARCELY geometry N r 1 x lz x la x ly The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 radially outward 1 1 Ir and such that imix is arbitrary not used if radial region 1 does not intersect Cartesian region k i 7 2 Ir 1 for the mixture outside the annular regions but inside Cartesian region k i 7 3 from surface Z to surface Z k 1 lz for each i and j 4 from surface X to surface X i 1 lx for each J IGE 294 51 5 from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly e CARCELZ geometries N lr 1 x lz x ly x lz The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 radially outward 1 1 Ir and such that imix is arbitrary not used if radial region 1 does not intersect Cartesian region i j k l Ir 1 for the mixture outside th
199. acking LINKED_LIST TRACK LIBRARY2 FLUX MAC2 EDIT SEQ_ASCII APOTR EDIT EDI LIBRARY2 TRACK FLUX EDIT 3 Hansen Roach energy mesh follows COND 12 17 21 27 33 42 50 60 66 76 84 95 123 140 155 172 MERGE MIX 111111233 SAVE ON EDITCDAT 1 MAC2 EDIT STEP UP EDITCDAT 1 STEP UP MACROLIB APOTR M2T MAC2 EDIT 3 TRAN MIX FUEL FROM 1 ENDMIX MIX CLAD FROM 2 ENDMIX MIX COOLANT FROM 3 ENDMIX IGE 294 137 3 17 The CHAB module This component of the lattice code is dedicated to the modification of cross section information in a MICROLIB The calling specifications are Table 66 Structure CHAB MICRO1 DRAGLIBI CHAB MICRO1 MICRO2 DRAGLIB2 CHAB data where MICRO1 character 12 name of a MICROLIB type L_LIBRARY object that is created or modified by CHAB DRAGLIB1 character 12 name of a DRAGLIB type L DRAGLIB object that is created by CHAB MICRO2 character 12 name of a MICROLIB type L_LIBRARY object open in read only mode DRAGLIB2 character 12 name of a DRAGLIB type L_DRAGLIB object open in read only mode CHAB_data input data structure containing specific data see Section 3 17 1 3 17 1 Data input for module CHAB Table 67 Structure CHAB data EDIT iprint MODI TVPSEC igm TO igp VALE val CONS value PLUS value MULT value HISOT where EDIT keyword used to set iprint iprint index used to control the printing in module
200. acking will take place irrespective of the symmetry of the geometry This is equivalent to specifying isymm 0 keyword to specify that Gauss Legendre polar integration angles are to be selected for the polar quadrature when a prismatic tracking is considered The conservation is ensured up to Pimu i scattering keyword to specify that CACTUS type equal weight polar integration angles are to be selected for the polar quadrature when a prismatic tracking is considered The conservation is ensured only for isotropic scattering keyword to specify that CACTUS type uniformly distributed integration polar angles are to be selected for the polar quadrature when a prismatic tracking is considered 11 The conservation is ensured only for isotropic scattering keyword to specify that optimized McDaniel type polar integration angles are to be selected for the polar quadrature when a prismatic tracking is considered l This is the default option The conservation is ensured only for isotropic scattering keyword to specify that Pi constrained optimized McDaniel type polar integra tion angles are to be selected for the polar quadrature when a prismatic tracking is considered The conservation is ensured only for isotropic and linearly anisotropic scattering keyword to specify that Optimized Gauss polar integration angles are to be selected for the method of characteristics l121 The conservation is ensured up to Pnmu 1 scattering user
201. agons with 4 triangular crown and pins 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 6 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 0 0000 DELETE GlobalGeo Tracking Lines gt 222 IGE 294 223 6 5 WIMSD4 microscopic cross section examples The test cases we will consider here use the LIB module to enter microscopic cross sections taken from a WIMSD4 69 groups library We will assume that this library is located in file iaea The test cases are numbered successively from TCWUO1 to TCWU31 6 5 1 TCWU01 The Mosteller benchmark 3 1 26209 cm Figure 34 Geometry for the Mosteller benchmark problem This benchmark uses both a cartesian 2 D cell with a central annular pin and an equivalent annular cell B1 No depletion information is required in this case since the module EVO will not be executed A comparison between various calculation options is provided here We first consider the annular geometry with a SYBILT self shielding and a SYBILT transport calculation This is then repeated for the cartesian 2 D cell Finally we used an isotropic TISO and a specular TSPC EXCELT tracking successively for the self shielding and transport calculations Input data for test case TCWUO1 x2m k TEST CASE TCWUO1 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK 1 D ANNULAR CELL AND 2 D CARTESIAN CELL WIMSD4 69 GROUPS LIBRARY FILE iaea FROM WLUP REF R Mosteller et al Nucl Sci Eng 107 265 1991 x Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used
202. al The main authors of this report would therefore like to express their thanks to cole Polytechnique de Montr al for its support along the years as well as to the graduate students and research associates which have contributed to the development of DRAGON along the years We would also like to thank Kevin E Kohler at the Nova Southeastern University Oceanographic Center for letting us use and distribute a PostScript utility module derived from his PSPLOT package Finally the DRAGON team would never have survived without the financial support of the Natural Science and Engineering Research Council of Canada NSERC Hydro Qu bec Atomic Energy of Canada limited AECL and the CANDU Owners Group COG IGE 294 iv SUMMARY The computer code DRAGON contains a collection of models which can simulate the neutronic be haviour of a unit cell or a fuel assembly in a nuclear reactor It includes all of the functions that characterize a lattice cell code namely the interpolation of microscopic cross sections which are sup plied by means of standard libraries resonance self shielding calculations in multidimensional geometries multigroup and multidimensional neutron flux calculations which can take into account neutron leakage transport transport or transport diffusion equivalence calculations as well as editing of condensed and homogenized nuclear properties for reactor calculations and finally isotopic depletion calculations The code DRAGON co
203. al preconditioning for the iterative resolution by Bi CGSTAB of the ACA sys tem full matrix preconditioning for the iterative resolution by Bi CGSTAB of the ACA system ILUO preconditioning for the iterative resolution by Bi CGSTAB of the ACA system This is the default option IGE 294 TMT SCR iscr KRYL ikryl MCU imcu HDD xhdd LEXF STIS istis ADJ 73 two step collapsing version of ACA which uses a tracking merging technique while building the ACA matrices keyword to set the SCR preconditioning of inner multigroup iterations 0 gt 0 SCR preconditioning of inner or multigroup iterations off on The default value is iscr 0 If MAXI is set to 1 SCR is used as a rebalancing technique for multigroup inner mixed iterations and iscr is the maximum number of iterations allowed to solve the SCR system When anisotropic scattering is considered SCR provides an accel eration of anisotropic flux moments If both ACA and SCR are selected iscr gt 0 and iaca gt 0 a two step acceleration scheme equivalent to ACA when isotropic scattering is considered involving both methods is used keyword to set the Krylov acceleration of inner iterations l 0 GMRES Bi CGSTAB acceleration not used gt 0 dimension of the Krylov subspace in GMRES lt 0 Bi CGSTAB is used The default value is ikrvl 10 keyword used to specify the maximum dimension of the connection matrix for memory allocation The de
204. alculation for K no leakage a DISCR SYBILT MOSTELC TITLE TCWMO1 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK SYBIL SYBIL MAXR 4 QUA1 5 QUA2 6 5 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY DISCR EDIT 1 NOGC NOLJ GRMIN 5 GRMAX 27 CP ASM LIBRARY DISCR PIJ 3 CALC FLU CALC CP LIBRARY DISCR TYPE K assertS CALC K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8212590 OUT EDI OUT LIBRARY DISCR CALC EDIT 1 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 27 69 STAT ALL REFE 1 DISCR CP DELETE DISCR CP Case 3 annular Self Shielding calculation EXCEL ISO Transport calculation EXCEL ISO Flux calculation for K no leakage Pa DISCR TRKSPC EXCELT MOSTELC TITLE TCWMO1 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK EXCELL MAXR 4 TRAK TISO 12 20 0 LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY DISCR TRKSPC EDIT 1 NOGC NOLJ GRMIN 5 GRMAX 27 CP ASM LIBRARY DISCR TRKSPC PIJ CALC FLU CALC CP LIBRARY DISCR IGE 294 188 TYPE K assertS CALC K EFFECTIVE 1 0 8220187 OUT EDI OUT LIBRARY DISCR CALC EDIT 1 MERG MIX 1 2 3 COND 27 69 STAT ALL REFE 1 DISCR TRKSPC CP DELETE DISCR TRKSPC CP Case 4 Cartesian Self Shielding calculation EXCEL SPC Transport calculation EXCEL SPC Flux calculation for K no leakage esses DISCR TRKSPC EXCELT MOSTELC TITLE TCWMO1 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK EXCELL MAXR 4 TRAK TSPC 12 20 0 LIBRARV SHI LIBRARV DISCR TRKSPC EDIT 1 NOGC NOLJ GRMIN 5 GRMAX 27 CP ASM LIBRARY DISCR TRKSPC PIJ
205. amp GT in for annular fuel k oo IGE 294 266 SORINS GEO CAR2D 5 3 EDIT 0 X REFL X REFL Y REFL Y REFL CELL M MXL MX2 MXR M MY FXYL BXY FXYR MY M MXL MX2 MXR M i M GEO CAR2D 1 1 MESHX 0 0 7 14375 MESHY 0 0 7 14375 HMIX 0 MIX 5 MXL GEO CAR2D 2 1 MESHX 7 14375 0 0 7 14375 MESHY 0 0 7 14375 HMIX 0 1 MIX 515 MX2 GEO CAR2D 1 1 MESHX 7 14375 7 14375 MESHY 0 0 7 14375 HMIX 1 MIX 15 MXR GEO CAR2D 2 1 MESHX 7 14375 0 0 7 14375 MESHY 0 0 7 14375 HMIX 1 0 MIX 15 5 MY GEO CAR2D 1 2 MESHY 7 14375 0 0 7 14375 MESHX 0 0 7 14375 HMIX 0 0 MIX 5 5 BXY GEO CARCEL 2 MESHX 7 14375 7 14375 MESHY 7 14375 7 14375 RADIUS 0 0 6 380 6 530 HMIX 1 1 1 MIX 15 15 15 CLUSTER ROD ROD GEO TUBE 4 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0 APIN 0 0 RADIUS 0 0 5 4115 5 4877 5 5791 5 6553 HMIX 1 1 1 1 MIX 15 14 21 14 B K FXYL GEO CARCEL 5 2 1 MESHX 7 14375 0 0 7 14375 MESHY 7 14375 7 14375 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 7 00 HMIX 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 MIX 1 2 3 4 5 5 11 12 13 14 15 15 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2L ROD2R ROD3L ROD3R ROD4L ROD4R RODI GEO TUBE 2 1 2 MIX 6 10 16 20 HMIX 0011 NPIN i RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 IGE 294 267 MESHX 0 6540 0 6540 MESHY 0 6540 0 0 0 6540 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2L GEO TUBE 2 MIX 7 10 HMIX 0 0 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 NPIN 3 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 2 09439510 3 14159265 4 18879020 R
206. an indicate that the mixture numbers of the current crown of the iplanth plane will be identical to those of the same crown of the iplanith plane iplani plane number used as reference to input the current plane or crown s Ip number of volumes in a plane In Cartesian geometry lp lx ly and in hexagonal geometry lp Lh IGE 294 CROWN Ic ALL UPTO ic HMIX CELL HCELL MERGE imerge TURN HTURN CLUSTER NAMPIN 54 keyword to attribute mixture numbers to each hexagon of a single crown This option is only valid for COMPLETE hexagonal geometry definition Each use of the keyword CROWN increases the crown number by 1 So it is not reguired to give its number but crowns must be defined from the center to the peripherical regions of a plane number of hexagons in the current crown For the ith crown of a compelete hexagonal plane le i 1 6 The first crown is composed of only one hexagon keyword to specify that the Ic material mixture number of the current crown have the same value jmix keyword to attribute material mixture numbers of the current crown up to the ic one number of the last crown in UPTO option Its value must be greater than egual to the current crown number keyword to specify the virtual isotopic mixture associated with each region inside the geometry These virtual mixtures will be produced by homogenization in the EDI module see Section 3 9 1 keyword to specify
207. and the origin real or double precision value for the distance of the plane from the origin keyword to specify the value of a for an arbitrary plane or line real or double precision value a keyword to specify the value of b for an arbitrary plane or line real or double precision value b keyword to specify the value of c for an arbitrary plane IGE 294 real or double precision value c keyword to specify the value of d for an arbitrary plane or line real or double precision value d 134 IGE 294 135 3 16 The M2T module This component of the lattice code is dedicated to the generation of an ASCII file with the Apotrim specification using MACROLIB data Such a file is useful to transfer multigroup and macroscopic cross section data toward a Moret calculation The calling specifications are Table 64 Structure M2T APTRIM M2T APTRIM MLIB M2T data where APTRIM character 12 name of an ASCII file with the Apotrim specification If APTRIM appears on the RHS new information is appended to the existing Apotrim file MLIB character 12 name of a MACROLIB type L_MACROLIB object M2T data input data structure containing specific data see Section 3 16 1 3 16 1 Data input for module M2T Table 65 Structure M2T data LEDIT iprint PN nl TRAN NOMA l MIX hmix FROM imixold BURN bup L TEMP tval ENDMIX where EDIT keyword used to set iprint iprint index use
208. ansport calculation Flux calculation for keff k VOLMATS INTLINS TITLE NXT NXT CANDU6S EDIT 0 TISO 50 10 0 LIBRARY EDIT 0 VOLMATF INTLINF TITLE NXT CANDUEF EDIT O TISO 50 10 0 PIJ FLUX TYPE K assertS FLUX EDITION INTLINF INTLINS ECHO test TCWU14 completed END QUIT LIST K INFINITY EDI LIBRARY VOLMATF FLUX COND 4 0 MERGE CELL MICR 1 Xe135 SAVE ON ASM LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF FLU PIJ LIBRARY VOLMATF NPIN 1 NPIN 6 NPIN 12 NPIN 18 6 44780 NPIN 1 NPIN 6 NPIN 12 NPIN 18 SHI LIBRARY VOLMATS INTLINS 1 1 129156 DELETE INTLINF INTLINS RPIN 0 0000 APIN RPIN 1 4885 APIN RPIN 2 8755 APIN RPIN 4 3305 APIN 6 58750 14 00 RPIN 0 0000 APIN RPIN 1 4885 APIN RPIN 2 8755 APIN RPIN 4 3305 APIN fuel 6 5 15 TCWU15 A CANDU 6 type Cartesian cell with burnup O 261 0000 0000 261799 0 2 0000 0000 261799 0 gt TCWU14 CANDU 6 ANNULAR POWER 31 971 FUEL TEMP 941 29 gt TCWU14 CANDU 6 ANNULAR POWER 31 971 FUEL TEMP 941 29 This test case is similar to TCWU05 except that the cell boundary are Cartesian and the NXT tracking module is used It uses the embedded DRAGON procedure stored in the TCWUO5Lib c2m file Input data for test case TCWU15 x2m xX TEST CASE TCWU05 CANDU 6 ANNULAR CELL x iaea WLUP Library IGE 294 262
209. apability is limited to EXCELL type reference geometries keyword to specify that the homogenization region will be selected using the informa tion provided by the HMIX option in the GEO module see Section 3 3 4 In this case all the regions associated with a virtual homogenization mixture will be homogenized If the virtual homogenization mixtures were not defined in the geometry the real mix tures are used instead see MIX keyword in Section 3 3 4 This option is valid only for NXT based TRACKING data structure this option uses the information stored on the reference TRKNAM data structure keyword to specify that the a cell by cell homogenization with or without SPH equiva lence is to take place The macro geometry and the merging indices are automatically computed and the macro geometry named MACRO GEOM is created on the root directory of EDINAM This capability is limited to reference geometries previously tracked by EURYDICE see Section 3 4 1 or NXT see Section 3 4 3 the macro geometry produced by CELL is tracked by SYBILT module the macro geometry produced by CELL is tracked by EXCELT module the macro geometry produced by CELL is tracked by NXT module the macro geometry produced by CELL is tracked by another module default option the cell by cell homogenization produced by option CELL is further homogenized ac cording to imixm2 indices This option is useful to integrate the assembly gap into the boundary cell
210. aracter 12 name of the TRACKING data structure containing the tracking L TRACK signature see Section 3 4 TRKFIL character 12 name of the sequential binary tracking file used to store the tracks lengths This file is given if and only if it was required in the previous tracking module call see Section 3 4 TRKFLP character 12 name of the FLUXUNK data structure containing the unperturbed flux used to decontaminate the GPT solution L FLUX signature This object is mandatory if and only if TYPE P is selected TRKGPT character 12 name of the GPT data structure containing the GPT fixed sources L_GPT signature This object is mandatory if and only if TYPE P is selected descflu structure containing the input data to this module see Section 3 8 1 IGE 294 92 3 8 1 Data input for module FLU Table 45 Structure descflu EDIT iprint INIT OFF ON TYPE N S P K descleak B L descleak EXTE maxout epsout THER maxthr epsthr REBA OFF UNKT epsunk ACCE nlibre naccel where EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of this operator The amount of output produced by this operator will vary substantially depending on the print level specified OFF keyword to specify that the neutron flux is to be initialized with a flat distribution ON keyword to specify that the initial neutron flux distr
211. ariat VEnergie Atomique France 1994 R Roy and G Marleau Normalization Techniques for Collision Probability Matrices PHYSOR 90 Marseille France April 23 27 1990 E A Vliiarino R J J Stammler A A Ferri and J J Casal HELIOS Angularly Dependent Collision Probabilities Nucl Sci Eng 112 16 31 1992 M J Grimstone J D Tullett and G Rimpault Accurate Treatments of Fast Reactor Fuel As sembly Heterogeneity with the ECCO Cell Code Proc Int Conf on the Physics of Reactors Operation Design and Computation PHYSOR 90 Marseille France p IX 24 April 23 27 1990 G Rimpault Algorithmic Features of the ECCO Cell Code for Treating Heterogeneous Fast Reactor Subassemblies Int Conf on Mathematics and Computations Reactor Physics and Environmental Analyses Portland Oregon April 30 May 4 1995 P Benoist J Mondot and I Petrovic Calculational and Experimental Investigations of Void Effect A Simple Theoretical Model for Space Dependent Leakage Treatment of Heterogeneous Assemblies Nucl Sci Eng 118 197 1994 I Petrovic P Benoist and G Marleau A Quasi Isotropic Reflecting Boundary Condition for the Heterogeneous Leakage Model Tibere Nucl Sci Eng 122 151 1996 MATXS7A 69 Neutron Group Cross Section Library in MATXS DLC 117 RSIC Data Library Collection Oak Ridge National Laboratory 1985 J D Kim J T Lee C S Gil and H R Ki
212. asas TRACK WATATRK EXCELT WAT16 TITLE TCMO3 WATANABE MAYNARD 16X16 MAXR 300 CUT 1 E 4 TRAK TSPC 12 8 0 SYS ASM MACRO TRACK WATATRK SKIP FLUX FLU SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE S THER 1 E 6 100 EXTE 1 E 6 100 assertV FLUX FLUX GROUP 1 REGION 10 2 986663 EDITION EDI EDITION MACRO TRACK FLUX EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 000000 00 0 o o o OVO Or Ooo0ooooOo oo0o0oo0ooOoO oo0oo0o0o0o0o0o0O R OOOOOOOO R4RRROOOOOOOOoO NNNOOOOOOOO NINNOOOOOOOO 0 0 50wWwWOOOOOOOO 0 00000 O0OOOOOOOOoO OONN EB5BOOCOOCG0CGOC0 OONN FP RPOTOVOOVOVODVOOVCAOCO IGE 294 EDITION EDI EDIT 2 SAVE MERGE REGION 00000 0 0 0 ooo ODO GO O O O O oO O o o o oo ooo O O O TRACK WATATRK k 0 Tracking Solution Editing TRACK WATATRK OJOoOGOhromn r OANaAOFBPWN EH Oo0Oo0ooOo0oOo0oooOoOo o0o0o0ooOoooOoOo Oo0o0Oo0oOoOo0oooOoOo 9 10 12 13 14 11 12 13 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYS FLUX EXCELT WAT24 DELETE O 0 0 0100000 TRACK WATATRK SYS FLUX FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM 1 UPPER QUADRANT FLUX 2 FLUX AT X 5 625CM EXCELT WAT24 10 10 10 o0o0o0O0O0O0o0ooOoOo Rp N BE N TITLE TCMO3 WATANABE MAYNARD 24X24 MAXR 300 CUT 1 E 4 TRAK TSPC 12 12 0 SYS ASM MACRO TRACK WATATRK SKIP FLUX FLU SYS MACRO TRACK TYPE S THER 1 E 6 100 EXTE 1 E 6 100 assertV FLUX EDI EDIT 2 SAVE EDITION
213. ates that the geometry has circular boundaries and that it contains three concentric annular subregions The boundary conditions reflection the annular radii and the mixture index corresponding to each region of the cell are given successively For MOSTELC the first line indicates that this geometry has 2 D Cartesian boundaries containing three subregions two of which are annular The boundary conditions reflection on each side the annular radii the external side widths and the mixture index corresponding to each region of the cell are given successively Four cases are then considered First we will analyse the annular geometry using the SYBILT module for flux calculation The DISCR and ddstracking structures are thereby generated The SHI module uses microscopic cross section data contained in the LIBRARY and tracking information contained in DISCR and TRACKS in order to compute the actual dilution of each resonant isotope U235 and U238 and to perform a new interpolation in the MATXS file Dilutions are only computed for the energy groups with resonance data present on the library the other groups are assumed to stay at infinite dilution For the second case we will analyse the Cartesian geometry using the again the SYBILT tracking module for self shielding calculations and the SYBILT module for flux calculation The DISCR and TRACKING structures are thereby generated IGE 294 189 Four cases are then considered First we will analyse
214. ation contains a description of the execution modules to be called and its associated input structure All these modules except the END module may be called more than once 2 3 The DRAGON Modules The code DRAGON has been divided into main calculations sequences to which is generally associated a single calculation module The only exception to this rule is the tracking sequence to which is associated many different modules one for each of the standard CP calculation options and an additional module for diffusion calculations However this later module can only be used indirectly in the edition module of DRAGON These modules perform the following tasks MAC module used to generate or modify a DRAGON MACROLIB see Section 2 5 which contains the group ordered macroscopic cross sections for a series of mixture see Section 3 1 This MACROLIB can be either an independent data structure or it can be included as a substructure in a MICROLIB The spatial location of these mixtures will be defined using the GEO module see Section 3 3 LIB module used to generate or modify a DRAGON MICROLIB see Section 2 5 that can read a number of different types of microscopic cross section libraries see Section 3 2 Each such access requires a double interpolation temperature dilution carried out by a subroutine specifically tailored to each type of library Currently the formats DRAGLIB WIMS DABJ MATXS 2l WIMS AECLI APOLLO and NDAS forma
215. attering sources keyword to force using 1 3D9 as cross sections A P or SP method will therefore behave as diffusion theory number of terms in the scattering sources iscat 1 is used for isotropic scattering in the laboratory system iscat 2 is used for linearly anisotropic scattering in the laboratory system The default value is set to n 1 in P or SP case key word to set the number of base points in the Gauss Legendre quadrature used to integrate void boundary conditions if icol 3 and n 4 0 type of quadrature The values permitted are 0 use a n 2 point quadrature consis tent with P theory 1 use a n 1 point quadrature consistent with S 1 theory 2 use an analytical integration of the void boundary conditions By default nvd 0 Various finite element approximations can be obtained by combining different values of ielem and icol e PRIM 1 1 e PRIM e PRIM e PRIM e PRIM e PRIM e PRIM e PRIM e PRIM e PRIM e DUAL e DUAL 1 1 2 3 Linear finite elements Mesh corner finite differences Linear superconvergent finite elements Quadratic finite elements Quadratic variational collocation method Quadratic superconvergent finite elements Cubic finite elements Cubic variational collocation method Cubic superconvergent finite elements Quartic variational collocation method Mixed dual linear finite elements Mesh centered finite
216. ays 10 days for 10 to 50 days 20 days for 50 to 150 days 50 days for 150 to 300 days c Days with burnup interval changes 1 0 5 0 10 0 50 0 150 0 and 300 0 days d Burnup control time variables Timei Timef Timei initial time nero Timef final time H REAL Power Delt Timec Timei Timef 31 9713 1 0 300 0 0 0 0 0 Host Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used Ho LINKED_LIST LIBRARY LINKED_LIST CANDU6S CANDU6F VOLMATS VOLMATF PIJ FLUX BURNUP EDITION SEQ_BINARY INTLINS INTLINF SEQ ASCII res MODULE GEO EXCELT LIB SHI ASM FLU EVO EDI SPH DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts hu Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 foes PROCEDURE TCWUO5Lib INTEGER iedit 1 LIBRARY TCWUO5Lib lt lt iedit gt gt asas Geometry CANDU6S 13 regions annular cluster for self shielding CANDU6F 31 regions annular cluster for transport fio CANDU6S GEO TUBE 5 R REFL RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 16 12171 IGE 294 253 MIX 12345 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 RODI GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2 GEO ROD1 MIX 7 10 NPIN 6 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 0 0000 ROD3 GEO ROD1 MIX 8 10 NPIN 12 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 0 261799 ROD4 GEO ROD1 MIX 9 10 NPIN 18 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 0 0 CANDU6F GEO CAND
217. ced by this tracking module will vary substantially depending on the print level specified STEP keyword used to move in the LCM object hierarchy of NAME2 before making the recover UP keyword used to move up towards a sub directory of NAME2 of the active directory NOMDIR recover the information located in the sub directory named NOMDIR AT keyword used to move up towards a component in an heterogeneous list of NAME2 index recover the information located in the index th component of the heterogeneous list If NAME1 appears only on the LHS it is created If NAME1 appears on both the LHS and the RHS it is replaced by the information located on the backup media IGE 294 168 4 6 The ADD module This module is used to add the floating point information contained of the two LCM object located on the RHS The result is stored in a third output LCM object The calling specifications are Table 91 Structure ADD NAME1 ADD NAME2 NAMB3 NAME1 character 12 name of a LCM object which contains the final information NAME2 character 12 name of a LCM object which contains the first part of the initial infor mation One can use NAME2 NAME1 NAME3 character 12 name of a LCM object which contains the second part of the initial information IGE 294 169 4 7 The MPX module This module is used to multiply the floating point information contained in a LCM object located on the RHS by a user defined real number The result is s
218. ch isotope in a mati was provided it is forbidden to combined two mixtures with different isotopic content description In the case where the initial mixtures are defined using densities p the density pr and volume Vp of the final mixture will become V V 1 Pk TA 2 piVi and the weight percent will be changed in a consistent way namely piViW J W k J ae When the explicit concentration are given we will use ViNi s Neg kJ T There is a very common usage of keyword COMB In the following example a new mixture with index 42 is defined in such a way to be identical to an existing mixture with index 25 MIX 42 COMB 25 1 0 Note that in the structure descmix1 one only needs to describe the isotopes initially present in each mixture DRAGON will then automatically associate with each depleting mixture the additional isotopes required by the available burnup chain Moreover the microscopic cross section library associated with these new isotopes will be the same as that of their parent isotope For example suppose that mixture 1 IGE 294 27 contains isotope U235 which is to be read on the DRAGON formatted library associated with file DRAGLIB Assume also that the depletion chain which is written on the WIMS AECL format library associated with file WIMSLIB states that isotope U236 initially absent in the mixture can be generated form U235 by neutron capture Then one can either specify explicitly from
219. ction using the Brent s method This procedure assumes that the zero is bracketed in an interval given in the input using the two first points and that the function used is continuous in this interval The calling specifications are Table 96 Structure FINDO LO FINDO LO DEBUG ITMAX itmax TOL tol POINT X x1 Y yl POINT X x2 Y y2 Y y3 gt gt IFlag lt lt gt gt rRoot lt lt LO character 12 names of the FINDO LCM object type L 0 that will contain all in formation necessary for the zero finding procedure If LO appears on both sides it is updated otherwise it is created DEBUG keyword used to edit the content of most variables in FINDO used only for debugging purposes ITMAX keyword used to specify the maximum number of iterations that will be allowed for the zero finding procedure The procedure will abort if the number of iterations goes beyond this maximum value itmax the maximum number of iterations Default value 100 TOL keyword used to specify the tolerance on the zero to be found tol tolerance Default value 1 E 5 POINT keyword used to specify that the next point will be given X keyword used to specify that an abscissa will be given Y keyword used to specify that an ordinate will be given xl the first abscissa value yl the first ordinate value x2 the second abscissa value y2 the second ordinate value y3 in the case we are in an update mode only a new ordinate valu
220. cular to each angle depends on the geometry of the cell to be analyzed If there are zones of very small volume a high line density is essential This value will be readjusted by EXCELT In the case of the analysis of a cluster type geometry the default value of this parameter is 5 rm where rm is the minimum radius of the pins or the minimum thickness of an annular ring in the geometry If the selected value of dens is too small some volumes or surfaces may not be tracked real value representing the density of the integration lines in the axial Z direction Used only with HEXZ and HEXCELZ geometries keyword to specify that the input of the parameters used to treat the corners for the isotropic integration maximum distance cm between a line and the intersection of n gt 2 external surfaces where track redistribution will take place Track redistribution will take place if a line comes close to the intersection of n gt 2 external surfaces In this case the line will be replicated n times each of these lines being associated with a different external surface while its weight is reduced by a factor of 1 n This allows for a better distribution of tracks which are relatively close to n external surfaces By default there is no treatment of the corners and pcorn 0 0 keyword to specify that the geometry has a rotation symmetry integer value describing the rotation symmetry of the geometry The fixed default of this parameter is 1 EXC
221. cut SYMM isymm NOSY GAUS CACA CACB LCMD OPP1 OGAU nmu f TISO EQW GAUS PNTN SMS LSN QRN nangl dens CORN pcorn TSPC MEDI nangl dens NOTR MC NBSLIN nbslin LONG PRIZ denspr where ANIS keyword to specify the order of scattering anisotropy nanis order of anisotropy in transport calculation A default value of 1 represents isotropic or transport corrected scattering while a value of 2 correspond to linearly anisotropic IGE 294 ONEG ALLG XCLL QUAB iquab SAPO HEBE PISO PSPC CUT peut 68 scattering When anisotropic scattering is considered user should pay attention to the following points e the usage of DIAG SYME SSYM keywords in the definition of the geometry is forbid den Indeed in EXCELT NXT tracking procedures the geometry is unfolded according to these symmetries this is incompatible with the integration of the anisotropic moments of the flux e an angular dependent normalization of the track lengths should be requested in the tracking procedure REND keyword in order to ensure the particle conserva tion e the angular quadratures should be selected paying attention to the restrictions mentioned in this manual in order to ensure the particle conservation keyword to specify that the tracking is read before computing each group dependent collision probability or algebraic collapsing matrix de
222. d This is particularly useful if one wants to avoid tracking angles that are parallel to the X or Y axis as its is the case when the external region of a CARCEL geometry is voided angular quadrature parameter For a 3 D EQW option the choices are nangl 2 4 8 10 12 14 or 16 For a 3 D PNTN or SMS option nang is an even number smaller than 46 For 2 D isotropic applications any value of nangl may be used equidistant angles will be selected For 2 D specular applications the input value must be of the form p 1 where p is a prime number as proposed in Ref 25 In this case the choice of nang 8 12 14 18 20 24 or 30 are allowed real value representing the density of the integration lines in cm for 2 D Cartesian cases and 3 D hexagonal cases and cm for 3 D cases Cartesian cases This choice of density along the plan perpendicular to each angle depends on the geometry of the cell to be analyzed If there are zones of very small volume a high line density is essential This value will be readjusted by NXT keyword to specify that the input of the parameters used to treat the corners for the isotropic integration maximum distance cm between a line and the intersection of n gt 2 external surfaces where track redistributing will take place Track redistribution will take place if a line comes close to the intersection of n gt 2 external surfaces In this case the line will be replicated n times each of
223. d TRANC This record must exists in the MACROLIB A leakage correction is applied to the total and Po within group scattering cross sec tions No transport correction is applied in this case keyword to specify the maximum number of physical albedos which will be read These can be used by the GEO module see Section 3 3 the maximum number of physical albedos The default value is nalbp 1 keyword used for the input of the physical albedo array physical albedo array A maximum of nalbp entries can be specified keyword used to write cross section data to a GOXS file In the case where nifiss gt 1 this option is invalid character 7 name of the GOXS file to be created or updated keyword to specify the energy group limits energy eV array which define the limits of the groups ngroup 1 elements Gener ally energy 1 is the highest energy keyword to specify the mixture volumes volume cm occupied by each mixture keyword for adding increments to existing macroscopic cross sections In this case the information provided in descxs represents incremental rather than standard cross sections IGE 294 12 READ keyword to specify the input file format One can use either the input stream keyword INPUT or a GOXS format file imat array of mixture identifiers to be read from a GOXS file The maximum number of identifiers permitted is nmixt and the maximum value that imat may take is nmixt When imat is 0 the corresponding
224. d by a rectangle description follows The rectangle can now be subdivided into a fine mesh when the EXCELT modules is used keyword to specify that a three dimensional mixed Cartesian cell with tubes oriented along the X axis description follows The three dimensional Cartesian cell can now be subdivided into a fine mesh when the EXCELT module is used keyword to specify that a three dimensional mixed Cartesian cell with tubes oriented along the Y axis description follows The three dimensional Cartesian cell can now be subdivided into a fine mesh when the EXCELT module is used keyword to specify that a three dimensional mixed Cartesian cell with tubes oriented along the Z axis description follows The three dimensional Cartesian cell can now be subdivided into a fine mesh when the EXCELT module is used keyword to specify that a two dimensional mixed hexagonal cell concentric tubes surrounded by a hexagon description follows keyword to specify that a three dimensional mixed hexagonal cell with tubes oriented along the Z axis description follows keyword to specify that a do it yourself type geometry description follows number of subdivisions along the X axis before mesh splitting number of subdivisions along the Y axis before mesh splitting number of subdivisions along the Z axis before mesh splitting number of cylinders or spherical shells before mesh splitting number of hexagons in an axial plane i
225. d energy released per fission or radiative capture are recovered from the file The list of isotopes standard and self shielded available in an APOLIB XSM is printed by setting the print flag to a value iprint gt 10 keyword to specify the name of the file where is stored the isotopic depletion data character 64 name of the library where the isotopic depletion chain or the microscopic cross sections are stored Library names in DRAGLIB format are limited to 12 characters A NDAS library is made of two or more files These file names must be concatenated in a single NAMEFIL name using semicolumns as separators The ASCII index file is always the first followed by optional patch files and terminated by the main direct access binary file The following sample data line corresponds to a NDAS library without patch MIXS LIB NDAS FIL E65LIB6 idx E65LIB6 sdb number of isotopes in the depleting chain input structure describing the depletion chain see Section 3 2 2 descdeplA2 simplified input structure describing the depletion chain in cases where an APOLIB 2 or MAXS BURN iburn tburn APOLIB XSM file is used see Section 3 2 2 keyword to specify that the mixture density on MICLIB are to be modified If OLDLIB is present and descmix2 is absent a direct one to one correspondence between the isotope on both libraries is assumed If OLDLIB and descmix2 are present only the mixture on the library file specified by descm
226. d in module ASM by setting PIJ SKIP See Section 3 7 1 SIGS keyword used to specify that an homogeneous buckling correction is to be applied on the diffusion cross section dB Eq 3 1 is then replaced by W 9 d B B 3 6 where transport corrected total cross sections are used to compute the W matrix This is the so called DIFFON method used in the APOLLO family of thermal lattice codes ALBS keyword used to specify that an homogeneous buckling contribution is introduced by a group dependent correction of the albedo l This leakage model is restricted to the collision probability method It is then necessary to define the geometry with an external boundary condition of type VOID see Section 3 3 2 and to close the region in module ASM using the ALBS option see Section 3 7 1 Eq 3 1 is then replaced by g W Q I WE geg d B B 7 Pis g 3 7 where Pis Pis g i 1 1 is the array of escape probabilities in the open geometry and where 2 Vib5 g J 38 SA 3 8 J Y ECCO keyword used to perform an ECCO type leakage calculation taking into account isotropic streaming effects This method introduces an heterogeneous buckling contribution as a group dependent correction to the source term 160 61 It is then necessary to set the keyword ECCO in module ASM see Section 3 7 1 In the Pi non consistent case Eq 3 1 is then replaced by i ma id Gy W a B 2 3 9 iJ
227. d in different mixture in onion peel fashion it is necessary to attribute a single inrs value to this fuel keyword to specify that the absolute temperature of the isotope is different from that of the isotopic mixture This option is useful to define Debye corrected temperature absolute temperature in Kelvin of the isotope By default tempd temp keyword to specify that the name of the isotope containing the information related to the self shielding is different from the initial name of the isotope This option is not required if a MATXS or a DRAGLIB file is used character 12 name of a record in the library containing the self shielding data This name is required if the dilution is not infinite or a non zero resonant region is associated with this isotope and NAMS is different from NAMISO This record must be contained in the same library file as record NAMISO keyword to specify that the thermalization effects are to be included with the cross sections when using a MATXS or MATXS2 format library character 6 name of the incoherent thermalization effects which will be taken into ac count The incoherent effects are those that may be described by the S a f scattering law The value FREE is used to simulate the effects of a gas keyword to specify that coherent thermalization effects will be taken into account character 6 name of the coherent thermalization effects which will be taken into account The coherent effects are the vecto
228. d local parameters and two lists of directories Each component of the IGE 294 125 first list MIXTURES contains the directory TREE the parameter tree and the list CALCULATIONS made of MICROLIB objects Each component of the second list GEOMETRIES contains the homogenized geometry of an elementary calculation The localization of an elementary calculation is done using a tuple of global and or local parameters The elementary calculation indices are stored in a tree with the number of levels equal to the number of global and local parameters An example of a tree with three parameters is shown in Figure 21 Each node of this tree is associated with the index of the corresponding parameter and with the reference to the daughter nodes if they exist The number if leafs is equal to the number of nodes for the last third parameter and is equal to the number of elementary calculations stored in the MULTICOMPO object The index of each elementary calculation is therefore an attribute of each leaf In each homogenized mixture component the COMPO module recover cross sections for a number of particularized isotopes and of a single macroscopic set a collection of the remaining isotopic cross sections weighted by isotopic number densities Other information is also recovered multigroup neutron fluxes isotopic number densities fission spectrum delayed neutron data etc A different specification of the COMPO function call is
229. d to control the printing in module M2T 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value PN keyword used to set the Legendre order of the scattering transfers written on the Apotrim file nl Legendre order By default nl 0 corresponding to an isotropic collision in LAB TRAN keyword used to set a transport correction on cross sections written on the Apotrim file NOMA keyword used to avoid writing the energy mesh on the Apotrim file This option is useful to catenate additional mixture information on an existing Apotrim file By default the energy mesh is written on the Apotrim file MIX keyword used to set hmix IGE 294 136 hmix character 20 name of the mixture to be written on the Apotrim file BURN keyword used to set the burnup of a mixture bup burnup of a mixture By default bup 0 0 TEMP keyword used to set the temperature of a mixture tval temperature of a mixture in Celsius By default tval 0 0 C FROM keyword used to set the index of the mixture in the MACROLIB object imixold index of the mixture that is recovered in the MACROLIB object By default imixold 1 ENDMIX end of specification keyword for the material mixture Here is an example of the creation of an Apotrim file named APOTR with a Hansen Roach energy mesh created from a XMAS 172 group flux calculation The Apotrim file is created from three LCM objects FLUX LIBRARY2 and TRACK containing the flux the XMAS formatted microlib and the tr
230. d to specify the maximum number of iterations during the self shielding process the maximum number of iterations The default is imxit 20 keyword to specify the convergence criterion for the self shielding iteration the convergence criterion for the self shielding iteration By default valeps 1 0 x 1074 keyword to activate the Livolant and Jeanpierre normalization scheme which modifies the self shielded averaged neutron fluxes in heterogeneous geometries By default the Livolant and Jeanpierre normalization scheme is not activated keyword to deactivate the Livolant and Jeanpierre normalization scheme which modi fies the self shielded averaged neutron fluxes in heterogeneous geometries This is the default option keyword to activate the Goldstein Cohen approximation in cases where Goldstein Cohen parameters are stored on the internal library These parameters may not be available with some libraries e g APLIB1 APLIB2 or MATXS type libraries The Goldstein Cohen parameters can always be imposed using the IRSET keyword of the LIB module see Section 3 2 This is the default option keyword to deactivate the Goldstein Cohen approximation in cases where Goldstein Cohen parameters are stored on the internal library keyword to deactivate the transport correction option for self shielding calculations see CTRA in Sections 3 1 and 3 2 keyword to specify the self shielding model 0 original Stamm ler model without distributed
231. d used to move up towards a sub directory of the active directory NOMDIR name of the sub directory or heterogeneous list to which we wish to head AT keyword used to move up towards a component in the heterogeneous list index access the information located in the index th component of the heterogeneous list BLOCK name of the record which will be analyzed by the GREP utility index index of the record which will be analyzed by the GREP utility TYPE keyword used to get the LCM type of record BLOCK itype type of block BLOCK or list component index 1 integer 2 real 3 character 4 double precision 5 logical 10 list 99 undefined GETVAL keyword used to get values from an existing record The receiving CLE 2000 variables are assumed to be of the same type as the picked values all CLE 2000 types are supported MAXVAL keyword used to get the maximum value of an existing record The receiving CLE 2000 single variable is assumed to be of the same type as the picked maximum valid for integer real and double precision types MINVAL keyword used to get the minimum value of an existing record The receiving CLE 2000 single variable is assumed to be of the same type as the picked minimum valid for integer real and double precision types INDMAX keyword used to get the index position inside the block of the maximum value of an existing record The receiving CLE 2000 single variable is assumed of an integer type
232. dary conditions in two dimensional rectangular geometry 26 EXCELL calculations are performed using the EXCELT or NXT module The MCCG tracking option activates the long characteristics solution technique This implementation uses the same tracking as EXCELL and perform flux integration using the long characteristics algorithm proposed by Igor Suslov P0 21 The option is activated when both EXCELT or NXT and MCCGT modules are called After the collision probability or response matrices associated with a given cell have been generated the multigroup solution module can be activated This module uses the power iteration method and requires a number of iteration types The thermal iterations are carried out by DRAGON so as to rebalance the flux distribution only in cases where neutrons undergo up scattering The power iterations are performed by DRAGON to solve the fixed source or eigenvalue problem in the cases where a mul tiplicative medium is analyzed The effective multiplication factor Keg is obtained during the power iterations A search for the critical buckling may be superimposed upon the power iterations so as to force the multiplication factor to take on a fixed value DRAGON can access directly standard microscopic cross section libraries in various formats It has the capability of exchanging macroscopic cross section libraries with a code such as TRANSX CTR or TRANSX 2 by the use of GOXS format files The macroscopic cros
233. dd LEXF STIS istis MAXI nmaxi EPSI xepsi ADJ where EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing in this operator IGE 294 LCMD OPP1 OGAU GAUS CACA CACB nmu DIFC LEXA MAXI nmaxi EPSI xepsi AAC iaca NONE DIAG FULL ILUO 72 keyword to specify that optimized McDaniel type polar integration angles are to be selected for the method of characteristics 2 This is the default option The conser vation is ensured only for isotropic scattering keyword to specify that P constrained optimized McDaniel type polar integration angles are to be selected for the method of characteristics The conservation is ensured only for isotropic and linearly anisotropic scattering keyword to specify that Optimized Gauss polar integration angles are to be selected for the method of characteristics l121 The conservation is ensured up to Pnmu 1 scattering keyword to specify that Gauss Legendre polar integration angles are to be selected for the method of characteristics The conservation is ensured up to Pimu i scattering keyword to specify that CACTUS type equal weight polar integration angles are to be selected for the method of characteristics The conservation is ensured only for isotropic scattering keyword to specify that CACTUS type uniformly distributed integration polar angles are to be selected for th
234. define a temperature in C as global parameter or local variable keyword used to define a number density as global parameter or local variable keyword used to define a burnup in MWday Tonne as global parameter or local variable keyword used to define a fuel only exposure rate in n kb as global parameter or local variable The exposure rate is recovered from the BRNNAM LCM object keyword used to define an exposure rate in global homogenized mixtures in n kb as local variable The exposure rate is recovered from the BRNNAM LCM object keyword used to define the power as global parameter or local variable keyword used to define the mass density of heavy isotopes as global parameter or local variable keyword used to define the volume averaged energy integrated flux as global param eter or local variable keyword used to define the time in seconds as global parameter keyword used to define the SPH equivalence factors as local variable A set of SPH factors can be defined as local variables Note that the cross sections and fluxes stored in the SAPHYB are not SPH corrected keyword used to define a user defined quantity as global parameter This keyword must be followed by the type of parameter keyword used to indicate that the user defined global parameter is a floating point value keyword used to indicate that the user defined global parameter is a character 12 value keyword used to indicate that the user defin
235. defined number of polar angles By default a value consistent with nangl is computed by the code For LCMD OPP1 OGAU quadratures nmu is limited to 2 3 or 4 keyword to specify that isotropic tracking parameters will be supplied This is the default tracking option for cluster geometries keyword to specify that specular tracking parameters will be supplied keyword to specify the use of equal weight quadrature The conservation is ensured up to Prangl 2 scattering after TISO keyword keyword to specify the use of the Gauss Legendre quadrature This option is valid only if an hexagonal geometry is considered keyword to specify that Legendre Techbychev quadrature quadrature will be selected 8 The conservation is ensured only for isotropic and linearly anisotropic scattering keyword to specify that Legendre trapezoidal quadrature quadrature will be selected P The conservation is ensured up to Prangl 1 scattering keyword to specify the use of the u optimized level symmetric quadrature The conservation is ensured up to Phangl 2 scattering IGE 294 QRN MEDI nang dens CORN pcorn NOTR MC NBSLIN nbsl LONG PRIZ denspr 70 keyword to specify the use of the quadrupole range QR quadrature keyword to specify the use of a median angle quadrature Instead of selecting the angles located at the end of each angular interval the angles located in the middle of these intervals are selecte
236. differences IGE 294 e DUAL 1 3 Mixed dual linear superconvergent finite elements numerically equivalent to PRIM 1 3 e DUAL 2 1 Mixed dual quadratic finite elements e DUAL 2 2 Quadratic nodal collocation method e DUAL 2 3 Mixed dual quadratic superconvergent finite elements numericallv equivalent to PRIM 2 3 e DUAL 3 1 Mixed dual cubic finite elements e DUAL 3 2 Cubic nodal collocation method e DUAL 3 3 Mixed dual cubic superconvergent finite elements numericallv equivalent to PRIM 3 3 e DUAL 4 2 Quartic nodal collocation method 78 IGE 294 79 3 4 7 The TRIVAT tracking module The TRIVAT module is used to perform a TRIVAC type tracking on a 1D 2D 3D regular Cartesian or hexagonal geometry 2 The geometry is analyzed and a LCM object with signature L_TRIVAC is created with the following information e Diagonal and hexagonal symmetries are unfolded and the mesh splitting operations are performed Volumes material mixture and averaged flux recovery indices are computed on the resulting geom etry e A finite element discretization is performed and the corresponding numbering is saved e The unit finite element matrices mass stiffness etc are recovered e Indices related to an ADI preconditioning with or without supervectorization are saved The calling specification for this module is Table 36 Structure TRIVAT TRKNAM TRIVAT TRKNAM GEONAM desctrack descTRI
237. direct access file of XSM type if declared as XSM_FILE in the input data e All the information declared as LINKED_LIST is destroyed at the end of arun All other information is located on files which are kept at the end of the run unless explicitely destroyed by a DELETE command e Consider the following example in which the operator MOD1 is called with the following command DATA1 DATA2 MOD1 DATA4 DATA2 Here DATA1 is opened in create mode because it appears only on the left hand side LHS of the command DATA2 is opened in modification mode because it appears on both sides of the command Finally DATA4 is opened in read only mode because it appears only on the right hand side RHS of the command 4 e The calling sentence to an operator should always end by a A comment can follow on the same input data record but a carriage return should be performed before other significant data can be read by REDGET e The possibility of user defined procedures is also offered These procedures give the user the possi bility to program an application using the capabilities of the generalized driver and to use it as a new operator in the main data stream or in a calling procedure IGE 294 289 9 THE CLE 2000 CONTROL LANGUAGE The CLE 2000 control language allows loops conditional testing and macro processor capabilities to be included in the generalized driver input deck A reversed polish notation RPN calculator named
238. e Input data for test case TCWU14 x2m ei TEST CASE TCWU14 CANDU 6 ANNULAR CELL iaea WLUP Library Hs ole Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used po LINKED_LIST LIBRARY CANDU6S CANDU6F VOLMATS VOLMATF PIJ FLUX EDITION DATABASE ISOT SEQ_BINARY INTLINS INTLINF SEQ_ASCII database MODULE GEO NXT SHI ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts hos Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 fleas IGE 294 260 PROCEDURE TCWUOSLib INTEGER iedit 1 LIBRARY TCWUO5Lib lt lt iedit gt gt kasas Geometry CANDU6S 13 regions annular cluster for self shielding CANDU6F 31 regions annular cluster for transport danos CANDU6S GEO CARCEL 5 X REFL X REFL Y REFL Y REFL MESHX 14 2875 14 2875 MESHY 14 2875 14 2875 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 14 00 MIX 123455 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 ROD1 GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2 GEO ROD1 MIX 7 10 NPIN 6 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 0 0000 ROD3 GEO ROD1 MIX 8 10 NPIN 12 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 0 261799 ROD4 GEO ROD1 MIX 9 10 NPIN 18 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 0 0 CANDU6F GEO CAR2D 2 2 X REFL X REFL Y REFL Y REFL CELL F1 F2 F3 F4 ii F1 GEO CARCEL 5 MESHX 14 2875 14 2875 MESHY 14 2875 14 2875 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 14 00 MIX 123455 CLUSTER RODi ROD2 ROD3 ROD4
239. e keyword to specify that the transport correction macroscopic cross sections for this mixture follows array representing the multigroup transport correction macroscopic cross section 7 in cm 1 associated with this mixture keyword to specify that the macroscopic fission cross section multiplied by the average number of neutrons per fission for this mixture follows array representing the multigroup macroscopic fission cross section multiplied by the average number of neutrons per fission WE in cm 1 for all the fissile isotopes asso ciated with this mixture keyword to specify that the fission spectrum for this mixture follows array representing the multigroup fission spectrum x for all the fissile isotopes as sociated with this mixture keyword to specify that the fixed neutron source density for this mixture follows array representing the multigroup fixed neutron source density for this mixture 5 in le s sem kevword to specifv that the isotropic diffusion coefficient for this mixture follows array representing the multigroup isotropic diffusion coefficient for this mixture D9 in cm keyword for input of the X directed diffusion coefficient array representing the multigroup X directed diffusion coefficient DI in cm for the mixture matnum keyword for input of the Y directed diffusion coefficient array representing the multigroup Y directed diffusion coefficient DZ in cm for the mixture matnum
240. e starting with i to n or real type starting with a to h or o to z variables If they are in upper case they represent character type variables For example iprint must be replaced in the input deck by an integer variable energy igroup igroup 1 ngroup 1 states that a vector containing ngroup 1 real elements is to be read while FILE must be replaced by a character variable its maximum size being generally specified No character variable can exceed 72 character in length The variables or structures surrounded by single square brackets are optional IGE 294 3 e The variables or structures surrounded by double square brackets are also optional However they can be repeated as many times as required e The variables or structures surrounded by braces and separated by vertical bars Y P represents various calculation options available in DRAGON Only one of these options is permitted When a fixed default value is specified for an optional parameter in a structure it can be modified only locally and is reset to the original default value each time the module is called When a floating default value is specified for a variable it is saved and can be used in later calls to this module In DRAGON almost every default value is a floating value with the exception of the parameter iprint which is set to 1 and is used to control the amount of information printed in the module Departure from this general rule will be i
241. e Cylindrical and Cartesian cluster geometry see Figure 25 Figure 25 Cylindrical cluster geometry The first two geometry namely ANNPIN and CARPIN can be analyzed using a EXCELT tracking modules since the pins in the clusters are all located between annular region For the last two geometries ANNSPIN and CARSPIN which are based on ANNPIN and CARPIN respectively they only be treated by the EXCELT tracking modules since the pins in the clusters intersect the annular regions defined by the SPLITR option This later option which was selected to ensure a uniform thickness of 0 25 cm for each the annular region in the final geometries ANNPIN GEO TUBE 3 R REFL RADIUS 0 0 0 75 2 75 4 75 MIX 213 CLUSTER C1 C2 C1 GEO TUBE 2 MIX 2 4 RADIUS 0 0 0 3 0 6 NPIN 4 RPIN 1 75 APIN 0 523599 C2 GEO C1 NPIN 2 RPIN 3 75 APIN 1 570796 CARPIN GEO CARCEL 3 X REFL X REFL Y REFL Y REFL MESHX 0 0 10 0 MESHY 5 0 5 0 RADIUS 0 0 0 75 2 75 4 75 MIX 2133 CLUSTER C1 C2 Cl GEO TUBE 2 MIX 2 4 RADIUS 0 0 0 3 0 6 NPIN 4 RPIN 1 75 APIN 0 523599 C2 GEO Ci NPIN 2 RPIN 3 75 APIN 1 570796 ANNSPIN GEO ANNPIN IGE 294 183 SPLITR 388 CARSPIN GEO CARPIN SPLITR 388 Note that even if MESHX and MESHY differ in CARPIN the annular regions and pins will still be localized with respect to the center of the cell located at x y 5 0 0 0 cm e 2 D hexagonal geometry see Figure 26 A
242. e WIMSD4 format keyword to specify that the isotopic depletion chain and the microscopic cross sections are in the WIMS AECL format keyword to specify that the isotopic depletion chain and the microscopic cross sections are in the WIMS AECL format keyword to specify that the isotopic depletion chain and the microscopic cross sections are in the NDAS format as used in recent versions of WIMS AECL keyword to specify that the microscopic cross sections are in the APOLLO 1 format keyword to specify that the microscopic cross sections are in the APOLLO 2 format keyword to specify the name of the file where is stored the mass ratio data character 8 name of the library where the mass ratio are stored keyword to specify the isotopic temperature temperature given in Kelvin K or Celsius C keyword to specify the water purity that is fraction of heavy water in a mix of heavy and light water water purity in weight percent WGT or atomic percent ATM keyword to specify the fuel enrichment fuel enrichment in weight percent WGT or atomic percent ATMA keyword to specify an isotope list This list will be used either for getting mass values of isotopes or for computing number densities number of isotopic names used for a calculation limited to nbiso lt 3 character 12 name of an isotope keyword to recover the mass values as written in the library It returns the mass value of each isotope in the output parameter mass
243. e annular regions but inside Cartesian region i j k from surface X to surface X i 1 lx for each j and k from surface Y to surface Y j 1 ly for each k UBS B from surface Z to surface Z k 1 I e HEX geometry N lh The mixtures or cells are then given in the order provided in Figure 6 to 11 e HEXT geometry N 6 x nh The real and virtual mixtures are given in the following order 1 from each triangle I l 1 2 x nhc 1 in hexagonal crown i of sector j Figure 1 illustrates region and surface ordering in the case where the default value of hexmsh is used and Figure 16 the same information when a different value of hexmsh is provided 2 from each crown in sector 7 3 for each sector j 1 6 e HEXCEL geometries Ni Ir 1 The mixtures are then given in the following order 1 radially outward I 1 Ir 2 Ir 1 for the mixture outside the annular regions but inside the hexagonal region e HEXZ geometry N thx Iz The mixtures or cells are then given in the following order 1 according to Figure 6 to 11 for plane k 2 from surface Z to surface Z k 1 Iz e HEXTZ geometry N 6 x nh x Iz The real and virtual mixtures are given plane by plane in the the same order as that used for the HEXT geometry starting at the bottom and finishing at the top plane in direction Z k 1 Iz IGE 294 52 e HEXCELZ geometries N ir 1 x kz The mixtures
244. e identified by integer values instead of names Each data type mapped to a LCM object is dynamically allocated using the computer s memory management algorithm and is accessed with a pointer LCM objects are the only memory resident data type used to transfer information between modules However interface files can also be used to transfer information between modules in cases where we want to reduce the memory resource reguirements A LCM object can therefore be declared as LINKED_LIST to make it memory resident or as XSM_FILE to make it persistent Seguential files either binary or ASCII can also be used r recordi m record2 record3 fr directory1 record7 directorv3 record4 record8 L directory2 record5 record6 Figure 42 An example of an associative table 2 Building a scientific application requires the definition of the LCM objects and interface files and the programming of application dependent modules to manage these LCM objects 3 A driver was written to support the LCM objects and to read macro language instructions The modules are callable from this driver but the possibility of having embedded modules i e mod ules called directly from a subroutine written in any of these four languages has also been introduced 4 Utility modules are available to backup the LCM object on an XSM file and to permit code restart The modules must be declared in the calling procedure using directives of the form Table 103
245. e is given IFlag CLE 2000 logical variable in writable mode The value returned is true if the new guessed root is within tol false otherwise rRoot CLE 2000 real variable in writable mode The value returned is the last guess for the root Note that the zero finding procedure has an initial mode where NAME1 NAME2 and NAME3 are created In the initialization process the two points specifying the interval must be given and it is expected that yl xy2 lt 0 In the updated mode there is no need to put back the abscissa of the next point because it is expected to be the last real value that was generated by the procedure This explains why you will only input Y y3 The FINDO specification is used to store intermediate values needed by the zero finding procedure There are no directories in this object and it is created and updated only by the FINDO module To understand the content of the object it is possible using the labels given for every block to refer to Brent s algorithm 7 IGE 294 176 4 12 The ABORT module This module is used to abort the overall calculation calling the XABORT subroutine from the Ganlib Table 97 Structure ABORT IGE 294 177 4 13 The END module This module is used to delete all the memory resident LCM objects to close all the remaining local files and to return from a procedure or to stop the run The calling specifications are Table 98 Structure END IGE 294 178 5 THE
246. e method of characteristics The conservation is ensured only for isotropic scattering user defined number of polar angles for the integration of the tracks with the method of characteristics for 2D geometries By default a value consistent with nangl is computed by the code For LCMD OPP1 OGAU quadratures nmu is limited to 2 3 or 4 keyword used to specify that only an ACA simplified transport flux calculation is to be performed not by default keyword used to force the usage of exact exponentials in the preconditioner calculation not by default keyword to specify the maximum number of inner iterations or Bi CGSTAB iterations to solve the ACA simplified system if DIFC is present the maximum number of iterations The default value is nmaxi 20 keyword to specify the convergence criterion on inner iterations or ACA simplified flux calculation if DIFC is present convergence criterion The default value is xepsi 1 0x 107 keyword to set the ACA preconditioning of inner multigroup iterations in case where a transport solution is selected l 1 7 0 gt 0 ACA preconditioning of inner or multigroup iterations off on The default value is iaca 1 If MAXI is set to 1 ACA is used as a rebalancing technique for multigroup inner mixed iterations and iaca is the maximum number of iterations al lowed to solve the ACA system e g 100 no preconditioning for the iterative resolution by Bi CGSTAB of the ACA system diagon
247. e pseudo fission products PFP e The fission father reactions NFTOT are not given e The stable isotopes are automatically recovered from the APOLIB file They are not given in structure descdeplA2 e An isotope is considered to be stable if it is not present in structure descdeplA2 has no father and no daughter but can release energy by fission or radiative capture e It is possible to truncate the isotope name NAMDPL at the underscore For example D20_3_P5 can be simply written D20 e Only the radioactive decay constants of the isotopes present in structure descdeplA2 are re covered from the APOLIB file The radioactive decay constants of the other isotopes are set to Zero IGE 294 24 3 2 3 Mixture description structure The structure descmix1 is used to describe the isotopic composition and the physical properties such as the temperature and density of a mixture Table 13 Structure descmix1 MIX matnum temp denmix NOEV l l l NAMALI NAMISO dens dil INF y CORR inrs DBYE tempd SHIB NAMS THER ntfg HINC TCOH HCOH IRSET gir PT PTMC PTSL nir NONE NOEV SAT J COMB mati relvol where MIX keyword to specify the number identifying the next mixture to be read matnum mixture identifier The maximum value that matnum may have is nmixt When matnum is absent the mixtures are numbered successively starting from 1 if
248. e recursively called from descgent as an embedded module in order to define sub geometries Table 16 Structure descgtyp VIRTUAL HOMOGE SPHERE Ir CAR1D Ix CAR2D Ix ly CAR3D Ix ly Iz TUBE Ir Ix ly TUBEX Ir Ix Ix ly Iz TUBEY Ir ly Ix ly Iz y TUBEZ Ir Iz Ix ly Iz RTHETA Ir Iz continued on next page IGE 294 30 Structure descgtyp continued from last page HEX Ih HEXZ Ih Iz HEXT nhr HEXTZ nhr Iz CARCEL Ir Ix ly CARCELX Ir Ix Ix ly Iz CARCELY Ir ly Ix ly Iz CARCELZ Ir Iz Ix ly Iz HEXCEL Ir HEXCELZ Ir Iz GROUP Ip Table 17 Structure descgent EDIT iprint descBC descSP descPP descDH descSIJ SUBGEO GEO descgtyp SUBGEO OLDGEO descgcnt where VIRTUAL keyword to specify that a virtual geometry description follows This type of geometry is used to complete an assembly that has irregular boundaries HOMOGE keyword to specify that a infinite homogeneous geometry description follows SPHERE keyword to specify that a spherical geometry concentric spheres description follows CAR1D keyword to specify that a one dimensional plane geometry infinite slab description follows CAR2D keyword to specify that a two dimensional Cartesian geometry description follows CAR3D keyword to specify that a three dimensional Cartesian geometry description follows TUBE keyword to sp
249. e supplied This is the default tracking option for cluster geometries keyword to specify that specular tracking parameters will be supplied keyword to specify that instead of selecting the angles located at the end of each angular interval the angles located in the middle of these intervals are selected This is particularly useful if one wants to avoid tracking angles that are parallel to the X or Y axis as its is the case when the external region of a CARCEL geometry is voided angular quadrature parameter For applications involving 3 D cells the choices are nangl 2 4 8 10 12 14 or 16 these angular quadratures FO present a rotational symmetry about the three cartesian axes For 2 D isotropic applications any value of nang gt 2 may be used equidistant angles will be selected For 2 D specular applications the input value must be of the form p 1 where p is a prime number for example p 7 11 etc the choice of nangl 8 12 14 18 20 24 or 30 are allowed For cluster type geometries the default value is nangl 10 for isotropic cases and nangl 12 for specular cases IGE 294 nangl_z dens dens_z CORN pcorn SYMM isymm NOSY HALT 66 angular quadrature parameter in the axial Z direction Used only with HEXZ and HEXCELZ geometries real value representing the density of the integration lines in cm for 2 D cases and cm for 3 D cases This choice of density along the plan perpendi
250. each resonant isotope is represented as a pure STU ST IR or ST WR approximation 2 Mathematical probability tables and slowing down correlated weight matrices can be com puted in selected energy groups using the Ribon extended approach In this case an elastic slowing down model is used and a mutual sel shielding model is available e The resonant fluxes are computed for each band of the probability tables using a subgroup method e The flux can be solved using collision probabilities or using any flux solution technique for which a tracking module is available e The resonant isotopes are computed one a time starting from the isotopes with the lower values of index inrs as defined in Section 3 2 If many isotopes have the same value of inrs the isotope with the greatest number of resonant nuclides is self shielded first One or many outer iterations can be performed e the distributed self shielded effect is automatically taken into account if different mixture indices are assigned to different regions inside the resonant part of the cell The rim effect can be computed by dividing the fuel into onion rings and by assigning different mixture indices to them e a SPH superhomog n isation equivalence is performed to correct the self shielded cross sections from the non linear effects related to the heterogeneity of the geometry The general format of the data for this module is Table 40 Structure USS MICLI
251. ecify that a cylindrical geometry infinite tubes or cylinders description follows This geometry can contain an imbedded X Y Cartesian mesh TUBEX keyword to specify that a polar R X cylindrical geometry description follows This geometry can contain an imbedded Y Z Cartesian mesh TUBEY keyword to specify that a polar R Y cylindrical geometry description follows This geometry can contain an imbedded Z X Cartesian mesh TUBEZ keyword to specify that a polar R Z cylindrical geometry description follows This geometry can contain an imbedded X Y Cartesian mesh IGE 294 RTHETA HEX HEXZ HEXT HEXTZ CARCEL CARCELX CARCELY CARCELZ HEXCEL HEXCELZ GROUP Ix ly Iz Ir lh nhr EDIT iprint descBC descSP 31 keyword to specify that a polar geometry R 0 description follows keyword to specify that a two dimensional hexagonal geometry description follows keyword to specify that a three dimensional hexagonal geometry description follows keyword to specify a single 2 D hexagonal cell geometry having a triangular mesh This option is only supported by the NXT tracking module see Section 3 4 keyword to specify a single Z directed 3 D hexagonal cell geometry having a triangular mesh plane X Y This option is only supported by the NXT tracking module see Section 3 4 keyword to specify that a two dimensional mixed Cartesian cell concentric tubes sur rounde
252. ecovered from MICROLIB objects The EDI calculation is generally performed with option MICR ALL The calling specifications are Table 70 Structure SAP SAPNAM SAP SAPNAM HMIC saphvb datal SAPNAM SAP SAPNAM EDINAM BRNNAM HMIC1 HMIC2 FLUNAM saphyb_data2 SAPNAM SAP SAPNAM SAPRHS saphyb_data3 where SAPNAM HMIC EDINAM BRNNAM HMICI HMIC2 FLUNAM SAPRHS saphyb_datal saphyb_data2 saphyb_data3 character 12 name of the LCM object containing the master SAPHYB data structure character 12 name of the reference MICROLIB type L_LIBRARY containing the micro scopic cross sections character 12 name of the LCM object type L_EDIT containing the EDITION data struc ture corresponding to an elementary calculation The EDITION data produced by the last call to the EDI module is used character 12 name of the LCM object type L BURNUP containing the BURNUP data structure This object is compulsory if one of the following parameters is used IRRA FLUB and or TIME character 12 name of a MICROLIB type L LIBRARV containing global parameter infor mation character 12 name of a MICROLIB type L LIBRARV containing global parameter infor mation character 12 name of the reference FLUX type L_FLUX By default the reference flux is not recovered and not written on the SAPHYB character 12 name of the read only SAPHYB data structure This data str
253. ed global parameter is an integer value keyword used to select the set of particularized isotopes keyword used to select all the available isotopes in the reference MICROLIB named HMIC as particularized isotopes keyword used to select the isotopes in the reference MICROLIB named HMIC from a specific mixture as particularized isotopes index of the mixture where the particularized isotopes are recovered keyword used to select all the available fissile isotopes in the reference MICROLIB named HMIC as particularized isotopes keyword used to select all the available fission products in the reference MICROLIB named HMIC as particularized isotopes character 12 user defined isotope name Niso is the total number of explicitely selected particularized isotopes keyword used to select a type of macroscopic set A maximum of two macroscopic sets is allowed character 8 user defined name of the macroscopic set IGE 294 145 TOUT keyword used to select all the available isotopes in the macroscopic set REST keyword used to remove all the particularized isotope contributions from the macro scopic set REAC keyword used to select the set of nuclear reactions HNAREA i character 4 name of a user selected reaction Nreac is the total number of selected reactions HNAREA i is chosen among the following values TOTA Total cross sections TOP1 Total P weighted cross sections ABSO Absorption cross sections SNNN Excess cross secti
254. edo of the geometry are to be taken into account in the complete homogenization process Thus the MERG and COMP options must be specified The SPH factors are obtained using a transport transport equivalence based on a calculation using the collision probabilities This option requires a geometry with VOID see Section 3 3 2 external boundary conditions to be closed using ALBS in modules ASM see Section 3 7 1 1SS kevword to activate a calculation of heterogeneous SPH factors based on a converg ing series of macro calculations with the correction strategv of Eqs 3 27 to 3 31 This is the default option if the macro calculation is of diffusion PN or SPN type A normalization condition must be set if the macro geometrv has no boundarv leak age fundamental mode condition If boundarv leakage is present no normalization condition is used but the SPH iterations are difficult to converge in this case IGE 294 SN STD SELE ALB SELE FD SELE_MWG 116 keyword to activate a calculation of heterogeneous SPH factors based on a converg ing series of macro calculations with the correction strategy of Eqs 3 32 and 3 33 This is the default option if the macro calculation is of PIJ IC SN or MOC type A normalization condition must be set if the macro geometry has no boundary leak age fundamental mode condition If boundary leakage is present no normalization condition is used but the SPH iterations are difficult to converge in
255. ee aS 118 3 121 Data input for module CFCs k a eee ewe ee 119 gl The INFO module i samisi S e K ee ee ee 121 3 13 1 Data input for module INFO J k ee ed aa ee 121 ould The COMPOS modale 2 ww imema a OES na jek ke Beek as ete ha ae a 124 3 14 1 Initialization data input for module COMPO 126 3 14 2 Modification data input for module COMPO 129 3 14 3 Modification catenate data input for module COMPO 130 3 14 4 Display data input for module COMPO 130 Slo The TEM module lt lt oie ee he ee RR e as 132 3101 Dats input for module TLM oa o ee a hae edhe eee 132 3 16 The MoT module abes g sarr eb d ea Od ee ee a OS g g 135 3 16 1 Data input for module M2T 2 es ca wee knee k daa ee 135 al The CHAB module s e no sms SS WHER OS eo et Lae es 137 3 1 1 Data input for module CHAB 4 0006 08 g a eee eee 137 ele DR EPOS odie coc or seai A eck eee ee ee ee ee 139 3 18 1 Data input for module CPO lt ee cas erineks ki a es 139 319 The SAP module baii ida BERR eee da mk L in 141 3 19 1 Initialization data input for module SAP 143 3 19 2 Modification data input for module SAP 145 3 193 Modification catenate data input for module SAP 146 daw The MGE module 5555 de sae eRe eee eta ee SS Fw Gos 148 32041 Data Input tar module MOL 2 0 65 bs haw i He eS 148 321 The module 4 4
256. een performed it is possible to list other isotopes and ask for further calculations Finally note that the number of output parameters denoted by gt gt param lt lt are recovered as CLE 2000 variables in descinfo The number of these parameters must be equal to the number of isotopes names given plus the water density when a command CALC DENS WATER is issued IGE 294 124 3 14 The COMPO module This component of the lattice code is dedicated to the constitution of the reactor database intended to store all the nuclear data produced in the lattice code that is useful in reactor calculations including fuel management and space time kinetics Multigroup lattice calculations are too expensive to be executed dynamically from the driver of the global reactor calculation A more feasible approach is to create a reactor database where a finite number of lattice calculation results are tabulated against selected global and or local parameters chosen so as to represent expected operating conditions of the reactor The COMPO module is used to create and construct a MULTICOMPO object This object is gener ally persistent and used to collect information gathered from many DRAGON elementary calculations performed under various conditions For each elementary calculation the results are recovered from the output of the EDI module and stored in a list of homogenized mixture directories The EDI module is responsible for performing condensation in ene
257. ef2p2 and file DLIB_J2 used in the tdraglib x2m and trowland x2m non regression tests The content of the readme file follows File readme Instructions for configuring Version4 components on MS DOS system cd homepath WVersion4X script instver4 Instructions for configuring Version4 of Dragon Donjon on UNIX systems To configure Version4 components with custom compiler cd Version4 Utilib script install cd Version4 Ganlib script install cd Version4 Trivac script install cd 7 Version4 Dragon script install cd 7 Version4 Donjon script install cd Version4 Optex script install On some Unix or Linux distributions the optimisation switch 0 is broken so that DRAGON seems to behave improperly Use the noopt option do disable the 0 switch Eg script install noopt IGE 294 285 To configure Version4 components with Absoft compiler cd Version4 Utilib script install absoft cd Version4 Ganlib script install absoft cd Version4 Trivac script install absoft cd Version4 Dragon script install absoft cd Version4 Donjon script install absoft cd Version4 Optex script install absoft absoft can be replaced with gfortran g95 or intel To execute Trivac with custom compiler cd Version4 Trivac rtrivac iaea3d x2m In case of bug rtrivac iaea3d x2m w To execute Dragon with custom com
258. eld NAMPAR ENDCHAIN with CHAIN keyword to specify the beginning of the depletion chain NAMDPL character 12 name of an isotope or isomer of the depletion chain that appears in the cross section library izae optional six digit integer representing the isotope The first two digits represent the atomic number of the isotope the next three indicate its mass number and the last digit indicates the excitation level of the nucleus 0 for a nucleus in its ground state 1 for an isomer in its first exited state etc For example U in its ground state will be represented by izae 922380 DECAV indicates that a decav reaction takes place either for production of this isotope or its depletion dcr radioactive decay constant in 1078 s 1 of the isotope By default der 0 0 reaction character 6 identification of a neutron induced reaction that takes place either for pro duction of this isotope its depletion or for producing energy Example of reactions are following NG indicates that a radiative capture reaction takes place either for produc tion of this isotope its depletion or for producing energy N2N indicates that the following reaction is taking place n Xz gt 2n 4 Xz N3N indicates that the following reaction is taking place n 4 Xz gt 3n4 4 Xz N4N indicates that the following reaction is taking place n 4 Xz gt 4n Xz NP indicates that the following reaction is taking place nda Xz gt
259. elementary calculation This EDITION data structure is containing group form factor information The EDITION data produced by the last call to the EDI module is used BRNNAM characterx12 name of the LCM object type L_BURNUP containing the BURNUP data structure IGE 294 126 HMIC1 character 12 name of a MICROLIB type L_LIBRARY containing global parameter infor mation HMIC2 character 12 name of a MICROLIB type L LIBRARV containing global parameter infor mation CPORHS character 12 name of the read only MULTICOMPO data structure This data structure is concatenated to CPONAM using the compo_data3 data structure as presented in Section 3 14 3 CPORHS must be defined with the same number of energy groups and the same number of homogeneous regions as CPONAM Moreover all the global and local parameters of CPORHS must be defined in CPONAM CPONAM may be defined with global parameters not defined in CPORHS compo datal input data structure containing initialization information see Section 3 14 1 compo data2 input data structure containing information related to the recovery of an elementary calculation see Section 3 14 2 compo_data3 input data structure containing information related to the catenation of a read only MULTICOMPO see Section 3 14 3 compo_data4 input data structure containing information related to the display of a read only MUL TICOMPO see Section 3 14 4 3 14 1 Initialization data input for module COMPO
260. energy group of a full core or macro calculation see Sect 4 4 of Ref 1 These equivalence factors are computed in such a way that a macro calculation made over Cm and M with a simplified transport operator leads to the same leakage and reaction rates as a reference calculation performed without homogenization and with a fine group discretization The SPH correction is applied differently depending on the type of macro calculation e In the case where the macro calculation is done with the diffusion theory neutron balance is satisfied if the SPH correction is applied as follows G G V J r uzat 2 ea 2 mE 3 27 and J r Dj ET 3 28 Mg In conclusion Diffusion coefficients and all P cross sections including the total cross section NTOTO must be multiplied by py Scattering matrix terms so g r must be multiplied by pp Fluxes such as NWTO and FLUX INTG must be divided by y e In the case where the macro calculation is done with the simplified P method the neutron balance is satisfied if the SPH correction is applied on even parity equations as follows Hg Xo g T aan al alr L ST en r t D Nas so T e 3 29 g 20 y boy git T 24 V S y ba0 n r 3 30 4711 V G20 1 9 7 MgX0 g r Lip L Pus g T DH sage NT TTL 30 and on odd paritv equations as follows G 28 yO 20 9 7 aat 2242 d2042 9 7 Ds2e 1 9 lt h P r r 3 31
261. eps are given in MWday tonne 1 However a confusion appear in cases where some energy is released outside the fuel e g due to n y reactions The accepted rule and default option in EVO is to compute the burnup steps in units of MW day tonne by considering only the energy released in fuel and only the initial mass of the heavy elements present in fuel However it is also recommended to provide a normalization power taking into account the total energy released in the global geometry The GLOB option can be use to change this rule and to use the energy released in the complete geometry to compute the burnup However this is not a common practice as it implies a non usual definition of the burnup A more acceptable solution consists in setting the normalization power in power per unit volume of the complete geometry using the key word W CC The value of apower can be computed from the linear power fiin expressed in Mev s7 cm 1 using in 1 60207 x 10713 apower A 3 24 where Vassmb is the 2 D lumped volume of the assembly expressed in em The corresponding normalization factor fburnup in MW tonne is given as apower A 3 25 Dg Fpower fournup where Dg is the mass of heavy elements per unit volume of the complete geometry g cm and Fpower is the ratio of the energy released in the complete geometry over the energy released in fuel Numerical values of Dg and fpower are computed by EVO when the parameter iprint is
262. er cross sections for a number of partic ularized isotopes and macroscopic sets a collection of isotopic cross sections weighted by isotopic number densities Cross sections for particularized isotopes and macroscopic sets are recovered for selected reac tions Other information is also recovered multigroup neutron fluxes isotopic number densities fission spectrum and a set of local variables The local variables are values that characterize each homogenized mixture local power burnup exposure rate etc Some local variables are arrays of values eg SPH equivalence factors Finally note that cross section information written on the SAPHYB is not transport corrected and not SPH corrected A different specification of the SAP function call is used for creation and construction of the SAPHYB object IGE 294 142 e The first specification is used to initialize the SAPHYB data structure as a function of the MICROLIB used in the reference calculation Optionnally the homogenized geometry is also provided The initialization call is also used to set the choice of global parameters local variables particularized isotopes macroscopic sets and selected reactions e A modification call to the SAP function is performed after each elementary calculation in order to recover output information processed by EDI condensed and homogenized cross sections and EVO burnup dependant values Global parameters and local variables can optionnally be r
263. ering modified collision probability matrix are multiplied by the adequate non leakage homogeneous buckling dependent factor 1671 The non leakage factor PNLR g is defined as Ug 20 949 __ 2 3 2 Ug Us0 g g dy B B PNLR g where transport corrected total cross sections are used to compute the W matrix Ds geg is the average transport corrected macroscopic within group scattering cross section in group g homogenized over the lattice and transport corrected Eq 3 1 is then replaced by do PaLR g WQ 3 3 PNL keyword used to specify that the elements of the collision probability matrix are multi plied by the adequate non leakage homogeneous buckling dependent factor This is the default option when a buckling calculation is required B or a fission source eigen value problem K with imposed buckling is considered The non leakage factor PnL y is defined as PNL g 3 4 8 d B B where Ya is the average transport corrected macroscopic total cross section in group g homogenized over the lattice and transport corrected Eq 3 1 is then replaced by dy R W L 1 Pin g 2250 gs g dg 3 5 IGE 294 95 where so 9 9 diag so i gs 9 Vi and the total cross sections used to compute the W matrix are also transport corrected It is important to note that that the PNLR option reduces to the PNL option in cases where no scattering reduction is performed Scattering reduction can be avoide
264. es SEQ_BINARY keyword used to specify which data structures will be stored on sequential binary files SEQ_ASCII keyword used to specify which data structures will be stored on sequential ASCII files STRNAME character 12 name of a DRAGON data structure Note that on MVS file names are truncated to 7 characters due to a constraint of this operating system The list of DRAGON data structure is presented in Section 2 5 module input specifications for a DRAGON or utility module For the DRAGON specific modules these input structures will be defined in Section 3 For utility modules the required structures are described in Section 4 IGE 294 4 END keyword to call the normal end of execution utility module end of record keyword This keyword is used by DRAGON to delimit the part of the input data stream associated with each module Note that the user generally has the choice to declare most of the data structures in the format of a linked list to reduce CPU times or as a XSM file to reduce memory resources Some exceptions to this general rule are the tracking files as we will see in Section 3 4 In general the data structure are stored on the sequential ASCII files only for backup purposes The input data normally ends with a call to the END module see Section 4 13 However the GAN driver will insert automatically the END module even if it was not provided upon reaching an end of file in the input stream Each module specific
265. es are to be printed This option should only be used when absolutely necessary because it generates a rather large amount of output Only used when 2 d assembly of cells are considered keyword to specify that square cells are to be treated as if they were rectangular cells with the inherent loss in performance that this entails This option is of purely academic interest keyword to specify the number of basis point for the numerical integration of each micro structure in cases involving double heterogeneity Bihet the number of basis point for the numerical integration of the collision probabilities in the micro volumes using the Gauss Jacobi formula The values permitted are 1 to 20 24 28 32 or 64 The default value is iquab 5 use the Sanchez Pomraning double heterogeneity model l use the Hebert double heterogeneity model default option IGE 294 63 3 4 2 The EXCELT tracking module The calling specification for this module is Table 26 Structure EXCELT TRKNAM TRKFIL EXCELT TRKNAM TRKFIL GEONAM desctrack descexcel where TRKNAM character 12 name of the TRACKING data structure that will contain region volume and surface area vectors in addition to region identification pointers and other tracking information If TRKNAM also appears on the RHS the previous tracking parameters will be applied by default on the current geometry TRKFIL character 12 name of the sequential binary tracki
266. etry These values must be lt maxmix fract array of volumetric concentration V Vr of each micro structures volume Vg in a given region volume VR of the macro geometry mixgr array giving the mixture index associated with each region of the micro structures Note that mixgr should be specified only for the regions of the micro structure which have a concentration fract gt 0 These values must be lt maxmix Examples of geometry definitions can be found in Section 6 2 IGE 294 57 3 3 6 Do it yourself geometries A do it yourself geometry is an abstract representation of an assembly of arbitrary unit cells defined in term of their probability of presence and of their probability to have a particular neighbor Structure descSIJ is defined as Table 22 Structure descSIJ POURCE pcinl i i 1 1p PROCEL pijcel i j j 1 lp i 1 lp where POURCE keyword to specify that a do it yourself type geometry is to be defined that is to say a geometry resembling the multicell geometry seen in APOLLO 1 This option permits the interactions between different arbitrarily arranged cells in an infinite lattice to be treated The cells are identified by the information following the keyword CELL The user must ensure that the total number of regions appearing in all the cells must be less than maxreg pcinl array giving the proportion of each cell type in the lattice such that lp V peinl i 1 lt 107 i 1 P
267. eyword to specify on which directory of EDINAM this information is to be stored name of the directory on which the above information is to be stored number associated with a directory of EDINAM on which the above information is to be stored To each number idirn is associated a directory name CDIRN REF CASE CN where CN is a character 4 variable defined by WRITE CN I4 idirn keyword to specify that first order perturbations for the microscopic cross sections are to be saved on EDINAM keyword to specify that a comparison between the current and a reference set of reac tion rates and or integrated fluxes is to be performed keyword to specify that the relative differences in the reaction rates and the integrated fluxes are to be printed keyword to specify that the relative differences in the reaction rates are to be printed keyword to specify that the relative differences in the integrated fluxes are to be printed keyword to specify that the absolute differences in the macroscopic cross section are to be printed keyword to specify the directory of EDINAM where the reference data requires for the comparison is stored When this keyword is absent the last reaction rates and integrated fluxes saved on EDINAM are used IGE 294 DIRO idiro NOHF NBAL MAXR maxpts DIRE PROD MGEO MACGEO NADF ALBS JOUT ADF TYPE 102 name of the directory from which the reference information is taken
268. f equivalence calculation where the flux and the condensed and or homogenized cross sections are corrected by SPH factors in such a way as to respect a specified transport transport or transport diffusion equivalence criteria This structure is defined as Table 52 Structure descsph EDIT iprint STEP UP NOMDIR AT index IDEM MACRO MICRO OFF SPRD nmerge ngcond sph i i 1 nmerge x ngcond HOMO ALBS PN SN STD SELE_ALB SELE FD SELE_MWG SELE_EDF ASYM mixs ARM ITER maxout epsout MAXNB maxnb EQUI TEXT80 LEAK b2 where IGE 294 EDIT iprint STEP UP NOMDIR AT index IDEM MACRO MICRO OFF SPRD nmerge ngcond sph i HOMO ALBS PN 115 keyword used to modify the print level iprint index used to control the printing of this module The iprint parameter is important for adjusting the amount of data that is printed by this calculation step keyword used to set a specific elementary calculation from the first RHS keyword used to select an elementary calculation located in a subdirectory of EDINAM or CPONAM By default e the sub directory name stored in record LAST EDIT is selected if EDINAM is defined at RHS e the sub directory default is selected if CPONAM is defined at RHS name of an existing sub directory of EDINAM or CPONAM keyword used to select the index th elementary calculation
269. f output produced by this tracking module will vary substantially depending on the print level specified GRMIN keyword to specify the minimum group number considered during the self shielding process Igrmin first group number considered during the self shielding process By default Igrmin is set to the first group number containing self shielding data in the library GRMAX keyword to specify the maximum group number considered during the self shielding process Igrmax last group number considered during the self shielding process By default Igrmax is set is set to the last group number containing self shielding data in the library PASS keyword to specify the number of outer iterations during the self shielding process ipass the number of iterations The default is ipass 2 if MICLIB is created NOCO kevword to ignore the directives set bv LIB concerning the mutual resonance shielding model This kevword has the effect to replace the mutual resonance shielding model in the subgroup projection method SPM by a full correlation approximation similar to the technique used in the ECCO code This keyword can be used to avoid the message USSIST UNABLE TO FIND CORRELATED ISOTOPE 2 4 IGE 294 NOSP TRAN NOTR PIJ ARM MAXST imax CALC REGI suffix isot ALL imix nmix ENDC 86 that appears with the SPM if the correlated weights matrices are missing in the mi crolib keyword to deactivate the SPH
270. fault value if TRKFIL is set The tracking file is read in each energy group if the method of characteristics MOC is used keyword to specify that the tracking is read once and the collision probability or algebraic collapsing matrices are computed in many energy groups The tracking file is read once if the method of characteristics MOC is used keyword to specify that the tracking is computed on demand it is not stored on a file and the collision probability matrices are computed in many energy groups The tracking file TRKFIL should not be provided default value if TRKFIL is not set keyword to specify the number of basis point for the numerical integration of each micro structure in cases involving double heterogeneity Bihet the number of basis point for the numerical integration of the collision probabilities in the micro volumes using the Gauss Jacobi formula The values permitted are 1 to 20 24 28 32 or 64 The default value is iquab 5 use the Sanchez Pomraning double heterogeneity model use the Hebert double heterogeneity model default option 47 keyword to specify that a collision probability calculation with isotropic reflection boundary conditions is required It is the default option if a TISO type integration is chosen To obtain accurate transmission probabilities for the isotropic case it is recommended that the normalization options in the ASM module be used keyword to specify that a collision p
271. fault value is eight resp twelve times the number of volumes and external surfaces for 2D resp 3D geometries keyword to select the integration scheme along the tracking lines selection criterion 0 0 step characteristics scheme zhdd gt 0 0 diamond differencing scheme The default value is xhdd 0 0 so that the step characteristics method is used keyword used to force the usage of exact exponentials in the flux calculation not by default keyword to select the tracking integration strategy 0 a direct approach with asymptotical treatment is used 1 a source term isola tion approach with asymptotical treatment is used this technique tends to reduce the computational cost and increase the numerical stability but requires the calcula tion of angular mode to mode self collision probabilities 1 an MOCC MCT like approach is used it tends to reduce further more the computational cost as it doesn t feature any asymptotical treatment for vanishing optical thicknesses Note that when a zero total cross section is found with istis 1 it is reset to 1 The default value is istis 1 for Pr c3 anisotropy and 0 otherwise keyword to select an adjoint solution of ACA and characteristics systems A direct solution is set by default IGE 294 74 3 4 5 The SNT tracking module The SNT module can process one dimensional two dimensional regular geometries and three dimensional Cartesian geometries of type CAR1D
272. fer scattering matrix are also obtained using the CALENDF approach keyword to enable the calculation of CALENDF type probability tables consistent with the Ribon extended model in some energy groups the intermediate resonance IR approximation or the Ribon extended model is imposed for energy groups with an index equal or greater than nir A statistical ST model is set in other groups keyword to specify that a statistical ST model is set in all groups keyword to force a mixture or a nuclide to be non depleting even in cases where it is potentially depleting Note that the mixture or nuclide keeps its capability to produce energy By default the depleting isotopes are automatically regognized as depleting keyword to force a nuclide to be at saturation By default the saturation approximation is automatically set as a function of the half life and capture cross sections of the isotope keyword to specify that this mixture is reset with a combination of previously defined mixtures number associated with a previously defined mixture In order to insert some void in a mixture use mati 0 If the mixture is not already defined one assumes that it represents a voided mixture relative volume V occupied by mixture mati i in matnum Two cases can be considered namely that where the density p of each mixture mati is provided along with the weight percent for each isotope J W7 and the case where the explicit concentration N of ea
273. file or a sequential ASCII file EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of this module The amount of output produced by this tracking module will vary substantially depending on the print level specified OLD keyword used to import export a LHS sequential ASCII file in 1995 LCM specification By default the up to date specification is used SAP keyword used to import export a LHS sequential ASCII file in Saphyr LCM specification STEP keyword used to move in the LCM object hierarchy of NAME2 before making the copy UP keyword used to move up towards a sub directory of NAME2 of the active directory NOMDIR copy the information located in the sub directory named NOMDIR AT keyword used to move up towards a component in an heterogeneous list of NAME2 index copy the information located in the index th component of the heterogeneous list If both the RHS and LHS are LCM objects either memory resident or XSM based a single copy is performed A memory resident LCM object can be created from an XSM file or an XSM file can be created from a memory resident LCM object If the LHS is a sequential file and the RHS is a LCM object an export is performed The export format is either binary or ASCII If the LHS is a LCM object and the RHS is a sequential file an import is performed The case where both the LHS and the RHS are sequential files is not supported IGE 294 163 4 2 The UTL module
274. generally set using MCFD 1 The MCFD approximations are numerically equivalent to the DUAL approximations with icol 2 however the MCFD approximations are less expensive key word to set a discretization based on the nodal collocation method with serendipity approximation The serendipity approximation is different from the MCFD option in cases with ielem gt 2 This option is not available for hexagonal geometries order of the finite element representation The values permitted are 1 linear polynomials 2 parabolic polynomials 3 cubic polynomials or 4 quartic polynomials By default ielem 1 type of quadrature used to integrate the mass matrices The values permitted are 1 analytical integration 2 Gauss Lobatto quadrature or 3 Gauss Legendre quadrature By default icol 2 The analytical integration corresponds to classical finite elements the Gauss Lobatto quadrature corresponds to a variational or nodal type collocation and the Gauss Legendre quadrature corresponds to superconvergent finite elements type of hexagonal mesh splitting This data is given only if the geometry is 2D or 3D hexagonal The values permitted with the MCFD option are 1 full hexagons 2 for splitting each hexagon into 6 triangles 3 for splitting each hexagon into 24 triangles etc The values permitted with the PRIM option are 1 full hexagons and 2 for splitting each hexagon into 6 triangles The values permitted with the Thomas Raviart Schneider me
275. geometry HEXDIY or directly HEXDIR HEXDIY GEO GROUP 2 POURCE 0 3333333 0 66666667 PROCEL 0 0 1 0 0 5 0 5 MIX C1 C2 ti Cl GEO TUBE 1 RADIUS 0 0 1 1822093 MIX 1 C2 GEO Ci MIX 2 IGE 294 185 DEDO CODO OBB LRH La La a 122912 On On On On Oa Ane OOOO ener TA a Figure 28 Hexagonal multicell lattice geometry HEXDIR GEO HEX 2 HBC S30 SYME SIDE 1 3 MIX 1 2 The first lattice can only be analyzed using the SYBILT tracking module while the second lattice can be analyzed using all the tracking modules of DRAGON IGE 294 186 6 3 MATXS7A microscopic cross section examples The test cases we will consider here use the LIB module to specify that the cross sections will be taken from a MATXS7A 69 groups microscopic cross sections library We will assume that this library is located in file MATXS7A 6 3 1 TCXA01 The Mosteller benchmark The typical input data required to analyze this benchmark with DRAGON is of the form Input data for test case TCXA01 x2m k TEST CASE TCXAO1 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK 1 D ANNULAR CELL AND 2 D CARTESIAN CELL MATXS7A 69 GROUPS LIBRARY FILE MATXS7A BASED ON ENDF B V REF R Mosteller et al Nucl Sci Eng 107 265 1991 Xxx XX XX xXx p o Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used Fuzz LINKED_LIST MOSTELA MOSTELC DISCR LIBRARY CP CALC OUT SEQ_BINARY TRKSPC MODULE LIB GEO SYBILT EXCELT SHI ASM FLU EDI DEL
276. he material mixtures In the editing routines a value of imixm 0 allows the corresponding isotopic mixtures to be neglected For a mixture in this library which is not used in the geometry one should insert a value of 0 for the new region number associated with this mixture By default if MIX is set and imixm is not set imixm ii ii is assumed keyword to specify that the a complete homogenization is to take place keyword to specify that a group condensation of the flux is to be performed array of increasing energy group limits that will be associated with each of the ngcond condensed groups The final value of icond will automatically be set to ngroup while the values of icond gt ngroup will be droped from the condensation We must have ngcond lt ngroup By default if COND is set and icond is not set all energy groups are condensed together keyword used to terminate the definition of a tally IGE 294 150 3 21 The T module A MACROLIB object can be defined directly using module MAC see Section 3 1 or as part of a MICROLIB object using module LIB see Section 3 2 It is possible to transpose a MACROLIB using the module T Transposition consists in e renumbering the energy groups from thermal to fast e transposing the transfer matrices SCAT so that the primary and secondary energy group indices are permuted e storing NUSIGF information in CHI and storing CHI infomation in NUSIGF A transposed MACROLIB object permits to ma
277. he method of cyclic characteristics IGE 294 211 Input data for test case TCM09 x2m SE TEST CASE TCMO9 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM CARTESIAN 3 X 3 ASSEMBLY WATANABE MAYNARD PROBLEM SIMILAR TO TCMO9 REF R Roy The Cyclic Characteristics Method Int Conf Physics of Nuclear Science and Technology Long Island NY October 1998 pp 407 414 XK XA XA XX XX XX XX X XX l l LINKED LIST WATA WAT24 TRACK MACRO SVS FLUX EDITION SEQ BINARV WATATRK STRING PolarAng CACB MODULE GEO EXCELT MCCGT MAC ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE assertV MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS MACRO MAC NGRO 1 NMIX 3 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 0 2 SCAT 1 1 0 19 FIXE 6 4 MIX 2 TOTAL 0 2 SCAT 1 1 0 19 MIX 3 TOTAL 0 0 SCAT 1 1 0 00 GEOMETRIES ENTERED WITH SYMMETRIES WAT24 24 X 24 REGIONS WATA GEO CAR2D 3 3 X DIAG X VOID MESHX 0 00 1 25 5 00 10 00 Y REFL Y DIAG MESHY 0 00 1 25 5 00 10 00 MIX 1 3 2 3 2 2 i WAT24 GEO WATA SPLITX 3 9 12 SPLITY 3 9 12 SOLUTION FOR WAT24 TRACK WATATRK EXCELT WAT24 TITLE TCMO9 WATANABE MAYNARD 24X24 MAXR 300 TRAK TSPC 12 12 0 TRACK MCCGT TRACK WATATRK EDIT 1 lt lt PolarAng gt gt 4 AAC 80 TMT EPSI 1E 5 MCU 2500 MAXI 1 KRYL O SCR O HDD 0 0 SYS ASM MACRO TRACK WATATRK EDIT 2 ARM FLUX FLU MACRO TRACK SYS WATATRK TYPE S THER 1 E 6 100 EXTE 1 E 6 100 UPPER QUADRANT FLUX FOR 24X24 RESULTS GIVE
278. homogenized and condensed using a current recovered from a consistent P or from a consistent heterogeneous B model keyword to specify that the Pi information is to be homogenized and condensed using the Todorova flux defined as ptr E ott 5E Das B where E and Xs1 E are the macroscopic total and P scattering cross sections in the mixture containing the point r keyword to specify that a group condensation of the flux is to be performed array of increasing energy group limits that will be associated with each of the ngcond condensed groups The final value of icond will automatically be set to ngroup while the values of icond gt ngroup will be droped from the condensation We must have ngcond lt ngroup By default if COND is set and icond is not set all energy groups are condensed together array of decreasing energy limits in eV that will be associated with each of the ngcond condensed groups We must have ngcond lt ngroup 1 Note that if an energy limit is located between two energy groups the condensation group will include this associated energy group In the case where two energy limits fall within the same energy group the lowest energy will be droped Finally the maximum and minimum energy limits can be skipped since they will be taken automatically from the information available in the library keyword to specify that the condensation and homogenization procedure will be used to associate micro
279. ibution is to be recovered from FLU NAM if present in the RHS arguments Otherwise the neutron flux is to be initialized with a flat distribution TYPE keyword to specify the type of solution used in the flux operator N keyword to specify that no flux calculation is to be performed This option is usually activated when one simply wishes to initialize the neutron flux distribution and to store this information in FLUNAM S keyword to specify that a fixed source problem is to be treated Such problem can also include fission source contributions P keyword to specify that a fixed source eigenvalue problem GPT type is to be treated Such problem includes fission source contributions in addition of GPT sources K keyword to specify that a fission source eigenvalue problem is to be treated The eigen value is then the effective multiplication factor with a fixed buckling In this case the fixed sources if any is present on the MACROLIB or MICROLIB data structure are not used B keyword to specify that a fission source eigenvalue problem is to be treated The eigen value in this case is the critical buckling with a fixed effective multiplication factor The buckling eigenvalue has meaning only in the case of a cell without leakages see the structure descBC in Section 3 3 2 It is also possible to use an open geometry with VOID boundary conditions provided it is closed by the ASM module see Section 3 7 1 using the keywords NORM or ALSB
280. ill be given by DEPL DAT CNN where CNN is a character 4 variable defined by WRITE CNN I14 4 INN where INN is an index associated with the time xti The initial values are recovered from this sub directory in BRNNAM xtf end of time for the burnup calculation The results of the isotopic depletion calculations are stored in the tables associated with a sub directory whose name is constructed in the same manner as the xti input dxt time interval for the burnup calculation The initial time xti in this case is taken as the final time reached at the last depletion step If this is the first depletion step xti 0 xts time associated with the last transport calculation The name of the sub directory where this information is to be stored is constructed in the same manner as the for xti input By default fixed default xts xti xtr time associated with the next flux calculation The name of the sub directory where this information is to be stored is constructed in the same manner as for the xti input By default fixed default xtr xtf IGE 294 DAY YEAR COOL FLUX flux POWR fpower W CC apower KEEP EPS1 valeps1 EPS2 valeps2 EXPM valexp SATOFF H1 valh1 RUNG KAPS 109 keyword to specify that the time is given in seconds keyword to specify that the time is given in days keyword to specify that the time is given in years keyword to specify that a zero flux burnup calculation is to
281. illustrate the burnup of an homogeneous cell that spends the first 1000 days in a reactor before being removed The depletion of the isotopes in this cell for an additional 1000 days outside of the core is also investiguated Input data for test case TCWU08 x2m x TEST CASE TCWWOS HOMOGENEOUS DEPLETION CASE x iaea WLUP Library REF None eee Define variables Burnup paremeters a Power 600 0 kw kg for 0 0 to 1000 0 days kal 0 0 kw kg for 1000 0 to 2000 0 days b Burnup time interval Delt 10 days for O to 50 days 2 50 days for 50 to 500 days 100 days for 500 to 1000 days 1000 days for 1000 to 2000 days c Editing time Timec 0 0 50 0 500 0 1000 0 and 2000 0 days d Burnup control time variables Timei Timef TotalTime Timei initial time Timef final time TotalTime Final time reached d Print variable Iprint 1 reduced print 3 full print poses REAL Power Delt Timec Timei Timef TotalTime 600 0 10 0 50 0 0 0 0 0 2000 0 INTEGER IGE 294 247 Iprint 1 p as Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used aa LINKED_LIST LIBRARY HOM TRACK PIJ FLUX BURNUP EDITION MODULE GEO SYBILT LIB SHI ASM FLU EVO EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts Hi Depletion data from file iaea format WIMSD4 Microscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 LIBRARY LIB NMIX 1 CTRA WIMS DEPL LIB WIMSD4 FIL iaea MIXS LIB WIMS
282. imei Timec lt DO EVALUATE Timef Timei Delt IF Timei 0 0 THEN BURNUP LIBRARY EVO LIBRARY FLUX VOLMATF DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt ELSE BURNUP NOEX ENDIF LIBRARY LIBRARY SHI LIBRARY VOLMATS INTLINS 31 971 FUEL TEMP 31 971 FUEL TEMP 941 29 941 29 EDITMOD EVO BURNUP LIBRARY FLUX VOLMATF DEPL lt lt Timei gt gt lt lt Timef gt gt DAY POWR lt lt Power gt gt U IGE 294 264 EDIT 0 PIJ DELETE PIJ PIJ ASM LIBRARY VOLMATF INTLINF FLUX FLU FLUX PIJ LIBRARY VOLMATF TYPE K EDITION EDI EDITION FLUX LIBRARY VOLMATF SAVE ELE change delta t for burnup and final time if required goo IF Timef Timec THEN IF Timec 150 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 50 0 300 0 ENDIF IF Timec 50 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 20 0 150 0 ENDIF IF Timec 10 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 10 0 50 0 ENDIF IF Timec 5 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 5 0 10 0 ENDIF IF Timec 1 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 4 0 5 0 ENDIF ENDIF EVALUATE Timei Timef ENDWHILE assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 0 9537331 ee Save calculation results in CPO format file eae COMPO1 CPO BURNUP EDITION BURNUP REF CASE EXTRACT Xe135 Xe135 NAME MIXTRXE fuel COMPO1 COMPO2 CPO EDITION STEP EDITMOD NAME MIXTMOD mode COMPO2 INTLINF INTLINS DELETE INTL
283. in the output microlib keyword to specify that microscopic activation data will be edited for the isotopes associated with the specified mixture This information correspond to the microscopic cross section associated with each isotope in a given macro group and macro region assuming a concentration for this isotope of 1 0 xem in each region This keyword is followed by nacti material mixture indices where nacti lt maxmix keyword to specify that no isotope present in the homogenized region is to be used as activation data array of material mixture indices which contains the isotopes for which activation data is to be generated nmix lt maxmix Even mixture not used in the geometry can be considered here keyword to specify that the set of microscopic cross section generated by the MICR and ACTI command will also be saved on a microscopic group neutron cross section library in the ISOTXS IV format This will generate a file for each final region specified by the TAKE or MERG keyword numbered consecutively IFILE The name of the file NISOTXS is built using the command WRITE NISOTXS A6 16 6 ISOTXS IFILE keyword to specify that the ISOTXS file is created in ascii format By default it is created in binary format keyword to specify that the fluxes the macroscopic and microscopic cross sections and the volumes corresponding to homogenized regions are to be saved on EDINAM A MACROLIB is store on a subdirectory of EDITION k
284. inary cylinder in a cluster geometry the angle radian of the first pin in the ring only one value provided for apins the angular spacing of the pins being 27 npins or the angle of each pins in the ring keyword to specify the x position where the centers of the pins are to be placed in a cluster geometry the x position cm where the centers of the pins are to be placed keyword to specify the y position where the centers of the pins are to be placed in a cluster geometry the y position cm where the centers of the pins are to be placed keyword to specify the z position where the centers of the pins are to be placed in a cluster geometry the z position cm where the centers of the pins are to be placed The user should be warned that the maximum number of zones resulting from the above description of a geometry Lzones Should not exceed the limits imposed by maxreg and defined in the tracking module JPMT SYBILT or EXCELT see Section 3 4 For pure geometry with splitting we can define the variables La Ly Lz Lr Ly and Ly as Ly 5 ispltz i ba isplty i 5 ispltz i IGE 294 44 Figure 13 Definition of the radii in a CARCEL or HEXCEL type geometry lr Le 3 lispltr i i l Ln Ih 6 x nh if nhr gt 1 6 x isplith otherwise and Lzones Will be given by e SPHERE geometry Lzones Ly e TUBE geometry Liones L L L e TUBEX geometry Drones L LyLzL e TUBEY geometry Liones L L Lz
285. ing even in cases where it is potentially depleting Note that the mixture keeps its capability to produce energy IGE 294 29 3 3 The GEO module The GEO module is used to create or modify a geometry The geometry definition module in DRAGON permits all the characteristics coordinates region mixture and boundary conditions of a simple or complex geometry to be specified The method used to specify the geometry is independent of the discretization module to be used subsequently Each geometry is stored in the form of a GEOMETRY data structure under its given name It is always possible to modify an existing geometry or copy it under a new name The calling specifications are Table 15 Structure GEO GEONAM GEO GEONAM OLDGEO descgent GEONAM GEO descgtyp descgent where GEONAM character 12 name of the GEOMETRY created or modified OLDGEO character 12 name of a read only GEOMETRY The type and all the characteristics of OLDGEO will be copied onto GEONAM before this later geometry is modified descgtyp structure describing the geometry type of GEONAM see Section 3 3 1 descgent structure describing the characteristics of a geometry see Section 3 3 1 3 3 1 Data input for module GEO Structures descgtyp and descgent are used to define respectively the type of geometry that will be define and the contents of this geometry dimensions materials boundary conditions The module GEO can b
286. ins RPIN rpins rpins i i 1 npins APIN apins apins i i 1 npins CPINX xpins i i npins j CPINY ypins i i 1 npins i 1 npins CPINZ zpins i DPIN dpins MESHX keyword to specify the spatial mesh defining the regions along the X axis XXX array giving the X limits cm of the regions making up the geometry These values must be given in order from X to X If the geometry presents a diagonal symmetry the same data is also used along the Y axis SPLITX keyword to specify that a mesh splitting of the geometry along the X axis is to be performed ispltx array giving the number of zones that will be considered for each region along the X axis If the geometry presents a diagonal symmetry this information is also used for the splitting along the Y axis By default ispltx 1 MESHY keyword to specify the spatial mesh defining the regions along the Y axis yyy array giving the Y limits cm of the regions making up the geometry These values must be given in order from Y to Y SPLITY keyword to specify that a mesh splitting of the geometry along the Y axis is to be performed isplty array giving the number of zones that will be considered for each region along the Y axis By default isplty 1 unless a diagonal symmetry is used in which case is plty ispltx MESHZ keyword to specify the spatial mesh defining the regions along the Z axis
287. int flux is introduced as a weighting function in the homogenization and condensation formulas In this case the module EDI produces the following homogenized condensed information adjoint neutron flux a dV dE r E Vmerg Emerg microscopic transfer cross section for isotope i 1 f f SSS T dV dE dE N r Osi 1 E E r E r E Ni 6 YV Jv a Emerg with 1 Gy wf aeee V Jy E merg merg IGE 294 104 microscopic cross section of type x lt f for isotope i Tei aS av dB Nir osa r E 6 r E r E Emerg microscopic y times fission cross section for isotope i F J VOr av f dE Ni r vor r E olr E NibV Jv Dis fission spectra for isotope i Vasa wf dE N r xi T E o r E mere TA r xi r E 6 r E Both the macrolib and microlib information is affected by the adjoint weighting However users should be advised that this operation may have some undesirable effects on the fission spectrum normalization Its use must therefore be limited to specialized applications where the adjoint weighting is theoretically required This is the case for example with the CLIO perturbative analysis method 01 IGE 294 105 3 10 The EVO module The EVO module performs the burnup calculations The depletion equations for the various isotope of the MICROLIB are solved using the burnup chains also present in the MICROLIB Both in core and out of core calculations ca
288. int information contained in it is multiplied CREA keyword used to create a block of information on the curent directory DEL keyword used to delete a block of information on the curent directory BLOCK name of the block or sub directory selected ileni maximum number of elements that the user wishes to print A value of ileni 0 is permitted keyword indicates that all the elements of a block will be printed In a realistic case the number of elements contained in a block may be rather large this option must therefore be used with caution ilencl index of the first element included in the block Can only be set if block BLOCK already exists By default ilencl 1 ilenc2 index of the last element included in the block IGE 294 valc ivalc hvalc dvalc flott COPY ADD STAT REL ABS NOMREF NOMALT DUMP 164 keyword indicates that the input values will follow real vector containing the information to be written in the record BLOCK integer vector containing the information to be written in the record BLOCK character 4 array containing the information to be written in the record BLOCK double precision array containing the information to be written in the record BLOCK constant by which a block or sub directory will be multiplied keyword used to copy an existing record or sub directory onto a new record or sub directory keyword used to add the contents of two records or two sub directories If NOMREF
289. iprint CTRA OFF l MIX numnew numold UPDL OLDL with EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing in this operator It must be set to 0 if no printing on the output file is required The macroscopic cross sections can written to the output file if the variable iprint is greater than or equal to 2 The transfer cross sections will be printed if this parameter is greater than or equal to 3 The normalization of the transfer cross sections will be checked if iprint is greater than or equal to 5 CTRA keyword to specify the type of transport correction that should be generated and stored on the MACROLIB All the operators that will read this MACROLIB will then have access to transport corrected cross sections In the case where the MACROLIB is updated using other MACROLIB or MICROLIB the default is to use a transport correction whenever one of these older data structure requires a transport correction OFF deactivates the transport correction MIX keyword to specify that the macroscopic cross sections associated with a mixture is to be created or updated numnew mixture number to be updated or created on the output MACROLIB numold mixture number on an old MACROLIB or MICROLIB which will be used to update or create numnew on the output macrolib OLDL the macroscopic cross sections associated with mixture numold are taken from OLDLIB This is the default option UPDL
290. is is the default option The conservation is ensured only for isotropic scattering keyword to specify that P constrained optimized McDaniel type polar integra tion angles are to be selected for the polar quadrature when a prismatic tracking is considered The conservation is ensured only for isotropic and linearly anisotropic scattering keyword to specify that Optimized Gauss polar integration angles are to be selected for the method of characteristics l121 The conservation is ensured up to Pnmu 1 scattering keyword to specify that Gauss Legendre polar integration angles are to be selected for the polar quadrature when a prismatic tracking is considered The conservation is ensured up to Pnmu 1 scattering keyword to specify that CACTUS type equal weight polar integration angles are to be selected for the polar quadrature when a prismatic tracking is considered 4 The conservation is ensured only for isotropic scattering keyword to specify that CACTUS type uniformly distributed integration polar angles are to be selected for the polar quadrature when a prismatic tracking is considered The conservation is ensured only for isotropic scattering user defined number of polar angles By default a value consistent with nangl is computed by the code For LCMD OPP1 OGAU quadratures nmu is limited to 2 3 or 4 keyword to specify the tracking parameters to be used keyword to specify that isotropic tracking parameters will b
291. is recovered see Section 3 2 MACNAM character 12 name of the existing MACROLIB data structure where the edition infor mation is recovered see Section 3 1 SAPNAM character 12 name of the existing SAPHYB data structure where the edition informa tion is recovered see Section 3 19 CPONAM character 12 name of the existing MULTICOMPO data structure where the edition information is recovered see Section 3 14 TRKNAM character 12 name of the existing TRACKING data structure containing the tracking of the macro geometry see Section 3 4 This object is compulsory only if a macro calculation is to be performed by module SPH TRKFIL character 12 name of the existing seguential binary tracking file used to store the tracks lengths of the macro geometry This file is given if and only if it was reguired in the previous tracking module call see Section 3 4 FLUNAM character 12 name of an initialization flux used to start SPH iterations see Sec tion 3 8 By default a flat estimate of the flux is used descsph structure containing the input data to this module see Section 3 11 2 Note Saphyb files generated by APOLLO2 don t have a signature If such a Saphyb is given as input to module SPH a signature must be included before using it The following instruction can do the job Saphyb UTL Saphyb CREA SIGNATURE 3 L SA PHYB 3 11 2 Data input for module SPH This structure is used to specify the type o
292. ix2 are updated using information from the OLDLIB If OLDLIB is absent and descmix2 is present only the mixture on MICLIB specified by descmix2 are updated keyword to specify that the mixture density on MICLIB are to be updated using infor mation taken from OLDLIB If descmix2 is absent a direct one to one correspondence between the isotope on OLDLIB and MICLIB is assumed If descmix2 is present only the mixture specified by descmix2 are updated using information from OLDLIB burnup step from the burnup file to use This step must be already present on the burnup file burnup time in days from the burnup file to use This time step must be already present on the burnup file IGE 294 21 descmix1 input structure describing the isotopic and physical properties of a given mixture see Section 3 2 3 descmix2 input structure describing perturbations to the isotopic and physical properties of a given mixture see Section 3 2 3 Note that it is possible to recompute the embedded macrolib in an existing microlib named MICRO by writing MICRO LIB MICRO MACR MIXS IGE 294 22 3 2 2 Depletion data structure The structure descdepl describes the heredity of the radioactive decay and the neutron activation chain to be used in the isotopic depletion calculation Table 11 Structure descdepl CHAIN NAMDPL izae DECAY der reaction energy STABLE FROM DECAY reaction yi
293. ixtures This data is required if MICLIB is created nmixt the maximum number of mixtures a mixture is characterized by a distinct set of macro scopic cross sections CALENDF keyword to set the accuracy of the CALENDF probability tables ipreci integer set to 1 2 3 or 4 The highest the value the more accurate are the probability tables CTRA keyword to specify the type of transport correction that should be generated and stored on the MICROLIB The transport correction is to be substracted from the total and isotropic IGE 294 NONE APOL WIMS OLDW LEAK ANIS naniso ADJ PROM SKIP INTR SUBG PT PTMC 18 Po within group scattering cross sections A leakage correction equal to the difference between current and flux weighted total cross sections ci go is also applied in the APOL OLDW and LEAK cases All the operators that will read this MICROLIB will then have access to transport corrected cross sections The default is no transport correction kevword to specifv that no transport correction should be used in this calculation keyword to specify that an APOLLO type transport correction based on the linearly anisotropic P within group scattering cross sections is to be set This correction as sumes that the micro reversibility principle is valid for all energy groups This type of correction uses P scattering information present on the library This type of correction uses directly
294. ke adjoint flux calculations The general format of the data for the T module is the following Table 76 Structure T MACLIBI T MACLIB2 LIBRARY y where MACLIB1 character 12 name of a the transposed MACROLIB MACLIB2 character 12 name of a the original MACROLIB LIBRARY character 12 name of a the original MICROLIB containing an embedded MACROLIB IGE 294 151 3 22 The DMAC module This module is used to set fixed sources that can be used in the right hand term of an adjoint fixed source eigenvalue problem This type of equation appears in generalized perturbation theory GPT applications The fixed sources set in DMAC are corresponding to the gradient of a reference macrolib with respect to homogenization and condensation of the cross section information The gradient of a cross section U r col i r 22 r with respect to homogenization and condensation is defined as r il VPO Piet ES O 4 7 where the homogenized and condensed cross section is an homogeneous functional of the flux defined as 2 6 Plo r EON Each fixed source V P r is orthogonal to the flux r The calling specifications are Table 77 Structure DMAC SOURCE DMAC FLUX MICRO MACRO TRACK DMAC data where SOURCE character 12 name of a FIXED SOURCES type L_GPT object open in creation mode This object contains a set of adjoint fixed sources corresponding to different macro regions macro gro
295. keep its desired value at every time during the stage only the beginning of stage and end of stage are set IGE 294 107 Whatever the normalisation technigue used DRAGON compute the exact burnup of the unit cell in MW per tonne of initial heavy element by adding an additional eguation in the depletion system This value is the local parameter that should be used to tabulate the output cross sections The general format of the data which is used to control the execution of the EVO module is the following Table 49 Structure EVO BRNNAM MICNAM EVO I BRNNAM MICNAM OLDMIC y FLUNAM TRKNAM POWNAM descevo where BRNNAM character 12 name of the BURNUP data structure that will contain the depletion history as modified by the depletion module If BRNNAM appears on both LHS and RHS it is updated otherwise it is created MICNAM character 12 name of the MICROLIB containing the microscopic cross sections at save point xts MICNAM is modified to include an embedded MACROLIB containing the updated macroscopic cross sections at set point xtr If MICNAM appears on both LHS and RHS it is updated otherwise the internal library OLDMIC is copied in MICNAM and MICNAM is updated It is possible to assign different MICROLIB to different save points of the depletion calculation In this case the microscopic reaction rates will be linearly interpolated extrapolated between points xti and xtf OLDMIC character 12 name of
296. l ASS B 1 6 RO G 3 Figure 26 Two dimensional hexagonal geometry This geometry can be analyzed using the SYBILT and EXCELT tracking modules HEXAGON GEO HEX 12 HBC S30 ALBE 1 6 SIDE 1 3 MX 111222333456 e 3 D Cartesian supercell see Figure 27 This geometry can only be analyzed using the EXCELT tracking modules SUPERCELL GEO CAR3D 4 4 3 X REFL X REFL Y REFL Y REFL Z REFL Z REFL MIX A1 C1 D1 43 A2 C2 D2 D2 A2 C2 C2 C2 A2 C2 C2 C2 C3 C3 D3 Al C4 C4 D4 D4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C3 C3 D3 Al C4 C4 D4 D4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 C4 ti Cl GEO CAR3D 1 1 1 MESHX 0 0 1 0 MESHY 0 0 1 5 MESHZ 0 0 2 0 MIX Ls ii C2 GEO C1 MESHY 0 0 1 0 2 11 C3 GEO C1 MESHZ 0 0 1 0 C4 GEO C2 MESHZ 0 0 1 0 ii D1 GEO C1 MIX 2 ii D2 GEO C2 MIX 2 ti D3 GEO C3 MIX 2 D4 GEO CA MIX 2 IGE 294 184 my Figure 27 Three dimensional Cartesian super cell A1 GEO CARCELY 2 1 MESHX 0 0 1 0 MESHY 0 0 1 5 MESHZ 0 0 2 0 RADIUS 0 0 0 4 0 45 MIX 3 4 ds A2 GEO A1 MESHY 0 0 1 0 ti A3 GEO CARCELZ 2 1 MESHX 0 0 1 0 MESHY 0 0 1 5 MESHZ 0 0 2 0 RADIUS 0 0 0 3 0 35 MIX 5 6 ty A4 GEO A3 MESHZ 0 0 1 0 e Multicell geometry in a 2 D hexagonal lattice see Figure 28 Here we are considering an infinite lattice having two types of cells such that O al IO This lattice can be represented either in a do it yourself type
297. l seed integer for the random number generator By default the seed integer is set from the processor clock initial seed integer keyword used to enable an explicit treatment of n 2n reactions In this case N2N cross sections are expected to be available in the macrolib By default n 2n reactions are taken into account implicitly by the correction on scattering cross sections keyword used to define a tally macrolib and effective multiplication factor Using TALLY ENDT construct permits to obtain a virtual collision estimation of the effective multiplication factor without estimation of the macrolib information keyword to deactivate the homogeneization or the condensation keyword to specify that the neutron flux is to be homogenized over specified regions or mixtures keyword to specify that the homogenization of the neutron flux will take place over the following regions Here nregio lt maxreg with maxreg the maximum number of regions for which solutions were obtained array of homogenized region numbers to which are associated the old regions In the editing routines a value of iregm 0 allows the corresponding region to be neglected keyword to specify that the homogenization of the neutron flux will take place over the following mixtures Here we must have nbmix lt maxmix where maxmix is the maximum number of mixtures in the macroscopic cross section library array of homogenized region numbers to which are associated t
298. m Generation and Benchmarking of a 69 group Cross Section Library for Thermal Reactor Applications J of the Korean Nucl Soc 21 245 1989 P Vontobel and S Pelloni New JEF EFF Based MATXS Formatted Nuclear Data Libraries Nucl Sci Eng 101 298 1989 A H bert A Consistent Technique for the Pin by Pin Homogenization of a Pressurized Water Reactor Assembly Nucl Sci Eng 113 227 1993 A H bert and G Mathonni re Development of a Third Generation Superhomog n isation Method for the Homogenization of a Pressurized Water Reactor Assembly Nucl Sci Eng 115 129 1993 A H bert Development of a Second Generation SPH Technique for the Pin by Pin Homogenization of a Pressurized Water Reactor Assembly in Hexagonal Geometry Trans Am Nucl Soc 71 253 1994 R Chambon Specifications and User Guide for NAP module in DRAGON DONJON VERSIONS Pin Power Reconstruction module Report IGE 345 Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al Institut de G nie Nucl aire 2014 T Courau M Cometto E Girardi D Couyras and N Schwartz Elements of Validation of Pin by Pin Calculations with the Future EDF Calculation Scheme Based on APOLLO2 and COCAGNE Codes Proceedings of ICAPP 08 Anaheim CA USA June 8 12 2008 W H Press B P Flannery S A Teukolsky and W T Vetterling Numerical Recipes Second Edition FORTRAN Version Cambridge University Press Cambridge 1994
299. macroscopic cross sections By default direct cross sections are produced keyword to specify that prompt neutrons are to be considered for the calculation of the fission spectrum By default the contribution due to delayed neutrons is considered This option is only compatible with a MATXS or MATXS2 format library keyword to recover the user defined microlib data without processing any library i e without temperature and or dilution interpolation keyword to perform a temperature and dilution interpolation of the microscopic cross sections present in the libraries The bin type cross section data is not processed This is the default option keyword to activate the calculation of the physical probability tables using the tempera ture interpolated cross section data as input The bin type cross section data is not processed keyword to activate the calculation of the CALENDF type mathematical probability tables without slowing down correlated weight matrices using the bin type cross section data as input l l This option is compatible with the Sanchez Coste self shielding method and with the subgroup projection method SPM 4 this option is similar to the PT procedure Here the base points of the probability tables corresponding to fission and scattering cross sections and to components of the transfer scattering matrix are also obtained using the CALENDF approach IGE 294 PTSL NEWL MACR ADED nedit HEDIT
300. mbinations X DIAG Y DIAG or X DIAG Y DIAG TRAN keyword to specify that the surface under consideration is connected to the opposite surface of a Cartesian domain see Figure 3 This option provides the facility to treat an infi nite geometry with translation symmetry The only combinations of translational symmetry permitted are e Translation along the X axis IGE 294 SYME ALBE albedo icode ZERO PI 2 PI CYLI ACYL 530 SA60 SB60 590 R120 R180 SA180 SB180 COMPLETE 34 X TRAN X TRAN e Translation along the Y axis Y TRAN Y TRAN e Translation along the Z axis Z TRAN Z TRAN keyword to specify that the Cartesian surface under consideration is virtual and that a reflection symmetry is associated with the adequately directed axis running through the center of the cells closest to this surface see Figure 3 Only the hexagonal geometries 30 and SA60 can be surrounded by a SYME boundary condition if a specular condition is to be applied on this boundary keyword to specify that the surface under consideration has an arbitrary albedo This side is an external surface of the domain geometric albedo corresponding to the boundary condition ALBE albedo gt 0 0 index of a physical albedo corresponding to the boundary condition ALBE The numerical values of the physical albedo are supplied by the operator MAC see Section 3 1 keyword to specify that the surface under con
301. mc Yref where 6 is the averaged surfacic flux of the reference calculation and io is the averaged volumic flux in a row of cells of the reference calculation Using this definition the averaged SPH factor is egual to P _ Yre H gap ref keyword to specify the use of asymptotic normalization of the SPH factors The SPH factors in homogenized mixture mixs are set to one in all macro energy groups index of the homogenized mixture where asymptotic normalization is performed keyword to activate a solution technique other than the collision probability method Used with the Eurydice solution technique within SYBILT to activate the current iteration method keyword to specify the main convergence parameters used to control SPH iterations user defined maximum number of SPH iterations default value 200 user defined convergence criterion default value 1 0 x 1074 keyword to specify an auxiliary convergence parameter used to control SPH iterations acceptable number of SPH iterations with an increase in convergence error before aborting default value 10 keyword used to select an existing set of SPH factors in SAPNAM or to store a new set of SPH factors in SAPNEW or SAPNAM character 80 name of a set of SPH factors keyword used to introduce leakage in the embedded MACROLIB This option should only be used for non regression tests the imposed buckling corresponding to the leakage IGE 294 118 3 12 The CFC
302. me for the sAPHYB This information is mandatory if the Saphyb is to be read by the Lisaph module of Cronos nomlib character 80 user defined name COMM key word used to input a general comment for the SAPHYB comment character 80 user defined comment ENDC end of comment key word PARA keyword used to define a single global parameter LOCA keyword used to define a single local variable a local variable may be a single value or an array of values parnam character 80 user defined name of a global parameter or local variable parkey character 4 user defined keyword associated to a global parameter or local variable micnam character 12 name of the MICROLIB type L LIBRARV associated to a global param eter The corresponding MICROLIB will be required on RHS of the SAP call described in Sect 3 19 2 imix index of the mixture associated to a global parameter This mixture is located in MICROLIB named micnam isonaml character 8 alias name of the isotope associated to a global parameter This isotope is located in MICROLIB data structure named micnam IGE 294 isonam2 TEMP CONC IRRA FLUB FLUG PUIS MASL FLUX TIME EQUI VALE FLOT CHAI ENTI ISOT TOUT MILI imil FISS PF HNAISO i MACR HNAMAC 144 character 8 alias name of the isotope associated to a local variable This isotope is located in the MICROLIB directory of the EDITION data structure named EDINAM keyword used to
303. module However this value is generally insufficient if symmetries or mesh splitting are specified RENO keyword to specify the use of the automatic procedure for integration lines normalization to the fine mesh volumes It is a global normalization for NXT and an angular depen dent normalization for EXCELT This normalization procedure should always be used to ensure neutron balances for each fine mesh zone It is the default option for trans port tracking and is forbidden for the SNT BIVACT or TRIVAT finite element tracking operators NORE keyword to specify that the automatic normalization of the integration lines should be deactivated RENM keyword to specify the use of the automatic procedure for integration lines normalization to the merged volumes This normalization procedure should always be used to ensure neutron balances for each merged zone This option is only valid when the EXCELT module is called REND keyword to specify the use of the automatic procedure for integration lines normalization to the merged volumes for each tracking direction This option is only valid when the NXT module is called IGE 294 60 3 4 1 The SYBILT tracking module The geometries that can be treated by the module SYBILT are 1 The homogeneous geometry HOMOGE 2 The one dimensional geometries SPHERE TUBE and CAR1D 3 The two dimensional geometries CAR2D and HEX including respectively CARCEL and HEXCEL sub geometries as well as VI
304. multigroup Monte Carlo flux solution module see Section 3 20 macrolib transposition operator see Section 3 21 construction module for a Generalized Perturbation Theory GPT source see Sec tion 3 22 sensitivity analysis of keff to nuclear data see Section 3 24 module to generate PostScript images for 2D geometries that can be tracked using the module EXCELT or NXT see Section 3 26 module to perform a perturbative analysis of two systems using the Clio formula and to determine the origins of Keff discrepancies see Section 3 25 IGE 294 2 4 The Utility Modules Because the execution of DRAGON is controlled by the GAN generalized driver it can use directly any one of its utility modules These modules perform the following tasks 2 UTL DELETE BACKUP RECOVER ADD MPX STAT GREP FINDO END default module used to make an explicit copv of a data structure see Section 4 1 module used to manipulate a data structure see Section 4 2 module used to delete a data structure see Section 4 3 module used to make a backup copv of a child data structure along with its parent see Section 4 4 module used to recover form a backup copv a child data structure along with its parent see Section 4 5 module used to add two data structures see Section 4 6 module used to multiplv a data structure bv a constant see Section 4 7 module used to compare two data structures see Section
305. n be considered For in core depletion calculations one assumes linear flux variation over each irradiation period time stage The initial and possibly final flux distributions are recovered from previous FLU calculations In core depletion can be performed at constant flux or constant power expressed in MW Tonne of initial heavy elements but these values can undergo step variations from one time stage to another All the information required for successive burnup calculation is stored on the PyLCM BURNUP data structure Thus it is possible at any point in time to return to a previous time step and restart the calculations In each burnup mixture of the unit cell the depletion of K isotopes over a time stage to tf follows the following equation SE Niele MOH Sie SK 3 12 with Arlt Ax 02 000 3 13 L K Sx t Yu o 1 8 9 t Nit S malt Mit 3 14 l 1 l 1 o1 6 8 B f salut udu 3 15 0 and ltd ADA ee 25 3 16 ts to where K number of depleting isotopes L number of fissile isotopes producing fission products Ny t time dependant number density for k th isotope Ak radioactive decay constant for k th isotope Ox k t u time and lethargy dependant microscopic cross section for nuclear reaction x on k th isotope x a x f and x respectively stands for absorption fission and radiative capture cross sections p t u time and lethargy dependant neutron flux Ye fission yield for produc
306. n the collision probability method The descleak structure allows the following information to be specified IGE 294 94 Table 46 Structure descleak LKRD RHS PO P1 BO B1 BOTR PNLR PNL SIGS ALBS ECCO HETE G R Z xX Y BUCK valb2 G valb2 R valbr2 Z valbz2 X valbx2 Y valby2 KEFF valk IDEM LKRD keyword used to specify that the leakage coefficients are recovered from data structure named LIBNAM The LKRD option is not available with the ECCO and HETE leakage models RHS keyword used to specify that the leakage coefficients are recovered from RHS flux data structure named FLUNAM The RHS option is not available with the ECCO and HETE leakage models If the flux calculation is an adjoint calculation the energy group ordering of the leakage coefficients is permuted PO keyword used to specify that the leakage coefficients are calculated using a Po model Pi keyword used to specify that the leakage coefficients are calculated using a P model BO keyword used to specify that the leakage coefficients are calculated using a Bp model This is the default value when a buckling calculation is required B Bi keyword used to specify that the leakage coefficients are calculated using a B model BOTR keyword used to specify that the leakage coefficients are calculated using a Bo model with transport correction PNLR keyword used to specify that the elements of the scatt
307. ncluding the virtual hexagon number of concentric hexagons in a HEXT or HEXTZ cell see Figure 1 This will lead to an hexagon subdivided into 6N identical trangles number of types of cells number of cells inside which a distinct flux will be calculated for a do it yourself type geometry keyword used to modify the print level iprint index used to control the printing in this module It must be set to 0 if no printing on the output file is required to 1 for minimum printing fixed default value and to 2 for printing the geometry state vector structure allowing the boundary conditions surrounding the geometry to be treated see Section 3 3 2 structure allowing the coordinates of a geometry to be described see Section 3 3 3 IGE 294 32 fu EN Figure 1 Hexagonal geometry with triangular mesh containing 4 concentric hexagon descPP structure allowing material mixtures to be associated with a geometry see Section 3 3 4 descDH structure used to specify double heterogeneity data see Section 3 3 5 descSIJ structure used to specify the properties of do it yourself geometries see Section 3 3 6 SUBGEO character 12 name of the directory that will contain the sub geometry OLDGEO character 12 name of a parallel directory containing an existing sub geometry The type and all the characteristics of OLDGEO will be copied onto SUBGEO Note that all the geometry described above are called pure geometry
308. nd is different for each node keyword used to set the intial position to 0 keyword used to set the intial position to 1 set length beginning of the set for the current script Must be an integer variable end of the set for the current script Must be an integer variable keyword used to make a computation over all the operand and to store the result in result Problems can be encountered in the 64 bits version keyword used to make ALLREDUCE perform a summation keyword used to make ALLREDUCE perform a multiplication keyword used to make ALLREDUCE find the maximum over all operand keyword used to make ALLREDUCE find the maximum over all operand operand in the ALLREDUCE calculation Cannot be a string or a logical value IGE 294 179 result result of the ALLREDUCE calculation Must be a variable of the same type as operand TIME keyword used to recover d Time dTime time in seconds since an arbitrary time in the past Must be a double precision variable BARRIER keyword used to stop the calculation until every node has reach this barrier NAME is always empty What matters is that NAME is no more only declared it now exists after the call of DRVMPI module The output parameters denoted as gt gt value lt lt are recovered as CLE 2000 variables in the module data located after the keyword 52 The SNDMPI module This module is used to send or receive a linked list or an XSM file from one node to another one thanks
309. nd R Roy Use of Specular Boundary Conditions for CANDU Cell Analysis Fourth Int Conf on Simulation Methods in Nuclear Engineering Montr al June 2 4 1993 H Khalil Effectiveness of a Consistently Formulated Diffusion Synthetic Acceleration Differencing approach Nucl Sci Eng 98 226 1988 Y Saad and M H Schultz GMRES A Generalized Minimal RESidual Algorithm For Solving Nonsymmetric Linear Systems SIAM J Sci Stat Comput 7 856 869 1986 E M Baker Quadruple range quadrature verification and extension Los Alamos National Labo ratory Report LA UR 07 8050 September 2006 G Marleau and A H bert Solving the Multigroup Transport Equation Using the Power Iteration Method 1985 Simulation Symposium on Reactor Dynamics and Plant Control Kingston Ontario April 22 23 1985 G Marleau and A H bert Introduction of an Improved Critical Buckling Search in WIMS 1986 Simulation Symposium on Reactor Dynamics and Plant Control Hamilton Ontario April 21 22 1986 R E Macfarlane TRANSX CTR A code for Interfacing MATXS Cross Section Libraries to Nuclear Transport Codes for Fusion Systems Analysis LA 9863 MS Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory New Mexico 1984 J V Donnelly WIMS CRNL A User s Manual for the Chalk River Version of WIMS AECL 8955 Atomic Energy of Canada Limited 1986 J R Askew et al A General Description of the Lattice Code WIMS J of
310. nd a subsequent call to MCCGT is mandatory real value representing the linear track density in cm to be used for the inline contruction of 3D tracks from 2D tracking when a prismatic tracking is considered IGE 294 71 3 4 4 The MCCGT tracking module This module must follow a call to module EXCELT or NXT Its calling specification is Table 30 Structure MCCGT TRKNAM MCCGT TRKNAM TRKFIL GEONAM descmccg where TRKNAM character 12 name of the TRACKING data structure that will contain region volume and surface area vectors in addition to region identification pointers and other track ing information It is provided by EXCELT or NXT operator and modified by MCCGT operator TRKFIL character 12 name of the sequential binary tracking file used to store the tracks lengths This file is provided by EXCELT or NXT operator and used without modification by MCCGT operator GEONAM character 12 name of the optional GEOMETRY data structure This structure is only required to recover double heterogeneity data descmccg structure describing the transport tracking data specific to MCCGT The MCCGT specific tracking data in descmccg is defined as Table 31 Structure descmccg EDIT iprint LCMD OPP1 OGAU GAUS CACA CACB nmu DIFC NONE DIAG FULL ILUO TMT LEXA AAC iaca NONE DIAG FULL ILUO TMT SCR iscr LEXA KRYL ikryl MCU imcu HDD xh
311. ndicated in the following sections 2 2 DRAGON Data Structure and Module Declarations DRAGON is built around the GAN generalized driver ll Accordingly all the modules that will be used during the current execution must be first identified One must also define the format of each data structure that will be processed by these modules Then the modules required for the specific DRAGON calculation are called successively information being transferred from one module to the next via the data structures Finally the execution of DRAGON is terminated when it encounters the END module even if it is followed by additional data records in the input data stream The general input data structure therefore follows the calling specifications given below Table 1 Structure DRAGON MODULE MODNAME LINKED_LIST STRNAME XSM FILE STRNAME SEQ_BINARY STRNAME SEQ_ASCII STRNAME module where MODULE keyword used to specify the list of modules to be used in this DRAGON execution MODNAME character 12 name of a DRAGON or utility module The list of DRAGON module is provided in Section 2 3 while the list of Utility module is described in Section 2 4 By default a module is always available see Sections 2 4 and 4 1 LINKED_LIST keyword used to specify which data structures will be stored in linked lists XSM_FILE keyword used to specify which data structures will be stored on XSM format fil
312. ng file used to store the tracks lengths If TRKFIL does not appear the keyword XCLL is set automatically If the user wants to use a tracking file TRKFIL is required for the EXCELT module either on the LHS on the RHS or on both sides In the case where TRKFIL appears on both LHS and RHS the existing tracking file is modified by the module while if TRKFIL appears only on the RHS the existing tracking file is read but not modified GEONAM character 12 name of the GEOMETRY data structure desctrack structure describing the general tracking data see Section 3 4 descexcel structure describing the transport tracking data specific to EXCELT The EXCELT specific tracking data in descexcel is defined as Table 27 Structure descexcel ANIS nanis ONEG ALLG XCLL PISO PSPC CUT pcut QUAB iquab SAPO HEBE PRIX PRIY PRIZ denspr LCMD OPP1 OGAU GAUS CACA CACB nmu TRAK CORN pcorn TISO nangl nangl_z dens dens_z 4 SYMM isymm NOSY TSPC MEDI nangl dens HALT where ANIS keyword to specify the order of scattering anisotropy nanis order of anisotropy in transport calculation A default value of 1 represents isotropic or transport corrected scattering while a value of 2 correspond to linearly anisotropic scattering When anisotropic scattering is considered user should pay attention to the following points IGE 294 64 e the
313. ng the radial direction is to be performed array giving the number of zones that will be considered for each region along the radial axis A negative value results in a splitting of the regions into zones of equal volumes a positive value results in a uniform splitting along the radial direction By default ispltr 1 keyword to specify the type of sectorization for a Cartesian or hexagonal cell In hexagonal geometry this keyword is expected to be defined near the SIDE keyword By default no sectorization is performed sectorization index defined as 999 non sectorized cell processed as a sectorized cell 1l x type sectorization isect 0 non sectorized cell 1 type sectorization 2 simultaneous x and type sectorization number of embedded tubes that are not sectorized with jsect 0 default value or jsect Ir Examples of sectorization options are depicted in Figs 14 and 15 keyword to specify the length of a side of a hexagon length of one side of a hexagon cm triangular mesh for HEXT and HEXTZ hexagonal geometries By default hexmsh sideh nhr When hexmsh is provided it is used instead of the default value with the following constraints sideh lt nhr x hexmsh lt sideh hermsh The triangles in the last hexagonal ring are truncated at sideh see Figure 16 keyword to specify that a triangular mesh splitting level for HEXT and HEXTZ type geometries is to be considered This is valid only if nhr 1
314. ng the x axis In this case the 3D geometry is projected in the y z plane and a 2D tracking on the projected geometry is performed This capability is limited to the non cyclic method of characteristics solver for the time being and a subsequent call to MCCGT is mandatory PRIY keyword to specify that a prismatic tracking is considered for a 3D geometry invariant along the y axis In this case the 3D geometry is projected in the z x plane and a 2D tracking on the projected geometry is performed This capability is limited to the IGE 294 PRIZ denspr LCMD OPP1 OGAU GAUS CACA CACB nmu TRAK TISO TSPC MEDI nangl 65 method of characteristics solver for the time being and a subsequent call to MCCGT is mandatory keyword to specify that a prismatic tracking is considered for a 3D geometry invariant along the z axis In this case the 3D geometry is projected in the x y plane and a 2D tracking on the projected geometry is performed This capability is limited to the method of characteristics solver for the time being and a subsequent call to MCCGT is mandatory real value representing the linear track density in cm to be used for the inline contruction of 3D tracks from 2D tracking when a prismatic tracking is considered keyword to specify that optimized McDaniel type polar integration angles are to be selected for the polar quadrature when a prismatic tracking is considered Th
315. no mixture has yet been specified or from the last mixture number specified 1 temp absolute temperature in Kelvin of the isotopic mixture It is optional only when this mixture is to be updated in which case the old temperature associated with the mixture is used denmix mixture density in gem NAMALI characterx8 alias name for an isotope to be used locally When the alias name is absent the isotope name used locally is identical to the first 8 character isotope name on the library keyword to specify to which isotope in a library is associated the previous alias name NAMISO character 12 name of an isotope present in the library which is included in this mixture dens isotopic concentration of the isotope NAMISO in the current mixture in 10 cm7 When the mixture density denmix is specified the relative weight percentage of each of the isotopes in this mixture is to be provided dil group independent microscopic dilution cross section in barns of the isotope NAMISO in this mixture It is possible to recalculate a group dependent dilution for an isotope by the use of the SHI operator see Section 3 5 In this case the dilution is only used as a starting point for the self shielding iterations and has no effect on the final result If the dilution is not given or is larger than 1010 barns an infinite dilution is assumed INF keyword to specify that a dilution of 101 barns is to be associated with this isotope This value repre
316. normalization of the scattering reduced collision probability matrix is to be used both for the flux solution module see Section 3 8 and in the equivalence calculation see Section 3 9 This keyword re sults in storing the scattering reduced escape probabilities W s in the record named DRAGON WIS For all the cases where this option is used it is necessary to define a geometry with VOID external boundary conditions see Section 3 3 keyword to specify that the collision leakage and escape probability matrices are to be normalized in such a way as to satisfy explicitly the neutron conservation laws This option compensates for the errors which will arise in the numerical evaluation of these probabilities and may result in non conservative collision probability matrices The default option is now HELI while it was formerly GELB Revision 3 03 keyword to specify that the probability matrices are not to be renormalized keyword to specify that only the diagonal element of the probability matrices will be modified in order to insure the validity of the conservation laws keyword to specify that the Gelbard algorithm will be used to normalize the collision probability matrices keyword to specify that the Helios algorithm will be used to normalize the collision probability matrices keyword to specify that a non linear multiplicative algorithm will be used to normalize the collision probability matrices l IGE 294 90 ECC
317. not span two records Comments can be included in the input deck in one of the following ways characters in column 73 or above on each record are considered to be comments all the information following the keyword on a record are not considered by the generalized driver each record starting with the characters is considered to be commented out all the characters on a given record inserted between and are considered to be commented out This users guide was written using the following conventions An input structure represents a set of input variables It is identified by a name in boldface surrounded by parenthesis For example the complete DRAGON input deck is represented by the structure DRAGON A standard DRAGON data structure represents a set records and directory stored in a hierarchical format on a direct access XSM file or in memory via a linked list It is identified by a name in small capital letter For example the data structure ASMPIJ contains the multigroup collision probability matrices generated by the ASM module of DRAGON The variables presented using the typewriter font are character variables used as keywords For example GEO is the keyword required to activate the geometry reading module of DRAGON The variables in italics are user defined variables When indexed and surrounded by parenthesis they denote arrays If they are in lower case they represent either integer typ
318. ntains a multigroup iterator conceived to control a number of different algo rithms for the solution of the neutron transport equation Each of these algorithms is presented in the form of a one group solution procedure where the contributions from other energy groups are included in a source term The current version of DRAGON contains many such algorithms The SYBIL option which solves the integral transport equation using the collision probability method for simple one dimensional 1 D geometries either plane cylindrical or spherical and the interface current method for 2 D Carte sian or hexagonal assemblies The EXCELL option which solves the integral transport equation using the collision probability method for general 2 D geometries and for three dimensional 3 D assemblies The MCCG option solves the integro differential transport equation using the long characteristics method for general 2 D and 3 D geometries The execution of DRAGON is controlled by the generalized GAN driver It is modular and can be interfaced easily with other production codes IGE 294 v Contents Copyright Notice for DRAGON si dana kus 6524 58 bb ik n Leg kee Sa ii Acknowledgmems elo ai S SS ER ee ee ie BES by ee og a OY 111 COMPO 1 yin Bah mene esos e a a O o e a a AA v List of Figures cos yoe e Grena a wl AES d ah Ae dd ee A was viii Litol Tables lt fae eee ab de IA Be ed eee Re ROS S ix 1 INTRODUCTION mm i MA See a OES Ee he a as wt SS 1 2 GENERAL
319. number associated with an directory of EDINAM on which the reference information is stored To each number idirn is associated a the directory CDIRN REF CASE CN where CN is a character 4 variable defined by WRITE CN 14 idirn keyword to suppress the calculation and edition of the H factors sum of all the cross sections producing energy times the energy produced by each reaction Note that this calculation may be time consuming By default the H factors are computed and edited if keyword DEPL and associated data is set in module LIB keyword to specify the editing of the four factors computed from a group balance In this case the user must specify explicitly a three group condensation keyword to specify the number of components in region related dynamically allocated arrays If the default value is not sufficient an error message is issued user defined maximum number of components use the direct flux to perform homogenization or and condensation default value use the product of the direct and adjoint flux to perform homogenization or and condensation This option is used only in specialized applications such as in the CLIO perturbative analysis formula The homogenization and condensation equations are presented in Sect 3 9 3 Note The FLUNAM object must contain both an adjoint and a direct flux solution keyword to define the name of the macro geometry which must appear among the RHS The macro geometry is reco
320. o enter macroscopic cross sections directly into DRAGON They are numbered successively from TCMO1 to TCMO8 6 4 1 TCMO1 Annular region Figure 29 Geometry for test case TCMO1 for an annular cell with macroscopic cross sections This sample input is used to analyze the annular cell presented in Figure 29 It uses two groups macroscopic cross sections provided directly by the user One type of solution is provided here one with a complete collision probability calculation SYBILT Note that for the second flux calculation the initial flux distribution is taken from the existing FLUXUNK structure which already contains the flux distribution from the SYBILT calculation Input data for test case TCMO1 x2m AEA x TEST CASE TCMO1 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIONS x FISSION SOURCE PROBLEM x 1 D ANNULAR CELL REF none Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used LINKED_LIST MACRO ANGEO TRACK SYS FLUX EDITION SEQ ASCII res MODULE GEO SVBILT MAC ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE asserts yoo ss Macroscopic XS e A IGE 294 191 MACRO MAC NGRO 2 NMIX 2 NIFI 1 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 0 222222 0 833333 SCAT 11 0 19222 2 2 0 75333 0 02 NUSIGF 0 0 0 135 CHI 1 0 0 0 MIX 2 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 2 1 10111 0 04 damas Geometry ANGEO Annular 2 regions kimi ANGEO GEO TUBE 2 R REFL RADIUS 0 0 0 19653 1 0 MIX 1 2 SPLITR 1 4 poses Tracking SYB
321. odule k taa eR aga 71 3 4 5 The SNT tracking module sissa wa 8 DEM eR bd ed baa a ga 74 3 4 6 The BIVACT tracking module o eo we bee ee nizza 76 3 4 7 The TRIVAT tracking module nw a l E 79 3 5 The SHI M dulo 242242840 ana eA hae b ee whe 82 3 5 1 Data input for module G A 224 60 48446445452 S 82 3 6 The USS module b vb a SAM ee Seed S Bk 84 30051 Bata input tor module USS pon e ahal i e dah is e a a OE w ug 85 del The ASM module ee sa saos Gb k eee a Ge ee ee eee 88 Oiled Data input tar module ASM Lk k k k ba ee eS 88 3 8 The FLU module 420000 Seether eevee we been hed deb baa en 91 3 31 Data input for module FLU c2 oooczccrcror rada 92 3 8 2 Leakage model specification structure Ls 93 3 9 The POTS Module sig kek ee ek LL E A A Oe ood 97 3 31 Data input for module EDT 3 e 0 d ika eee hb or eS 97 3 9 2 Homogenization and condensation with the flux 103 3 9 3 Homogenization and condensation with the flux and adjoint flux 103 SO Tho EVO Module s 325 re a a a A a kas a be eae AA 105 310 1 Data input for module EVOL io caom aop web bee bee eee wee 107 3102 Power normalization in EVO cc lt 202 20 2 uu 111 IGE 294 vi Sele The SPHE module 3 45 4 Gas OR a a ee ee A 112 S111 Data input formodule SPA a o 244442646 bee bee bea bbws 113 S112 Data input for module SPH ks m meat ag peewee ae d 114 3 12 The EEC mod le euii oe Skee ee ON ee ee SA ea Se
322. of a NXT TRACKING type L_TRACK object open in read only or modification mode Object TRACK must be constructed with option MC activated see Section 3 4 3 Opening TRACK in modification mode is useful to add tracking information to be plotted with module PSP see Section 3 26 MICRO character 12 name of a MICROLIB type L LIBRARY object open in read only mode The information on the embedded macrolib is used MACRO character 12 name of a MACROLIB type L MACROLIB object open in read only mode MC data input data structure containing specific data see Section 3 20 1 3 20 1 Data input for module MC Table 75 Structure MC data LEDIT iprint KCODE nsrck ikz ket SEED iseed N2N TALLY MERG COMP NONE REGI iregm ii ii 1 nregio MIX imixm ii ii 1 nbmix COND NONE icond ii ii 1 ngcond ENDT where EDIT keyword used to set iprint iprint index used to control the printing in module MC 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value 100 to add free path information in object TRACK must be open in modification mode in that case IGE 294 KCODE nsrck ikz ket SEED iseed N2N TALLY NONE MERG REGI iregm MIX imixm COMP COND icond ENDT 149 keyword used to define the power iteration settings number of neutrons generated per cycle number of inactive cycles number of active cycles keyword used to set the initia
323. om GOXS files with data taken from the input stream One can also transfer the macroscopic cross sections to a GOXS format binary file if required In this case a single macroscopic library is involved e The third input method is through a file which already contains a MACROLIB In this case two macroscopic and microscopic libraries are to be combined e The fourth method consists to update an existing MACROLIB using control variable data recovered from a L OPTIMIZE object The general format of the data for the MAC module is the following Table 2 Structure MAC MACLIB MAC MACLIB escmacinp AC AC d i MICLIB MAC MICLIB descmacinp MACLIB MAC MACLIB OLDLIB descmacupd MACLIB MAC MACLIB OPTIM The meaning of each of the terms above is MACLIB character 12 name of a MACROLIB that will contain the macroscopic cross sections If MACLIB appears on both LHS and RHS it is updated otherwise it is created If MACLIB is created all macroscopic cross sections are first initialized to zero MICLIB character 12 name of a MICROLIB Only the MACROLIB data substructure of this MICROLIB is then updated This is used mainly to associate fixed sources densities with various mixtures If any other cross section is modified for a specific mixture the microscopic and macroscopic cross sections are no longer compatible One can return to a compatible library using the library update module see Sec
324. on due to n an reactions FISS Fission cross section CHI Steady state fission spectrum NUFI v cross sections ENER Energy production cross section taking into account all energy production reactions EFIS Energy production cross section for n f reaction only EGAM Energy production cross section for n y reaction only FUIT B times the leakage coefficient SELF within group Po scattering cross section DIFF scattering cross section for each available Legendre order These cross sections are not multiply by the 2 1 factor PROF profile of the transfer cross section matrices i e position of the non zero element in the transfer cross section matrices TRAN transfer cross section matrices for each available Legendre order These cross sections are multiply by the 2 1 factor CORR transport correction Note that the cross sections stored in the SAPHYB are not transport corrected STRD STRD cross sections used to compute the diffusion coefficients NP n p production cross sections NT n t production cross sections NA n a production cross sections NAME key word used to define mixture names By default mixtures names are of the form HNAMIX I where WRITE HNAMIX I 3HMIX I5 5 I HNAMIX i Character 20 user defined mixture name Nm is the number of mixtures 3 19 2 Modification data input for module SAP Table 72 Structure saphyb_data2 EDIT iprint CRON parkey value l ORIG orig SET xtr S
325. onal name of the read only reference GEOMETRY data structure L_GEOM signature that was used for the original flux calculation see Section 3 3 MACROGEO character 12 optional name of the read only macro GEOMETRY data structure L_GEOM signature that is saved in EDINAM and can be used in the homogenization process or in the SPH equivalence procedure In some cases the module EDI can automat ically build a macro geometry however it is always possible to specify explicitly the macro geometry to be saved in EDINAM REFPIJ character 12 optional name of the read only ASMPIJ data structure L PIJ signa ture that was used for the reference flux calculation see Section 3 7 Compulsory if keyword ALBS is used in Section 3 9 1 descedi structure containing the input data to this module see Section 3 9 1 3 9 1 Data input for module EDI Table 48 Structure descedi EDIT iprint continued on next page IGE 294 98 Structure descedi continued from last page UPS MERG NONE COMP GEO HMIX CELL SYBIL EXCELL NXT DEFAULT REMIX imixm2 ii ii 1 nbmix2 REGI iregm ii ii 1 nregio COND MICR ACTI SAVE PERT NOHF POW M R M l MAXR maxpts DIRE PROD MGEO MACGEO NADF ALBS JOUT IX imixm ii ii 1 nbmix TAKE EGI iregt ii ii 1 nregio IX imixt ii ii 1 nbmix PAWL Piw_T NONE icond ii ii 1 ngcond
326. onding to regions ireg or mixtures imix Any user defined name can be used but some standard names are recognized by module SPH see Section 3 11 2 Standard names are FD_C corner flux edition FD_B surface assembly gap flux edition FD_H row flux edition These are the first row of surrounding cells in the assembly IGE 294 103 ireg index of a region of the reference geometry belonging to boundary edition imix index of a material mixture of the reference geometry belonging to boundary edition 3 9 2 Homogenization and condensation with the flux The cross sections are homogenized over macro volumes Vmerg and condensed over macro groups Emerg We also use V to identify the subset of Vmerg where the isotope i is defined The module EDI produces the following homogenized condensed information v dV V merg integrated volume macroscopic cross section of type z y da dv Sine dE Ue r E br E ii Venere dv Fe dE olr E number density for isotope 2 1 V Jv where N r is the space dependent number density of isotope i neutron flux I o pl dV dE 6 r E V Vmerg Emerg microscopic cross section of type x for isotope 2 ee f Wie dE N r oz r E p r E Ni SV M Jene JE OC E 1 dV dE Nir ox4 T E p r E sar I p ABN a t E Or E 3 9 3 Homogenization and condensation with the flux and adjoint flux If the PROD keyword is set in data structure 3 9 1 the adjo
327. ontrol the printing in module COMPO 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value ALLX keyword used to register the region number of each isotope before merging This option is useful if the same keyword has been specified in EDI before This allows to perform subsequent depletion calculations in taking into account different fuel regions in the diffusion calculation STEP keyword used to access the database from a sub directory named NAMDIR instead of accessing it from the root of CPONAM UP keyword used to move up towards a sub directory of CPONAM NAMDIR access the MULTICOMPO structure in the sub directory named NAMDIR use a sub directory name identical to the directory in EDINAM where the edition data is coming from PARKEY character 12 keyword associated to a user defined global parameter value floating point integer or character 12 value of a user defined global parameter ORIG keyword used to define the father node in the parameter tree By default the index of the previous elementary calculation is used orig index of the elementary calculation associated to the father node in the parameter tree MACRO keyword used to recover cross section information from the macrolib directory in ED INAM By default the cross section information is recovered from the microlib in EDINAM SET keyword used to recover the flux normalization factor already stored on BRNNAM from a sub directory corresponding to a specific time xt
328. or input of the multigroup P volume integrated fluxes array representing the multigroup P volume integrated fluxes V for the mixture matnum keyword to specify that the power factor for this mixture follows array representing the multigroup power factor for this mixture H9 in MeV cm keyword to specify that the macroscopic scattering cross section matrix for this mixture follows array representing the number of primary groups ig with non vanishing macroscopic scattering cross section towards the secondary group jg considered for each anisotropy level associated with this mixture array representing the group index of the most thermal group with non vanishing macroscopic scattering cross section towards the secondary group jg considered for each anisotropy level associated with this mixture array representing the multigroup macroscopic scattering cross section a cm from the primary group ig towards the secondary group jg considered for each anisotropy level associated with this mixture The elements are ordered using decreas ing primary group number ig from ilastg to ilastg nbscat 1 and an increasing secondary group number jg Examples of input structures for macroscopic scattering cross sections can be found in Section 6 1 in 3 1 3 Update structure for operator MAC In the case where OLDLIB is specified the descmacupd input structure takes the form IGE 294 15 Table 5 Structure descmacupd EDIT
329. or no print 1 for minimum printing default value ANIS keyword used to specify the level naniso of anisotropy permitted in the calculation nanis number of Legendre orders for the representation of the scattering cross sections and the anisotropy of the flux The default value is nanis 1 corresponding to the use IGE 294 156 of isotropic scattering cross sections and integrated flux The number of Legendre orders used for the sensitivity calculations is the lowest between nanis and the level of anisotropy available in the MACRO data IGE 294 157 3 25 The DUO module This module is used to perform a perturbative analysis of two systems in fundamental mode conditions using the Clio formula and to determine the origins of Keff discrepancies The calling specifications are Table 82 Structure DUO DUO MICLIB1 MICLIB2 DUO data where MICLIB1 character 12 name of the first MICROLIB type L LIBRARV object open in read only mode MICLIB2 character 12 name of the second MICROLIB type L LIBRARV object open in read only mode DUO data input data structure containing specific data see Section 3 25 1 3 25 1 Data input for module DUO Note that the input order must be respected Table 83 Structure DUO_data EDIT iprint ENERGY ISOTOPE MIXTURE REAC reac PICK gt gt deltaRho lt lt ENDREAC where EDIT keyword used to set iprint iprint index used to control the printing
330. ord that specified that time dependent cross sections will be used if available This is the default option when time dependent cross sections are provided keyword to supress the linear extrapolation of the microscopic reaction rates in the solution of the burnup equations keyword to perform a linear extrapolation of the microscopic reaction rates using the available information preceding the initial time xti This is the default option keyword to compute the burnup using the energy released in fuel only This is the default option keyword to compute the burnup using the energy released in the complete geometry This option has an effect only in cases where some energy is released outside the fuel e g due to n y reactions This option affects both the meaning of fpower given after the key word POWR and the value of the burnup as computed by EVO save the non saturated initial number densities in the BURNUP object BRNNAM default value save the saturated initial number densities in the BURNUP object BRNNAM select Eq 3 17 to compute the saturated number densities default value select Eq 3 18 to compute the saturated number densities recover the neutron flux from FLUNAM object default option recover the neutron flux from embedded macrolib present in MICNAM or OLDMIC object This option is useful to deplete in cases where the neutron flux is obtained from a Monte Carlo calculation recover the neutron flux from the P
331. ork October 5 8 1998 A H bert and M Coste Computing Moment Based Probability Tables for Self Shielding Calcula tions in Lattice Codes Nucl Sci Eng 142 245 257 2002 A H bert The Ribon Extended Self Shielding Model Nucl Sci Eng 151 1 24 2005 A H bert Development of the Subgroup Projection Method for Resonance Self Shielding Calcula tions Nucl Sci Eng 162 56 75 2009 M Coste et al New Improvements in the Self Shielding Formalism of the APOLLO2 Code Joint Int Conf on Mathematical Methods and Supercomputing in Nuclear Applications Karlsruhe Ger many April 19 23 1993 A H bert D veloppement de la m thode SPH Homog n isation de cellules dans un r seau non uniforme et calcul des param tres de r flecteur CEA N 2209 Commissariat VEnergie Atomique France 1981 R Roy D Rozon A H bert and G Hotte Treatment of Circular Boundary Conditions in Neutron Diffusion Calculations Third Int Conf on Simulation Methods in Nuclear Engineering Montr al Canada April 18 20 1990 R Roy A H bert and G Marleau A Transport Method for Treating Three Dimensional Lattices of Heterogeneous Cells Nucl Sci Eng 101 217 1989 R Roy G Marleau J Tajmouati and D Rozon Modelling of CANDU Reactivity Control Devices with the Lattice Code DRAGON Ann nucl Energy 21 115 1994 IGE 294 292 20 21 22 23
332. orted default 3 14 4 Displav data input for module COMPO Table 61 Structure compo_data4 EDIT iprint STEP UP NAMDIR EDIT iprint D B STRUC IGE 294 where EDIT iprint DB STRUC 131 keyword used to set iprint index used to control the printing in module COMPO lt 2 for MUPLET display only default value and parameters values are presented at the end gt 2 for the parameter value display for each calculation character 12 keyword used to display the content of the CPONAM object for the NAMDIR directory IGE 294 132 3 15 The TLM module The TLM module has been designed to generate a Matlab m file in an ASCII format that contains the instructions for plotting the tracking lines generated by the NXT module EDIT 1000 option The TLM module is activated using the following list of commands Table 62 Structure TLM MFILE TLM MFILE TRKNAM TRKFIL desctlm where MFILE character 12 name of the ASCII Matlab m file data structure that will contain the instructions for plotting the tracking lines TRKNAM character 12 name of the TRACKING data structure that will contain region volume and surface area vectors in addition to region identification pointers and other tracking information TRKFIL character 12 name of the sequential binary tracking file used to store the tracks lengths 7 desctlm structure describing the type of graphics generated see Section 3 15 1
333. oscopic cross sections from file iaea format WIMSD4 PROCEDURE TCWUO5Lib INTEGER iedit 1 LIBRARY TCWUO5Lib lt lt iedit gt gt Geometry CANDU6S GEOMETRY FOR SELF SHIELDING NO VOID CANDU6F GEOMETRY FOR TRANSPORT NO VOID CANDU6FV GEOMETRY FOR TRANSPORT COOLANT VOID CANDU6FV GEOMETRY FOR TRANSPORT COOLANT VOID CANDU6S GEO CARCEL 5 X REFL X REFL MESHX 14 2875 14 2875 Y REFL Y REFL MESHY 14 2875 14 2875 RADIUS 0 00000 5 16890 5 60320 6 44780 6 58750 14 00 MIX 1 2 3 4 5 5 CLUSTER ROD1 ROD2 ROD3 ROD4 ROD1 GEO TUBE 2 MIX 6 10 NPIN 1 RPIN 0 0000 APIN 0 0000 RADIUS 0 00000 0 6122 0 6540 ROD2 GEO ROD1 MIX 7 10 NPIN 6 RPIN 1 4885 APIN 0 0000 H ROD3 GEO ROD1 MIX 8 10 NPIN 12 RPIN 2 8755 APIN 0 261799 ROD4 GEO ROD1 MIX 9 10 NPIN 18 RPIN 4 3305 APIN 0 0 CANDU6T GEO CANDU6S SPLITR 611 110 ROD1 GEO ROD1 SPLITR 2 1 ROD2 GEO ROD2 SPLITR 2 1 ROD3 GEO ROD3 SPLITR 2 1 RODA GEO ROD4 SPLITR 2 1 CANDU6SV GEO CANDU6S MIX 0 23455 CANDU6TV GEO CANDU6SV SPLITR 611 1 10 ROD1 GEO ROD1 SPLITR 2 1 ROD2 GEO ROD2 SPLITR 2 1 ROD3 GEO ROD3 SPLITR 2 1 RODA GEO ROD4 SPLITR 2 1 amas CASE WITH NO VOID Self Shielding calculation EXCEL Transport calculation EXCEL Flux TYPE K AND B WITH VARIOUS LEAKAGE OPTIONS kosa TRACK INTLIN EXCELT CANDU6S
334. p 4Yz IGE 294 23 NA indicates that the following reaction is taking place n Xz Ne He ATE Xz 5 NFTOT indicates that a fission is taking place energy energy in MeV recoverable per neutron induced reaction of type reaction If the energy associated to radiative capture is not explicitely given it should be added to the energy released per fission By default energy 0 0 MeV STABLE non depleting isotope Such an isotope may produces energy by neutron induced reactions such as radiative capture FROM indicates that this isotope is produced from decay or neutron induced reactions yield branching ratio or production yield expressed in fraction NAMPAR character 12 name of the a parent isotope or isomer that appears in the cross section library ENDCHAIN keyword to specify the end of the depletion chain If the keyword APLIB2 or APXSM was used in structure desclib part of the depletion data is recovered from the APOLIB file the fission yields the radioactive decay constants and the energy released per fission or radiative capture Moreover the following simplified structure is used to provide the remaining depletion data Table 12 Structure descdeplA2 CHAIN NAMDPL FROM DECAY reaction l yield NAMPAR J ENDCHAIN In this case the following rules apply e We should provide the names NAMDPL of all the depleting isotopes i e isotopes with a time dependent number density including th
335. pes as global or local parameter keyword used to define the volume averaged energy integrated flux as global or local parameter keyword used to define the time in seconds as global parameter keyword used to define a user defined quantity as global parameter This keyword must be followed by the type of parameter keyword used to indicate that the user defined global parameter is a floating point value keyword used to indicate that the user defined global parameter is a character 12 value IGE 294 INTE ISOT nisp HISOP GFF INIT 128 keyword used to indicate that the user defined global parameter is an integer value keyword used to select the set of particularized isotopes By default all the isotopes available in the EDITION data structure EDINAM are selected number of user defined particularized isotopes character 8 names of the user defined particularized isotopes These names must be present in the EDITION data structure EDINAM keyword used to enable the recovery of group form factor information from EDITION data structure EDINA2 keyword used to create the empty structure in the MULTICOMPO IGE 294 129 3 14 2 Modification data input for module COMPO Table 59 Structure compo data2 EDIT iprint ALLX STEP UP NAMDIR ORIG orig l I PARKEY value MACRO SET xtr S DAY YEAR where EDIT keyword used to set iprint iprint index used to c
336. pic cross section examples o 223 6 5 1 TCWU01 The Mosteller benchmark 223 6 5 2 TCWU02 A 17 x 17 PWR type assembly 225 6 5 3 TCWU03 An hexagonal assembly 229 6 5 4 TCWU04 A Cylindrical cell with burnup 232 6 5 5 TCWU05 A CANDU 6 type annular cell with burnup 236 6 5 6 TCWU06 A CANDU 6 type supercell with control rods 240 EJT TCWU07 A CANDU 6 type calculation using various leakage options 243 6 5 8 TCWUO08 Burnup of an homogeneous cell 246 6 5 9 TCWUO9 Testing boundary conditions 248 6 5 10 TCWU10 Fixed source problem in multiplicative media 250 6 5 11 TCWU11 Two group burnup of a CANDU 6 type cell 251 6 5 12 TCWU12 Mixture composition 2 2 2000 254 6 5 13 TCWU13 Solution by the method of cyclic characteristics 256 6 5 14 TCWU14 SPH Homogenisation without tracking 259 6 5 15 TCWU15 A CANDU 6 type Cartesian cell with burnup 261 6 5 16 TCWU17 A 2 D CANDU 6 supercell with control rods 264 6 5 17 TCWU17Lib Microlib definition Ls 271 6 5 18 TCWU31 Compo based two group burnup of a CANDU 6 type cell 273 6 5 19 TCWUO5Lib Microlib definition o 276 6 6 Depletion chain examples 0 ee es 278 6 7 Assert PLOCBUUEES 4
337. piler cd Version4 Dragon rdragon iaea2d x2m In case of bug rdragon iaea2d x2m w To execute Dragon with Absoft compiler cd Version4 Dragon rdragon iaea2d x2m absoft To execute Donjon with custom compiler cd Version4 Donjon rdonjon Candu6 x2m To configure the doc cd 7 Version4 doc IGE293 install cd 7 Version4 doc IGE294 install cd Version4 doc IGE295 install cd Version4 doc IGE300 install To read the doc gv antialias Version4 doc IGE294 IGE294 pdf gv antialias Version4 doc IGE295 IGE295 pdf To configure NJOY A file named src_99p0 containing the Fortran source of Njoy v99 0 must be present on directory Version4 Njoy99 IGE 294 286 cd Version4 Njoy99 install To execute NJOY A directory evaluations Jef2 2 must be present to hold the Jef2 2 evaluation files cd Version4 Njoy99 python python simpleTest py IGE 294 287 8 THE GAN GENERALIZED DRIVER A scientific application can be built around the GAN generalized driver by linking it with application dependent modules Such a scientific application will share the following specifications 1 The GAN generalized driver can handle a custom data type called a LCM object and implemented as an associative table or heterogeneous list A associative table is a data structure similar to the example shown in Figure 42 An heterogeneous list is an alternative structure where the component ar
338. pli cation constant value of the fixed effective multiplication constant The fixed default value is valk 1 0 keyword used to specify that the initial for a buckling eigenvalue problem or fixed for a effective multiplication constant eigenvalue problem buckling is to be read from the data structure LIBNAM IGE 294 97 3 9 The EDI module The EDI module supplies the main editing options to DRAGON It can be use to compute the reaction rates average and condensed cross sections to store this information on a file for further use The calling specifications are Table 47 Structure EDI EDINAM EDI EDINAM LIBNAM TRKNAM FLUNAM I REFGEO MACROGEO REFPIJ descedi where EDINAM character 12 name of the EDITION data structure L_EDIT signature where the edi tion results will be stored LIBNAM character 12 name of the read only MACROLIB or MICROLIB data structure L_MACROLIB or L_LIBRARY signature that contains the macroscopic cross sections see Sections 3 1 and 3 2 TRKNAM character 12 name of the read only TRACKING data structure L_TRACK signature containing the tracking see Section 3 4 Note If data structures TRKNAM and FLUNAM are not given a flux is recovered from the MACROLIB present in LIBNAM and used to perform the editions FLUNAM character 12 name of the read only FLUXUNK data structure L_FLUX signature con taining a transport solution see Section 3 8 REFGEO character 12 opti
339. r included into a larger structure such as an EDITION structure It can be created by the LIB and EDI modules It can also be modified by the MAC SHI USS and EVO modules a standard data structure used by DRAGON to transfer the geometry between its modules It can be a stand alone structure or included into a larger structure such as another GEOMETRY structure It can be created by the GEO module Such a structure is also required directly for a successful execution of the tracking modules SYBILT EXCELT and MCCGT a standard data structure used by DRAGON to transfer the general tracking infor mation between its modules It is a stand alone structure It can be created by the SYBILT EXCELT and MCCGT modules Such a structure is also required directly for a successful execution of the ASM module IGE 294 ASMPIJ FLUXUNK EDITION BURNUP DRAGLIB CPO MULTICOMPO SAPHYB FBMXSDB 7 a standard data structure used by DRAGON to transfer the multigroup response and collision probability matrices between its modules It is a stand alone structure It is created by the ASM module Such a structure is also reguired directly for a successful execution of the FLU module a standard data structure used by DRAGON to transfer the fluxes between its modules It is a stand alone structure It is created by the FLU module Such a structure is also required for a successful execution of the EDI and EVO modules a
340. r time associated with the current flux calculation The name of the sub directory where this information is stored will be given by DEPL DAT CNN where CNN is a character 4 variable defined by WRITE CNN 14 4 INN where INN is an index associated with the time xtr S keyword to specify that the time is given in seconds IGE 294 130 DAY keyword to specify that the time is given in days YEAR keyword to specify that the time is given in years 3 14 3 Modification catenate data input for module COMPO Table 60 Structure compo data3 LEDIT iprint STEP UP NAMDIR ORIG orig l I PARKEY value WARNING ONLY where EDIT keyword used to set iprint iprint index used to control the printing in module COMPO 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value PARKEY character 12 keyword associated to a global parameter that is specific to CPONAM not defined in CPORHS value floating point integer or character 12 value of a global parameter that is specific to CPONAM ORIG keyword used to define the father node in the parameter tree By default the index of the previous elementary calculation is used orig index of the elementary calculation associated to the father node in the parameter tree WARNING ONLV This option is useful if an elementarv calculation in CPORHS is alreadv present in CPONAM If this keyword is set a warning is send and the CPONAM values are kept otherwise the run is ab
341. rder Kaps Rentrop algorithm taking care to perform all matrix operations in sparse matrix algebra Matrices mxi to and mxi ty are therefore represented in diagonal banded storage and kept apart from the yield matrix Y 1 Every matrix multiplication or linear system solution is obtained via the LU algorithm The solution of burnup equations is affected by the flux normalization factors DRAGON can perform out of core or in core depletion with a choice between two normalization techniques 1 Constant flux depletion In this case the lethargy integrated fluxes at beginning ofstage and end of stage are set to a constant F L to u du L tr u jdu F 3 22 0 0 2 Constant power depletion In this case the power released per initial heavy element at beginning of stage and end of stage are set to a constant W kr ot to 6 to Kask Oa k to to Ni to S TM kk ore tp O t Kask r k ty tp Nelts Co W 3 23 k 1 where kfk energy MeV released per fission of the fissile isotope k Kyk energy MeV released per radiative capture of isotope k Co conversion factor MeV MJ multiplied by the mass of initial heavy elements expressed in metric tonnes The end of stage power is function of the number densities N ty a few iterations will therefore be required before the end of stage power released can be set equal to the desired value Note that there is no warranties that the power released
342. reactor related information and to classified it using tuples of global parameters This is a stand alone structure that is generally stored on a persistent LCM object It is created by the SAP module a standard data structure used by DRAGON to store a full reactor cross section database with Feedback coefficients It is a stand alone structure that must be stored on a linked list or an XSM file It is created by the CFC module It can be used by the AFM module of DONJON A 2 6 Main Updates in DRAGON The frozen version DRAGON Release 3 06 has seen a large number of changes since the first official release of the code DRAGON_960627 The current DRAGON package DRAGON Version4 is an evolution of the frozen version released as an attempt to introduce innovative capabilities e The new self shielding module USS allow increased accuracy and better representation of phenom ena such as distributed self shielding effects and mutual self shielding effects e The new flux solution solver MCCG is an implementation of the long characteristics method pro posed by Igor Suslov This solver is initiated by the new tracking module MCCGT e The new flux solution module FLU is a complete rewrite of the outer iteration for the multigroup flux calculation that is now compatible with the method of characteristics and with any other approach requiring inner iterations The MOCC module is no longer required IGE 294 8 e The burnup module EVO wa
343. regions or mixtures keyword to specify that the homogenization of the neutron flux will take place over the following regions Here nregio lt maxreg with maxreg the maximum number of regions for which solutions were obtained IGE 294 iregm MIX imixm COMP GEO HMIX CELL SYBIL EXCELL NXT DEFAULT REMIX imixm2 TAKE REGI iregt 99 array of homogenized region numbers to which are associated the old regions In the editing routines a value of iregm 0 allows the corresponding region to be neglected keyword to specify that the homogenization of the neutron flux will take place over the following mixtures Here we must have nbmix lt maxmix where maxmix is the maximum number of mixtures in the macroscopic cross section library array of homogenized region numbers to which are associated the material mixtures In the editing routines a value of imixm 0 allows the corresponding isotopic mixtures to be neglected For a mixture in this library which is not used in the geometry one should insert a value of 0 for the new region number associated with this mixture By default if MIX is set and imixm is not set imixm ii ii is assumed keyword to specify that the a complete homogenization is to take place keyword to specify that a geometry equivalence procedure equigeom is to be used Merging indices are automatically computed by comparing the reference geometry RE FGEO with the macro geometry MACROGEO This c
344. rgy homogenization in space of the microscopic cross sections and constitution of macroscopic sets for collecting together many isotopes All the elementary calculations gathered in a single MULTICOMPO object are characterized by the same number of homogenized mixtures and by a specific output energy group structure m SIGNATURE m STATE VECTOR E DEPL CHAIN H COMMENT GLOBAL namdir H LOCAL TREE L MIXTURES ARC ations 12 miorolb object L GEOMETRIES 4 eomety object Figure 20 Organization of a multicompo object Each elementary calculation is characterized by a tuple of global and or local parameters Global parameters are characteristics of the complete lattice while local parameters are characteristics of each homogenized mixture These parameters are of different types depending on the nature of the study under consideration type of assembly power temperature in a mixture concentration of an isotope time burnup or exposure rate in a depletion calculation etc Each step of a depletion calculation represents an elementay calculation The MULTICOMPO object is often presented as a multi parameter reactor database root Parameter nb 1 Parameter nb 2 Parameter nb 3 leafs Figure 21 Parameter tree in a MULTICOMPO object The MULTICOMPO object is organized as shown in Figure 20 The root of the object contains table of content information for global an
345. rial reactions in the MATXS or MATXS2 format library where the name is terminated by the suffix They are generally available for graphite beryllium beryllium oxide polyethylene and zirconium hydroxide number of energy groups that will be affected by the thermalization effects keyword to specify an intermediate resonance IR approximation or the Ribon extended model for some energy groups By default an IR approximation with the value of the Goldstein Cohen parameter found on the library is used If no value is found on the library a statistical ST modell l is set in all groups by default imposed Goldstein Cohen IR parameter A Goldstein Cohen IR parameter 0 lt A lt 1 is set in energy group g A value of 1 0 stands for a statistical ST approximation A value of 0 0 stands for an infinite mass IM or WR approximation keyword to enable the calculation of CALENDF type probability tables in some energy groups The slowing down correlated weight matrices are not computed This type of probability tables is consistent with the Sanchez Coste self shielding method and with the subgroup projection method SPM 4 IGE 294 PTMC PTSL nir NONE NOEV SAT COMB mati relvol 26 keyword to enable the calculation of CALENDF type probability tables similar to the PT procedure Here the base points of the probability tables corresponding to fission and scattering cross sections and to components of the trans
346. rieve user variables in a structure or copy specific records from different structures to a single one so that the user can have an easy access to the information he wants from a CLE 2000 procedure The calling specifications are Table 95 Structure MSTR STRUCT EDIT iprint TYPE type CD ilem path GET nbelem indexfirst increment ilem path recname gt gt VARIN lt lt MSTR STRUCT EXTSTR PUT nbelem indexfirst increment ilem path recname value CP nbelem indexfirst increment ilcm1 path1 recnamel ilem2 path2 recname2 STRUCT character 12 name of the user defined LCM object in creation modification or read only mode depending on the requested actions EXTSTR character 12 name of existing LCM object from which information will be retrieved EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of this module TYPE keyword used to modify the structure signature type string containing the user defined signature limited to 12 characters CD keyword for introducing a UNIX like command to change the active directory of the structures ilem integer defining the structure index according to its position in the LHS or RHS list of parameters By default equal to 1 i e STRUCT is affected by the CD command path string containing the UNIX like path relative or absolute of the directory
347. rmal coolant density CPONAM default keyword to specify moderator density used for regular evolution normal moderator density CPONAM default keyword to specify water purity D2O content used for regular evolution and per turbed cases normal moderator purity fraction of D20 in water CPONAM default perturbed moderator purity fraction of D20 in water CPONAM 13 and 28 Note Other perturbed values are recovered directly from the concentrations and isotope densities stored in the different CPONAM IGE 294 121 3 13 The INFO module The INFO module is mainly used to compute the number densities for selected isotopes at specific local conditions The module can also be used to compute the water density p T P according to the assumed temperature T and purity P In that case the compound water density for a mix of light and heavy water is 100 PHo T PD 0 T P pu o T 1 P ppso T Temperature tabulations for py 0 T and pp o T are the same as those of the WIMS AECL code p T P The calling specifications are Table 55 Structure INFO INFO descinfo where descinfo structure containing the input data to this module see Section 3 13 1 3 13 1 Data input for module INFO Table 56 Structure info EDIT iprint LIB DRAGON MATXS MATXS2 WIMSD4 WIMS WIMSAECL NDAS APLIB2 APLIB1 FIL NAMEFIL TMP temp K C PUR purity WGT ATM CALC DENS WATER g
348. rmalization options in the ASM module be used PSPC keyword to specify that a collision probability calculation with specular reflection boundary conditions required this is the default option if a TSPC type integration is chosen This calculation is only possible if the file was initially constructed using the TSPC option CUT keyword to specify the input of cutting parameters for the specular integration pcut real value representing the maximum error allowed on the exponential function used for specular collision probability calculations Tracks will be cut at a length such that the error in the probabilities resulting from this reduced track will be of the order of pcut By default there is no cutting of the tracks and pcut 0 0 If this option is used in an entirely reflected case it is preferable to use the NORM command in the ASM module QUAB keyword to specify the number of basis point for the numerical integration of each micro structure in cases involving double heterogeneity Bihet iquab the number of basis point for the numerical integration of the collision probabilities in the micro volumes using the Gauss Jacobi formula The values permitted are 1 to 20 24 28 32 or 64 The default value is iquab 5 SAPO use the Sanchez Pomraning double heterogeneity model 6 HEBE use the Hebert double heterogeneity model default option PRIX keyword to specify that a prismatic tracking is considered for a 3D geometry invariant alo
349. robability calculation with mirror like reflection or periodic boundary conditions is required this is the default option if a TSPC type inte gration is chosen This calculation is only possible if the file was initially constructed using the TSPC option keyword to specify the input of cutting parameters for the specular collision probability of characteristic integration real value representing the maximum error allowed on the exponential function used for specular collision probability calculations Tracks will be cut at a length such that the error in the probabilities resulting from this reduced track will be of the order of peut By default the tracks are extended to infinity and pcut 0 0 If this option is used in an entirely reflected case it is recommended to use the NORM command in the ASM module IGE 294 SYMM isymm NOSY GAUS CACA CACB LCMD OPP1 OGAU nmu TISO TSPC EQW GAUS PNTN SMS LSN 69 keyword to specify the level to which the tracking will respect the symmetry of the geometry level to which the tracking will respect the symmetry of the geometry For 2 D and 3 D Cartesian geometries it must takes the form isymm 2S 4S 165 where e Sy 1 if the X symmetry is to be considered and S 0 otherwise e Sy lif the Y symmetry is to be considered and S 0 otherwise e S 1 if the Z symmetry is to be considered and S 0 otherwise keyword to specify the full tr
350. s MODULE PROCEDURE x MAC GEO NXT PSP ASM FLU DELETE END asserts Macroscopic XS k MacLib MAC NGRO 2 NMIX 18 NIFI 1 READ INPUT MIX 1 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 2 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 3 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 4 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 5 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 6 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 7 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 8 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 9 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 10 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 11 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 12 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 13 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 14 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 15 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 16 TOTAL 0 166667 1 111111 SCAT 22 0 00015 0 126667 2 MIX 17 TOTAL 0 222222 0 833333 SCAT 11 0 19222 2 NUSIGF 0 0 0 170 CHI 1 0 0 0 MIX 18 TOTAL 0 222222 0 833333 SCAT 11 0 19222 2 NUSIGF 0 0 0 170 CHI 1 0 0 0 ik 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 10111 75333 75333
351. s By default one homogenized region is created for each cell of the macro geometry array of rehomogenized region numbers to which are associated the regions indices created after the cell by cell homogenization was performed In the editing routines a value of imixm2 0 allows the corresponding cell region to be neglected Here nbmix2 is equal to the number of cells in the macro geometry keyword to specify that the neutron flux is to be edited over specified regions or mixtures keyword to specify that the editing of the neutron flux will take place over the following regions Here nregio lt maxreg with maxreg the maximum number of regions for which solutions were obtained regions where the editing will take place The new region numbers associated with these editing regions are numbered sequentially IGE 294 MIX imixt POW PiWL P1W_T COND icond energy MICR ALLX ALL RES nis HISO REAC 100 keyword to specify that the editing of the neutron flux will take place over the following mixtures Here we must have nbmix lt maxmix where maxmix is the maximum number of mixtures in the macroscopic cross section library mixtures where the editing will take place Each mixture set here must exists in the reference geometry keyword to specify that the P information is to be homogenized and condensed using the scalar flux This is the default option keyword to specify that the Pi information is to be
352. s extended to take into account energy produced by radioactive decay and by reactions other than fission e The new module COMPO is used to create and increment a multiparameter reactor database The module The companion module NCR is used to interpolate an existing multiparameter reactor database e The flux solution solver SYBIL related to 2D assembly calculations was extended to allow sector ization of the cells e The method of discrete ordinates is implemented in tracking module SNT e The EXCELL module has been removed but its capability is now implemented using the XCLL keyword in EXCELT e The LIB module can access NDAS formatted cross section libraries IGE 294 9 3 THE DRAGON MODULES The input to DRAGON is set up in the form of a structure containing commands which call succes sively each of the calculation modules reguired in a given transport calculation 3 1 The MAC module In DRAGON the macroscopic cross sections associated with each mixture are stored in a MACROLIB as an independent data structure or as part of a MICROLIB which may be generated using one of different ways e First one can use directly the input stream already used for the remaining DRAGON data In this case a single macroscopic library is involved e The second method is via a GOXS format binary sequential file 2 It should be noted that a number of GOXS files may be read successively by DRAGON and that it is possible to combine data fr
353. s section can also be read in DRAGON via the input data stream IGE 294 2 2 GENERAL STRUCTURE OF THE DRAGON INPUT The input to DRAGON is set up in the form of a structure containing commands which call succes sively each of the calculation modules required in a given transport calculation 2 1 Data organization The structure of the input data is independent of the physical or computational characteristics of the host system The physical characteristics of the input data is a collection of sequential records These characters are by necessity ASCII characters The logical organization of an input deck is in the form of a sequential structure of input variables presented in free format This structure must be located in the first 72 columns of each record in the input stream Characters located in column 73 and above can be used to identify the records and are treated as comments An input variable can be defined in one of two ways As a set of consecutive characters containing no blanks it will be considered by DRAGON auto matically as being an either an integer a real or a character variable depending on the format of the input variable As a set of characters enclosed between quotation marks In this case the input variable is always considered to be a character variable The only separator allowed between two input variables is a single or a set of blanks not enclosed between quotation marks A single input variable can
354. s sections are in the WIMSD4 format keyword to specify that the isotopic depletion chain and the microscopic cross sections are in the WIMS AECL format IGE 294 WIMSAECL NDAS APLIB1 APLIB2 APXSM FIL NAMEFIL ndepl descdepl 20 kevword to specifv that the isotopic depletion chain and the microscopic cross sections are in the WIMS AECL format kevword to specifv that the isotopic depletion chain and the microscopic cross sections are in the NDAS format as used in recent versions of WIMS AECL keyword to specify that the microscopic cross sections are in the APOLLO 1 format There are no depletion chains available for libraries using this format kevword to specifv that the microscopic cross sections are in the APOLLO 2 direct access format There are no depletion chains available for libraries using this format However fission yields radioactive decay constants and energy released per fission or radiative cap ture are recovered from the file Only versions of the APOLIB 2 libraries subsequent or equal to CEA93 V4 can be processed The list of isotopes standard and self shielded available in an APOLIB 2 is printed by setting the print flag to a value iprint gt 10 keyword to specify that the microscopic cross sections are in the APOLIB XSM format the output format of N2A2 utility There are no depletion chains available for libraries using this format However fission yields radioactive decay constants an
355. s solved using the method of cyclic characteristics and the method of collision probabilities using specular mirror like boundary conditions IGE 294 Input data for test case TCM11 TEST CASE TCM11 MACROSCOPIC CROSS SECTIO FIXED SOURCE PROBLEM CARTESIAN 4 X 4 ASSEMBLY KAVENOKY BENCHMARK REF R Roy The Cyclic Int Conf Physics Long Island NY Oc XK XA XA XA XX XX XX X XX X xXx STRING Polar_Ang CACB INTEGER Nazimuth 8 REAL DenTrak 100 INTEGER Nsplit REAL Tolerance 5 5 E x2m NS WITH FUEL RODS AND POISON Characteristics Method of Nuclear Science and Technology tober 1998 pp 407 414 6 LINKED_LIST PWR TRACK MACRO SYS FLUX EDITION SEQ_BINARY PWRTRK MODULE GEO EXCELT MCCGT PROCEDURE assertV REAL ou 100 REAL fi f2 f3 f8 9 10 fil f vi v2 v3 v8 v9 v10 viiv REAL ri r2 r3 r8 r9 rit ri2 r13 r14 5 166 3 699 4 183 3 178 3 617 2 913 3 441 3 937 3 225 REAL el e2 e3 e8 e9 e11 e12 e13 e14 0 11 0 08 0 07 0 04 0 05 0 03 0 03 0 04 0 05 EVALUATE el e2 e3 e8 e11 e12 e13 el ri e2 r2 e3 r3 e8 r8 e11 r11 e12 r12 e13 EVALUATE e1 e2 e3 e8 e11 e12 e13 el ou e2 ou e3 ou e8 ou e11 ou e12 ou e13 ou Macroscopic XS MAC ASM FLU EDI END DELETE GREP 12 13 14 f15 12 v13 v14 v15 e9 e10 e14 e15 e9 r9 e10 r10 113 e14 r14 e15 r15 e9 e10 e14 e15 e9 ou e10 ou e14
356. s will be filled with various colors taken using the HSB color scheme This is the default option keyword to specify that the contour lines delimiting each region will not be drawn keyword to specify the type of graphics generated keyword to specify that different colors or gray levels will be associated with each region This is the default option keyword to specify that different colors or gray levels will be associated with each mixture keyword to specify that the group integrated flux is to be drawn keyword to specify that the group flux is to be drawn IGE 294 162 4 THE UTILITY MODULES DRAGON contains a number of utility modules used to perform tasks not related to reactor physics These modules are also available to any code built around the GAN generalized driver 4 1 The equality module This module is used to duplicate a LCM object The calling specifications are Table 86 Structure equality NAME NAME1 NAME2 EDIT iprint OLD SAP STEP UP NOMDIR AT index NAME1 character 12 name of the output data structure It can be a LCM object either memory resident or XSM based a sequential binary file or a sequential ASCII file If NAME 1 is a LCM object and if it appears on both sides it is erased and refilled with the contents of NAME2 NAME2 character 12 name of the input data structure It can be a LCM object either memory resident or XSM based a sequential binary
357. scattering sources iscat number of terms in the scattering sources iscat 1 is used for isotropic scattering in the laboratory system iscat 2 is used for linearly anisotropic scattering in the laboratory system The default value is set to n IGE 294 LIVO icll icl2 NLIVO DSA NDSA GMRES nstart NSDSA nsdsa MAXI maxi EPSI epsi QUAD iquad QUAB iquab SAPO HEBE 75 kevword to enable Livolant acceleration method default value Numbers of respectivelv free and accerated iterations in the Livolant method kevword to disable Livolant acceleration method kevword to enable diffusion svnthetic acceleration using BIVAC or TRIVAC default value kevword to disable diffusion svnthetic acceleration kevword to set the GMRES m acceleration of the scattering iterations The default value equivalent to nstart 0 corresponds to a one parameter Livolant acceleration restarts the GMRES method everv nstart iterations keyword to set the number if inner flux iterations without DSA in 3D cases if m gt 2 If DSA is enabled too soon instabilities and convergence failure can occur in these cases number if inner flux iterations without DSA The default value is nsdsa 10 Keyword to set the maximum number of inner iterations or GMRES iterations if ac tived Maximum number of inner iterations Default value 100 Set the convergence criterion on inner iterations or GMRES iterations if acti
358. scopic cross sections to the isotopes present in the homogenized regions The macroscopic cross sections and the diffusion coefficients are weighted by the multigroup fluxes appearing in the regions where the isotopes are present The resulting nuclear properties are saved on EDINAM when the SAVE keyword is present keyword used to register the region number of each isotope before merging in the em bedded library The homogeneized information is therefore registered for each isotope in the merging region as depicted by the formulas below This procedure is useful to produce particular databases in order to perform micro depletion calculations in diffusion with DONJON keyword to specify that all the isotopes present in the homogenized region are to be kept individual and processed keyword to specify that all the isotopes present in the homogenized region will be merged as a single residual isotope number of isotopes present in the homogenized region to be processed array of character 8 isotopes alias names to be processed keyword to specify the reaction names to be included in the output microlib By default all available reactions are included in the output microlib IGE 294 nreac HREAC ACTI NONE imixa ISOTXS ASCII SAVE ON DIRN idirn PERT STAT ALL RATE FLUX DELS REFE 101 number of reactions to be included in the output microlib array of character 8 reaction names to be included
359. seful to extract a corrected or non corrected MICROLIB or MACROLIB from the first RHS object The calling specification is Table 51 Structure SPH EDINEW LIBNEW MACNEW SAPNEW CPONEW EDINAM LIBNAM MACNAM SAPNAM CPONAM SPH EDINAM LIBNAM MACNAM SAPNAM CPONAM TRKNAM TRKFIL FLUNAM descsph where EDINEW character 12 name of the new EDITION data structure containing SPH corrected information see Section 3 9 In this case an existing EDITION data structure must appear on the RHS LIBNEW character 12 name of the new MICROLIB data structure containing SPH corrected information see Section 3 2 In this case an existing EDITION MICROLIB or MULTI COMPO data structure must appear on the RHS MACNEW character 12 name of the new MACROLIB data structure containing SPH corrected information see Section 3 1 SAPNEW character 12 name of the new SAPHYB data structure containing SPH information see Section 3 19 In this case data structure SAPNAM must appear on the RHS CPONEW character 12 name of the new MULTICOMPO data structure containing SPH corrected information see Section 3 14 In this case data structure CPONAM must appear on the RHS IGE 294 114 EDINAM character 12 name of the existing EDITION data structure where the edition infor mation is recovered see Section 3 9 LIBNAM character 12 name of the existing MICROLIB data structure where the edition infor mation
360. seg is generally a multiple of 64 By default iseg 64 key word used to set impv IGE 294 81 impv index used to control the printing in supervectorization subroutines 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value Larger values produce increasing amounts of output Various finite element approximations can be obtained by combining different values of ielem and isplh IGE 294 82 3 5 The SHI module The self shielding module in DRAGON called SHIBA allows the energy dependent dilution pa rameter microscopic dilution cross section associated with each resonant isotope identified as such by the inrs parameter defined in Section 3 2 to be recalculated The general format of the data for this module is Table 38 Structure SHI MICLIB SHI MICLIB OLDLIB TRKNAM TRKFIL descshi where MICLIB character 12 name of the MICROLIB that will contain the microscopic and macro scopic cross sections updated by the self shielding module If MICLIB appears on both LHS and RHS it is updated otherwise the internal library OLDLIB is copied into MICLIB and MICLIB is updated OLDLIB character 12 name of a read only MICROLIB that is copied into MICLIB TRKNAM character 12 name of the reguired TRACKING data structure TRKFIL character 12 name of the sequential binary tracking file used to store the tracks lengths This file is given if and only if it was required in the previous tracking module call see
361. sent ang ir 5 by default i e the correction is applied at every angle IGE 294 36 side 2 side 4 side 2 side 4 ololojojojejojojo jolojejejojojojoje side 4 side 2 side 4 side 2 Condition PI 2 on sides 1 and 3 and condition TRAN on sides 2 and 4 Figure 4 Translation rotation boundarv conditions in Cartesian geometrv side 4 side 1 0 0 0 ojejo 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0j2 0 0 0 ojoje side 2 Condition PI on side 3 and TRAN on sides 1 2 and 4 Figure 5 Representing a checkerboard in Cartesian geometry IGE 294 37 Figure 6 Hexagonal geometries of type 530 and SA60 Figure 7 Hexagonal geometries of type SB60 and S90 IGE 294 Figure 9 Hexagonal geometry of type SA180 38 IGE 294 39 SB180 Figure 10 Hexagonal geometry of type SB180 COMPLETE Figure 11 Hexagonal geometry of type COMPLETE IGE 294 Figure 12 Cylindrical correction in Cartesian geometry 40 IGE 294 41 3 3 3 Spatial properties of geometry The descSP structure has the following contents Table 19 Structure descSP MESHX xxx i 1 1x 1 SPLITX ispltx i i 1 1x MESHY yyy i i 1 1y 1 SPLITY isplty i 1 ly MESHZ zzz i i 1 1z 1 SPLITZ ispltz i i 1 1z RADIUS rrr i i 1 17 1 OFFCENTER disxyz i i 1 3 SPLITR ispltr i i 1 Ir SECT isect jsect SIDE sideh hexmsh SPLITH isplth NPIN np
362. sents an infinite dilution the isotope is present in trace amounts only It is possible to recalculate a group dependent dilution for an isotope by the use of the SHI operator see Section 3 5 In this case the dilution is only used as a starting point for the self shielding iterations and has no effect on the final result If the dilution is not given an infinite dilution is assumed IGE 294 CORR inrs DBYE tempd SHIB NAMS THER HINC TCOH HCOH nt g IRSET gir PT 25 keyword to specify that the resonances of an isotope are correlated with those of other isotopes with the same inrs index This option is only available with the Ribon extended model or wth the subgroup projection method SPM U in energy groups where this model is set If this option is selected for an isotope it must be set for all isotopes with the same inrs index By default the resonances of distinct isotopes are assumed to be uncorrelated index of the resonant region associated with this isotope By default inrs 0 and the isotope is not a candidate for self shielding When inrsA0 the isotope can be self shielded where it is assumed that a given isotope distributed with different concentrations in a number of mixtures and having the same value of inrs will share the same fine flux Should we wish to self shield both the clad and the fuel it is important to assign a different inrs number to each If a single type of fuel is locate
363. ser defined comment end of HCOM keyword keyword used to define a single global parameter keyword used to define a single local parameter character 12 user defined keyword associated to a global or local parameter character 12 name of the MICROLIB type L_LIBRARY associated to a global parame ter The corresponding MICROLIB will be required on RHS of the COMPO call described in Sect 3 14 2 index of the mixture associated to a global parameter This mixture is located in MICROLIB named HMIC character 8 alias name of the isotope associated to a global parameter This isotope is located in MICROLIB data structure named HMIC character 8 alias name of the isotope associated to a local parameter This isotope is located in the MICROLIB directory of the EDITION data structure named EDINAM keyword used to define a temperature in Kelvin as global or local parameter keyword used to define a number density as global or local parameter keyword used to define a burnup in MWday Tonne as global or local parameter keyword used to define a fuel only exposure rate in n kb as global or local parameter The exposure rate is recovered from the BRNNAM LCM object keyword used to define an exposure rate in global homogenized mixtures in n kb as local parameter The exposure rate is recovered from the BRNNAM LCM object keyword used to define the power as global or local parameter keyword used to define the mass density of heavy isoto
364. sideration has a zero flux boundary condition This side is an external surface of the domain keyword to specify that the surface under consideration has a 7 2 rotational symmetry see Figure 3 The only 7 2 symmetry permitted is related to sides X and Y This condition can be combined with a translation boundary condition PI 2 X TRAN X and or PI 2 Y TRAN Y see Figure 4 keyword to specify that the surface under consideration has a 7 rotational symmetry see Figure 3 This keyword is useful for representing a Cartesian checkerboard pattern as shown in Fig 5 the side under consideration has a zero incoming current boundary condition with a circular correction applied on the Cartesian boundary This option is only available in the X Y plane for CAR2D and CAR3D geometries defined for TRIVAC full core calculations the side under consideration has an arbitrary albedo with a circular correction applied on the Cartesian boundary This option is only available in the X Y plane for CAR2D and CAR3D geometries defined for TRIVAC full core calculations keyword to specify an hexagonal symmetry of one twelfth of an assembly see Figure 6 keyword to specify an hexagonal symmetry of one sixth of an assembly of type A see Fig ure 6 keyword to specify an hexagonal symmetry of one sixth of an assembly of type B see Fig ure 7 keyword to specify an hexagonal symmetry of one quarter of an assembly see Figure 7 keyword to specif
365. solution technigues of the neutron transport equation ll The DRAGON project results from an effort made at Ecole Polytechnigue de Montr al to rationalize and unify into a single code the different models and algorithms used in a lat tice code P 71 One of the main concerns was to ensure that the structure of the code was such that the development and implementation of new calculation techniques would be facilitated DRAGON is there fore a lattice cell code which is divided into many calculation modules linked together using the GAN generalized driverl These modules exchange informations only via well defined data structures The two main components of the code DRAGON are its multigroup flux solver and its one group collision probability CP tracking modules The CP modules all perform the same task but using different levels of approximation The SYBIL tracking option emulates the main flux calculation option available in the APOLLO 1 code l and includes a new version of the EURYDICE 2 code which performs reactor assembly calculations in both rectangular and hexagonal geometries using the interface current method The option is activated when the SYBILT module is called The EXCELL tracking option is used to generate the collision probability matrices for the cases having cluster two dimensional or three dimensional mixed rectangular and cylindrical geometries l 19 A cyclic tracking option is also available for treating specular boun
366. standard data structure used by DRAGON to store condensed and merged micro scopic and macroscopic cross sections It is a stand alone structure but can contain MACROLIB and MICROLIB substructure It is created by the EDI module Such a structure is also required for a successful execution of the COMPO module a standard data structure used by DRAGON to store burnup informations It is created by the EVO module Such a structure is also required for a successful execution of the COMPO module a standard data structure used by DRAGON input to recover isotopic dilution and temperature dependent information including multigroup microscopic cross sections and burnup data This is a stand alone structure that is generally stored on a persistent LCM object It may be created by the dragr module of NJOY a standard data structure used by DRAGON to store a simplified reactor dabase It is a stand alone structure that must be stored on a linked list or an XSM file It is created by the CPO module It is required for a successful execution of the CFC module It can be used by the CRE module of DONJON a standard data structure used by DRAGON output to store reactor related in formation and to classified it using tuples of local and global parameters This is a stand alone structure that is generally stored on a persistent LCM object It is created by the COMPO module a standard data structure used by APOLLO2 and DRAGON output to store
367. t are supported After having reconstructed the microscopic cross sections for each isotope they are then multiplied by the isotopic concentrations particles per cm and combined in such a way as to produce an embedded MACROLIB see Section 2 5 The spatial location of these mixtures will be defined using the GEO module see Section 3 3 GEO module used to generate or modify a geometry see Section 3 3 SYBILT the standard tracking module based on 1D collision probability or Interface Current technique see Section 3 4 and Section 3 4 1 EXCELT the standard tracking module for 2D and 3D geometries as well as isolated 2D cells containing clusters see Section 3 4 and Section 3 4 2 NXT the standard tracking module for 2D or 3D assemblies of cluster see Section 3 4 and Section 3 4 3 SNT the discrete ordinates tracking module see Section 3 4 and Section 3 4 5 MCCGT the tracking module of the open characteristics flux solver see Section 3 4 and Sec tion 3 4 4 BIVACT the 1D 2D diffusion and SP tracking module see Section 3 4 and Section 3 4 6 TRIVAT the 1D 2D 3D diffusion and SP tracking module see Section 3 4 and Section 3 4 7 IGE 294 SHI USS ASM FLU EDI EVO SPH INFO COMPO TLM M2T CHAB CPO SAP MC DMAC SENS PSP DUO module used to perform self shielding calculations using the generalized Stamm ler method see Section 3 5 module used
368. t gt dens lt lt ENR enrichment lt WGT ATM ISO nbiso ISONAM i i 1 nbiso 1 GET MASS gt gt mass i lt lt i 1 nbiso CALC WGT D20 gt gt nh1 lt lt gt gt hd2 lt lt gt gt nol6 lt lt U02 gt gt nu5 lt lt gt gt hu8 lt lt gt gt nol6 lt lt THO2 gt gt nth2 lt lt gt gt nu3 lt lt gt gt nol6 lt lt where EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of the module The amount of output produced by this tracking module will vary substantially depending on the print level specified LIB keyword to specify the type of library from which the isotopic mass ratio is to be read IGE 294 DRAGON MATXS MATXS2 WIMSD4 WIMS WIMSAECL NDAS APLIB1 APLIB2 FIL NAMEFIL TMP temp PUR puritv ENR enrichment ISO nbiso ISONAM GET MASS CALC DENS WATER WGT D20 122 keyword to specify that the isotopic depletion chain or the microscopic cross sections are in the DRAGLIB format keyword to specify that the microscopic cross sections are in the MATXS format of NJOY II and NJOY 89 no depletion data available for libraries using this format keyword to specify that the microscopic cross sections are in the MATXS format of NJOY 91 no depletion data available for libraries using this format keyword to specify that the isotopic depletion chain and the microscopic cross sections are in th
369. tandard scattering reduced collision probabilities must be computed Moreover the additional directional collision prob ability matrix can only be used if HETE is activated in Section 3 8 Finally the PIJK option is only available for 2 D geometries analyzed with the operator EXCELT with collision probability option By default the PIJ option is used keyword to specify that only the reduced collision probability matrix Pi is to be computed In general the scattering modified collision probabilitv matrix Pei is also computed using PS aj U Pi Edo pi where 24079 is the within group isotropic scattering cross section When available Pei is used in the flux solution module in such a way that for the groups where there is no up scattering the thermal iteration is automatically deactivated In the case where the SKIP option is activated the Pij matrix is used and thermal iterations are required in every energy group Consequently the total number of inner iterations is greatly increased keyword to specify that the scattering reduced collision probability matrix is to be normalized in such a way as to eliminate all neutron loss even if the region under consideration has external albedo boundary conditions which should result in neutron loss When used with a void boundary condition zero reentrant current this option is equivalent to imposing a posteriori a uniform reentrant current keyword to specify that a consistent Selengut
370. terx12 name of the file that will contain the graphical description in a POSTSCRIPT format This file must have a sequential ASCII format GEONAM character 12 name of a read only GEOMETRY see Section Section 3 3 TRKNAM character 12 name of an NXT or EXCELL type read only TRACKING see Sections 3 4 2 and 3 4 3 FLUNAM character 12 name of an optional read only FLUXUNK see Section 3 8 It is required only if a flux mapping plot is requested descpsp structure containing the input data to this module see Section 3 26 1 3 26 1 Data input for module PSP Table 85 Structure descpsp EDIT iprint FILL NONE GRAY RGB CMYK HSB NOCONTOUR TYPE REGION MIXTURE FLUX MGFLUX where EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing in this module It must be set to 0 if no printing on the output file is required FILL keyword to specify the drawing options NONE keyword to specify that only region contour are to be drawn IGE 294 GRAY RGB CMYK HSB NOCONTOUR TYPE REGION MIXTURE FLUX MGFLUX 161 keyword to specify that the regions will be filled with various levels of gray keyword to specify that the regions will be filled with various colors taken using the RGB color scheme keyword to specify that the regions will be filled with various colors taken using the CMYK color scheme keyword to specify that the region
371. the homogenization and condensation IGE 294 153 3 23 The DREF module This module is used to set fixed sources that can be used in the right hand term of an adjoint fixed source eigenvalue problem This type of equation appears in generalized perturbation theory GPT applications The fixed sources set in DREF are corresponding to the gradient of the RMS functional which is a measure of the discrepancy between actual and reference or target power distributions The actual power distribution is recovered from a MICRO or MACRO object The reference power distribution is recovered from a MICREF or MACREF object Actual power values are defined as PA H aB ref Eor E 0 Vi where the power factors H r E and fluxes r E are recovered from H FACTOR and FLUX INTG records in a MACROLIB object The RMS error on power distribution is an homogeneous functional of the flux defined as F r o 2 where the reference or target powers P are obtained from the full core reference transport calculation The gradient of functional F r is a G group function of space defined as Hi r 2 H gt H H gt Hat VFI I r TA 2 Hd 7 ac 7 l Hg r where 6 r lif r V and 0 otherwise Each fixed source V F r is orthogonal to the flux r The calling specifications are Table 79 Structure DREF SOURCE DREF FLUX TRACK 4 MICRO MACRO MICREF
372. the location of the sub geometry called generating cells in a Cartesian or hexagonal geometry array of sub geometry character 12 names which will be superimposed upon the current Cartesian geometry The same sub geometry may appear in different positions within the global geometry if the material properties and dimensions are identical The concept of sub geometry is useful for the interface current method in a SYBIL calculation since the collision probability matrix associated with each sub geometry is computed independently of its location in the geometry In general the neutron fluxes in identical sub geometry located at different locations will be different even if they are associated with the same collision probability matrix These sub geometry names must be specified in the following order 1 from surface X to surface X 2 from surface Y to surface Y 3 from surface Z to surface Z keyword to specify that some sub geometries or regions must be merged array of numbers that associate a global sub geometry or region number with each sub geometry or region All the sub geometries or regions with the same global number will be attributed the same flux keyword to specify that some sub geometries must be rotated in space before being located at a specific position array of character 1 keywords to rotate conveniently each sub geometry The letters A to L are used as keywords to specify these rotation For Cartesian geometries the
373. the macroscopic cross sections associated with mixture numold are taken from MACLIB IGE 294 16 3 2 The LIB module The general format of the input data for the LIB module is the following Table 6 Structure LIB MICLIB LIB MICLIB OLDLIB desclib where MICLIB character 12 name of the MICROLIB that will contain the internal library If MICLIB appears on both LHS and RHS it is updated otherwise it is created OLDLIB character 12 name of a read only MACROLIB MICROLIB or BURNUP data structure In the case where a MACROLIB is considered it is included directly in the MICLIB before updating it If it is a second MICROLIB or a BURNUP data structure the number densities for the isotopes in file MICLIB will be replaced selectively by those found in OLDLIB desclib input structure for this module see Section 3 2 1 3 2 1 Data input for module LIB In the case where OLDLIB is absent or represents a MACROLIB desclib takes the form Table 7 Structure desclib EDIT iprint NGRO ngroup MXIS nmisot NMIX nmixt CALENDF ipreci CTRA NONE APOL WIMS OLDW LEAK ANIS naniso ADJ PROM SKIP INTR SUBG PT PTMC PTSL NEWL MACR ADED nedit HEDIT i i 1 nedit DEPL LIB DRAGON WIMS WIMSD4 WIMSAECL NDAS FIL NAMEFIL LIB APLIB2 APXSM FIL NAMEFIL descdeplA2 ndepl descdepl MIXS LIB DRAGON MATXS MATXS2 WIMS WI
374. these lines being associated with a different external surface while its weight is reduced by a factor of 1 n This allows for a better distribution of tracks which are relatively close to n external surfaces By default there is no treatment of the corners and pcorn 0 0 keyword to specify that the geometry will not be tracked This is useful for 2 D geometries to generate a tracking data structure that can be used by the PSP module see Section 3 26 One can then verify visually if the geometry is adequate before the tracking process as such is undertaken keyword to specify that the geometry will not be tracked and that object TRKNAM will be used with the Monte Carlo method This option is similar to NOTR with addi tional information being added into TRKNAM keyword to set the maximum number of segments in a single tracking line integer value representing the maximum number of segments in a single tracking line The default value is nbs 100000 keyword to specify that a long tracking file will be generated This option is required if the tracking file is to be used by the TLM module see Section 3 15 keyword to specify that a prismatic tracking is considered for a 3D geometry invariant along the z axis In this case the 3D geometry is projected in the x y plane and a 2D tracking on the projected geometry is performed This capability is limited to the non cyclic method of characteristics solver for the time being a
375. this group character 8 alias name of a self shielded isotope in this group keyword to specify that a unique self shielded isotope will be made for the complete domain list of mixture indices that will share the same self shielded isotope number of mixtures that will share the same self shielded isotope end of CALC data keyword Here is an example of the data structure corresponding to a production case where only 38U is assumed to show distributed self shielding effects LIBRARY2 USS LIBRARY TRACK CALC REGI REGI REGI REGI REGI REGI REGI REGI REGI REGI REGI W1 PU239 ALL W1 PU241 ALL W1 PU240 ALL W1 PU242 ALL Wi U235 ALL Wi U236 ALL Wi PU238 ALL Wi U234 ALL Wi AM241 ALL Wi NP237 ALL Wi ZRNAT ALL IGE 294 REGI REGI REGI REGI REGI REGI ENDC Wi W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 U238 U238 U238 U238 U238 U238 lt lt COMBO101 gt gt lt lt COMB0401 gt gt lt lt COMB0102 gt gt lt lt COMB0402 gt gt lt lt COMB0103 gt gt lt lt COMB0403 gt gt lt lt COMB0104 gt gt lt lt COMB0404 gt gt lt lt COMBO105 gt gt lt lt COMB0405 gt gt lt lt COMB0106 gt gt lt lt COMB0406 gt gt lt lt COMBO201 gt gt lt lt COMBO501 gt gt lt lt COMB0202 gt gt lt lt COMBO502 gt gt lt lt COMBO203 gt gt lt lt COMB0503 gt gt lt lt COMB0204 gt gt lt lt COMB0504 gt gt lt lt COMB0205 gt gt lt lt COMBO505 gt gt lt lt COMB
376. thod are 1 full hexagons gt 1 for performing a mesh splitting in 3x isplh losanges per hexagon keyword to set a simplified spherical harmonics SP expansion of the flux Pl This option is currently limited to 1D 2D and 3D Cartesian geometries order of the P or SP expansion odd number Set to zero for diffusion theory default value keyword to limit the anisotropy of scattering sources keyword to force using 1 3D9 as X cross sections A P or SP method will therefore behave as diffusion theory number of terms in the scattering sources iscat 1 is used for isotropic scattering in the laboratory system iscat 2 is used for linearly anisotropic scattering in the laboratory system The default value is set to n 1 in P or SP case key word to set the number of base points in the Gauss Legendre quadrature used to integrate void boundary conditions if icol 3 and n 0 type of quadrature The values permitted are 0 use a n 2 point quadrature consistent with P theory 1 use a n 1 point quadrature consistent with S 1 theory 2 use an analytical integration of the void boundary conditions By default nvd 0 keyword to set the number of ADI iterations at the inner iterative level number of ADI iterations default nadi 2 key word to set an ADI preconditionning with supervectorization By default TRIVAC uses an ADI preconditionning without supervectorization width of a vectorial register i
377. tion 3 2 OLDLIB character 12 name of a MACROLIB or a MICROLIB which will be used to update or create the MACLIB MACROLIB OPTIM character 12 name of a L OPTIMIZE object The MACROLIB MACLIB is updated using control variable data recovered from OPTIM descmacinp macroscopic input data structure for this module see Section 3 1 1 IGE 294 10 descmacupd macroscopic update data structure for this module see Section 3 1 3 3 1 1 Input structure for module MAC In the case where there are no OLDLIB specified the descmac input structure takes the form Table 3 Structure descmacinp EDIT iprint NGRO ngroup NMIX nmixt NIFI nifiss DELP ndel ANIS naniso CTRA NONE APOL WIMS LEAK NALP nalbp ALBP albedp ia ia 1 nalbp WRIT GOXSWN ENER energy jg jg 1 neroup 1 VOLUME volume ibm ibm 1 nmixt ADD READ imat i i 1 nmixt GOXSRN DELE READ INPUT descxs STEP istep READ INPUT descxs NORM with EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing in this module It must be set to 0 if no printing on the output file is required The macroscopic cross sections can written to the output file if the variable iprint is greater than or equal to 2 The transfer cross sections will be printed if this parameter is greater than or equal to 3 The normalization of the transfer cross sections
378. tion of fission product k by fissile isotope 1 m t radioactive decay constant or ox 1 t t term for production of isotope k by isotope l Depleting isotopes with Ax to tr to gt valexp and Ax tp tf to gt valexp are considered to be at saturation They are described by making 0 in Eq 3 12 to obtain Sp t Ny t Sil if k is at saturation 3 17 A t If the keyword SAT is set beginning of stage and end of stage Dirac contributions are added to the previous equation ad t to Si t bd t ty if k is at saturation 3 18 IGE 294 106 where a and b are chosen in order to satisfy the time integral of Eq 3 12 Nett Nalt f Ng t Arlt dt f bi Sy t dt 3 19 0 0 It is numerically convenient to chose the following values of a and b Sk to Ax to a Nx to 3 20 and _ Salt SM b MaD MEN 3 21 The numerical solution techniques used in the EVO module are the following Very short period isotopes are taken at saturation and are solved apart from non saturating isotopes If an isotope is taken at saturation all its parent isotopes other than fissiles isotopes are also taken at saturation Isotopes at saturation can procuce daughter isotopes using decay and or neutron induced reactions The lumped depletion matrix system containing the non saturating isotopes is solved using either a fifth order Cash Karp algorithm or a fourth o
379. tions 3 1 and 3 2 TRKNAM character 12 name of the TRACKING data structure containing the tracking see Section 3 4 TRKFIL character 12 name of the sequential binary tracking file used to store the tracks lengths This file is given if and only if it was required in the previous tracking module call see Section 3 4 descasm structure containing the input data to this module see Section 3 7 1 3 7 1 Data input for module ASM Table 43 Structure descasm EDIT iprint ARM PIJ PIJK SKIP NORM ALBS PNOR NONE DIAG GELB HELI NONL l ECCO where EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index used to control the printing of this module The amount of output produced by IGE 294 ARM PIJ PIJK SKIP NORM ALBS PNOR NONE DIAG GELB HELI NONL 89 this tracking module will vary substantially depending on the print level specified keyword to specify that an assembly calculation is carried out without building the full collision probability matrices This option can only be used for a geometry tracked using the SYBILT with EURYDICE 2 option or MCCGT module By default the PIJ option is used keyword to specify that the standard scattering reduced collision probabilities must be computed This option cannot be used with the MCCGT module This is the default option keyword to specify that both the directional and s
380. tiplication constant eigenvalue problem buckling keyword used to specify that the buckling in the x direction y direction and z direction are to be initialized to valb2 3 floating default keyword used to specify that the buckling in the x direction and y direction are to be initialized to valbr2 2 keyword used to specify that the buckling in the z direction is to be initialized to valbz2 keyword used to specify that the buckling in the x direction is to be initialized to valbx2 keyword used to specify that the buckling in the y direction is to be initialized to valby2 value of the fixed or initial total buckling in cm The floating default value is valb2 valbx2 valby2 valbz2 value of the fixed or initial radial buckling in cm The floating default value is valbr2 valbx2 valby2 2 value of the fixed or initial z direction buckling in cm The floating default value is valbz2 0 0 cm If valb2 is specified then valbz2 valb2 3 value of the fixed or initial z direction buckling in cm The floating default value is valbx2 0 0 em If valb2 is specified then valbx2 valb2 3 If valbr2 is specified then valbx2 valbr2 2 value of the fixed or initial z direction buckling in cm The floating default value is valby2 0 0 em If valb2 is specified then valbv2 valb2 3 If valbr2 is specified then valby2 valbr2 2 keyword used to specify the fixed for a buckling eigenvalue problem effective multi
381. to ac cess Note that if the directory does not exist and that the structure is in cre ation modification mode it is created recname string containing the record name Note that if this record does not exist and that the structure is in creation modification mode it is created For example 2 dir rec refers to the record rec in the directory dir of the second structure in the calling specifications of the module GET keyword for introducing the action of retrieving variables from the structure PUT keyword for introducing the action of storing variables in the structure CP keyword for introducing the UNIX like action of copying some elements from one record defined by ilcm1 path1 recname1 to another ilem2 path2 recname2 nbelem integer defining the number of elements to store retrieve copy indexfirst integer defining the index of the first element to store retrieve cpoy By default egual to 1 IGE 294 174 increment integer defining the stride in the record between the values to be stored retrieved copied By default equal to 1 VAR_IN character 12 CLE 2000 variable name in which the extracted value will be placed It is expected that the number of values extracted and the number and types of variables agree value value to be stored The first one defines the record type and all the values should be of the same type IGE 294 175 4 11 The FINDO module The FINDO module is used to find the root of a fun
382. to specify the maximum level of anisotropy permitted in the scattering cross sections This information is required only if MACLIB is created and the cross sections are taken directly from the input data stream number of Legendre orders for the representation of the scattering cross sections The default value is naniso 1 corresponding to the use of isotropic scattering cross sections keyword to specify the type of transport correction that should be generated and stored on the MACROLIB The transport correction is to be substracted from the total and isotropic Pp within group scattering cross sections A leakage correction equal to the difference between current and flux weighted total cross sections 21 Lo is also applied in the APOL and LEAK cases All the modules that will read this MACROLIB will then have access to transport corrected cross sections The default is no transport correction when the MACROLIB is created from the input or GOXS files keyword to specify that no transport correction should be used in this calculation keyword to specify that an APOLLO type transport correction based on the linearly anisotropic P scattering cross sections is to be set This correction assumes that the micro reversibility principle is valid for all energy groups P scattering information must exists in the MACROLIB keyword to specify that a WIMS type transport correction is used The transport correction is recovered from a record name
383. tored in a second output LCM object The calling specifications are Table 92 Structure MPX NAME1 MPX NAME2 real NAME1 character 12 name of a LCM object which contains the final information NAME2 character 12 name of a LCM object which contains the the initial information One can use NAME2 NAME1 real real number used as a multiplication factor IGE 294 170 4 8 The STAT module This module is used to compare the floating point information contained in two different LCM object The calling specifications are Table 93 Structure STAT STAT NAME1 NAME2 NAME1 character 12 name of the reference LCM object NAME2 character 12 name of a compared LCM object IGE 294 171 4 9 The GREP module The GREP module is used to extract a single value from a LCM object The calling specifications are Table 94 Structure GREP GREP NAMES EDIT iprint STEP UP NOMDIR AT index TYPE BLOCK index gt gt itype lt lt GETVAL MAXVAL MINVAL INDMAX INDMIN MEAN BLOCK index index index2 index3 NVAL neval gt gt value lt lt 14 NAMES character 12 name of the LCM object from which extractions will be performed EDIT keyword used to modify the print level iprint iprint index set to 1 to enable printing in this module By default iprint 0 STEP keyword used to move in the LCM object hierarchy UP keywor
384. tracted delta rho discrepancy will be placed keyword used to indicate that no more nuclear reactions will be analysed The module DUO is an implementation of the CLIO perturbative analysis method as introduced in Ref 90 This method is useful for comparing two similar systems in fundamental mode conditions It is based on fundamental mode balance equations that must be satisfied by the direct and adjoint solutions of each of the two systems The balance equation of the first system is written Li6 A1 Pi 0 and Li i P i 0 3 36 where L absorption total plus leakage minus scattering reaction rate matrix P production nu times fission reaction rate matrix A one over the effective multiplication factor Q direct multigroup flux in each mixture of the geometry i adjoint multigroup flux in each mixture of the geometry IGE 294 159 Similarly the balance equation of the second system is written Lod A P2 9 O 3 37 Next we write L L 4OL P2 P 0P 66 and A2 A1 4 A 3 38 Substituting Eq 3 38 into Eq 3 37 we write Lig Li66 0L 65 Ar Pi 6 A1 Pi dQ Ag Pa A1 P1 65 O 3 39 Following the guideline from Ref 90 we subtract Eq 3 36 from Eq 3 39 to obtain Ly Ay P 66 0 L 22 Po A1 P1 Q2 3 40 Next we left multiply this matrix system by a row vector equal to i in order to make the LHS vanishing This operation is written
385. tration of samarium o cell cross section for a different concentration of neptunium 14 cell cross section for the spectral mixed effect fuel coolant density m 00 cell cross section for the spectral mixed effect coolant density temperature 4 Kej cell cross section for low power history DD o cell cross section for intermediate power history D 14 cell cross section for high power historv DD N reactor reference moderator cross section N w moderator cross section for the first moderator temperature bo moderator cross section for the second moderator temperature N or moderator cross section for the first moderator density N o moderator cross section for the second moderator density IGE 294 desccfc 119 27 moderator cross section for a different concentration of boron 28 moderator cross section for a different moderator purity structure containing the input data to this module see Section 3 12 1 3 12 1 Data input for module CFC where EDIT iprint INFOR TITLE DNAME RNAME PWR powerref powerup powerint powerdown TCOOL tcoolref tcoolup tcooldown TMODE EDIT iprint INFOR TITLE DNAME RNANE PWR powerref powerup powerint powerdown TCOOL tcoolref tcoolup tcooldown Table 54 Structure desccfc TMODE tmoderef tmodeup tmodedown TFUEL tfuelref tfuelup tfueldown RHOC denscooll RHOM densmode
386. trices The values permitted are 1 an alytical integration 2 Gauss Lobatto quadrature or 3 Gauss Legendre quadrature IGE 294 isplh PN SPN SCAT DIFF iscat VOID nvd 77 By default icol 2 The analytical integration corresponds to classical finite elements the Gauss Lobatto quadrature corresponds to a variational or nodal type collocation and the Gauss Legendre quadrature corresponds to superconvergent finite elements type of hexagonal mesh splitting This data is given only if the geometry is 2 D hexago nal The values permitted with the finite difference discretizations are 1 full hexagons 2 for splitting each hexagon into 6 triangles 3 for splitting each hexagon into 24 trian gles 5 for splitting each hexagon into 96 triangles 9 for splitting each hexagon into 384 triangles and 17 for splitting each hexagon into 1536 triangles The values permitted with the Thomas Raviart Schneider method are 1 full hexagons gt 1 for performing a mesh splitting in 3x isplh losanges per hexagon keyword to set a spherical harmonics P expansion of the flux P 1 This option is cur rently limited to 1D and 2D Cartesian geometries keyword to set a simplified spherical harmonics S P expansion of the flux 3 This option is currently limited to 1D and 2D Cartesian geometries order of the P or SP expansion odd number Set to zero for diffusion theory default value keyword to limit the anisotropy of sc
387. ty tables The data IRSET PT 5 indicates that the CALENDF probability tables are used for energy groups with an index equal or greater than 5 with the exception of the energy groups where no Autolib data is available and a statistical model with physical probability tables is used for energy groups with an index smaller than 5 A statistical model is also imposed in groups where no Autolib data is available The following data U235 U235 5 105E 5 1 IRSET PT NONE is useful to impose the statistical model with physical probability tables in all energy groups The structure descmix2 is used to describe the modifications in the isotopic composition of a mixture Table 14 Structure descmix2 MIX matnum matold relden NAMALI dens NOEV where IGE 294 MIX matnum matold relden NAMALI dens NOEV 28 keyword to specify the number identifying the next mixture to be updated mixture identifier on MICLIB mixture identifier on OLDLIB relative density of updated mixture The concentration of each isotope in the mixture is to be multiplied by this factor whether it comes from MICLIB from OLDLIB or is specified explicitly using dens character 8 alias name for an isotope on MICLIB to be modified isotopic concentration of the isotope NAMISO in the current mixture in 10 cm7 When relden is specified the isotopic concentration becomes dens x relden keyword to force a mixture to be non deplet
388. ucture is concatenated to SAPNAM using the saphyb_data3 data structure as presented in Sec tion 3 19 3 SAPRHS must be defined with the same number of energy groups and the same number of homogeneous regions as SAPNAM Moreover all the global and local parameters of SAPRHS must be defined in SAPNAM SAPNAM may be defined with global parameters not defined in SAPRHS input data structure containing initialization information see Section 3 19 1 input data structure containing information related to the recovery of an elementary calculation see Section 3 19 2 input data structure containing information related to the catenation of a read only SAPHYB see Section 3 19 3 IGE 294 143 3 19 1 Initialization data input for module SAP Table 71 Structure saphvb datal EDIT iprint NOML nomlib COMM comment ENDC PARA parnam parkey TEMP micnam imix CONC isonam1 micnam imix IRRA FLUB PUIS MASL FLUX TIME VALE FLOT CHAI ENTI LOCA parnam parkey TEMP CONC isonam2 IRRA FLUB FLUG PUIS MASL FLUX EQUI ISOT TOUT MILI imil FISS PF HNAISO i i 1 Niso MACR HNAMAC TOUT REST REAC HNAREA i i 1 Nreac NAME HNAMIX i i 1 Nm where EDIT key word used to set iprint iprint index used to control the printing in module SAP 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value NOML key word used to input a user defined na
389. ult value is epsthr 5 0 x 1077 kevword to specifv the flux error tolerance in the outer iteration convergence criterion for flux components in the outer iteration The fixed default value is epsunk epsthr kevword used to specifv that the flux rebalancing option is to be turned on or off in the thermal iteration By default floating default the flux rebalancing option is initially activated This keyword is required to toggle between the on and off position of the flux rebalancing option keyword used to deactivate the flux rebalancing option When this keyword is absent the flux rebalancing option is reactivated keyword used to modify the variational acceleration parameters This option is active by default floating default with nlibre 3 free iterations followed by naccel 3 accelerated iterations number of free iterations per cycle of nlibre naccel iterations number of accelerated iterations per cycle of nlibre naccel iterations Variational accel eration may be deactivated by using naccel 0 3 8 2 Leakage model specification structure Without leakage model the multigroup flux bg of the collision probability method is obtained from equation dy W 6 3 1 where W is the scattering reduced collision probability matrix and Q is the fission and out of group scattering source This equation is modified by the leakage model The leakage models PNLR PNL SIGS and ECCO can also be used with solutions techniques other tha
390. ume of the external crown This applies only in cases where the external surface is annular using the ROTH or ROT options Only used when 2 d assembly of cells are considered Note that an assembly of rectangular cells having unequal volumes cannot use a Wigner cylinderization IGE 294 ASKE SANC LIGN RECT QUAB iquab SAPO HEBE 62 keyword to specify the use of an Askew cylinderization which preserves both the external surface of the cells and the material balance of the external crown by a modification of its concentration This applies only in cases where the external surface is annular using the ROTH or ROT options Only used when 2 d assembly of cells are considered Note that an assembly of rectangular cells having unequal volumes can use an Askew cylinderization keyword to specify the use of a Sanchez cylinderization This model uses a Wigner cylin derization for computing the collision P and leakage P s probabilities However the reciprocity and conservation relations used to compute the incoming Ps and transmis sion Pss probabilities are defined in the rectangular cell with the exact surface This applies where the external surface is annular using the ROTH or ROT options Only used when 2 d assembly of cells are considered Note that an assembly of rectangular cells having unequal volumes can use a Sanchez cylinderization This is the default option keyword to specify that all the integration lin
391. up final time and power if required x IF Timef Timec THEN IF Timec 1000 0 THEN EVALUATE Power Delt Timec 0 0 1000 0 2000 0 ENDIF IF Timec 500 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 100 0 1000 0 ENDIF IF Timec 50 0 THEN EVALUATE Delt Timec 50 0 500 0 ENDIF ENDIF EVALUATE Timei Timef ENDWHILE assertS FLUX K EFFECTIVE 1 1 184694 ECHO test TCWUOS completed END QUIT LIST 6 5 9 TCWU09 Testing boundary conditions This case test different boundary conditions for the Mosteller cell Input data for test case TC WU09 x2m xX Xxx xXx XX XX X TEST CASE TCWUO9 MOSTELLER BENCHMARK FOR 1 D ANNULAR CELL iaea WLUP Librarv REFLECTIVE AND VOID BC REF None x Define STRUCTURES and MODULES used k LINKED LIST MOSTELA MOSTELV VOLMAT LIBRARY PIJ FLUX OUT IGE 294 MODULE 249 LIB GEO SYBILT SHI ASM FLU EDI DELETE END PROCEDURE assertS k Microscopic cross section from file iaea format WIMSD4 X LIBRARY LIB NMIX 3 CTRA WIMS MIXS LIB WIMSD4 FIL MIX 1 600 0 U235 72235 U238 78238 MIX 2 600 0 Zr91 791 MIX 3 600 0 H1H20 730017 BNat 71011 Geometry MOSTELA Annular cell iaea 016 760167 4 61309E 2 1 66078E 4 1 2 28994E 2 1 3 83243E 2 4 42326E 2 016H20 6016 2 21163E 2 1 02133E 5 with reflective BC MOSTELV Annular cell with void B
392. ups and cross section types present in the reference macrolib FLUX character 12 name of a reference FLUX type L_FLUX object open in read only mode MICRO character 12 name of a reference MICROLIB type L LIBRARY object open in read only mode The information on the embedded macrolib is used MACRO character 12 name of a reference MACROLIB type L_MACROLIB object open in read only mode TRACK character 12 name of a reference TRACKING type L_TRACK object open in read only mode DMAC data input data structure containing specific data see Section 3 22 1 3 22 1 Data input for module DMAC Table 78 Structure DMAC data LEDIT iprint RATE MERG COMP NONE continued on next page IGE 294 152 Structure DMAC_data continued from last page REGI iregm ii ji 1 nregio MIX imixm ii ii 1 nbmix COND NONE icond ii ii 1 ngcond ENDR where EDIT keyword used to set iprint iprint index used to control the printing in module DMAC 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value RATE keyword used to define the homogenization and condensation limits NONE keyword to deactivate the homogeneization or the condensation MERG keyword to specify that the neutron flux is to be homogenized over specified regions or mixtures REGI keyword to specify that the homogenization of the neutron flux will take place over the following regions Here nregio lt maxreg with maxreg
393. usage of DIAG SYME SSYM keywords in the definition of the geometry is forbid den Indeed in EXCELT NXT tracking procedures the geometry is unfolded according to these symmetries this is incompatible with the integration of the anisotropic moments of the flux e the angular quadratures should be selected paying attention to the restrictions mentioned in this manual in order to ensure the particle conservation ONEG keyword to specify that the tracking is read before computing each group dependent collision probability or algebraic collapsing matrix default value if TRKFIL is set The tracking file is read in each energy group if the method of characteristics MOC is used ALLG keyword to specify that the tracking is read once and the collision probability or algebraic collapsing matrices are computed in many energy groups The tracking file is read once if the method of characteristics MOC is used XCLL keyword to specify that the tracking is computed on demand it is not stored on a file and the collision probability matrices are computed in many energy groups The tracking file TRKFIL should not be provided default value if TRKFIL is not set PISO keyword to specify that a collision probability calculation with isotropic reflection boundary conditions is required It is the default option if a TISO type integration is chosen To obtain accurate transmission probabilities for the isotropic case it is recommended that the no
394. used for creation and construction of the MULTICOMPO object e The first specification is used to initialize the MULTICOMPO data structure and to set the choice of global and local parameters e A modification call to the COMPO function is performed after each elementary calculation in order to recover output information processed by EDI condensed and homogenized cross sections and EVO burnup dependant values Global and local parameters can optionnally be recovered from MICROLIB objects e Another modification call to the COMPO function is used to catenate a read only MULTICOMPO object into a master MULTICOMPO object The calling specifications are Table 57 Structure COMPO CPONAM COMPO CPONAM compo datal CPONAM COMPO CPONAM EDINAM EDINA2 BRNNAM HMIC1 HMIC2 compo data2 CPONAM COMPO CPONAM CPORHS compo data3 COMPO CPONAM compo _data4 where CPONAM character 12 name of the LCM object containing the master MULTICOMPO data struc ture EDINAM character 12 name of the LCM object type L EDIT containing the EDITION data struc ture corresponding to an elementary calculation This EDITION data structure is contain ing homogenized and condensed cross section information The EDITION data produced by the last call to the EDI module is used EDINA2 character 12 name of an optional LCM object type L EDIT containing the EDITION data structure corresponding to an
395. valid for integer real and double precision blocks IGE 294 INDMIN MEAN index1 index2 index3 NVAL neval 172 keyword used to get the index position inside the block of the minimum value of an existing record The receiving CLE 2000 single variable is assumed of an integer type valid for integer real and double precision blocks keyword used to get the mean value of an existing record The receiving CLE 2000 single variable is assumed to be of the same type as the computed mean valid only for real and double precision types the first element number in record BLOCK to be considered the last element in record BLOCK to be considered If index2 is absent only element index will be considered the search will extend to the last element in the record BLOCK specifies the stride between values to be extracted between index1 and index2 By default a stride of 1 is assumed keyword used to specify the number of elements to be extracted from the specified record the number of elements to be extracted from the the specified record If the record contains character information elements index1 to index1 neval 1 are extracted The output parameters denoted as gt gt value lt lt are recovered as CLE 2000 variables in the module data located after the keyword IGE 294 173 4 10 The MSTR module This module is used to create user defined structures In particular it can be used to store and ret
396. variable VAR1 as equal to a real number and to use lt lt VAR1 gt gt in place of this real number later on e reversed polish notation calculator A calculator is called each time the statement EVALUATE is used For example the statement EVALUATE VAR1 4 0 6 0 would assign the result 10 0 to the variable VAR1 Logical operations are fully supported e a simple printer For example the variable VAR1 can be printed using the command PRINT VAR1 IGE 294 290 e three types of control loops The available control loops are IF logical expression THEN user instructions ELSE user instructions ENDIF REPEAT user instructions UNTIL logical expression WHILE logical expression DO user instructions ENDWHILE Note that the EVALUATE and PRINT statements are not modules of the generalized driver IGE 294 291 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 References A H bert Applied Reactor Physics Presses Internationales Polytechnique ISBN 978 2 553 01436 9 424 p Montr al 2009 G Marleau and A H bert A New Driver for Collision Probability Transport Codes Int Top Mtg on Advances in Nuclear Engineering Computation and Radiation Shielding Santa Fe New Mexico April 9 13 1989 G Marleau R Roy and A H bert DRAGON A Collision Probability Transport Code for Cell and Supercell Calculations Report IGE 157 Ecole Polytechnique de Montr al
397. ve Y surface of a Cartesian geometry Z Z keyword to specify the boundary conditions associated with the negative or positive Z surface of a Cartesian geometry R keyword to specify the boundary conditions associated with the outer surface of a cylindrical or spherical geometry HBC keyword to specify the boundary conditions associated with the outer surface of an hexagonal geometry VOID keyword to specify that the surface under consideration has zero re entrant angular flux This side is an external surface of the domain REFL keyword to specify that the surface under consideration has a reflective boundary condition In most DRAGON calculations this implies white boundary conditions The main excep tion to this rule is when cyclic tracking in 2 D is considered and mirror like reflections are considered A geometry is never unfolded to take into account a REFL boundary condition SSYM keyword to specify that the surface under consideration has a specular or mirror reflective boundary condition The main difference between REFL and SSYM is that for SSYM the cell may be unfolded to take into account the reflection at the boundary DIAG keyword to specify that the Cartesian surface under consideration has the same properties as that associated with a diagonal through the geometry see Figure 2 Note that two and only two DIAG surfaces must be specified The diagonal symmetry is only permitted for square geometry and in the following co
398. ved Convergence criterion on inner iterations The default value is 1 x 107 keyword to set the type of angular quadrature type of quadrature 1 Lathrop Carlson level symmetric quadrature 2 uL optimi zed level symmetric quadrature default option in 2D and in 3D 3 Snow code level symmetric quadrature obsolete 4 Legendre Chebyshev quadrature variable num ber of base points per axial level 5 symmetric Legendre Chebyshev quadrature 6 quadruple range QR quadrature 10 product of Gauss Legendre and Gauss Chebyshev quadrature equal number of base points per axial level keyword to specify the number of basis point for the numerical integration of each micro structure in cases involving double heterogeneity Bihet the number of basis point for the numerical integration of the collision probabilities in the micro volumes using the Gauss Jacobi formula The values permitted are 1 to 20 24 28 32 or 64 The default value is iquab 5 use the Sanchez Pomraning double heterogeneity model use the Hebert double heterogeneity model default option IGE 294 76 3 4 6 The BIVACT tracking module The BIVACT module can only process 1D 2D regular geometries of type CAR1D CAR2D and HEX The geometry is analyzed and a LCM object with signature L_BIVAC is created with the tracking information The calling specification for this module is Table 34 Structure BIVACT TRKNAM BIVACT TRKNAM
399. vered automatically by interface modules such as COMPO see Section 3 14 or manually by a CLE 2000 statement such as GEONAM EDINAM STEP UP MACRO GEOM where GEONAM and EDINAM are L_GEOM and L_EDIT LCM objects respectively character 12 name of the macro geometiv keyword to desactivate boundary editions keyword to specify that the boundary flux is to be obtained from relation sur 4Jout S where Jout is the outgoing interface current The albedo of the geometry are to be taken into account in the complete homogenization process Thus the MERG and COMP options must be specified The boundary fluxes are obtained from a calculation using the collision probabilities This option requires a geometry with VOID see Sec tion 3 3 2 external boundary conditions to be closed using ALBS in module ASM see Section 3 7 1 161 keyword to specify that the boundary flux is to be obtained from relation Osurf 4Jout S where Jout is the outgoing interface current The outgoing interface current is recovered by direct homogenization and condensation of the flux unknown components corresponding to external boundary and used with the current iteration method in Eurydice This keyword is only compatible if a SYBILT tracking is used and if keyword ARM is set in module ASM see Section 3 7 1 keyword to specify that boundary editions are required Averaged fluxes are computed over boundary regions character 4 name of the boundary edit corresp
400. vered from the output of the EDI operator and stored in a set of homogenized mixture directories The EDI operator is responsible for performing condensation in energy and homogenization in space of the macroscopic and microscopic cross sections All the elementary calculations gathered in a single SAPHYB object are characterized by a single output geometry and a unique output energy group structure The SAPHYB object contains table of content information apart from a set of specific elementary calculation directories These directories are themself subdivided into homogenized mixture directories The localization of an elementary calculation is done using a tuple of global parameters The elementary calculation indices are stored in a tree with the number of levels equal to the number of global parameters An example of a tree with three global parameters is shown in Figure 22 Each node of this tree is associated with the index of the corresponding global parameter and with the reference to the daughter nodes if they exist The number of leaves is equal to the number of nodes for the last third parameter and is equal to the number of elementary calculations stored in the SAPHYB object The index of each elementary calculation is therefore an attribute of each leaf root Parameter nb 1 Parameter nb 2 Parameter nb 3 leafs Figure 22 Global parameter tree in a SAPHYB object In each homogenized mixture directory the SAP operator recov
401. when they do not contain sub geometry When they do contain sub geometry they will be called composite geometry 3 3 2 Boundary conditions The inputs corresponding to the descBC structure are the following Table 18 Structure descBC X VOID REFL SSYM DIAG TRAN SYME ALBE albedo icode ZERO PI 2 PI CYLI ACYL albedo icode y X VOID REFL SSYM DIAG TRAN SYME ALBE 4 albedo icode ZERO PI CYLI ACYL albedo icode Y VOID REFL SSYM DIAG TRAN SYME ALBE albedo icode ZERO PI 2 PI CYLI ACYL albedo icode continued on next page IGE 294 33 Structure descBC continued from last page Y VOID REFL SSYM DIAG TRAN SYME ALBE albedo icode ZERO PI CYLI ACYL albedo icode Z VOID REFL SSYM TRAN SYME ALBE albedo icode ZERO Z VOID REFL SSYM TRAN SYME ALBE albedo icode ZERO R VOID REFL ALBE albedo icode ZERO HBC S30 SA60 SB60 S90 R120 R180 SA180 SB180 COMPLETE VOID REFL SYME ALBE albedo icode ZERO RADS ANG nrads xrad ir rrad ir ang ir ir 1 nrads where X X keyword to specify the boundary conditions associated with the negative or positive X surface of a Cartesian geometry Y Y keyword to specify the boundary conditions associated with the negative or positi
402. xdiffx 12 13 xdiffy 12 13 xdiffz 12 13 xepsi 71 72 xhdd 71 73 XIR 119 120 xpins 41 43 xrad 33 35 xschi 12 13 xschid 12 14 xsfixe 12 13 xsint0 12 14 xsint1 12 14 XSM_FILE 3 288 xsscat 12 14 xssigl 12 13 xssigd 12 14 xssigf 12 13 xssigt 12 13 xsstra 12 13 xtf 108 109 xti 108 110 xtr 108 129 145 146 xts 108 xxx 41 Y 94 96 175 Y 33 41 48 51 53 54 Y 32 33 41 48 51 53 54 yl 175 y2 175 y3 175 YEAR 108 109 129 130 145 146 yield 22 23 ypins 41 43 yyy 41 Z 94 96 Z 33 41 48 54 Z 33 41 48 54 ZERO 32 34 zpins 41 43 zzz 41
403. y a rotation symmetry of one third of an assembly see Figure 8 keyword to specify a rotation symmetry of a half assembly see Figure 8 keyword to specify an hexagonal symmetry of half a type A assembly see Figure 9 keyword to specify an hexagonal symmetry of half a type B assembly see Figure 10 keyword to specify a complete hexagonal assembly see Figure 11 IGE 294 35 side 4 jeje je oloje side 3 Assembly without symmetries DIAG condition on sides 1 and 4 de 1 N 0 3 7 SI Figure 2 Diagonal boundarv conditions in Cartesian geometrv side 4 side 4 side 4 side 4 side 4 side 3 side 3 side 3 side 3 side 3 Condition ALBE or REFL on side 2 Condition TRAN on sides 1 and 2 side 3 side 4 side 4 side 3 side 4 side 2 Condition SVME on side 3 Condition PI on side 1 Condition PI 2 on sides 1 and 3 Figure 3 Various boundarv conditions in Cartesian geometrv RADS This key word is used to specify the cylindrical correction applied in the X Y plane for CAR2D and CAR3D geomcetries ANG This key word allows the angle see Figure 12 of the cylindrical notch to be set By default no notch is present nrads Number of different corrections along the cylinder main axis i e the Z axis xrad ir Coordinate of the Z axis from which the correction is applied rrad ir Radius of the real cylindrical boundary ang ir Angle of the cylindrical notch This data is given if and only if the key word ANG is pre
404. ys YEAR keyword to specify that the time is given in years 3 19 3 Modification catenate data input for module SAP Table 73 Structure saphyb_data3 EDIT iprint ORIG orig WARNING ONLY l parkey value where EDIT keyword used to set iprint iprint index used to control the printing in module SAP 0 for no print 1 for minimum printing default value parkey character 4 keyword associated to a user defined global parameter value floating point integer or character 12 value of a user defined global parameter IGE 294 147 ORIG keyword used to define the father node in the parameter tree By default the index of the previous elementary calculation is used orig index of the elementary calculation associated to the father node in the parameter tree WARNING ONLY This option is useful if an elementary calculation in SAPRHS is already present in SAPNAM If this keyword is set a warning is send and the SAPNAM values are kept otherwise the run is aborted default IGE 294 148 3 20 The MC module This component of the lattice code is dedicated to the Monte Carlo solution of the transport equation in multigroup approximation The calling specifications are Table 74 Structure MC OUTMC TRACK MC OUTMC TRACK MICRO MACRO MC data where OUTMC character 12 name of a MONTE CARLO type LMC object open in modification or creation mode TRACK character 12 name

A USER GUIDE FOR DRAGON VERSION4 G. Marleau, A. Hébert

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

A USER GUIDE FOR DRAGON VERSION4 G. Marleau, A. H&eacute;bert

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

A USER GUIDE FOR DRAGON VERSION4 G. Marleau, A. Hébert